From 8aaa14a95b40109cdbfe00e63f5eab32d7c450f0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Vladimir Glazounov Date: Wed, 26 Aug 2009 08:17:39 +0000 Subject: CWS-TOOLING: integrate CWS hcshared22 2009-07-21 13:08:41 +0200 ufi r274186 : hidlst 2009-07-21 12:34:16 +0200 ufi r274179 : makefiles 2009-07-21 12:33:01 +0200 ufi r274177 : fixes 2009-07-21 12:22:32 +0200 ufi r274175 : hidlst 2009-07-21 10:20:12 +0200 ufi r274167 : bugfixes 2009-07-21 10:19:42 +0200 ufi r274166 : bugfixes 2009-07-21 10:07:53 +0200 ufi r274165 : errorfix 2009-07-21 09:56:18 +0200 ufi r274162 : vor build 2009-07-13 11:49:18 +0200 ufi r273923 : CWS-TOOLING: rebase CWS hcshared22 to trunk@273858 (milestone: DEV300:m52) 2009-07-10 12:29:33 +0200 ufi r273885 : makefiles 2009-07-10 09:48:46 +0200 ufi r273875 : vor rebase 2009-07-10 09:48:19 +0200 ufi r273874 : vor rebase 2009-07-10 09:47:23 +0200 ufi r273873 : vor rebase --- helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/main_transform.xsl | 9 +- helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/shared.tree | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/swriter.tree | 1 - helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02110000.xhp | 14 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02120000.xhp | 48 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02120100.xhp | 267 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140000.xhp | 92 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02210000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060101.xhp | 1340 +++++++------- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060102.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060103.xhp | 1346 +++++++------- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060105.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060106.xhp | 88 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060107.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060109.xhp | 11 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060118.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060184.xhp | 27 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080300.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05100000.xhp | 253 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/text2columns.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/05/02140000.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/address_auto.xhp | 91 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/auto_off.xhp | 94 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/autofilter.xhp | 101 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/autoformat.xhp | 138 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/background.xhp | 92 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/borders.xhp | 371 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_date.xhp | 103 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/calc_series.xhp | 131 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calculate.xhp | 103 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/cell_enter.xhp | 12 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/cell_protect.xhp | 134 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/cell_unprotect.xhp | 74 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellcopy.xhp | 122 +- .../text/scalc/guide/cellreference_dragdrop.xhp | 103 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences.xhp | 130 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences_url.xhp | 95 +- .../text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_by_formula.xhp | 113 +- .../text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_conditional.xhp | 247 +-- .../text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_minusvalue.xhp | 72 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/consolidate.xhp | 142 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_files.xhp | 162 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/csv_formula.xhp | 126 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/currency_format.xhp | 84 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/database_define.xhp | 100 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/database_filter.xhp | 145 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/database_sort.xhp | 57 +- .../text/scalc/guide/datapilot_createtable.xhp | 124 +- .../text/scalc/guide/datapilot_deletetable.xhp | 59 +- .../text/scalc/guide/datapilot_edittable.xhp | 69 +- .../text/scalc/guide/datapilot_filtertable.xhp | 59 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/fraction_enter.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/keyboard.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/schart/00/00000004.xhp | 18 +- .../source/text/schart/01/choose_chart_type.xhp | 8 +- .../source/text/schart/01/wiz_chart_elements.xhp | 140 +- .../source/text/schart/01/wiz_data_range.xhp | 113 +- helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/04/01020000.xhp | 900 +++++----- .../source/text/sdraw/guide/color_define.xhp | 110 +- .../source/text/sdraw/guide/text_enter.xhp | 251 ++- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000001.xhp | 288 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000402.xhp | 16 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000406.xhp | 329 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040500.xhp | 476 ++--- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040502.xhp | 878 +++++---- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010200.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100200.xhp | 123 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100000.xhp | 3 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100001.xhp | 643 +++---- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02180000.xhp | 104 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02220100.xhp | 79 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230402.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02250000.xhp | 142 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030100.xhp | 176 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040300.xhp | 132 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040400.xhp | 132 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210300.xhp | 98 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05220000.xhp | 120 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050000.xhp | 3 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050400.xhp | 62 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050500.xhp | 345 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050600.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/makefile.mk | 1 + .../source/text/shared/01/password_dlg.xhp | 45 +- .../source/text/shared/01/password_main.xhp | 79 +- .../source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export.xhp | 339 ++-- .../source/text/shared/01/xformsdatatab.xhp | 138 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01220000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07010000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100200.xhp | 527 +++--- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20020000.xhp | 53 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01010000.xhp | 1873 ++++++++++---------- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01110200.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard01.xhp | 51 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/data_addressbook.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/error_report.xhp | 77 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/export_ms.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/import_ms.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/keyboard.xhp | 784 ++++---- .../source/text/shared/guide/line_intext.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/protection.xhp | 221 +-- .../source/text/shared/guide/scripting.xhp | 14 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/workfolder.xhp | 78 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010000.xhp | 71 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010800.xhp | 58 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01020400.xhp | 77 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01030000.xhp | 61 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01030300.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01030500.xhp | 1 - .../source/text/shared/optionen/01040700.xhp | 89 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01050100.xhp | 136 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01070300.xhp | 141 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/improvement.xhp | 120 ++ .../source/text/shared/optionen/makefile.mk | 1 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000402.xhp | 58 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02120000.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02140000.xhp | 51 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05100000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06050000.xhp | 362 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13090000.xhp | 2 +- .../text/simpress/guide/line_arrow_styles.xhp | 106 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/00/00000004.xhp | 20 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090000.xhp | 85 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090100.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090200.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090300.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090400.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090500.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090600.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090700.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090800.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091100.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091500.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091501.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091502.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091503.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091504.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091505.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091506.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091507.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091508.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091509.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/06010100.xhp | 3 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/04/01020000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/keyboard.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/limits.xhp | 10 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0103.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0503.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000403.xhp | 163 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000404.xhp | 18 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000405.xhp | 470 ++--- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000406.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02110000.xhp | 32 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02150000.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp | 862 ++++----- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120229.xhp | 65 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp | 71 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030800.xhp | 78 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040500.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040600.xhp | 103 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060700.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060800.xhp | 96 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05100400.xhp | 62 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110100.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130004.xhp | 3 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130100.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05140000.xhp | 12 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05200000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06060000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06100000.xhp | 136 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/anchor_object.xhp | 157 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/arrange_chapters.xhp | 45 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp | 93 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp | 182 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp | 94 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp | 63 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp | 174 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/background.xhp | 172 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/border_object.xhp | 133 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp | 141 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/borders.xhp | 391 ++-- .../source/text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp | 73 +- .../text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp | 88 +- .../text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp | 95 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp | 95 +- .../text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp | 96 +- .../text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp | 91 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp | 115 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp | 120 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp | 116 +- .../text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp | 132 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp | 184 +- .../text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp | 99 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp | 66 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/dragdroptext.xhp | 101 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp | 166 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/field_convert.xhp | 76 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp | 175 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp | 87 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp | 84 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp | 418 +++-- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/finding.xhp | 254 ++- .../source/text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp | 91 +- .../text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp | 96 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp | 180 +- .../text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp | 126 +- .../text/swriter/guide/form_letters_main.xhp | 6 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp | 106 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp | 277 ++- .../source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp | 100 +- .../text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp | 162 +- .../text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp | 158 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp | 103 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp | 231 ++- .../text/swriter/guide/hidden_text_display.xhp | 76 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp | 93 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/hyphen_prevent.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp | 84 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp | 96 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp | 87 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp | 122 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp | 161 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp | 106 +- .../text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp | 203 ++- .../source/text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp | 85 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp | 122 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp | 154 +- .../text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp | 79 +- .../swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromchart.xhp | 90 +- .../text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp | 80 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/insert_line.xhp | 2 +- .../text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp | 109 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/jump2statusbar.xhp | 49 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp | 132 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp | 79 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp | 62 +- .../text/swriter/guide/nonprintable_text.xhp | 66 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/number_date_conv.xhp | 72 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp | 111 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp | 215 +-- .../source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp | 124 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp | 112 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp | 203 +-- .../source/text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp | 220 ++- .../source/text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp | 219 ++- .../source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp | 190 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/print_brochure.xhp | 104 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp | 73 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp | 102 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp | 92 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/printing_order.xhp | 82 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp | 211 ++- .../source/text/swriter/guide/references.xhp | 203 ++- .../text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp | 77 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/registertrue.xhp | 108 +- .../text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp | 85 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp | 70 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp | 78 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp | 120 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp | 105 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp | 157 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/sections.xhp | 107 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/select_language.xhp | 77 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp | 79 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/shortcut_writing.xhp | 74 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp | 66 +- .../text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp | 98 +- .../text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp | 103 +- .../text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp | 132 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp | 75 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp | 90 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/table_cells.xhp | 113 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/table_delete.xhp | 65 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/table_insert.xhp | 320 ++-- .../guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp | 83 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp | 151 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp | 96 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/template_create.xhp | 95 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/template_default.xhp | 135 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp | 65 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp | 72 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp | 118 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp | 82 +- .../text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp | 97 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp | 10 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp | 188 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp | 264 +-- .../source/text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp | 96 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/textdoc_inframe.xhp | 117 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp | 198 +-- .../text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp | 94 +- .../text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp | 104 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp | 158 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp | 91 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp | 88 +- .../text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp | 139 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp | 70 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp | 147 +- 302 files changed, 18168 insertions(+), 17974 deletions(-) create mode 100755 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/improvement.xhp (limited to 'helpcontent2/source') diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/main_transform.xsl b/helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/main_transform.xsl index 4ff4dfab8b..ca649b8c6f 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/main_transform.xsl +++ b/helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/main_transform.xsl @@ -24,7 +24,8 @@ Aug 16 2005 workaround for #i53365# Aug 19 2005 fixed missing list processing in embedded sections Aug 19 2005 #i53535#, fixed wrong handling of Database parameter - Oct 17 2006 #i70462#, disabled sorting to avoid output of error messages to console + Oct 17 2006 #i70462#, disabled sorting to avoid output of error messages to console + Jun 15 2009 #i101799#, fixed wrong handling of http URLs with anchors ***********************************************************************//--> + + - - - diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/shared.tree b/helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/shared.tree index 450f283296..857fcab690 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/shared.tree +++ b/helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/shared.tree @@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ Inserting Special Characters Inserting and Editing Tab Stops Merging and Splitting Cells -Protecting Content in %PRODUCTNAME +Protecting Contents in %PRODUCTNAME Protecting Records Selecting the Maximum Printable Area on a Page Selecting Measurement Units diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/swriter.tree b/helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/swriter.tree index 9dc9d21964..901258414d 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/swriter.tree +++ b/helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/swriter.tree @@ -123,7 +123,6 @@ Hiding Text Defining Different Headers and Footers Inserting a Chapter Name and Number in a Header or a Footer -Quickly Applying Paragraph Styles Applying Text Formatting While You Type Resetting Font Attributes Applying Styles in Fill Format Mode diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02110000.xhp index 828a6bccbc..5c6abe391a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02110000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02110000.xhp @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02120000.xhp index 32cb20f0d0..e29d5188a8 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02120000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02120000.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Headers & Footers -/text/scalc/01/02120000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Headers & Footers + /text/scalc/01/02120000.xhp + + + mw deleted two index entries -Headers & Footers -Allows you to define and format headers and footers. +Headers & Footers + Allows you to define and format headers and footers. -The Headers/Footers dialog contains the tabs for defining headers and footers. There will be separate tabs for the left and right page headers and footers if the Same content left/right option was marked in the Page Style dialog. -
- -
- - - - + The Headers/Footers dialog contains the tabs for defining headers and footers. There will be separate tabs for the left and right page headers and footers if the Same content left/right option was not marked in the Page Style dialog. +
+ +
+ + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02120100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02120100.xhp index 182dfbbccd..a10e40c1c5 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02120100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02120100.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Header/Footer -/text/scalc/01/02120100.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: new list box added, spec "Enhanced header/footer dialog feature" -dedr: reviewed - - - -
+ + Header/Footer + /text/scalc/01/02120100.xhp + + + +
page styles; headers -page styles; footers -headers; defining -footers; defining -file names in headers/footers -changing;dates, automatically -dates;updating automatically -automatic date updates + page styles; footers + headers; defining + footers; defining + file names in headers/footers + changing;dates, automatically + dates;updating automatically + automatic date updates -Header/Footer -Defines or formats a header or footer for a Page Style. -
-
- -
+Header/Footer + Defines or formats a header or footer for a Page Style. +
+
+ +
-Left Area -Enter the text to be displayed at the left side of the header or footer. +Left Area + Enter the text to be displayed at the left side of the header or footer. -Center Area -Enter the text to be displayed at the center of the header or footer +Center Area + Enter the text to be displayed at the center of the header or footer -Right Area -Enter the text to be displayed at the right side of the header or footer. - -Header/Footer -Select a predefined header or footer from the list. +Right Area + Enter the text to be displayed at the right side of the header or footer. + +Header/Footer + Select a predefined header or footer from the list. -Text attributes -Opens a dialog to assign formats to new or selected text. The Text Attributes dialog contains the tab pages Font, Font Effects and Font Position. - - - - -Icon +Text attributes + Opens a dialog to assign formats to new or selected text. The Text Attributes dialog contains the tab pages Font, Font Effects and Font Position. +
+ + + +Icon - - -Text Attributes - - -
+ + + Text Attributes + + + -File Name -Inserts a file name placeholder in the selected area. Click to insert the title. Long-click UFI: this is still a long-clickto select either title, file name or path/file name from the submenu. If a title has not be assigned (see File - Properties), the file name will be inserted instead. - - - - -Icon +File Name + Inserts a file name placeholder in the selected area. Click to insert the title. Long-click UFI: this is still a long-clickto select either title, file name or path/file name from the submenu. If a title has not be assigned (see File - Properties), the file name will be inserted instead. +
+ + + +Icon - - -File Name - - -
+ + + File Name + + + -Sheet Name -Inserts a placeholder in the selected header/footer area, which is replaced by the sheet name in the header/footer of the actual document. - - - - -Icon +Sheet Name + Inserts a placeholder in the selected header/footer area, which is replaced by the sheet name in the header/footer of the actual document. +
+ + + +Icon - - -Sheet Name - - -
+ + + Sheet Name + + + -Page -Inserts a placeholder in the selected header/footer area, which is replaced by page numbering. This allows continuous page numbering in a document. - - - - -Icon +Page + Inserts a placeholder in the selected header/footer area, which is replaced by page numbering. This allows continuous page numbering in a document. +
+ + + +Icon - - -Page - - -
+ + + Page + + + -Pages -Inserts a placeholder in the selected header/footer area, which is replaced by the total number of pages in the document. - - - - -Icon +Pages + Inserts a placeholder in the selected header/footer area, which is replaced by the total number of pages in the document. +
+ + + +Icon - - -Pages - - -
+ + + Pages + + + -Date -Inserts a placeholder in the selected header/footer area, which is replaced by the current date which will be repeated in the header/footer on each page of the document. - - - - -Icon +Date + Inserts a placeholder in the selected header/footer area, which is replaced by the current date which will be repeated in the header/footer on each page of the document. +
+ + + +Icon - - -Date - - -
+ + + Date + + + -Time -Inserts a placeholder in the selected header/footer area, which is replaced by the current time in the header/footer on each page of the document. - - - - -Icon +Time + Inserts a placeholder in the selected header/footer area, which is replaced by the current time in the header/footer on each page of the document. +
+ + + +Icon - - -Time - - -
+ + + Time + + + - - + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140000.xhp index e413292280..099e15ed31 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140000.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Fill -/text/scalc/01/02140000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -
+ + Fill + /text/scalc/01/02140000.xhp + + + +
filling;selection lists -selection lists;filling cells + selection lists;filling cells MW inserted 2 index entries -Fill -Automatically fills cells with content. -
-
- -
-The $[officename] Calc context menus have additional options for filling the cells. - - - - -Sheet - -Rows - - -Filling cells using context menus: - - - -Call the context menu when positioned in a cell and choose Selection List. - - +Fill + Automatically fills cells with content. +
+
+ +
+ The $[officename] Calc context menus have additional options for filling the cells. + + + + + Sheet + + Series + + + Filling cells using context menus: + + + + Call the context menu when positioned in a cell and choose Selection List. + + -A list box containing all text found in the current column is displayed. The text is sorted alphabetically and multiple entries are listed only once. - - -Click one of the listed entries to copy it to the cell. - - - - +A list box containing all text found in the current column is displayed. The text is sorted alphabetically and multiple entries are listed only once. + + + Click one of the listed entries to copy it to the cell. + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02210000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02210000.xhp index 9932eaa2c7..837c1fc1da 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02210000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02210000.xhp @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ Selecting Sheets - Selects multiple sheets.. + Selects multiple sheets. Selected Sheets Lists the sheets in the current document. To select a sheet, press the up or down arrow keys to move to a sheet in the list. To add a sheet to the selection, hold down Ctrl (Mac: Command) while pressing the arrow keys and then press Spacebar. To select a range of sheets, hold down Shift and press the arrow keys. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060101.xhp index 1bf874be9d..acbe5c86d1 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060101.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060101.xhp @@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ * * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * - * $RCSfile: 04060101.xhp,v $ - * $Revision: 1.12.4.1 $ + * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ + * $Revision: 1.10 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,697 +35,735 @@ - -Database Functions -/text/scalc/01/04060101.xhp - - - + + Database Functions + /text/scalc/01/04060101.xhp + + + Function Wizard; databases -functions; database functions -databases; functions in $[officename] Calc + functions; database functions + databases; functions in $[officename] Calc -Database Functions -This section deals with functions used with data organized as one row of data for one record. +Database Functions + This section deals with functions used with data organized as one row of data for one record. -The Database category may be confused with a database integrated in $[officename]. However, there is no connection between a database in $[officename] and the Database category in $[officename] Calc. -Example Data: -The following data will be used in some of the function description examples: -The range A1:E10 lists the children invited to Joe's birthday party. The following information is given for each entry: column A shows the name, B the grade, then age in years, distance to school in meters and weight in kilograms. - - - - - -A - - -B - - -C - - -D - - -E - - - - -1 - - - -Name - - - - -Grade - - - - -Age - - - - -Distance to School - - - - -Weight - - - - - -2 - - - -Andy - - - - -3 - - - - -9 - - - - -150 - - - - -40 - - - - - -3 - - - -Betty - - - - -4 - - - - -10 - - - - -1000 - - - - -42 - - - - - -4 - - - -Charles - - - - -3 - - - - -10 - - - - -300 - - - - -51 - - - - - -5 - - - -Daniel - - - - -5 - - - - -11 - - - - -1200 - - - - -48 - - - - - -6 - - - -Eva - - - - -2 - - - - -8 - - - - -650 - - - - -33 - - - - - -7 - - - -F -rank - - - - -2 - - - - -7 - - - - -3 -00 - - - - -4 -2 - - - - - -8 - - - -Greta - - - - -1 - - - - -7 - - - - -200 - - - - -36 - - - - - -9 - - - -Harry - - - - -3 - - - - -9 - - - - -1200 - - - - -44 - - - - - -10 - - - -Irene - - - - -2 - - - - -8 - - - - -1000 - - - - -42 - - - - - -11 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -12 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -13 - - - -Name - - - - -Grade - - - - -Age - - - - -Distance to School - - - - -Weight - - - - - -14 - - - - - - - - - ->600 - - - - - - - -15 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -16 - - - -DCOUNT - - - - -5 - - - - - - - - - -
+ The Database category may be confused with a database integrated in $[officename]. However, there is no connection between a database in $[officename] and the Database category in $[officename] Calc. + Example Data: + The following data will be used in some of the function description examples: + The range A1:E10 lists the children invited to Joe's birthday party. The following information is given for each entry: column A shows the name, B the grade, then age in years, distance to school in meters and weight in kilograms. + + + + + + A + + + B + + + C + + + D + + + E + + + + + 1 + + + + Name + + + + + Grade + + + + + Age + + + + + Distance to School + + + + + Weight + + + + + + 2 + + + + Andy + + + + + 3 + + + + + 9 + + + + + 150 + + + + + 40 + + + + + + 3 + + + + Betty + + + + + 4 + + + + + 10 + + + + + 1000 + + + + + 42 + + + + + + 4 + + + + Charles + + + + + 3 + + + + + 10 + + + + + 300 + + + + + 51 + + + + + + 5 + + + + Daniel + + + + + 5 + + + + + 11 + + + + + 1200 + + + + + 48 + + + + + + 6 + + + + Eva + + + + + 2 + + + + + 8 + + + + + 650 + + + + + 33 + + + + + + 7 + + + + F + rank + + + + + 2 + + + + + 7 + + + + + 3 + 00 + + + + + 4 + 2 + + + + + + 8 + + + + Greta + + + + + 1 + + + + + 7 + + + + + 200 + + + + + 36 + + + + + + 9 + + + + Harry + + + + + 3 + + + + + 9 + + + + + 1200 + + + + + 44 + + + + + + 10 + + + + Irene + + + + + 2 + + + + + 8 + + + + + 1000 + + + + + 42 + + + + + + 11 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + 12 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + 13 + + + + Name + + + + + Grade + + + + + Age + + + + + Distance to School + + + + + Weight + + + + + + 14 + + + + + + + + + + >600 + + + + + + + + 15 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + 16 + + + + DCOUNT + + + + + 5 + + + + + + + + + +
-The formula in cell B16 is =DCOUNT(A1:E10;0;A13:E14) -Database Function Parameters: -The following items are the parameter definitions for all database functions: - -Database is the cell range defining the database. - -DatabaseField specifies the column where the function operates on after the search criteria of the first parameter is applied and the data rows are selected. It is not related to the search criteria itself. Use the number 0 to specify the whole data range. To reference a column by means of the column header name, place quotation marks around the header name. + The formula in cell B16 is =DCOUNT(A1:E10;0;A13:E14) + Database Function Parameters: + The following items are the parameter definitions for all database functions: + + Database is the cell range defining the database. + + DatabaseField specifies the column where the function operates on after the search criteria of the first parameter is applied and the data rows are selected. It is not related to the search criteria itself. Use the number 0 to specify the whole data range. To reference a column by means of the column header name, place quotation marks around the header name. - -SearchCriteria is the cell range containing search criteria. If you write several criteria in one row they are connected by AND. If you write the criteria in different rows they are connected by OR. Empty cells in the search criteria range will be ignored. -Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate to define how $[officename] Calc acts when searching for identical entries. -See also the Wiki page about Conditional Counting and Summation. + + SearchCriteria is the cell range containing search criteria. If you write several criteria in one row they are connected by AND. If you write the criteria in different rows they are connected by OR. Empty cells in the search criteria range will be ignored. + Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate to define how $[officename] Calc acts when searching for identical entries. + See also the Wiki page about Conditional Counting and Summation.
DCOUNT function -counting rows;with numeric values + counting rows;with numeric values mw added "counting rows;" -DCOUNT -DCOUNT counts the number of rows (records) in a database that match the specified search criteria and contain numerical values. - -Syntax -DCOUNT(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) -For the DatabaseField parameter you can enter a cell to specify the column, or enter the number 0 for the entire database. The parameter cannot be empty. - -Example -In the example above (scroll up, please), we want to know how many children have to travel more than 600 meters to school. The result is to be stored in cell B16. Set the cursor in cell B16. Enter the formula =DCOUNT(A1:E10;0;A13:E14) in B16. The Function Wizard helps you to input ranges. - -Database is the range of data to be evaluated, including its headers: in this case A1:E10. DatabaseField specifies the column for the search criteria: in this case, the whole database. SearchCriteria is the range where you can enter the search parameters: in this case, A13:E14. -To learn how many children in second grade are over 7 years of age, delete the entry >600 in cell D14 and enter 2 in cell B14 under Grade, and enter >7 in cell C14 to the right. The result is 2. Two children are in second grade and over 7 years of age. As both criteria are in the same row, they are connected by AND. -
-
+DCOUNT + DCOUNT counts the number of rows (records) in a database that match the specified search criteria and contain numerical values. + + Syntax + DCOUNT(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) + For the DatabaseField parameter you can enter a cell to specify the column, or enter the number 0 for the entire database. The parameter cannot be empty. + + Example + In the example above (scroll up, please), we want to know how many children have to travel more than 600 meters to school. The result is to be stored in cell B16. Set the cursor in cell B16. Enter the formula =DCOUNT(A1:E10;0;A13:E14) in B16. The Function Wizard helps you to input ranges. + + Database is the range of data to be evaluated, including its headers: in this case A1:E10. DatabaseField specifies the column for the search criteria: in this case, the whole database. SearchCriteria is the range where you can enter the search parameters: in this case, A13:E14. + To learn how many children in second grade are over 7 years of age, delete the entry >600 in cell D14 and enter 2 in cell B14 under Grade, and enter >7 in cell C14 to the right. The result is 2. Two children are in second grade and over 7 years of age. As both criteria are in the same row, they are connected by AND. +
+
DCOUNTA function -records;counting in Calc databases -counting rows;with numeric or alphanumeric values + records;counting in Calc databases + counting rows;with numeric or alphanumeric values mw added "records;" and "counting rows;" -DCOUNTA -DCOUNTA counts the number of rows (records) in a database that match the specified search conditions, and contain numeric or alphanumeric values. - -Syntax -DCOUNTA(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) - -Example -In the example above (scroll up, please), you can search for the number of children whose name starts with an E or a subsequent letter. Edit the formula in B16 to read =DCOUNTA(A1:E10;"Age";A13:E14). Delete the old search criteria and enter >=E under Name in field A14. The result is 5. If you now delete all number values for Greta in row 8, the result changes to 4. Row 8 is no longer included in the count because it does not contain any values. The name Greta is text, not a value. Note that the DatabaseField parameter must point to a column that can contain values.see i25407 -
-
+DCOUNTA + DCOUNTA counts the number of rows (records) in a database that match the specified search conditions, and contain numeric or alphanumeric values. + + Syntax + DCOUNTA(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) + + Example + In the example above (scroll up, please), you can search for the number of children whose name starts with an E or a subsequent letter. Edit the formula in B16 to read =DCOUNTA(A1:E10;"Name";A13:E14). Delete the old search criteria and enter >=E under Name in field A14. The result is 5. If you now delete all number values for Greta in row 8, the result changes to 4. Row 8 is no longer included in the count because it does not contain any values. The name Greta is text, not a value. Note that the DatabaseField parameter must point to a column that can contain values.see i25407 +
+
DGET function -cell contents;searching in Calc databases -searching;cell contents in Calc databases + cell contents;searching in Calc databases + searching;cell contents in Calc databases mw added "cell contents;" and "searching;" -DGET -DGET returns the contents of the referenced cell in a database which matches the specified search criteria. In case of an error, the function returns either #VALUE! for no row found, or Err502 for more than one cell found. - -Syntax -DGET(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) - -Example -In the above example (scroll up, please), we want to determine what grade a child is in, whose name was entered in cell A14. The formula is entered in cell B16 and differs slightly from the earlier examples because only one column (one database field) can be entered for DatabaseField. Enter the following formula: - -=DGET(A1:E10;"Grade";A13:E14) - -Enter the name Frank in A14, and you see the result 2. Frank is in second grade. Enter "Age" instead of "Grade" and you will get Frank's age. -Or enter the value 11 in cell C14 only, and delete the other entries in this row. Edit the formula in B16 as follows: - -=DGET(A1:E10;"Name";A13:E14) - -Instead of the grade, the name is queried. The answer appears at once: Daniel is the only child aged 11. -
-
+DGET + DGET returns the contents of the referenced cell in a database which matches the specified search criteria. In case of an error, the function returns either #VALUE! for no row found, or Err502 for more than one cell found. + + Syntax + DGET(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) + + Example + In the above example (scroll up, please), we want to determine what grade a child is in, whose name was entered in cell A14. The formula is entered in cell B16 and differs slightly from the earlier examples because only one column (one database field) can be entered for DatabaseField. Enter the following formula: + + =DGET(A1:E10;"Grade";A13:E14) + + Enter the name Frank in A14, and you see the result 2. Frank is in second grade. Enter "Age" instead of "Grade" and you will get Frank's age. + Or enter the value 11 in cell C14 only, and delete the other entries in this row. Edit the formula in B16 as follows: + + =DGET(A1:E10;"Name";A13:E14) + + Instead of the grade, the name is queried. The answer appears at once: Daniel is the only child aged 11. +
+
DMAX function -maximum values in Calc databases -searching;maximum values in columns + maximum values in Calc databases + searching;maximum values in columns mw added "maximum..." and "searching;" -DMAX -DMAX returns the maximum content of a cell (field) in a database (all records) that matches the specified search conditions. - -Syntax -DMAX(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) - -Example -To find out how much the heaviest child in each grade weighed in the above example (scroll up, please), enter the following formula in B16: - -=DMAX(A1:E10;"Weight";A13:E14) - -Under Grade, enter 1, 2, 3, and so on, one after the other. After entering a grade number, the weight of the heaviest child in that grade appears. -
-
+DMAX + DMAX returns the maximum content of a cell (field) in a database (all records) that matches the specified search conditions. + + Syntax + DMAX(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) + + Example + To find out how much the heaviest child in each grade weighed in the above example (scroll up, please), enter the following formula in B16: + + =DMAX(A1:E10;"Weight";A13:E14) + + Under Grade, enter 1, 2, 3, and so on, one after the other. After entering a grade number, the weight of the heaviest child in that grade appears. +
+
DMIN function -minimum values in Calc databases -searching;minimum values in columns + minimum values in Calc databases + searching;minimum values in columns mw added "minimum..." and "searching;" -DMIN -DMIN returns the minimum content of a cell (field) in a database that matches the specified search criteria. - -Syntax -DMIN(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) - -Example -To find the shortest distance to school for the children in each grade in the above example (scroll up, please), enter the following formula in B16: - -=DMIN(A1:E10;"Distance to School";A13:E14) - -In row 14, under Grade, enter 1, 2, 3, and so on, one after the other. The shortest distance to school for each grade appears. -
-
+DMIN + DMIN returns the minimum content of a cell (field) in a database that matches the specified search criteria. + + Syntax + DMIN(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) + + Example + To find the shortest distance to school for the children in each grade in the above example (scroll up, please), enter the following formula in B16: + + =DMIN(A1:E10;"Distance to School";A13:E14) + + In row 14, under Grade, enter 1, 2, 3, and so on, one after the other. The shortest distance to school for each grade appears. +
+
DAVERAGE function -averages; in Calc databases -calculating;averages in Calc databases + averages; in Calc databases + calculating;averages in Calc databases mw added "averages;..." and "calculating;" -DAVERAGE -DAVERAGE returns the average of the values of all cells (fields) in all rows (database records) that match the specified search criteria. - -Syntax -DAVERAGE(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) - -Example -To find the average weight of all children of the same age in the above example (scroll up, please), enter the following formula in B16: - -=DAVERAGE(A1:E10;"Weight";A13:E14) - -In row 14, under Age, enter 7, 8, 9, and so on, one after the other. The average weight of all children of the same age appears. -
-
+DAVERAGE + DAVERAGE returns the average of the values of all cells (fields) in all rows (database records) that match the specified search criteria. + + Syntax + DAVERAGE(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) + + Example + To find the average weight of all children of the same age in the above example (scroll up, please), enter the following formula in B16: + + =DAVERAGE(A1:E10;"Weight";A13:E14) + + In row 14, under Age, enter 7, 8, 9, and so on, one after the other. The average weight of all children of the same age appears. +
+
DPRODUCT function -multiplying;cell contents in Calc databases + multiplying;cell contents in Calc databases mw added "multiplying..." -DPRODUCT -DPRODUCT multiplies all cells of a data range where the cell contents match the search criteria. - -Syntax -DPRODUCT(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) - -Example -With the birthday party example above (scroll up, please), there is no meaningful application of this function. -
-
+DPRODUCT + DPRODUCT multiplies all cells of a data range where the cell contents match the search criteria. + + Syntax + DPRODUCT(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) + + Example + With the birthday party example above (scroll up, please), there is no meaningful application of this function. +
+
DSTDEV function -standard deviations in databases;based on a sample + standard deviations in databases;based on a sample mw added "standard deviations...;" -DSTDEV -DSTDEV calculates the standard deviation of a population based on a sample, using the numbers in a database column that match the given conditions. The records are treated as a sample of data. That means that the children in the example represent a cross section of all children. Note that a representative result can not be obtained from a sample of less than one thousand. - -Syntax -DSTDEV(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) - -Example -To find the standard deviation of the weight for all children of the same age in the example (scroll up, please), enter the following formula in B16: - -=DSTDEV(A1:E10;"Weight";A13:E14) - -In row 14, under Age, enter 7, 8, 9, and so on, one after the other. The result shown is the standard deviation of the weight of all children of this age. -
-
+DSTDEV + DSTDEV calculates the standard deviation of a population based on a sample, using the numbers in a database column that match the given conditions. The records are treated as a sample of data. That means that the children in the example represent a cross section of all children. Note that a representative result can not be obtained from a sample of less than one thousand. + + Syntax + DSTDEV(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) + + Example + To find the standard deviation of the weight for all children of the same age in the example (scroll up, please), enter the following formula in B16: + + =DSTDEV(A1:E10;"Weight";A13:E14) + + In row 14, under Age, enter 7, 8, 9, and so on, one after the other. The result shown is the standard deviation of the weight of all children of this age. +
+
DSTDEVP function -standard deviations in databases;based on populations + standard deviations in databases;based on populations mw added "standard deviations...;" -DSTDEVP -DSTDEVP calculates the standard deviation of a population based on all cells of a data range which match the search criteria. The records from the example are treated as the whole population. - -Syntax -DSTDEVP(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) - -Example -To find the standard deviation of the weight for all children of the same age at Joe's birthday party (scroll up, please), enter the following formula in B16: - -=DSTDEVP(A1:E10;"Weight";A13:E14) - -In row 14, under Age, enter 7, 8, 9, and so on, one after the other. The result is the standard deviation of the weight for all same-aged children whose weight was checked. -
-
+DSTDEVP + DSTDEVP calculates the standard deviation of a population based on all cells of a data range which match the search criteria. The records from the example are treated as the whole population. + + Syntax + DSTDEVP(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) + + Example + To find the standard deviation of the weight for all children of the same age at Joe's birthday party (scroll up, please), enter the following formula in B16: + + =DSTDEVP(A1:E10;"Weight";A13:E14) + + In row 14, under Age, enter 7, 8, 9, and so on, one after the other. The result is the standard deviation of the weight for all same-aged children whose weight was checked. +
+
DSUM function -calculating;sums in Calc databases -sums;cells in Calc databases + calculating;sums in Calc databases + sums;cells in Calc databases mw added "calculating;" and "sums;" -DSUM -DSUM returns the total of all cells in a database field in all rows (records) that match the specified search criteria. - -Syntax -DSUM(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) - -Example -To find the length of the combined distance to school of all children at Joe's birthday party (scroll up, please) who are in second grade, enter the following formula in B16: - -=DSUM(A1:E10;"Distance to School";A13:E14) - -Enter 2 in row 14 under Grade. The sum (1950) of the distances to school of all the children who are in second grade is displayed. -
-
+DSUM + DSUM returns the total of all cells in a database field in all rows (records) that match the specified search criteria. + + Syntax + DSUM(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) + + Example + To find the length of the combined distance to school of all children at Joe's birthday party (scroll up, please) who are in second grade, enter the following formula in B16: + + =DSUM(A1:E10;"Distance to School";A13:E14) + + Enter 2 in row 14 under Grade. The sum (1950) of the distances to school of all the children who are in second grade is displayed. +
+
DVAR function -variances;based on samples + variances;based on samples mw added "variances;" -DVAR -DVAR returns the variance of all cells of a database field in all records that match the specified search criteria. The records from the example are treated as a sample of data. A representative result cannot be obtained from a sample population of less than one thousand. - -Syntax -DVAR(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) - -Example -To find the variance of the weight of all children of the same age of the above example (scroll up, please), enter the following formula in B16: - -=DVAR(A1:E10;"Weight";A13:E14) - -In row 14, under Age, enter 7, 8, 9, and so on, one after the other. You will see as a result the variance of the weight values for all children of this age. -
-
+DVAR + DVAR returns the variance of all cells of a database field in all records that match the specified search criteria. The records from the example are treated as a sample of data. A representative result cannot be obtained from a sample population of less than one thousand. + + Syntax + DVAR(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) + + Example + To find the variance of the weight of all children of the same age of the above example (scroll up, please), enter the following formula in B16: + + =DVAR(A1:E10;"Weight";A13:E14) + + In row 14, under Age, enter 7, 8, 9, and so on, one after the other. You will see as a result the variance of the weight values for all children of this age. +
+
DVARP function -variances;based on populations + variances;based on populations mw added "variances;" -DVARP -DVARP calculates the variance of all cell values in a database field in all records that match the specified search criteria. The records are from the example are treated as an entire population. - -Syntax -DVARP(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) - -Example -To find the variance of the weight for all children of the same age at Joe's birthday party (scroll up, please), enter the following formula in B16: - -=DVARP(A1:E10;"Weight";A13:E14) - -In row 14, under Age, enter 7, 8, 9, and so on, one after the other. The variance of the weight values for all children of this age attending Joe's birthday party appears. -
+DVARP + DVARP calculates the variance of all cell values in a database field in all records that match the specified search criteria. The records are from the example are treated as an entire population. + + Syntax + DVARP(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) + + Example + To find the variance of the weight for all children of the same age at Joe's birthday party (scroll up, please), enter the following formula in B16: + + =DVARP(A1:E10;"Weight";A13:E14) + + In row 14, under Age, enter 7, 8, 9, and so on, one after the other. The variance of the weight values for all children of this age attending Joe's birthday party appears. +
- -
- - + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060102.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060102.xhp index f7f84be54a..4a02eaeaba 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060102.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060102.xhp @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@
-The functions whose names end with _ADD return the same results as the corresponding Microsoft Excel functions. Use the functions without _ADD to get results based on international standards. For example, the WEEKNUM function calculates the week number of a given date based on international standard ISO 6801, while WEEKNUM_ADD returns the same week number as Microsoft Excel.UFI: see #33784# +The functions whose names end with _ADD return the same results as the corresponding Microsoft Excel functions. Use the functions without _ADD to get results based on international standards. For example, the WEEKNUM function calculates the week number of a given date based on international standard ISO 8601, while WEEKNUM_ADD returns the same week number as Microsoft Excel.UFI: see #33784#
$[officename] internally handles a date/time value as a numerical value. If you assign the numbering format "Number" to a date or time value, it is converted to a number. For example, 01/01/2000 12:00 PM, converts to 36526.5. The value preceding the decimal point corresponds to the date; the value following the decimal point corresponds to the time. If you do not want to see this type of numerical date or time representation, change the number format (date or time) accordingly. To do this, select the cell containing the date or time value, call its context menu and select Format Cells. The Numbers tab page contains the functions for defining the number format. Date base for day zero diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060103.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060103.xhp index 38180da3e1..dcf75321b0 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060103.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060103.xhp @@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ * * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * - * $RCSfile: 04060103.xhp,v $ - * $Revision: 1.13.4.1 $ + * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ + * $Revision: 1.10 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,708 +35,748 @@ - -Financial Functions Part One -/text/scalc/01/04060103.xhp - - - + + Financial Functions Part One + /text/scalc/01/04060103.xhp + + + financial functions -functions; financial functions -Function Wizard; financial -amortizations, see also depreciations + functions; financial functions + Function Wizard; financial + amortizations, see also depreciations mw added one entry -Financial Functions Part One -This category contains the mathematical finance functions of %PRODUCTNAME Calc. +Financial Functions Part One + This category contains the mathematical finance functions of %PRODUCTNAME Calc.
AMORDEGRC function -depreciations;degressive amortizations + depreciations;degressive amortizations mw added one entry -AMORDEGRC -Calculates the amount of depreciation for a settlement period as degressive amortization. Unlike AMORLINC, a depreciation coefficient that is independent of the depreciable life is used here. -Syntax -AMORDEGRC(Cost; DatePurchased; FirstPeriod; Salvage; Period; Rate; Basis) - -Cost is the acquisition costs. - -DatePurchased is the date of acquisition. - -FirstPeriod is the end date of the first settlement period. - -Salvage is the salvage value of the capital asset at the end of the depreciable life. - -Period is the settlement period to be considered. - -Rate is the rate of depreciation. - -
-
+AMORDEGRC + Calculates the amount of depreciation for a settlement period as degressive amortization. Unlike AMORLINC, a depreciation coefficient that is independent of the depreciable life is used here. + Syntax + AMORDEGRC(Cost; DatePurchased; FirstPeriod; Salvage; Period; Rate; Basis) + + Cost is the acquisition costs. + + DatePurchased is the date of acquisition. + + FirstPeriod is the end date of the first settlement period. + + Salvage is the salvage value of the capital asset at the end of the depreciable life. + + Period is the settlement period to be considered. + + Rate is the rate of depreciation. + +
+
AMORLINC function -depreciations;linear amortizations + depreciations;linear amortizations mw added "depreciations;..." -AMORLINC -Calculates the amount of depreciation for a settlement period as linear amortization. If the capital asset is purchased during the settlement period, the proportional amount of depreciation is considered. -Syntax -AMORLINC(Cost; DatePurchased; FirstPeriod; Salvage; Period; Rate; Basis) - -Cost means the acquisition costs. - -DatePurchased is the date of acquisition. - -FirstPeriod is the end date of the first settlement period. - -Salvage is the salvage value of the capital asset at the end of the depreciable life. - -Period is the settlement period to be considered. - -Rate is the rate of depreciation. - -
-
+AMORLINC + Calculates the amount of depreciation for a settlement period as linear amortization. If the capital asset is purchased during the settlement period, the proportional amount of depreciation is considered. + Syntax + AMORLINC(Cost; DatePurchased; FirstPeriod; Salvage; Period; Rate; Basis) + + Cost means the acquisition costs. + + DatePurchased is the date of acquisition. + + FirstPeriod is the end date of the first settlement period. + + Salvage is the salvage value of the capital asset at the end of the depreciable life. + + Period is the settlement period to be considered. + + Rate is the rate of depreciation. + +
+
ACCRINT function -ACCRINT +ACCRINT accrued interests;periodic payments mw changed "accrued interests" -Calculates the accrued interest of a security in the case of periodic payments. -Syntax -ACCRINT(Issue; FirstInterest; Settlement; Rate; Par; Frequency; Basis) - -Issue is the issue date of the security. - -FirstInterest is the first interest date of the security. - -Settlement is the date at which the interest accrued up until then is to be calculated. - -Rate is the annual nominal rate of interest (coupon interest rate) - -Par is the par value of the security. - -Frequency is the number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). - -Example -A security is issued on 2.28.2001. First interest is set for 8.31.2001. The settlement date is 5.1.2001. The Rate is 0.1 or 10% and Par is 1000 currency units. Interest is paid half-yearly (frequency is 2). The basis is the US method (0). How much interest has accrued? - -=ACCRINT("2.28.2001";"8.31.2001";"5.1.2001";0.1;1000;2;0) returns 16.94444. -
-
+Calculates the accrued interest of a security in the case of periodic payments. + Syntax + ACCRINT(Issue; FirstInterest; Settlement; Rate; Par; Frequency; Basis) + + Issue is the issue date of the security. + + FirstInterest is the first interest date of the security. + + Settlement is the date at which the interest accrued up until then is to be calculated. + + Rate is the annual nominal rate of interest (coupon interest rate) + + Par is the par value of the security. + + Frequency is the number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). + + Example + A security is issued on 2001-02-28. First interest is set for 2001-08-31. The settlement date is 2001-05-01. The Rate is 0.1 or 10% and Par is 1000 currency units. Interest is paid half-yearly (frequency is 2). The basis is the US method (0). How much interest has accrued? + + =ACCRINT("2001-02-28";"2001-08-31";"2001-05-01";0.1;1000;2;0) returns 16.94444. +
+
ACCRINTM function -accrued interests;one-off payments + accrued interests;one-off payments mw added one index entry -ACCRINTM -Calculates the accrued interest of a security in the case of one-off payment at the settlement date. -Syntax -ACCRINTM(Issue; Settlement; Rate; Par; Basis) - -Issue is the issue date of the security. - -Settlement is the date at which the interest accrued up until then is to be calculated. - -Rate is the annual nominal rate of interest (coupon interest rate). - -Par is the par value of the security. - -Example -A security is issued on 4.1.2001. The maturity date is set for 6.15.2001. The Rate is 0.1 or 10% and Par is 1000 currency units. The basis of the daily/annual calculation is the daily balance (3). How much interest has accrued? - -=ACCRINTM("4.1.2001";"6.15.2001";0.1;1000;3) returns 20.54795. -
-
+ACCRINTM + Calculates the accrued interest of a security in the case of one-off payment at the settlement date. + Syntax + ACCRINTM(Issue; Settlement; Rate; Par; Basis) + + Issue is the issue date of the security. + + Settlement is the date at which the interest accrued up until then is to be calculated. + + Rate is the annual nominal rate of interest (coupon interest rate). + + Par is the par value of the security. + + Example + A security is issued on 2001-04-01. The maturity date is set for 2001-06-15. The Rate is 0.1 or 10% and Par is 1000 currency units. The basis of the daily/annual calculation is the daily balance (3). How much interest has accrued? + + =ACCRINTM("2001-04-01";"2001-06-15";0.1;1000;3) returns 20.54795. +
+
RECEIVED function -amount received for fixed-interest securities + amount received for fixed-interest securities mw added one entry -RECEIVED -Calculates the amount received that is paid for a fixed-interest security at a given point in time. -Syntax -RECEIVED("Settlement"; "Maturity"; Investment; Discount; Basis) - -Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. - -Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). - -Investment is the purchase sum. - -Discount is the percentage discount on acquisition of the security. - -Example -Settlement date: February 15 1999, maturity date: May 15 1999, investment sum: 1000 currency units, discount: 5.75 per cent, basis: Daily balance/360 = 2. -The amount received on the maturity date is calculated as follows: - -=RECEIVED("2.15.99";"5.15.99";1000;0.0575;2) returns 1014.420266. -
-
+RECEIVED + Calculates the amount received that is paid for a fixed-interest security at a given point in time. + Syntax + RECEIVED("Settlement"; "Maturity"; Investment; Discount; Basis) + + Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. + + Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). + + Investment is the purchase sum. + + Discount is the percentage discount on acquisition of the security. + + Example + Settlement date: February 15 1999, maturity date: May 15 1999, investment sum: 1000 currency units, discount: 5.75 per cent, basis: Daily balance/360 = 2. + The amount received on the maturity date is calculated as follows: + + =RECEIVED("1999-02-15";"1999-05-15";1000;0.0575;2) returns 1014.420266. +
+
PV function -present values -calculating; present values + present values + calculating; present values -PV -Returns the present value of an investment resulting from a series of regular payments. -Use this function to calculate the amount of money needed to be invested at a fixed rate today, to receive a specific amount, an annuity, over a specified number of periods. You can also determine how much money is to remain after the elapse of the period. Specify as well if the amount is to be paid out at the beginning or at the end of each period. -Enter these values either as numbers, expressions or references. If, for example, interest is paid annually at 8%, but you want to use month as your period, enter 8%/12 under Rate and %PRODUCTNAME Calc with automatically calculate the correct factor. -Syntax -PV(Rate; NPer; Pmt; FV; Type) - -Rate defines the interest rate per period. - -NPer is the total number of periods (payment period). - -Pmt is the regular payment made per period. - -FV (optional) defines the future value remaining after the final installment has been made. - -Type (optional) denotes due date for payments. Type = 1 means due at the beginning of a period and Type = 0 (default) means due at the end of the period. - - - -Example -What is the present value of an investment, if 500 currency units are paid out monthly and the annual interest rate is 8%? The payment period is 48 months and 20,000 currency units are to remain at the end of the payment period. - -=PV(8%/12;48;500;20000) = -35,019.37 currency units. Under the named conditions, you must deposit 35,019.37 currency units today, if you want to receive 500 currency units per month for 48 months and have 20,000 currency units left over at the end. Cross-checking shows that 48 x 500 currency units + 20,000 currency units = 44,000 currency units. The difference between this amount and the 35,000 currency units deposited represents the interest paid. -If you enter references instead of these values into the formula, you can calculate any number of "If-then" scenarios. Please note: references to constants must be defined as absolute references. Examples of this type of application are found under the depreciation functions. -
-
+PV + Returns the present value of an investment resulting from a series of regular payments. + Use this function to calculate the amount of money needed to be invested at a fixed rate today, to receive a specific amount, an annuity, over a specified number of periods. You can also determine how much money is to remain after the elapse of the period. Specify as well if the amount is to be paid out at the beginning or at the end of each period. + Enter these values either as numbers, expressions or references. If, for example, interest is paid annually at 8%, but you want to use month as your period, enter 8%/12 under Rate and %PRODUCTNAME Calc with automatically calculate the correct factor. + Syntax + PV(Rate; NPer; Pmt; FV; Type) + + Rate defines the interest rate per period. + + NPer is the total number of periods (payment period). + + Pmt is the regular payment made per period. + + FV (optional) defines the future value remaining after the final installment has been made. + + Type (optional) denotes due date for payments. Type = 1 means due at the beginning of a period and Type = 0 (default) means due at the end of the period. + + + + Example + What is the present value of an investment, if 500 currency units are paid out monthly and the annual interest rate is 8%? The payment period is 48 months and 20,000 currency units are to remain at the end of the payment period. + + =PV(8%/12;48;500;20000) = -35,019.37 currency units. Under the named conditions, you must deposit 35,019.37 currency units today, if you want to receive 500 currency units per month for 48 months and have 20,000 currency units left over at the end. Cross-checking shows that 48 x 500 currency units + 20,000 currency units = 44,000 currency units. The difference between this amount and the 35,000 currency units deposited represents the interest paid. + If you enter references instead of these values into the formula, you can calculate any number of "If-then" scenarios. Please note: references to constants must be defined as absolute references. Examples of this type of application are found under the depreciation functions. +
+
calculating; depreciations -SYD function -depreciations; arithmetic declining -arithmetic declining depreciations + SYD function + depreciations; arithmetic declining + arithmetic declining depreciations -SYD -Returns the arithmetic-declining depreciation rate. -Use this function to calculate the depreciation amount for one period of the total depreciation span of an object. Arithmetic declining depreciation reduces the depreciation amount from period to period by a fixed sum. -Syntax -SYD(Cost; Salvage; Life; Period) - -Cost is the initial cost of an asset. - -Salvage is the value of an asset after depreciation. - -Life is the period fixing the time span over which an asset is depreciated. - -Period defines the period for which the depreciation is to be calculated. -Example -A video system initially costing 50,000 currency units is to be depreciated annually for the next 5 years. The salvage value is to be 10,000 currency units. You want to calculate depreciation for the first year. - -=SYD(50000;10000;5;1)=13,333.33 currency units. The depreciation amount for the first year is 13,333.33 currency units. -To have an overview of depreciation rates per period, it is best to define a depreciation table. By entering the different depreciation formulas available in %PRODUCTNAME Calc next to each other, you can see which depreciation form is the most appropriate. Enter the table as follows: - - - - - - -A - - - - -B - - - - -C - - - - -D - - - - -E - - - - - -1 - - - -Initial Cost - - - - -Salvage Value - - - - -Useful Life - - - - -Time Period - - - - -Deprec. SYD - - - - - -2 - - - -50,000 currency units - - - - -10,000 currency units - - - - -5 - - - - -1 - - - - -13,333.33 currency units - - - - - -3 - - - - - - - - - -2 - - - - -10,666.67 -currency units - - - - - -4 - - - - - - - - - -3 - - - - -8,000.00 currency units - - - - - -5 - - - - - - - - - -4 - - - - -5,333.33 currency units - - - - - -6 - - - - - - - - - -5 - - - - -2,666.67 currency units - - - - - -7 - - - - - - - - - -6 - - - - -0.00 currency units - - - - - -8 - - - - - - - - - -7 - - - - - - - -9 - - - - - - - - - -8 - - - - - - - -10 - - - - - - - - - -9 - - - - - - - -11 - - - - - - - - - -10 - - - - - - - -12 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -13 - - - ->0 - - - - - - - - -Total - - - - -40,000.00 currency units - - - -
+SYD + Returns the arithmetic-declining depreciation rate. + Use this function to calculate the depreciation amount for one period of the total depreciation span of an object. Arithmetic declining depreciation reduces the depreciation amount from period to period by a fixed sum. + Syntax + SYD(Cost; Salvage; Life; Period) + + Cost is the initial cost of an asset. + + Salvage is the value of an asset after depreciation. + + Life is the period fixing the time span over which an asset is depreciated. + + Period defines the period for which the depreciation is to be calculated. + Example + A video system initially costing 50,000 currency units is to be depreciated annually for the next 5 years. The salvage value is to be 10,000 currency units. You want to calculate depreciation for the first year. + + =SYD(50000;10000;5;1)=13,333.33 currency units. The depreciation amount for the first year is 13,333.33 currency units. + To have an overview of depreciation rates per period, it is best to define a depreciation table. By entering the different depreciation formulas available in %PRODUCTNAME Calc next to each other, you can see which depreciation form is the most appropriate. Enter the table as follows: + + + + + + + A + + + + + B + + + + + C + + + + + D + + + + + E + + + + + + 1 + + + + Initial Cost + + + + + Salvage Value + + + + + Useful Life + + + + + Time Period + + + + + Deprec. SYD + + + + + + 2 + + + + 50,000 currency units + + + + + 10,000 currency units + + + + + 5 + + + + + 1 + + + + + 13,333.33 currency units + + + + + + 3 + + + + + + + + + + 2 + + + + + 10,666.67 currency units + + + + + + 4 + + + + + + + + + + 3 + + + + + 8,000.00 currency units + + + + + + 5 + + + + + + + + + + 4 + + + + + 5,333.33 currency units + + + + + + 6 + + + + + + + + + + 5 + + + + + 2,666.67 currency units + + + + + + 7 + + + + + + + + + + 6 + + + + + 0.00 currency units + + + + + + 8 + + + + + + + + + + 7 + + + + + + + + 9 + + + + + + + + + + 8 + + + + + + + + 10 + + + + + + + + + + 9 + + + + + + + + 11 + + + + + + + + + + 10 + + + + + + + + 12 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + 13 + + + + >0 + + + + + + + + + Total + + + + + 40,000.00 currency units + + + +
-The formula in E2 is as follows: - -=SYD($A$2;$B$2;$C$2;D2) - -This formula is duplicated in column E down to E11 (select E2, then drag down the lower right corner with the mouse). -Cell E13 contains the formula used to check the total of the depreciation amounts. It uses the SUMIF function as the negative values in E8:E11 must not be considered. The condition >0 is contained in cell A13. The formula in E13 is as follows: - -=SUMIF(E2:E11;A13) - -Now view the depreciation for a 10 year period, or at a salvage value of 1 currency unit, or enter a different initial cost, and so on. -
-
+ The formula in E2 is as follows: + + =SYD($A$2;$B$2;$C$2;D2) + + This formula is duplicated in column E down to E11 (select E2, then drag down the lower right corner with the mouse). + Cell E13 contains the formula used to check the total of the depreciation amounts. It uses the SUMIF function as the negative values in E8:E11 must not be considered. The condition >0 is contained in cell A13. The formula in E13 is as follows: + + =SUMIF(E2:E11;A13) + + Now view the depreciation for a 10 year period, or at a salvage value of 1 currency unit, or enter a different initial cost, and so on. +
+
DISC function -allowances -discounts + allowances + discounts mw added "discounts" and "allowances" -DISC -Calculates the allowance (discount) of a security as a percentage. -Syntax -DISC("Settlement"; "Maturity"; Price; Redemption; Basis) - -Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. - -Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). - -Price is the price of the security per 100 currency units of par value. - -Redemption is the redemption value of the security per 100 currency units of par value. - -Example -A security is purchased on 1.25.2001; the maturity date is 11.15.2001. The price (purchase price) is 97, the redemption value is 100. Using daily balance calculation (basis 3) how high is the settlement (discount)? - -=DISC("1.25.2001";"11.15.2001";97;100;3) returns 0.03840 or 3.84 per cent. -
-
+DISC + Calculates the allowance (discount) of a security as a percentage. + Syntax + DISC("Settlement"; "Maturity"; Price; Redemption; Basis) + + Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. + + Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). + + Price is the price of the security per 100 currency units of par value. + + Redemption is the redemption value of the security per 100 currency units of par value. + + Example + A security is purchased on 2001-01-25; the maturity date is 2001-11-15. The price (purchase price) is 97, the redemption value is 100. Using daily balance calculation (basis 3) how high is the settlement (discount)? + + =DISC("2001-01-25";"2001-11-15";97;100;3) returns about 0.0372 or 3.72 per cent. +
+
DURATION_ADD function -Microsoft Excel functions -durations;fixed interest securities + Microsoft Excel functions + durations;fixed interest securities mw added two entries -DURATION_ADD -Calculates the duration of a fixed interest security in years. - -Syntax -DURATION_ADD("Settlement"; "Maturity"; Coupon; Yield; Frequency; Basis) - -Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. - -Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). - -Coupon is the annual coupon interest rate (nominal rate of interest) - -Yield is the annual yield of the security. - -Frequency is the number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). - -Example -A security is purchased on 1.1.2001; the maturity date is 1.1.2006. The Coupon rate of interest is 8%. The yield is 9.0%. Interest is paid half-yearly (frequency is 2). Using daily balance interest calculation (basis 3) how long is the duration? - -=DURATION_ADD("1.1.2001";"1.1.2006";0.08;0.09;2;3) - -
-
+DURATION_ADD + Calculates the duration of a fixed interest security in years. + + Syntax + DURATION_ADD("Settlement"; "Maturity"; Coupon; Yield; Frequency; Basis) + + Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. + + Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). + + Coupon is the annual coupon interest rate (nominal rate of interest) + + Yield is the annual yield of the security. + + Frequency is the number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). + + Example + A security is purchased on 2001-01-01; the maturity date is 2006-01-01. The Coupon rate of interest is 8%. The yield is 9.0%. Interest is paid half-yearly (frequency is 2). Using daily balance interest calculation (basis 3) how long is the duration? + + =DURATION_ADD("2001-01-01";"2006-01-01";0.08;0.09;2;3) + +
+
annual net interest rates -calculating; annual net interest rates -net annual interest rates -EFFECTIVE function + calculating; annual net interest rates + net annual interest rates + EFFECTIVE function mw added one entry -EFFECTIVE -Returns the net annual interest rate for a nominal interest rate. -Nominal interest refers to the amount of interest due at the end of a calculation period. Effective interest increases with the number of payments made. In other words, interest is often paid in installments (for example, monthly or quarterly) before the end of the calculation period. -Syntax -EFFECTIVE(Nom; P) - -Nom is the nominal interest. - -P is the number of interest payment periods per year. -Example -If the annual nominal interest rate is 9.75% and four interest calculation periods are defined, what is the actual interest rate (effective rate)? - -=EFFECTIVE(9.75%;4) = 10.11% The annual effective rate is therefore 10.11%. -
-
+EFFECTIVE + Returns the net annual interest rate for a nominal interest rate. + Nominal interest refers to the amount of interest due at the end of a calculation period. Effective interest increases with the number of payments made. In other words, interest is often paid in installments (for example, monthly or quarterly) before the end of the calculation period. + Syntax + EFFECTIVE(Nom; P) + + Nom is the nominal interest. + + P is the number of interest payment periods per year. + Example + If the annual nominal interest rate is 9.75% and four interest calculation periods are defined, what is the actual interest rate (effective rate)? + + =EFFECTIVE(9.75%;4) = 10.11% The annual effective rate is therefore 10.11%. +
+
effective interest rates -EFFECT_ADD function + EFFECT_ADD function mw changed "effective rates" -EFFECT_ADD -Calculates the effective annual rate of interest on the basis of the nominal interest rate and the number of interest payments per annum. - -Syntax -EFFECT_ADD(NominalRate; NPerY) - -NominalRate is the annual nominal rate of interest. - -NPerY is the number of interest payments per year. -Example -What is the effective annual rate of interest for a 5.25% nominal rate and quarterly payment. - -=EFFECT_ADD(0.0525;4) returns 0.053543 or 5.3534%. -
-
+EFFECT_ADD + Calculates the effective annual rate of interest on the basis of the nominal interest rate and the number of interest payments per annum. + + Syntax + EFFECT_ADD(NominalRate; NPerY) + + NominalRate is the annual nominal rate of interest. + + NPerY is the number of interest payments per year. + Example + What is the effective annual rate of interest for a 5.25% nominal rate and quarterly payment. + + =EFFECT_ADD(0.0525;4) returns 0.053543 or 5.3543%. +
+
calculating; arithmetic-degressive depreciations -arithmetic-degressive depreciations -depreciations;arithmetic-degressive -DDB function + arithmetic-degressive depreciations + depreciations;arithmetic-degressive + DDB function mw corrected two typos and added "depreciations;..." -DDB -Returns the depreciation of an asset for a specified period using the arithmetic-declining method. -Use this form of depreciation if you require a higher initial depreciation value as opposed to linear depreciation. The depreciation value gets less with each period and is usually used for assets whose value loss is higher shortly after purchase (for example, vehicles, computers). Please note that the book value will never reach zero under this calculation type. -Syntax -DDB(Cost; Salvage; Life; Period; Factor) - -Cost fixes the initial cost of an asset. - -Salvage fixes the value of an asset at the end of its life. - -Life is the number of periods defining how long the asset is to be used. - -Period defines the length of the period. The length must be entered in the same time unit as life. - -Factor (optional) is the factor by which depreciation decreases. If a value is not entered, the default is factor 2. -Example -A computer system with an initial cost of 75,000 currency units is to be depreciated monthly over 5 years. The value at the end of the depreciation is to be 1 currency unit. The factor is 2. - -=DDB(75000;1;60;12;2) = 1,721.81 currency units. Therefore, the double-declining depreciation during the first month after purchase is 1,721.81 currency units. -
-
+DDB + Returns the depreciation of an asset for a specified period using the arithmetic-declining method. + Use this form of depreciation if you require a higher initial depreciation value as opposed to linear depreciation. The depreciation value gets less with each period and is usually used for assets whose value loss is higher shortly after purchase (for example, vehicles, computers). Please note that the book value will never reach zero under this calculation type. + Syntax + DDB(Cost; Salvage; Life; Period; Factor) + + Cost fixes the initial cost of an asset. + + Salvage fixes the value of an asset at the end of its life. + + Life is the number of periods (for example, years or months) defining how long the asset is to be used. + + Period states the period for which the value is to be calculated. + + Factor (optional) is the factor by which depreciation decreases. If a value is not entered, the default is factor 2. + Example + A computer system with an initial cost of 75,000 currency units is to be depreciated monthly over 5 years. The value at the end of the depreciation is to be 1 currency unit. The factor is 2. + + =DDB(75000;1;60;12;2) = 1,721.81 currency units. Therefore, the double-declining depreciation in the twelfth month after purchase is 1,721.81 currency units. +
+
calculating; geometric-degressive depreciations -geometric-degressive depreciations -depreciations;geometric-degressive -DB function + geometric-degressive depreciations + depreciations;geometric-degressive + DB function mw added "depreciations;.." -DB -Returns the depreciation of an asset for a specified period using the double-declining balance method. -This form of depreciation is used if you want to get a higher depreciation value at the beginning of the depreciation (as opposed to linear depreciation). The depreciation value is reduced with every depreciation period by the depreciation already deducted from the initial cost. -Syntax -DB(Cost; Salvage; Life; Period; Month) - -Cost is the initial cost of an asset. - -Salvage is the value of an asset at the end of the depreciation. - -Life defines the period over which an asset is depreciated. - -Period is the length of each period. The length must be entered in the same date unit as the depreciation period. - -Month (optional) denotes the number of months for the first year of depreciation. If an entry is not defined, 12 is used as the default. -Example -A computer system with an initial cost of 25,000 currency units is to be depreciated over a three year period. The salvage value is to be 1,000 currency units. One period is 30 days. - -=DB(25000;1000;36;1;6) = 1,075.00 currency units -The fixed-declining depreciation of the computer system is 1,075.00 currency units. -
-
+DB + Returns the depreciation of an asset for a specified period using the double-declining balance method. + This form of depreciation is used if you want to get a higher depreciation value at the beginning of the depreciation (as opposed to linear depreciation). The depreciation value is reduced with every depreciation period by the depreciation already deducted from the initial cost. + Syntax + DB(Cost; Salvage; Life; Period; Month) + + Cost is the initial cost of an asset. + + Salvage is the value of an asset at the end of the depreciation. + + Life defines the period over which an asset is depreciated. + + Period is the length of each period. The length must be entered in the same date unit as the depreciation period. + + Month (optional) denotes the number of months for the first year of depreciation. If an entry is not defined, 12 is used as the default. + Example + A computer system with an initial cost of 25,000 currency units is to be depreciated over a three year period. The salvage value is to be 1,000 currency units. One period is 30 days. + + =DB(25000;1000;36;1;6) = 1,075.00 currency units + The fixed-declining depreciation of the computer system is 1,075.00 currency units. +
+
IRR function -calculating;internal rates of return, regular payments -internal rates of return;regular payments + calculating;internal rates of return, regular payments + internal rates of return;regular payments mw changed "calculating;..." and "internal rates" -IRR -Calculates the internal rate of return for an investment. The values represent cash flow values at regular intervals, at least one value must be negative (payments), and at least one value must be positive (income). -Syntax -IRR(Values; Guess) - -Values represents an array containing the values. - -Guess (optional) is the estimated value. An iterative method is used to calculate the internal rate of return. If you can provide only few values, you should provide an initial guess to enable the iteration. -Example -Under the assumption that cell contents are A1=-10000, A2=3500, A3=7600 and A4=1000, the formula =IRR(A1:A4) gives a result of 80.24%. -
-
+IRR + Calculates the internal rate of return for an investment. The values represent cash flow values at regular intervals, at least one value must be negative (payments), and at least one value must be positive (income). + Syntax + IRR(Values; Guess) + + Values represents an array containing the values. + + Guess (optional) is the estimated value. An iterative method is used to calculate the internal rate of return. If you can provide only few values, you should provide an initial guess to enable the iteration. + Example + Under the assumption that cell contents are A1=-10000, A2=3500, A3=7600 and A4=1000, the formula =IRR(A1:A4) gives a result of 80.24%. +
+
calculating; interests for unchanged amortization installments -interests for unchanged amortization installments -ISPMT function + interests for unchanged amortization installments + ISPMT function -ISPMT -Calculates the level of interest for unchanged amortization installments. -Syntax -ISPMT(Rate; Period; TotalPeriods; Invest) - -Rate sets the periodic interest rate. - -Period is the number of installments for calculation of interest. - -TotalPeriods is the total number of installment periods. - -Invest is the amount of the investment. -Example -For a credit amount of 120,000 currency units with a two-year term and monthly installments, at a yearly interest rate of 12% the level of interest after 1.5 years is required. - -=ISPMT(1%;18;24;120000) = -300 currency units. The monthly interest after 1.5 years amounts to 300 currency units. -
+ISPMT + Calculates the level of interest for unchanged amortization installments. + Syntax + ISPMT(Rate; Period; TotalPeriods; Invest) + + Rate sets the periodic interest rate. + + Period is the number of installments for calculation of interest. + + TotalPeriods is the total number of installment periods. + + Invest is the amount of the investment. + Example + For a credit amount of 120,000 currency units with a two-year term and monthly installments, at a yearly interest rate of 12% the level of interest after 1.5 years is required. + + =ISPMT(1%;18;24;120000) = -300 currency units. The monthly interest after 1.5 years amounts to 300 currency units. + -Financial Functions Part Two -Financial Functions Part Three - - - +Financial Functions Part Two + Financial Functions Part Three + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060105.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060105.xhp index f47de69405..60b8f4badc 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060105.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060105.xhp @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ Specifies a logical test to be performed. Syntax - IF(Test; ThenValue; "OtherwiseValue") + IF(Test; ThenValue; OtherwiseValue) Test is any value or expression that can be TRUE or FALSE. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060106.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060106.xhp index 43ebf2f839..52357b0a82 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060106.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060106.xhp @@ -900,26 +900,23 @@ INT, TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP ROUND function -ROUND - Rounds a number to a certain number of decimal places. - Syntax - ROUND(Number; Count) - Returns Number rounded to Count decimal places. If Count is omitted or zero, the function rounds to the nearest integer. If Ccunt is negative, the function rounds to the nearest 10, 100, 1000, etc. - This function rounds to the nearest number. See ROUNDDOWN and ROUNDUP for alternatives. - Example - - =ROUND(2.348;2) returns 2.35 - - =ROUND(-32.4834;3) returns -32.483. Change the cell format to see all decimals. - - =ROUND(2.348;0) returns 2. - - =ROUND(2.5) returns 3. - - =ROUND(987.65;-2) returns 1000.see also INT, TRUNC, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP, +ROUND +Rounds a number to a certain number of decimal places. +Syntax +ROUND(Number; Count) +Returns Number rounded to Count decimal places. If Count is omitted or zero, the function rounds to the nearest integer. If Count is negative, the function rounds to the nearest 10, 100, 1000, etc. +This function rounds to the nearest number. See ROUNDDOWN and ROUNDUP for alternatives. +Example + +=ROUND(2.348;2) returns 2.35 + +=ROUND(-32.4834;3) returns -32.483. Change the cell format to see all decimals. + +=ROUND(2.348;0) returns 2. + +=ROUND(2.5) returns 3. + +=ROUND(987.65;-2) returns 1000.see also INT, TRUNC, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP, CEILING, FLOOR, EVEN, ODD, MROUND
@@ -1431,33 +1428,30 @@ INT, TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP counting;specified cells mw added one entry -COUNTIF - Returns the number of cells that meet with certain criteria within a cell range. - - Syntax - COUNTIF(Range; Criteria) - - Range is the range to which the criteria are to be applied. - - Criteria indicates the criteria in the form of a number, an expression or a character string. These criteria determine which cells are counted. You may also enter a search text in the form of a regular expression, e.g. b.* for all words that begin with b. You may also indicate a cell range that contains the search criterion. If you search for literal text, enclose the text in double quotes. - Example - A1:A10 is a cell range containing the numbers 2000 to 2009. Cell B1 contains the number 2006. In cell B2, you enter a formula: - - =COUNTIF(A1:A10;2006) - this returns 1 - - =COUNTIF(A1:A10;B1) - this returns 1 - - =COUNTIF(A1:A10;">=2006") - this returns 3 - - =COUNTIF(A1:A10;"<"&B1) - when B1 contains 2006, this returns 6 - - =COUNTIF(A1:A10;C2) where cell C2 contains the text >2006 counts the number of cells in the range A1:A10 which are >2006 - To count only negative numbers: =COUNTIF(A1:A10;"<0") - -
+COUNTIF +Returns the number of cells that meet with certain criteria within a cell range. + +Syntax +COUNTIF(Range; Criteria) + +Range is the range to which the criteria are to be applied. + +Criteria indicates the criteria in the form of a number, an expression or a character string. These criteria determine which cells are counted. You may also enter a search text in the form of a regular expression, e.g. b.* for all words that begin with b. You may also indicate a cell range that contains the search criterion. If you search for literal text, enclose the text in double quotes. +Example +A1:A10 is a cell range containing the numbers 2000 to 2009. Cell B1 contains the number 2006. In cell B2, you enter a formula: + +=COUNTIF(A1:A10;2006) - this returns 1 + +=COUNTIF(A1:A10;B1) - this returns 1 + +=COUNTIF(A1:A10;">=2006") - this returns 4 + +=COUNTIF(A1:A10;"<"&B1) - when B1 contains 2006, this returns 6 + +=COUNTIF(A1:A10;C2) where cell C2 contains the text >2006 counts the number of cells in the range A1:A10 which are >2006 +To count only negative numbers: =COUNTIF(A1:A10;"<0") + +
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060107.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060107.xhp index 01dd9640d1..d501a85ced 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060107.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060107.xhp @@ -1203,7 +1203,7 @@ for bug #i31051# ArrayX represents the first array whose arguments are to be squared and added. -ArrayY represents the second array, whose elements are to be added and squared. +ArrayY represents the second array, whose elements are to be squared and added. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060109.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060109.xhp index 0b9edb1030..2e056abf28 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060109.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060109.xhp @@ -87,8 +87,8 @@ Sheet represents the name of the sheet. It must be placed in double quotes. Example: - - =ADDRESS(1;1;2;"Sheet2") returns the following: Sheet2.A$1 + + =ADDRESS(1;1;2;;"Sheet2") returns the following: Sheet2.A$1i 101187 If the cell A1 in sheet 2 contains the value -6, you can refer indirectly to the referenced cell using a function in B2 by entering =ABS(INDIRECT(B2)). The result is the absolute value of the cell reference specified in B2, which in this case is 6.
@@ -98,6 +98,7 @@ AREAS Returns the number of individual ranges that belong to a multiple range. A range can consist of contiguous cells or a single cell. + The function expects a single argument. If you state multiple ranges, you must enclose them into additional parentheses. Multiple ranges can be entered using the semicolon (;) as divider, but this gets automatically converted to the tilde (~) operator. The tilde is used to join ranges. Syntax AREAS(Reference) @@ -105,7 +106,7 @@ Example - =AREAS(A1:B3;F2;G1) returns 3, as it is a reference to three cells and/or areas. + =AREAS((A1:B3;F2;G1)) returns 3, as it is a reference to three cells and/or areas. After entry this gets converted to =AREAS((A1:B3~F2~G1)). =AREAS(All) returns 1 if you have defined an area named All under Data - Define Range.
@@ -241,7 +242,7 @@ Ref represents a reference to a cell or an area (in text form) for which to return the contents. A1 (optional) - if set to 0, the R1C1 notation is used. If this parameter is absent or set to another value than 0, the A1 notation is used. - For interoperability with Microsoft Excel, the sheet address separator ! is allowed as in INDIRECT("filename!sheetname"&B1).UFI: finally a fix for #i34465# + If you open an Excel spreadsheet that uses indirect addresses calculated from string functions, the sheet addresses will not be translated automatically. For example, the Excel address in INDIRECT("filename!sheetname"&B1) is not converted into the Calc address in INDIRECT("filename.sheetname"&B1).UFI: for #i34465# INDIRECT cannot resolve range names as in INDIRECT("RangeName").i83070 Example @@ -537,7 +538,7 @@ =ROW(D5:D8) returns 5 because the ROW function is not used as array formula and only the number of the first row of the reference is returned. - {=ROW(A1:E1)} and =ROW(A1:E1) both return 1 because the reference only contains row 1 as the first column in the table. (Because single-row areas only have one row number it does not make any difference whether or not the formula is used as an array formula.) + {=ROW(A1:E1)} and =ROW(A1:E1) both return 1 because the reference only contains row 1 as the first row in the table. (Because single-row areas only have one row number it does not make any difference whether or not the formula is used as an array formula.) =ROW() returns 3 if the formula was entered in row 3. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060118.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060118.xhp index 7225e15b9f..30f32b9a42 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060118.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060118.xhp @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@
ODDFPRICE function -prices;securities with irregular first interest rate +prices;securities with irregular first interest date mw added one entry ODDFPRICE diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060184.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060184.xhp index 0e87ee5329..735a1b6d79 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060184.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060184.xhp @@ -141,21 +141,18 @@ averages;statistical functions mw added "averages;" -AVEDEV - Returns the average of the absolute deviations of data points from their mean. Displays the diffusion in a data set. - Syntax - AVEDEV(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) - - Number1, Number2,...Number 0 are values or ranges that represent a sample. Each number can also be replaced by a reference. - Example - - =AVEDEV(A1:A50) - -
-
+AVEDEV +Returns the average of the absolute deviations of data points from their mean. Displays the diffusion in a data set. +Syntax +AVEDEV(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) + +Number1, Number2,...Number30 are values or ranges that represent a sample. Each number can also be replaced by a reference. +Example + +=AVEDEV(A1:A50) + +
+
AVERAGE function diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080300.xhp index 6be1baf33c..bd107d4d5e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080300.xhp @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ Rows to repeat -Choose one or more rows to print on every page. In the right text box enter the row reference, for example, "1" or $1" or "$2:$3". The list box displays -user defined-. You can also select -none- to remove a defined repeating row. +Choose one or more rows to print on every page. In the right text box enter the row reference, for example, "1" or "$1" or "$2:$3". The list box displays -user defined-. You can also select -none- to remove a defined repeating row. You can also define repeating rows by dragging the mouse in the spreadsheet, if the cursor is in the Rows to repeat text field in the dialog. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05100000.xhp index f867669a47..0c5030dec8 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05100000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05100000.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Styles and Formatting -/text/scalc/01/05100000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: deleted index bookmarks, corrected wording of bottom listbox to "style groups" - - - -
+ + Styles and Formatting + /text/scalc/01/05100000.xhp + + + +
Stylist, see Styles and Formatting window -Styles and Formatting window -formats; Styles and Formatting window -formatting; Styles and Formatting window -paint can for applying styles + Styles and Formatting window + formats; Styles and Formatting window + formatting; Styles and Formatting window + paint can for applying styles -Styles and Formatting -Use the Styles and Formatting window to assign styles to objects and text sections. You can update Styles, modify existing Styles or create new Styles. -
-The Styles and Formatting dockable window can remain open while editing the document. -
- -
-How to apply a cell style: - - -Select the cell or cell range. - - -Double-click the style in the Styles and Formatting window. - - +Styles and Formatting + Use the Styles and Formatting window to assign styles to objects and text sections. You can update Styles, modify existing Styles or create new Styles. +
+ The Styles and Formatting dockable window can remain open while editing the document. +
+ +
+ How to apply a cell style: + + + Select the cell or cell range. + + + Double-click the style in the Styles and Formatting window. + + -Cell Styles -Displays the list of the available Cell Styles for indirect cell formatting. - - - - -Icon +Cell Styles + Displays the list of the available Cell Styles for indirect cell formatting. +
+ + + +Icon - - -Cell Styles - - -
+ + + Cell Styles + + + -Page Styles -Displays the Page Styles available for indirect page formatting. - - - - -Icon +Page Styles + Displays the Page Styles available for indirect page formatting. +
+ + + +Icon - - -Page Styles - - -
+ + + Page Styles + + + -Fill Format Mode -Turns the Fill Format mode on and off. Use the paint can to assign the Style selected in the Styles and Formatting window. - - - - -Icon +Fill Format Mode + Turns the Fill Format mode on and off. Use the paint can to assign the Style selected in the Styles and Formatting window. +
+ + + +Icon - - -Fill Format Mode - - -
+ + + Fill Format Mode + + + -How to apply a new style with the paint can: - - -Select the desired style from the Styles and Formatting window. - - -Click the Fill Format Mode icon. - - -Click a cell to format it, or drag your mouse over a certain range to format the whole range. Repeat this action for other cells and ranges. - - -Click the Fill Format Mode again to exit this mode. - - + How to apply a new style with the paint can: + + + Select the desired style from the Styles and Formatting window. + + + Click the Fill Format Mode icon. + + + Click a cell to format it, or drag your mouse over a certain range to format the whole range. Repeat this action for other cells and ranges. + + + Click the Fill Format Mode again to exit this mode. + + -New Style from Selection -Creates a new style based on the formatting of a selected object. Assign a name for the style in the Create Style dialog. - - - - -Icon +New Style from Selection + Creates a new style based on the formatting of a selected object. Assign a name for the style in the Create Style dialog. +
+ + + +Icon - - -New Style from Selection - - -
+ + + New Style from Selection + + + -Update Style -Updates the Style selected in the Styles and Formatting window with the current formatting of the selected object. - - - - -Icon +Update Style + Updates the Style selected in the Styles and Formatting window with the current formatting of the selected object. +
+ + + +Icon - - -Update Style - - -
+ + + Update Style + + + -Style List -Displays the list of the styles from the selected style category. -In the context menu you can choose commands to create a new style, delete a user-defined style, or change the selected style. +Style List + Displays the list of the styles from the selected style category. + In the context menu you can choose commands to create a new style, delete a user-defined style, or change the selected style. -Style GroupsUFI: use "groups" to be consistent with Writer -Lists the available style groups. - - +Style GroupsUFI: use "groups" to be consistent with Writer + Lists the available style groups. + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/text2columns.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/text2columns.xhp index 1155bdfbf7..390bd02d1e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/text2columns.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/text2columns.xhp @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ You can select a fixed width and then click the ruler on the preview to set cell breakup positions. You can select or enter separator characters to define the positions of breaking points. The separator characters are removed from the resulting cell contents. -In the example, you select the comma as a delimiter character. Cells A1 and B1 will be expanded to four columns. A1 contains 1, A2 contains 2, and so on. +In the example, you select the comma as a delimiter character. Cells A1 and B1 will be expanded to four columns. A1 contains 1, B1 contains 2, and so on.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/05/02140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/05/02140000.xhp index 3fe2f24654..78a16972f2 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/05/02140000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/05/02140000.xhp @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ Invalid character -Character in a formula is not valid, for example, "=1Eq" instead of "=1E2". +Character in a formula is not valid. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/address_auto.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/address_auto.xhp index 64d1e7437d..f6089588b9 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/address_auto.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/address_auto.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Recognizing Names as Addressing -/text/scalc/guide/address_auto.xhp - - - + + Recognizing Names as Addressing + /text/scalc/guide/address_auto.xhp + + + automatic addressing in tables -natural language addressing -formulas; using row/column labels -text in cells; as addressing -addressing; automatic -name recognition on/off -row headers;using in formulas -column headers;using in formulas -columns; finding labels automatically -rows; finding labels automatically -recognizing; column and row labels -mw changes "names;..." entry to "text in cells;..."mw inserted three index entries from text/shared/optionen/01060500.xhp. Changed "finding;..." entry to "recognizing;..." entry. Adding (Calc) is no longer necessary in this file.Recognizing Names as Addressing + natural language addressing + formulas; using row/column labels + text in cells; as addressing + addressing; automatic + name recognition on/off + row headers;using in formulas + column headers;using in formulas + columns; finding labels automatically + rows; finding labels automatically + recognizing; column and row labels +mw changes "names;..." entry to "text in cells;..."mw inserted three index entries from text/shared/optionen/01060500.xhp. Changed "finding;..." entry to "recognizing;..." entry. Adding (Calc) is no longer necessary in this file. +Recognizing Names as Addressing -You can use cells with text to refer to the rows or to the columns that contain the cells. - - - - -Example spreadsheet + You can use cells with text to refer to the rows or to the columns that contain the cells. +
+ + + +Example spreadsheet - - -
-In the example spreadsheet, you can use the string 'Column One' in a formula to refer to the cell range B3 to B5, or 'Column Two' for the cell range C2 to C5. You can also use 'Row One' for the cell range B3 to D3, or 'Row Two' for the cell range B4 to D4. The result of a formula that uses a cell name, for example, SUM('Column One'), is 600. -This function is active by default. To turn this function off, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate and clear the Automatically find column and row labels check box. -If you want a name to be automatically recognized by Calc, the name must start with a letter and be composed of alphanumeric characters. If you enter the name in the formula yourself, enclose the name in single quotation marks ('). If a single quotation mark appears in a name, you must enter a backslash in front of the quotation mark, for example, 'Harry\'s Bar'. - -
mw changed reference to deleted Calc guide address_byname.xhp to refer to Calc guide value_with_name.xhpUFI: changed embedvar links to embed links - - -
- - + + + + + In the example spreadsheet, you can use the string 'Column One' in a formula to refer to the cell range B3 to B5, or 'Column Two' for the cell range C2 to C5. You can also use 'Row One' for the cell range B3 to D3, or 'Row Two' for the cell range B4 to D4. The result of a formula that uses a cell name, for example, SUM('Column One'), is 600. + This function is active by default. To turn this function off, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate and clear the Automatically find column and row labels check box. + If you want a name to be automatically recognized by Calc, the name must start with a letter and be composed of alphanumeric characters. If you enter the name in the formula yourself, enclose the name in single quotation marks ('). If a single quotation mark appears in a name, you must enter a backslash in front of the quotation mark, for example, 'Harry\'s Bar'. + +
mw changed reference to deleted Calc guide address_byname.xhp to refer to Calc guide value_with_name.xhpUFI: changed embedvar links to embed links + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/auto_off.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/auto_off.xhp index cb183bab62..433a6ddfb3 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/auto_off.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/auto_off.xhp @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ - * $Revision: 1.8.4.1 $ + * $Revision: 1.10 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,53 +35,51 @@ - -Deactivating Automatic Changes -/text/scalc/guide/auto_off.xhp - - - + + Deactivating Automatic Changes + /text/scalc/guide/auto_off.xhp + + + deactivating; automatic changes -tables; deactivating automatic changes in -AutoInput function on/off -text in cells;AutoInput function -cells; AutoInput function of text -input support in spreadsheets -changing; input in cells -AutoCorrect function;cell contents -cell input;AutoInput function -lowercase letters;AutoInput function (in cells) -capital letters;AutoInput function (in cells) -date formats;avoiding conversion to -number completion on/off -text completion on/off -word completion on/off + tables; deactivating automatic changes in + AutoInput function on/off + text in cells;AutoInput function + cells; AutoInput function of text + input support in spreadsheets + changing; input in cells + AutoCorrect function;cell contents + cell input;AutoInput function + lowercase letters;AutoInput function (in cells) + capital letters;AutoInput function (in cells) + date formats;avoiding conversion to + number completion on/off + text completion on/off + word completion on/off mw added one entry -Deactivating Automatic Changes +Deactivating Automatic Changes -By default, $[officename] automatically corrects many common typing errors and applies formatting while you type. You can immediately undo any automatic changes with CommandCtrl+Z. -The following shows you how to deactivate and reactivate the automatic changes in $[officename] Calc: -Automatic text or number completion -When making an entry in a cell, $[officename] Calc automatically suggests matching input found in the same column. This function is known as AutoInput. - - -To turn the AutoInput on and off, set or remove the check mark in front of Tools - Cell Contents - AutoInput. - - -Automatic conversion to date format -$[officename] Calc automatically converts certain entries to dates. For example, the entry 1.1 may be interpreted as January 1 of the current year, according to the locale settings of your operating system, and then displayed according to the date format applied to the cell.for sure 1.1 will not be interpreted as a date in the USofA !! -To ensure that an entry is interpreted as text, add an apostrophe at the beginning of the entry. The apostrophe is not displayed in the cell. -Quotation marks replaced by custom quotes -Choose Tools - AutoCorrect Options. Go to the Custom Quotes tab and unmark Replace. -Cell content always begins with uppercase -Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Options. Go to the Options tab. Unmark Capitalize first letter of every sentence. -Replace word with another word -Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Options. Go to the Replace tab. Select the word pair and click Delete. -
-Tools - Cell Contents - AutoInput -Tools - AutoCorrect Options -
- - + By default, $[officename] automatically corrects many common typing errors and applies formatting while you type. You can immediately undo any automatic changes with Command +Ctrl+Z. + The following shows you how to deactivate and reactivate the automatic changes in $[officename] Calc: + Automatic Text or Number Completion + When making an entry in a cell, $[officename] Calc automatically suggests matching input found in the same column. This function is known as AutoInput. + To turn the AutoInput on and off, set or remove the check mark in front of Tools - Cell Contents - AutoInput. + Automatic Conversion to Date Format + $[officename] Calc automatically converts certain entries to dates. For example, the entry 1.1 may be interpreted as January 1 of the current year, according to the locale settings of your operating system, and then displayed according to the date format applied to the cell.for sure 1.1 will not be interpreted as a date in the USofA !! + To ensure that an entry is interpreted as text, add an apostrophe at the beginning of the entry. The apostrophe is not displayed in the cell. + Quotation Marks Replaced by Custom Quotes + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect Options. Go to the Custom Quotes tab and unmark Replace. + Cell Content Always Begins With Uppercase + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect Options. Go to the Options tab. Unmark Capitalize first letter of every sentence. + Replace Word With Another Word + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect Options. Go to the Replace tab. Select the word pair and click Delete. +
+ Tools - Cell Contents - AutoInput + Tools - AutoCorrect Options +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/autofilter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/autofilter.xhp index 02d0a2fb6a..44f5c29145 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/autofilter.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/autofilter.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Applying AutoFilter -/text/scalc/guide/autofilter.xhp - - - + + Applying AutoFilter + /text/scalc/guide/autofilter.xhp + + + filters, see also AutoFilter function -AutoFilter function;applying -sheets; filter values -numbers; filter sheets -columns; AutoFilter function -drop-down menus in sheet columns -database ranges; AutoFilter function -mw made "drop-down..." a one level entry and added a "see also" referenceApplying AutoFilter + AutoFilter function;applying + sheets; filter values + numbers; filter sheets + columns; AutoFilter function + drop-down menus in sheet columns + database ranges; AutoFilter function +mw made "drop-down..." a one level entry and added a "see also" reference +Applying AutoFilter -The AutoFilter function inserts a combo box on one or more data columns that lets you select the records (rows) to be displayed. -
- - -Select the columns you want to use AutoFilter on. - - -Choose Data - Filter - AutoFilter. The combo box arrows are visible in the first row of the range selected. - - -Run the filter by clicking the drop-down arrow in the column heading and choosing an item. -Only those rows whose contents meet the filter criteria are displayed. The other rows are filteredUFI: we must distinguish manually hidden cells from filtered cells, because they behave differently. So don't use the word "hidden" when a filter is applied.. You can see if rows have been filtered from the discontinuous row numbers. The column that has been used for the filter is identified by a different color for the arrow button. - - -When you apply an additional AutoFilter on another column of a filtered data range, then the other combo boxes list only the filtered data. -To display all records again, select the -all- entry in the AutoFilter combo box. If you choose -Standard-, the Standard Filter dialog appears, allowing you to set up a standard filter. Choose -Top 10- to display the highest 10 values only. -To stop using AutoFilter, reselect all cells selected in step 1 and once again choose Data - Filter - AutoFilter. -To assign different AutoFilters to different sheets, you must first define a database range on each sheet. -The arithmetic functions also take account of the cells that are not visible due to an applied filter. For example, a sum of an entire column will also total the values in the filtered cells. Apply the SUBTOTAL function if only the cells visible after the application of a filter are to be taken into account. -
-
- - - -Data - Filter - AutoFilter -SUBTOTAL -
- - + The AutoFilter function inserts a combo box on one or more data columns that lets you select the records (rows) to be displayed. +
+ + + Select the columns you want to use AutoFilter on. + + + Choose Data - Filter - AutoFilter. The combo box arrows are visible in the first row of the range selected. + + + Run the filter by clicking the drop-down arrow in the column heading and choosing an item. + Only those rows whose contents meet the filter criteria are displayed. The other rows are filteredUFI: we must distinguish manually hidden cells from filtered cells, because they behave differently. So don't use the word "hidden" when a filter is applied.. You can see if rows have been filtered from the discontinuous row numbers. The column that has been used for the filter is identified by a different color for the arrow button. + + + When you apply an additional AutoFilter on another column of a filtered data range, then the other combo boxes list only the filtered data. + To display all records again, select the "all" entry in the AutoFilter combo box. If you choose "Standard", the Standard Filter dialog appears, allowing you to set up a standard filter. Choose "Top 10" to display the highest 10 values only. + To stop using AutoFilter, reselect all cells selected in step 1 and once again choose Data - Filter - AutoFilter. + To assign different AutoFilters to different sheets, you must first define a database range on each sheet. + The arithmetic functions also take account of the cells that are not visible due to an applied filter. For example, a sum of an entire column will also total the values in the filtered cells. Apply the SUBTOTAL function if only the cells visible after the application of a filter are to be taken into account. +
+
+ + + + Data - Filter - AutoFilter + SUBTOTAL +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/autoformat.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/autoformat.xhp index 1a0ff937f2..fafbb4dfc0 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/autoformat.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/autoformat.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Using AutoFormat for Tables -/text/scalc/guide/autoformat.xhp - - - - - - + + Using AutoFormat for Tables + /text/scalc/guide/autoformat.xhp + + + tables; AutoFormat function -defining;AutoFormat function for tables -AutoFormat function;defining and applying formats -formats; automatically formatting spreadsheets -automatic formatting in spreadsheets -sheets;AutoFormat function - - MW deleted "applying;" - Applying Automatic Formatting to a Selected Cell Range + defining;AutoFormat function for tables + AutoFormat function;defining and applying formats + formats; automatically formatting spreadsheets + automatic formatting in spreadsheets + sheets;AutoFormat function +MW deleted "applying;" +Applying Automatic Formatting to a Selected Cell Range -You can use the AutoFormat feature to quickly apply a format to a sheet or a selected cell range. -To apply an AutoFormat to a sheet or selected cell range - - -Select the cells, including the column and row headers, that you want to format. - - -Choose Format - AutoFormat. - - -To select which properties to include in an AutoFormat, click More. - - -Click OK. -The format is applied to the selected range of cells. - - -If you do not see any change in color of the cell contents, choose View - Value Highlighting. -To define an AutoFormat for spreadsheets -You can define a new AutoFormat that is available to all spreadsheets. - - -Format a sheet. - - -Choose Edit - Select All. - - -Choose Format - AutoFormat. - - -Click Add. - - -In the Name box of the Add AutoFormat dialog, enter a name for the format. - - -Click OK. - - -
-Format - AutoFormat -
- - + You can use the AutoFormat feature to quickly apply a format to a sheet or a selected cell range. + To Apply an AutoFormat to a Sheet or Selected Cell Range + + + Select the cells, including the column and row headers, that you want to format. + + + Choose Format - AutoFormat. + + + To select which properties to include in an AutoFormat, click More. + + + Click OK. + The format is applied to the selected range of cells. + + + If you do not see any change in color of the cell contents, choose View - Value Highlighting. + To Define an AutoFormat for Spreadsheets + You can define a new AutoFormat that is available to all spreadsheets. + + + Format a sheet. + + + Choose Edit - Select All. + + + Choose Format - AutoFormat. + + + Click Add. + + + In the Name box of the Add AutoFormat dialog, enter a name for the format. + + + Click OK. + + +
+ Format - AutoFormat +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/background.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/background.xhp index 502569fc6e..ed7837de5b 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/background.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/background.xhp @@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ * * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * - * $RCSfile: background.xhp,v $ - * $Revision: 1.4.4.1 $ + * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ + * $Revision: 1.10 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,49 +35,51 @@ - -Defining Background Colors or Background Graphics -/text/scalc/guide/background.xhp - - - + + Defining Background Colors or Background Graphics + /text/scalc/guide/background.xhp + + + spreadsheets; backgrounds -backgrounds;cell ranges -tables; backgrounds -cells; backgrounds -rows, see also cells -columns, see also cells -** Expression is faulty ** -Defining Background Colors or Background Graphics + backgrounds;cell ranges + tables; backgrounds + cells; backgrounds + rows, see also cells + columns, see also cells + +Defining Background Colors or Background Graphics MW created this file from splitting shared/guide/background.xhp -You can define a background color or use a graphic as a background for cell ranges in $[officename] Calc. -Applying a Background Color to a $[officename] Calc Spreadsheet - - -Select the cells. - - -Choose Format - Cells (or Format Cells from the context menu). - - -On the Background tab page, select the background color. - - -Graphics in the Background of Cells - - -Choose Insert - Picture - From File. - - -Select the graphic and click Open. -The graphic is inserted anchored to the current cell. You can move and scale the graphic as you want. In your context menu you can use the Arrange - To Background command to place this in the background. To select a graphic that has been placed in the background, use the Navigator +You can define a background color or use a graphic as a background for cell ranges in $[officename] Calc. + Applying a Background Color to a $[officename] Calc Spreadsheet + + + Select the cells. + + + Choose Format - Cells (or Format Cells from the context menu). + + + On the Background tab page, select the background color. + + + Graphics in the Background of Cells + + + Choose Insert - Picture - From File. + + + Select the graphic and click Open. + The graphic is inserted anchored to the current cell. You can move and scale the graphic as you want. In your context menu you can use the Arrange - To Background command to place this in the background. To select a graphic that has been placed in the background, use the Navigator Navigator. - - -
-Watermarks -Background tab page -Formatting Spreadsheets -
- - + + +
+ Watermarks + Background tab page + Formatting Spreadsheets +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/borders.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/borders.xhp index 43cb208a0c..e69deb7cb4 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/borders.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/borders.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -User Defined Borders in Cells -text/scalc/guide/borders.xhp - - -Cell Borders - - - - + + User Defined Borders in Cells + text/scalc/guide/borders.xhp + + + cells;borders -line arrangement;cells -borders;cells - -User Defined Borders in Cells + line arrangements with cells + borders;cells +MW made "line arrangement;" a one level entry +User Defined Borders in Cells -You can apply a variety of different lines to selected cells. - - -Select the cell or a block of cells. - - -Choose Format - Cells. - - -In the dialog, click the Borders tab. - - -Choose the border options you want to apply and click OK. - - -The options in the Line arrangement area can be used to apply multiple border styles. -Selection of cells -Depending on the selection of cells, the area looks different. - - - -Selection - - -Line arrangement area - - - - -One cell - - - -borders with one cell selected + You can apply a variety of different lines to selected cells. + + + Select the cell or a block of cells. + + + Choose Format - Cells. + + + In the dialog, click the Borders tab. + + + Choose the border options you want to apply and click OK. + + + The options in the Line arrangement area can be used to apply multiple border styles. + Selection of cells + Depending on the selection of cells, the area looks different. +
+ + + Selection + + + Line arrangement area + + + + + One cell + + + +borders with one cell selected - - - - -Cells in a column - - - -borders with a column selected + + + + + Cells in a column + + + +borders with a column selected - - - - -Cells in a row - - - -borders with a row selected + + + + + Cells in a row + + + +borders with a row selected - - - - -Cells in a block of 2x2 or more - - - -borders with a block selected + + + + + Cells in a block of 2x2 or more + + + +borders with a block selected - - -
+ + + -You cannot apply borders to multiple selections. -Default settings -Click one of the Default icons to set or reset multiple borders. - - -The thin gray lines inside an icon show the borders that will be reset or cleared. - - -The dark lines inside an icon show the lines that will be set using the selected line style and color. - - -The thick gray lines inside an icon show the lines that will not be changed. - - -Examples -Select a block of about 8x8 cells, then choose Format - Cells - Borders. - -default icon row of Borders tab page + You cannot apply borders to multiple selections. + Default Settings + Click one of the Default icons to set or reset multiple borders. + + + The thin gray lines inside an icon show the borders that will be reset or cleared. + + + The dark lines inside an icon show the lines that will be set using the selected line style and color. + + + The thick gray lines inside an icon show the lines that will not be changed. + + + Examples + Select a block of about 8x8 cells, then choose Format - Cells - Borders. + +default icon row of Borders tab page - - -Click the left icon to clear all lines. This removes all outer borders, all inner lines, and all diagonal lines. - - -Click the second icon from the left to set an outer border and to remove all other lines. - - -Click the rightmost icon to set an outer border. The inner lines are not changed, except the diagonal lines, which will be removed.is this a bug? - - -Now you can continue to see which lines the other icons will set or remove. -User defined settings -In the User defined area, you can click to set or remove individual lines. The preview shows lines in three different states. - - -Repeatedly click an edge or a corner to switch through the three different states. - - - - - -Line types - - -Image - - -Meaning - - - - -A black line - - - -solid line for user defined border + + + Click the left icon to clear all lines. This removes all outer borders, all inner lines, and all diagonal lines. + + + Click the second icon from the left to set an outer border and to remove all other lines. + + + Click the rightmost icon to set an outer border. The inner lines are not changed, except the diagonal lines, which will be removed.is this a bug? + + + Now you can continue to see which lines the other icons will set or remove. + User Defined Settings + In the User defined area, you can click to set or remove individual lines. The preview shows lines in three different states. + Repeatedly click an edge or a corner to switch through the three different states. +
+ + + Line types + + + Image + + + Meaning + + + + + A black line + + + +solid line for user defined border - - -A black line sets the corresponding line of the selected cells. The line is shown as a dotted line when you choose the 0.05 pt line style. Double lines are shown when you select a double line style. - - - - -A gray line - - - -gray line for user defined border + + + A black line sets the corresponding line of the selected cells. The line is shown as a dotted line when you choose the 0.05 pt line style. Double lines are shown when you select a double line style. + + + + + A gray line + + + +gray line for user defined border - - -A gray line is shown when the corresponding line of the selected cells will not be changed. No line will be set or removed at this position. - - - - -A white line - - - -white line for user defined border + + + A gray line is shown when the corresponding line of the selected cells will not be changed. No line will be set or removed at this position. + + + + + A white line + + + +white line for user defined border - - -A white line is shown when the corresponding line of the selected cells will be removed. - - -
+ + + A white line is shown when the corresponding line of the selected cells will be removed. + + + -Examples -Select a single cell, then choose Format - Cells - Borders. -Click the lower edge to set a very thin line as a lower border. All other lines will be removed from the cell. - -setting a thin lower border + Examples + Select a single cell, then choose Format - Cells - Borders. + Click the lower edge to set a very thin line as a lower border. All other lines will be removed from the cell. + +setting a thin lower border -Choose a thicker line style and click the lower edge. This sets a thicker line as a lower border. - -setting a thick line as a border + Choose a thicker line style and click the lower edge. This sets a thicker line as a lower border. + +setting a thick line as a border -Click the second Default icon from the left to set all four borders. Then repeatedly click the lower edge until a white line is shown. This removes the lower border. - -removing lower border + Click the second Default icon from the left to set all four borders. Then repeatedly click the lower edge until a white line is shown. This removes the lower border. + +removing lower border -You can combine several line types and styles. The last image shows how to set thick outer borders (the thick black lines), while any diagonal lines inside the cell will not be touched (gray lines). - -advanced example for cell borders + You can combine several line types and styles. The last image shows how to set thick outer borders (the thick black lines), while any diagonal lines inside the cell will not be touched (gray lines). + +advanced example for cell borders -
+
- - -
- - + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_date.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_date.xhp index 7eeda013d9..30fc2a99fb 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_date.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_date.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Calculating With Dates and Times -/text/scalc/guide/calc_date.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: Screenshot deleted -YJ: checked - - - + + Calculating With Dates and Times + /text/scalc/guide/calc_date.xhp + + + dates; in cells -times; in cells -cells;date and time formats -current date and time values + times; in cells + cells;date and time formats + current date and time values -Calculating With Dates and Times +Calculating With Dates and Times -In $[officename] Calc, you can perform calculations with current date and time values. As an example, to find out exactly how old you are in seconds or hours, follow the following steps: - - -In a spreadsheet, enter your birthday in cell A1. - - -Enter the following formula in cell A3: =NOW()-A1 - - -After pressing the Enter key you will see the result in date format. Since the result should show the difference between two dates as a number of days, you must format cell A3 as a number. - - -Place the cursor in cell A3, right-click to open a context menu and choose Format Cells. - - -The Format Cells dialog appears. On the Numbers tab, the Number category will appear already highlighted. The format is set to "General", which causes the result of a calculation containing date entries to be displayed as a date. To display the result as a number, set the number format to "-1,234" and close the dialog with the OK button. - - -The number of days between today's date and the specified date is displayed in cell A3. - - -Experiment with some additional formulas: in A4 enter =A3*24 to calculate the hours, in A5 enter =A4*60 for the minutes, and in A6 enter =A5*60 for seconds. Press the Enter key after each formula. - - -The time since your date of birth will be calculated and displayed in the various units. The values are calculated as of the exact moment when you entered the last formula and pressed the Enter key. This value is not automatically updated, although "Now" continuously changes. In the Tools menu, the menu item Cell Contents - AutoCalculate is normally active; however, automatic calculation does not apply to the function NOW. This ensures that your computer is not solely occupied with updating the sheet. -
- -
- - + In $[officename] Calc, you can perform calculations with current date and time values. As an example, to find out exactly how old you are in seconds or hours, follow the following steps: + + + In a spreadsheet, enter your birthday in cell A1. + + + Enter the following formula in cell A3: =NOW()-A1 + + + + After pressing the Enter key you will see the result in date format. Since the result should show the difference between two dates as a number of days, you must format cell A3 as a number. + + + Place the cursor in cell A3, right-click to open a context menu and choose Format Cells. + + + The Format Cells dialog appears. On the Numbers tab, the "Number" category will appear already highlighted. The format is set to "General", which causes the result of a calculation containing date entries to be displayed as a date. To display the result as a number, set the number format to "-1,234" and close the dialog with the OK button. + + + The number of days between today's date and the specified date is displayed in cell A3. + + + Experiment with some additional formulas: in A4 enter =A3*24 to calculate the hours, in A5 enter =A4*60 for the minutes, and in A6 enter =A5*60 for seconds. Press the Enter key after each formula. + + + The time since your date of birth will be calculated and displayed in the various units. The values are calculated as of the exact moment when you entered the last formula and pressed the Enter key. This value is not automatically updated, although "Now" continuously changes. In the Tools menu, the menu item Cell Contents - AutoCalculate is normally active; however, automatic calculation does not apply to the function NOW. This ensures that your computer is not solely occupied with updating the sheet. +
+ +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_series.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_series.xhp index 2cdce15710..5aea6cdfa0 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_series.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_series.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Automatically Calculating Series -/text/scalc/guide/calc_series.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: Deleted screen shot, heavily reedited; dedr: reviewed - - - + + Automatically Calculating Series + /text/scalc/guide/calc_series.xhp + + + series; calculating -calculating; series -linear series -growth series -date series -powers of 2 calculations -cells; filling automatically -auto filling cells -AutoFill function -filling;cells, automatically -mw made "powers of 2;..." a one level entry and changed "AutoFill" entry -Automatically Filling in Data Based on Adjacent Cells + calculating; series + linear series + growth series + date series + powers of 2 calculations + cells; filling automatically + automatic cell filling + AutoFill function + filling;cells, automatically +mw made "powers of 2;..." a one level entry and changed "AutoFill" entryMW changed "auto filling cells" +Automatically Filling in Data Based on Adjacent Cells -You can automatically fill cells with data with the AutoFill command or the Series command. -Using AutoFill -AutoFill automatically generates a data series based on a defined pattern. - - -On a sheet, click in cell, and type a number. - - -Click in another cell and then click back in the cell where you typed the number. - - -Drag the fill handle in the bottom right corner of the cell across the cells that you want to fill, and release the mouse button. -The cells are filled with ascending numbers. - - -To quickly create a list of consecutive days, enter "Monday" in a cell, and drag the fill handle. -Hold down Command Ctrl if you do not want to fill the cells with different values. -If you select two or more adjacent cells that contain different numbers, and drag, the remaining cells are filled with the arithmetic pattern that is recognized in the numbers. The AutoFill function also recognizes customized lists that are defined under Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists. -You can double-click the fill handle to automatically fill all empty columns of the current data block. For example, first enter Jan into A1 and drag the fill handle down to A12 to get the twelve months in the first column. Now enter some values into B1 and C1. Select those two cells, and double-click the fill handle. This fills automatically the data block B1:C12. -Using a Defined Series - - -Select the cell range in the sheet that you want to fill. - - -Choose Edit - Fill - Series. - - -Select the parameters for the series. -If you select a linear series, the increment that you enter is added to each consecutive number in the series to create the next value. -If you select a growth series, the increment that you enter is multiplied by each consecutive number to create the next value. -If you select a date series, the increment that you enter is added to the time unit that you specify. - - -
- -Sort lists -
- - + You can automatically fill cells with data with the AutoFill command or the Series command. + Using AutoFill + AutoFill automatically generates a data series based on a defined pattern. + + + On a sheet, click in a cell, and type a number. + + + Click in another cell and then click back in the cell where you typed the number. + + + Drag the fill handle in the bottom right corner of the cell across the cells that you want to fill, and release the mouse button. + The cells are filled with ascending numbers. + + + To quickly create a list of consecutive days, enter Monday in a cell, and drag the fill handle. + Hold down Command +Ctrl if you do not want to fill the cells with different values. + If you select two or more adjacent cells that contain different numbers, and drag, the remaining cells are filled with the arithmetic pattern that is recognized in the numbers. The AutoFill function also recognizes customized lists that are defined under Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists. + You can double-click the fill handle to automatically fill all empty columns of the current data block. For example, first enter Jan into A1 and drag the fill handle down to A12 to get the twelve months in the first column. Now enter some values into B1 and C1. Select those two cells, and double-click the fill handle. This fills automatically the data block B1:C12. + Using a Defined Series + + + Select the cell range in the sheet that you want to fill. + + + Choose Edit - Fill - Series. + + + Select the parameters for the series. + If you select a linear series, the increment that you enter is added to each consecutive number in the series to create the next value. + If you select a growth series, the increment that you enter is multiplied by each consecutive number to create the next value. + If you select a date series, the increment that you enter is added to the time unit that you specify. + + +
+ + Sort lists +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calculate.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calculate.xhp index 950f917dc0..6bcba3f555 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calculate.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calculate.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Calculating in Spreadsheets -/text/scalc/guide/calculate.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: Changed screenshots, cleaned up text; dedr: reviewed - - - + + Calculating in Spreadsheets + /text/scalc/guide/calculate.xhp + + + spreadsheets; calculating -calculating; spreadsheets -formulas; calculating + calculating; spreadsheets + formulas; calculating mw changed "formulas;..." entry -Calculating in Spreadsheets +Calculating in Spreadsheets -The following is an example of a calculation in $[officename] Calc. - - -Click in a cell, and type a number - - -Press Enter. -The cursor moves down to the next cell. - - -Enter another number. - - -Press the Tab key. -The cursor moves to the right into the next cell. - - -Type in a formula, for example, =A3 * A4 / 100. - - - - Press Enter. -The result of the formula appears in the cell. If you want, you can edit the formula in the input line of the Formula bar. -When you edit a formula, the new result is calculated automatically. - - -
- - - - -
- - + The following is an example of a calculation in $[officename] Calc. + + + Click in a cell, and type a number + + + Press Enter. + The cursor moves down to the next cell. + + + Enter another number. + + + Press the Tab key. + The cursor moves to the right into the next cell. + + + Type in a formula, for example, =A3 * A4 / 100. + + + + Press Enter. + The result of the formula appears in the cell. If you want, you can edit the formula in the input line of the Formula bar. + When you edit a formula, the new result is calculated automatically. + + +
+ + + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_enter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_enter.xhp index ad62741db3..2fa3230619 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_enter.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_enter.xhp @@ -49,21 +49,21 @@ Entering Values Calc can simplify entering data and values into multiple cells. You can change some settings to conform to your preferences. - To enter values into a range of cells manually + To Enter Values Into a Range of Cells Manually There are two features that assist you when you enter a block of data manually. - Area detection for new rows + Area Detection for New Rows In the row below a heading row, you can advance from one cell to the next with the Tab key. After you enter the value into the last cell in the current row, press Enter. Calc positions the cursor below the first cell of the current block. area detection In row 3, press Tab to advance from cell B3 to C3, D3, and E3. Then press Enter to advance to B4. - Area selection + Area Selection Use drag-and-drop to select the area where you want to input values. But start dragging from the last cell of the area and release the mouse button when you have selected the first cell. Now you can start to input values. Always press the Tab key to advance to the next cell. You will not leave the selected area. area selection - The image shows the selected area in high-contrast. Should we use transparent? Must be localized then... + Select the area from E7 to B3. Now B3 is waiting for your input. Press Tab to advance to the next cell within the selected area. - To enter values to a range of cells automatically + To Enter Values to a Range of Cells Automatically See Automatically Filling in Data Based on Adjacent Cells.
@@ -71,4 +71,4 @@
- \ No newline at end of file + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_protect.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_protect.xhp index c079997282..a32b7bd6c1 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_protect.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_protect.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Protecting Cells from Changes -/text/scalc/guide/cell_protect.xhp - - - - - - + + Protecting Cells from Changes + /text/scalc/guide/cell_protect.xhp + + + protecting;cells and sheets -cells; protecting -cell protection; enabling -sheets; protecting -documents; protecting -cells; hiding for printing -changing; sheet protection -hiding;formulas -formulas;hiding - - MW transferred "modifying;..." and "changing;..." into one index entry - Protecting Cells from Changes + cells; protecting + cell protection; enabling + sheets; protecting + documents; protecting + cells; hiding for printing + changing; sheet protection + hiding;formulas + formulas;hiding +MW transferred "modifying;..." and "changing;..." into one index entry +Protecting Cells from Changes - In %PRODUCTNAME Calc you can protect sheets and the document as a whole. You can choose whether the cells are protected against accidental changes, whether the formulas can be viewed from within Calc, whether the cells are visible or whether the cells can be printed. - Protection can be provided by means of a password, but it does not have to be. If you have assigned a password, protection can only be removed once the correct password has been entered. - Note that the cell protection for cells with the Protected attribute is only effective when you protect the whole table. In the default condition, every cell has the Protected attribute. Therefore you must remove the attribute selectively for those cells where the user may make changes. You then protect the whole table and save the document. - These protection features are just switches to prevent accidental action. The features are not intended to provide any secure protection. For example, by exporting a sheet to another file format, a user may be able to surpass the protection features. There is only one secure protection: the password that you can apply when saving an OpenDocument file. A file that has been saved with a password can be opened only with the same password. - - - Select the cells that you want to specify the cell protection options for. - - - Choose Format - Cells and click the Cell Protection tab. - - - Select the protection options that you want. - Select Protected to prevent changes to the contents and the format of a cell. - Select Hide formula to hide and to protect formulas from changes. - Select Hide when printing to hide protected cells in the printed document. The cells are not hidden onscreen. - - - Click OK. - - - Apply the protection options. - To protect the cells from being changed / viewed / printed according to your settings in the Format - Cells dialog, choose Tools - Protect Document - Sheet. - To protect the structure of the document, for example the count, names, and order of the sheets, from being changed, choose Tools - Protect Document - Document. - - - (Optional) Enter a password of at least 5 characters. - If you forget your password, you cannot deactivate the protection. If you only want to protect cells from accidental changes, set the sheet protection, but do not enter a password. - - - Click OK. - - -
- - - - - -
- - + In %PRODUCTNAME Calc you can protect sheets and the document as a whole. You can choose whether the cells are protected against accidental changes, whether the formulas can be viewed from within Calc, whether the cells are visible or whether the cells can be printed. + Protection can be provided by means of a password, but it does not have to be. If you have assigned a password, protection can only be removed once the correct password has been entered. + Note that the cell protection for cells with the Protected attribute is only effective when you protect the whole table. In the default condition, every cell has the Protected attribute. Therefore you must remove the attribute selectively for those cells where the user may make changes. You then protect the whole table and save the document. + These protection features are just switches to prevent accidental action. The features are not intended to provide any secure protection. For example, by exporting a sheet to another file format, a user may be able to surpass the protection features. There is only one secure protection: the password that you can apply when saving an OpenDocument file. A file that has been saved with a password can be opened only with the same password. + + + Select the cells that you want to specify the cell protection options for. + + + Choose Format - Cells and click the Cell Protection tab. + + + Select the protection options that you want. + Select Protected to prevent changes to the contents and the format of a cell. + Select Hide formula to hide and to protect formulas from changes. + Select Hide when printing to hide protected cells in the printed document. The cells are not hidden on screen. + + + Click OK. + + + Apply the protection options. + To protect the cells from being changed / viewed / printed according to your settings in the Format - Cells dialog, choose Tools - Protect Document - Sheet. + To protect the structure of the document, for example the count, names, and order of the sheets, from being changed, choose Tools - Protect Document - Document. + + + (Optional) Enter a password of at least 5 characters. + If you forget your password, you cannot deactivate the protection. If you only want to protect cells from accidental changes, set the sheet protection, but do not enter a password. + + + Click OK. + + +
+ + + + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_unprotect.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_unprotect.xhp index 8700d8ba41..e61d2b59eb 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_unprotect.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_unprotect.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Unprotecting Cells -/text/scalc/guide/cell_unprotect.xhp - - - - - - + + Unprotecting Cells + /text/scalc/guide/cell_unprotect.xhp + + + cell protection; unprotecting -protecting; unprotecting cells -unprotecting cells + protecting; unprotecting cells + unprotecting cells - Unprotecting Cells +Unprotecting Cells - - - Click the sheet for which you want to cancel the protection. - - - Select Tools - Protect Document, then choose Sheet or Document to remove the check mark indicating the protected status. - - - If you have assigned a password, enter it in this dialog and click OK. - - - The cells can now be edited, the formulas can be viewed, and all cells can be printed until you reactivate the protection for the sheet or document. -
- - - -
- - + + + Click the sheet for which you want to cancel the protection. + + + Select Tools - Protect Document, then choose Sheet or Document to remove the check mark indicating the protected status. + + + If you have assigned a password, enter it in this dialog and click OK. + + + The cells can now be edited, the formulas can be viewed, and all cells can be printed until you reactivate the protection for the sheet or document. +
+ +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellcopy.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellcopy.xhp index 12d5c239ba..f966aa8b07 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellcopy.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellcopy.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Only Copy Visible Cells -/text/scalc/guide/cellcopy.xhp - - - + + Only Copy Visible Cells + /text/scalc/guide/cellcopy.xhp + + + cells; copying/deleting/formatting/moving -rows;visible and invisible -copying; visible cells only -formatting;visible cells only -moving;visible cells only -deleting;visible cells only -invisible cells -filters;copying visible cells only -hidden cells -mw changed "cells;"Only Copy Visible Cells + rows;visible and invisible + copying; visible cells only + formatting;visible cells only + moving;visible cells only + deleting;visible cells only + invisible cells + filters;copying visible cells only + hidden cells +mw changed "cells;" +Only Copy Visible Cells -Assume you have hidden a few rows in a cell range. Now you want to copy, delete, or format only the remaining visible rows. -$[officename] behavior depends on how the cells were made invisible, by a filter or manually. - - - -Method and Action - - -Result - - - - -Cells were filtered by AutoFilters, standard filters or advanced filters. -Copy, delete, move, or format a selection of currently visible cells. - - -Only the visible cells of the selection are copied, deleted, moved, or formatted. - - - - -Cells were hidden using the Hide command in the context menu of the row or column headers, or through an outline. -Copy, delete, move, or format a selection of currently visible cells. - - -All cells of the selection, including the hidden cells, are copied, deleted, moved, or formatted. - - -
-
- - - -
- - + Assume you have hidden a few rows in a cell range. Now you want to copy, delete, or format only the remaining visible rows. + $[officename] behavior depends on how the cells were made invisible, by a filter or manually. + + + + Method and Action + + + Result + + + + + Cells were filtered by AutoFilters, standard filters or advanced filters. + Copy, delete, move, or format a selection of currently visible cells. + + + Only the visible cells of the selection are copied, deleted, moved, or formatted. + + + + + Cells were hidden using the Hide command in the context menu of the row or column headers, or through an outline. + Copy, delete, move, or format a selection of currently visible cells. + + + All cells of the selection, including the hidden cells, are copied, deleted, moved, or formatted. + + +
+ +
+ + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreference_dragdrop.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreference_dragdrop.xhp index 7877b9f6ab..2fe2452ffc 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreference_dragdrop.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreference_dragdrop.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Referencing Cells by Drag-and-Drop -/text/scalc/guide/cellreference_dragdrop.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Referencing Cells by Drag-and-Drop + /text/scalc/guide/cellreference_dragdrop.xhp + + + drag and drop; referencing cells -cells; referencing by drag and drop -references;inserting by drag and drop -inserting;references, by drag and drop + cells; referencing by drag and drop + references;inserting by drag and drop + inserting;references, by drag and drop -Referencing Cells by Drag-and-Drop +Referencing Cells by Drag-and-Drop -With the help of the Navigator you can reference cells from one spreadsheet to another sheet in the same document or in a different document. The cells can be inserted as a copy, link or hyperlink. The range to be inserted must be defined with a name in the original file so that it can be inserted in the target file. - - -Open the document that contains the source cells. - - -To set the source range as the range, select the cells and choose Insert - Names - Define. Save the source document, and do not close it. - - -Open the sheet in which you want to insert something. - - -Open the Navigator. In the lower box of the Navigator select the source file. - - -In the Navigator, the source file object appears under "Range names". - - -Using the Drag Mode icon in Navigator, choose whether you want the reference to be a hyperlink, link, or copy. - - -Click the name under "Range names" in the Navigator, and drag into the cell of the current sheet where you want to insert the reference. - - -This method can also be used to insert a range from another sheet of the same document into the current sheet. Select the active document as source in step 4 above. -
- - -
- - + With the help of the Navigator you can reference cells from one spreadsheet to another sheet in the same document or in a different document. The cells can be inserted as a copy, link or hyperlink. The range to be inserted must be defined with a name in the original file so that it can be inserted in the target file. + + + Open the document that contains the source cells. + + + To set the source range as the range, select the cells and choose Insert - Names - Define. Save the source document, and do not close it. + + + Open the sheet in which you want to insert something. + + + Open the Navigator. In the lower box of the Navigator select the source file. + + + In the Navigator, the source file object appears under "Range names". + + + Using the Drag Mode icon in Navigator, choose whether you want the reference to be a hyperlink, link, or copy. + + + Click the name under "Range names" in the Navigator, and drag into the cell of the current sheet where you want to insert the reference. + + + This method can also be used to insert a range from another sheet of the same document into the current sheet. Select the active document as source in step 4 above. +
+ + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences.xhp index 19934a11ff..07d3f82612 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Referencing a Cell in Another Document -/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Referencing a Cell in Another Document + /text/scalc/guide/cellreferences.xhp + + + sheet references -references; to cells in another document -cells; operating in another document -mw made "sheet references;" a one level entry -Referencing Other Sheets + references; to cells in other sheets/documents + cells; operating in another document + documents;references +mw made "sheet references;" a one level entryMW changed "references;" and added "documents;" +Referencing Other Sheets -In a sheet cell you can show a reference to a cell in another sheet. - - -Open a new, empty spreadsheet. - - -By way of example, enter the following formula in cell A1 of Sheet1: -=Sheet2.A1 - - -Click the Sheet 2 tab at the bottom of the spreadsheet. Set the cursor in cell A1 there and enter text or a number. - - -If you switch back to Sheet1, you will see the same content in cell A1 there. If the contents of Sheet2.A1 change, then the contents of Sheet1.A1 also change. - - -In the same way, a reference can also be made to a cell from another document provided that this document has already been saved as a file. - - -Choose File - Open, to load an existing spreadsheet document. - - -Choose File - New, to open a new spreadsheet document. Set the cursor in the cell where you want to insert the external data and enter an equals sign to indicate that you want to begin a formula. - - -Now switch to the document you have just loaded. Click the cell with the data that you want to insert in the new document. - - -Switch back to the new spreadsheet. In the input line you will now see how $[officename] Calc has added the reference to the formula for you. -The reference to a cell of another document contains the name of the other document in single inverted commas, then a hash #, then the name of the sheet of the other document, followed by a point and the name of the cell. - - -Confirm the formula by clicking the green check mark. - - -If you drag the box in the lower right corner of the active cell to select a range of cells, $[officename] automatically inserts the corresponding references in the adjacent cells. As a result, the sheet name is preceded with a "$" sign to designate it as an absolute reference. - - -If you examine the name of the other document in this formula, you will notice that it is written as a URL. This means that you can also enter a URL from the Internet. -
- -
- - + In a sheet cell you can show a reference to a cell in another sheet. + In the same way, a reference can also be made to a cell from another document provided that this document has already been saved as a file. + To Reference a Cell in the Same Document + + + Open a new, empty spreadsheet. + + + By way of example, enter the following formula in cell A1 of Sheet1: + + =Sheet2.A1 + + + + Click the Sheet 2 tab at the bottom of the spreadsheet. Set the cursor in cell A1 there and enter text or a number. + + + If you switch back to Sheet1, you will see the same content in cell A1 there. If the contents of Sheet2.A1 change, then the contents of Sheet1.A1 also change. + + + To Reference a Cell in Another Document + + + Choose File - Open, to load an existing spreadsheet document. + + + Choose File - New, to open a new spreadsheet document. Set the cursor in the cell where you want to insert the external data and enter an equals sign to indicate that you want to begin a formula. + + + Now switch to the document you have just loaded. Click the cell with the data that you want to insert in the new document. + + + Switch back to the new spreadsheet. In the input line you will now see how $[officename] Calc has added the reference to the formula for you. + The reference to a cell of another document contains the name of the other document in single inverted commas, then a hash #, then the name of the sheet of the other document, followed by a point and the name of the cell. + + + Confirm the formula by clicking the green check mark. + + + If you drag the box in the lower right corner of the active cell to select a range of cells, $[officename] automatically inserts the corresponding references in the adjacent cells. As a result, the sheet name is preceded with a "$" sign to designate it as an absolute reference. + + + If you examine the name of the other document in this formula, you will notice that it is written as a URL. This means that you can also enter a URL from the Internet. +
+ +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences_url.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences_url.xhp index ebec4bdd5a..49db1f1b47 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences_url.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences_url.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -References to Other Sheets and Referencing URLs -/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences_url.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + References to Other Sheets and Referencing URLs + /text/scalc/guide/cellreferences_url.xhp + + + HTML; in sheet cells -references; URL in cells -cells; Internet references -URL; in Calc + references; URL in cells + cells; Internet references + URL; in Calc mw deleted "sheet references;" -Referencing URLs +Referencing URLs -For example, if you found an Internet page containing current stock exchange information in spreadsheet cells, you can load this page in $[officename] Calc by using the following procedure: - - -In a $[officename] Calc document, position the cursor in the cell into which you want to insert the external data. - - -Choose Insert - Link to External Data. The External Data dialog appears. - - -Enter the URL of the document or Web page in the dialog. The URL must be in the format: http://www.my-bank.com/table.html. The URL for local or local area network files is the path seen in the File - Open dialog. -$[officename] loads the Web page or file in the "background", that is, without displaying it. In the large list box of the External Data dialog, you can see the name of all the sheets or named ranges you can choose from. - - -Select one or more sheets or named ranges. You can also activate the automatic update function every "n" minutes and click OK. -The contents will be inserted as a link in the $[officename] Calc document. - - -Save your spreadsheet. When you open it again later, $[officename] Calc will update the linked cells following an inquiry. - - -Under Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - General you can choose to have the update, when opened, automatically carried out either always, upon request or never. The update can be started manually in the dialog under Edit - Links. - - -
- - -
- - + For example, if you found an Internet page containing current stock exchange information in spreadsheet cells, you can load this page in $[officename] Calc by using the following procedure: + + + In a $[officename] Calc document, position the cursor in the cell into which you want to insert the external data. + + + Choose Insert - Link to External Data. The External Data dialog appears. + + + Enter the URL of the document or Web page in the dialog. The URL must be in the format: http://www.my-bank.com/table.html. The URL for local or local area network files is the path seen in the File - Open dialog. + $[officename] loads the Web page or file in the "background", that is, without displaying it. In the large list box of the External Data dialog, you can see the name of all the sheets or named ranges you can choose from. + + + Select one or more sheets or named ranges. You can also activate the automatic update function every "n" minutes and click OK. + The contents will be inserted as a link in the $[officename] Calc document. + + + Save your spreadsheet. When you open it again later, $[officename] Calc will update the linked cells following an inquiry. + + + Under Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - General you can choose to have the update, when opened, automatically carried out either always, upon request or never. The update can be started manually in the dialog under Edit - Links. + + +
+ + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_by_formula.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_by_formula.xhp index f8b5ebdb65..f83a1dc4ef 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_by_formula.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_by_formula.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Assigning Formats by Formula -/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_by_formula.xhp - - - - - - + + Assigning Formats by Formula + /text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_by_formula.xhp + + + formats; assigning by formulas -cell formats; assigning by formulas -STYLE function example -cell styles;assigning by formulas -formulas;assigning cell formats - - mw deleted "applying;" - Assigning Formats by Formula + cell formats; assigning by formulas + STYLE function example + cell styles;assigning by formulas + formulas;assigning cell formats +mw deleted "applying;" +Assigning Formats by Formula - The STYLE() function can be added to an existing formula in a cell. For example, together with the CURRENT function, you can color a cell depending on its value. The formula =...+STYLE(IF(CURRENT()>3; "Red"; "Green")) applies the cell style "Red" to cells if the value is greater than 3, otherwise the cell style "Green" is applied. - If you would like to apply a formula to all cells in a selected area, you can use the Find & Replace dialog. - - - Select all the desired cells. - - - Select the menu command Edit - Find & Replace. - - - For the Search for term, enter: .* - ".*" is a regular expression that designates the contents of the current cell. - - - Enter the following formula in the Replace with field: =&+STYLE(IF(CURRENT()>3;"Red";"Green")) - The "&" symbol designates the current contents of the Search for field. The line must begin with an equal sign, since it is a formula. It is assumed that the cell styles "Red" and "Green" already exist. - - - Mark the fields Regular expressions and Current selection only. Click Find All. - All cells with contents that were included in the selection are now highlighted. - - - Click Replace all. - - -
- - - - -
- - + The STYLE() function can be added to an existing formula in a cell. For example, together with the CURRENT function, you can color a cell depending on its value. The formula =...+STYLE(IF(CURRENT()>3; "Red"; "Green")) applies the cell style "Red" to cells if the value is greater than 3, otherwise the cell style "Green" is applied. + If you would like to apply a formula to all cells in a selected area, you can use the + Find & Replace dialog. + + + Select all the desired cells. + + + Select the menu command Edit - Find & Replace. + + + For the Search for term, enter: .* + + ".*" is a regular expression that designates the contents of the current cell. + + + Enter the following formula in the Replace with field: =&+STYLE(IF(CURRENT()>3;"Red";"Green")) + + The "&" symbol designates the current contents of the Search for field. The line must begin with an equal sign, since it is a formula. It is assumed that the cell styles "Red" and "Green" already exist. + + + Mark the fields Regular expressions and Current selection only. Click Find All. + All cells with contents that were included in the selection are now highlighted. + + + Click + Replace all. + + +
+ + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_conditional.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_conditional.xhp index 10ac33ba85..6bd9c55a11 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_conditional.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_conditional.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Applying Conditional Formatting -/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_conditional.xhp - - - + + Applying Conditional Formatting + /text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_conditional.xhp + + + conditional formatting; cells -cells; conditional formatting -formatting; conditional formatting -styles;conditional styles -cell formats; conditional -random numbers;examples -cell styles; copying -copying; cell styles -tables; copying cell styles -mw deleted "formats;"Applying Conditional Formatting + cells; conditional formatting + formatting; conditional formatting + styles;conditional styles + cell formats; conditional + random numbers;examples + cell styles; copying + copying; cell styles + tables; copying cell styles +mw deleted "formats;" +Applying Conditional Formatting -Using the menu command Format - Conditional formatting, the dialog allows you to define up to three conditions per cell, which must be met in order for the selected cells to have a particular format. -To apply conditional formatting, AutoCalculate must be enabled. Choose Tools - Cell Contents - AutoCalculate (you see a check mark next to the command when AutoCalculate is enabled). -With conditional formatting, you can, for example, highlight the totals that exceed the average value of all totals. If the totals change, the formatting changes correspondingly, without having to apply other styles manually. - - -Select the cells to which you want to apply a conditional style. - - -Choose Format - Conditional Formatting. - - -Enter the condition(s) into the dialog box. The dialog is described in detail in $[officename] Help, and an example is provided below: - - -Example of Conditional Formatting: Generate Number Values -You want to give certain values in your tables particular emphasis. For example, in a table of turnovers, you can show all the values above the average in green and all those below the average in red. This is possible with conditional formatting. - - -First of all, write a table in which a few different values occur. For your test you can create tables with any random numbers: -In one of the cells enter the formula =RAND(), and you will obtain a random number between 0 and 1. If you want integers of between 0 and 50, enter the formula =INT(RAND()*50). - - -Copy the formula to create a row of random numbers. Click the bottom right corner of the selected cell, and drag to the right until the desired cell range is selected. - - -In the same way as described above, drag down the corner of the rightmost cell in order to create more rows of random numbers. - - -Example of Conditional Formatting: Define Cell Styles -The next step is to apply a cell style to all values that represent above-average turnover, and one to those that are below the average. Ensure that the Styles and Formatting window is visible before proceeding. - - -Click in a blank cell and select the command Format Cells in the context menu. - - -In the Format Cells dialog on the Background tab, select a background color. Click OK. - - -In the Styles and Formatting window, click the New Style from Selection icon. Enter the name of the new style. For this example, name the style "Above". - - -To define a second style, click again in a blank cell and proceed as described above. Assign a different background color for the cell and assign a name (for this example, "Below"). - - -Example of Conditional Formatting: Calculate Average -In our particular example, we are calculating the average of the random values. The result is placed in a cell: - - -Set the cursor in a blank cell, for example, J14, and choose Insert - Function. - - -Select the AVERAGE function. Use the mouse to select all your random numbers. If you cannot see the entire range, because Function Wizard is obscuring it, you can temporarily shrink the dialog using the Shrink / Maximize icon. - - -Close Function Wizard with OK. - - -Example of Conditional Formatting: Apply Cell Style -Now you can apply the conditional formatting to the sheet: - - -Select all cells with the random numbers. - - -Choose the Format - Conditional Formatting command to open the corresponding dialog. - - -Define the condition as follows: If cell value is less than J14, format with cell style "Below", and if cell value is greater than or equal to J14, format with cell style "Above". - - -Example of Conditional Formatting: Copy Cell Style -To apply the conditional formatting to other cells later: - - -Click one of the cells that has been assigned conditional formatting. - - -Copy the cell to the clipboard. - - -Select the cells that are to receive this same formatting. - - -Choose Edit - Paste Special. The Paste Special dialog appears. - - -In the Selection area, check only the Formats box. All other boxes must be unchecked. Click OK. - - -
- - -Format - Conditional formatting -
- - + Using the menu command Format - Conditional formatting, the dialog allows you to define up to three conditions per cell, which must be met in order for the selected cells to have a particular format. + To apply conditional formatting, AutoCalculate must be enabled. Choose Tools - Cell Contents - AutoCalculate (you see a check mark next to the command when AutoCalculate is enabled). + With conditional formatting, you can, for example, highlight the totals that exceed the average value of all totals. If the totals change, the formatting changes correspondingly, without having to apply other styles manually. + To Define the Conditions + + + Select the cells to which you want to apply a conditional style. + + + Choose Format - Conditional Formatting. + + + Enter the condition(s) into the dialog box. The dialog is described in detail in $[officename] Help, and an example is provided below: + + + Example of Conditional Formatting: Highlighting Totals Above/Under the Average Value + Step1: Generate Number Values + You want to give certain values in your tables particular emphasis. For example, in a table of turnovers, you can show all the values above the average in green and all those below the average in red. This is possible with conditional formatting. + + + First of all, write a table in which a few different values occur. For your test you can create tables with any random numbers: + In one of the cells enter the formula =RAND(), and you will obtain a random number between 0 and 1. If you want integers of between 0 and 50, enter the formula =INT(RAND()*50). + + + Copy the formula to create a row of random numbers. Click the bottom right corner of the selected cell, and drag to the right until the desired cell range is selected. + + + In the same way as described above, drag down the corner of the rightmost cell in order to create more rows of random numbers. + + + Step 2: Define Cell Styles + The next step is to apply a cell style to all values that represent above-average turnover, and one to those that are below the average. Ensure that the Styles and Formatting window is visible before proceeding. + + + Click in a blank cell and select the command Format Cells in the context menu. + + + In the Format Cells dialog on the Background tab, select a background color. Click OK. + + + In the Styles and Formatting window, click the New Style from Selection icon. Enter the name of the new style. For this example, name the style "Above". + + + To define a second style, click again in a blank cell and proceed as described above. Assign a different background color for the cell and assign a name (for this example, "Below"). + + + Step 3: Calculate Average + In our particular example, we are calculating the average of the random values. The result is placed in a cell: + + + Set the cursor in a blank cell, for example, J14, and choose Insert - Function. + + + Select the AVERAGE function. Use the mouse to select all your random numbers. If you cannot see the entire range, because the Function Wizard is obscuring it, you can temporarily shrink the dialog using the Shrink / Maximize icon. + + + Close the Function Wizard with OK. + + + Step 4: Apply Cell Styles + Now you can apply the conditional formatting to the sheet: + + + Select all cells with the random numbers. + + + Choose the Format - Conditional Formatting command to open the corresponding dialog. + + + Define the condition as follows: If cell value is less than J14, format with cell style "Below", and if cell value is greater than or equal to J14, format with cell style "Above". + + + Step 5: Copy Cell Style + To apply the conditional formatting to other cells later: + + + Click one of the cells that has been assigned conditional formatting. + + + Copy the cell to the clipboard. + + + Select the cells that are to receive this same formatting. + + + Choose Edit - Paste Special. The Paste Special dialog appears. + + + In the Selection area, check only the Formats box. All other boxes must be unchecked. Click OK. + + +
+ + + Format - Conditional formatting +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_minusvalue.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_minusvalue.xhp index f051c8a5b8..6df51672f5 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_minusvalue.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_minusvalue.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Highlighting Negative Numbers -/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_minusvalue.xhp - - - + + Highlighting Negative Numbers + /text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_minusvalue.xhp + + + negative numbers -numbers; highlighting negative numbers -highlighting;negative numbers -colors;number formats -number formats;colors -MW made "negative numbers;" a one level entryHighlighting Negative Numbers + numbers; highlighting negative numbers + highlighting;negative numbers + colors;negative numbers + number formats;colors for negative numbers +MW made "negative numbers;" a one level entryMW changed "numbers formats;" and "colors;" +Highlighting Negative Numbers -You can format cells with a number format that highlights negative numbers in red. Alternatively, you can define your own number format in which negative numbers are highlighted in other colors. - - -Select the cells and choose Format - Cells. - - -On the Numbers tab, select a number format and mark Negative numbers red check box. Click OK. - - -The cell number format is defined in two parts. The format for positive numbers and zero is defined in front of the semicolon; after the semicolon the formula for negative numbers is defined. You can change the code (RED) under Format code. For example, instead of "RED," enter "YELLOW". If the new code appears in the list after clicking the Add icon, this is a valid entry. -
- - -
- - + You can format cells with a number format that highlights negative numbers in red. Alternatively, you can define your own number format in which negative numbers are highlighted in other colors. + + + Select the cells and choose Format - Cells. + + + On the Numbers tab, select a number format and mark Negative numbers red check box. Click OK. + + + The cell number format is defined in two parts. The format for positive numbers and zero is defined in front of the semicolon; after the semicolon the formula for negative numbers is defined. You can change the code (RED) under Format code. For example, instead of RED, enter YELLOW. If the new code appears in the list after clicking the Add icon, this is a valid entry. +
+ + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/consolidate.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/consolidate.xhp index 7733ad2d06..78cd98a38c 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/consolidate.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/consolidate.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Consolidating Data -/text/scalc/guide/consolidate.xhp - - - + + Consolidating Data + /text/scalc/guide/consolidate.xhp + + + consolidating data -ranges; combining -combining;cell ranges -tables; combining -data; merging cell ranges -merging;data ranges -mw deleted "values;"Consolidating Data + ranges; combining + combining;cell ranges + tables; combining + data; merging cell ranges + merging;data ranges +mw deleted "values;" +Consolidating Data -During consolidation, the contents of the cells from several sheets will be combined in one place. - - -Open the document that contains the cell ranges to be consolidated. - - -Choose Data - Consolidate to open the Consolidate dialog. - - -From the Source data area box select a source cell range to consolidate with other areas. -If the range is not named, click in the field next to the Source data area. A blinking text cursor appears. Type a reference for the first source data range or select the range with the mouse. - - -Click Add to insert the selected range in the Consolidation areas field. - - -Select additional ranges and click Add after each selection. - - -Specify where you want to display the result by selecting a target range from the Copy results to box. -If the target range is not named, click in the field next to Copy results to and enter the reference of the target range. Alternatively, you can select the range using the mouse or position the cursor in the top left cell of the target range. - - -Select a function from the Function box. The function specifies how the values of the consolidation ranges are linked. The "Sum" function is the default setting. - - -Click OK to consolidate the ranges. - - -Additional Settings -Click More in the Consolidate dialog to display additional settings: - - -Select Link to source data to insert the formulas that generate the results in the target range, rather than the actual results. If you link the data, any values modified in the source range are automatically updated in the target range. -The corresponding cell references in the target range are inserted in consecutive rows, which are automatically ordered and then hidden from view. Only the final result, based on the selected function, is displayed. - - - - -Under Consolidate by, select either Row labels or Column labels if the cells of the source data range are not to be consolidated corresponding to the identical position of the cell in the range, but instead according to a matching row label or column label. -To consolidate by row labels or column labels, the label must be contained in the selected source ranges. -The text in the labels must be identical, so that rows or columns can be accurately matched. If the row or column label does not match any that exist in the target range, it will be appended as a new row or column. - - -The data from the consolidation ranges and target range will be saved when you save the document. If you later open a document in which consolidation has been defined, this data will again be available. -
-Data - Consolidate -
- - + During consolidation, the contents of the cells from several sheets will be combined in one place. + To Combine Cell Contents + + + Open the document that contains the cell ranges to be consolidated. + + + Choose Data - Consolidate to open the Consolidate dialog. + + + From the Source data area box select a source cell range to consolidate with other areas. + If the range is not named, click in the field next to the Source data area. A blinking text cursor appears. Type a reference for the first source data range or select the range with the mouse. + + + Click Add to insert the selected range in the Consolidation areas field. + + + Select additional ranges and click Add after each selection. + + + Specify where you want to display the result by selecting a target range from the Copy results to box. + If the target range is not named, click in the field next to Copy results to and enter the reference of the target range. Alternatively, you can select the range using the mouse or position the cursor in the top left cell of the target range. + + + Select a function from the Function box. The function specifies how the values of the consolidation ranges are linked. The "Sum" function is the default setting. + + + Click OK to consolidate the ranges. + + + Additional Settings + Click More in the Consolidate dialog to display additional settings: + + + Select Link to source data to insert the formulas that generate the results in the target range, rather than the actual results. If you link the data, any values modified in the source range are automatically updated in the target range. + The corresponding cell references in the target range are inserted in consecutive rows, which are automatically ordered and then hidden from view. Only the final result, based on the selected function, is displayed. + + + + + Under Consolidate by, select either Row labels or Column labels if the cells of the source data range are not to be consolidated corresponding to the identical position of the cell in the range, but instead according to a matching row label or column label. + To consolidate by row labels or column labels, the label must be contained in the selected source ranges. + The text in the labels must be identical, so that rows or columns can be accurately matched. If the row or column label does not match any that exist in the target range, it will be appended as a new row or column. + + + The data from the consolidation ranges and target range will be saved when you save the document. If you later open a document in which consolidation has been defined, this data will again be available. +
+ Data - Consolidate +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_files.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_files.xhp index b9108f68f8..58574514c8 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_files.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_files.xhp @@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ * * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * - * $RCSfile: csv_files.xhp,v $ - * $Revision: 1.9.4.1 $ + * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ + * $Revision: 1.10 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,83 +35,85 @@ - - Importing and Exporting CSV Files -/text/scalc/guide/csv_files.xhp - - - + + Importing and Exporting CSV Files + /text/scalc/guide/csv_files.xhp + + + number series import -data series import -exporting; tables as text -importing; tables as text -delimited values and files -comma separated files and values -text file import and export -csv files;importing and exporting -tables; importing/exporting as text -text documents; importing to spreadsheets -MW deleted "importing;text data bases" and copied 4 index entries from scalc/guide/csv_formula.xhp -Opening and Saving Text CSV Files + data series import + exporting; tables as text + importing; tables as text + delimited values and files + comma separated files and values + text file import and export + csv files;importing and exporting + tables; importing/exporting as text + text documents; importing to spreadsheets + opening;text csv files + saving;as text csv +MW deleted "importing;text data bases" and copied 4 index entries from scalc/guide/csv_formula.xhpmw added "saving;" and "opening;" +Opening and Saving Text CSV Files -Comma Separated Values (CSV) is text file format that you can use to exchange data from a database or a spreadsheet between applications. Each line in a Text CSV file represents a record in the database, or a row in a spreadsheet. Each field in a database record or cell in a spreadsheet row is usually separated by a comma. However, you can use other characters to delimit a field, such as a tabulator character. -If the content of a field or cell contains a comma, the contents of the field or cell must be enclosed by single quotes (') or double quotes ("). -To Open a Text CSV File in Calc - - -Choose File - Open. - - -Locate the CSV file that you want to open. -If the file has a *.csv extension, select the file. -If the CSV file has another extension, select the file, and then select "Text CSV" in the File type box - - -Click Open. -The Text Import dialog opens. - - -Specify the options to divide the text in the file into columns. -You can preview the layout of the imported data at the bottom of the Text Import dialog. -Right-click a column in the preview to set the format or to hide the column. -If the CSV file uses a text delimiter character that is not listed in the Text delimiter box, click in the box, and type the character. - - -Click OK. - - -To Save a Sheet as a Text CSV File -When you export a spreadsheet to CSV format, only the data on the current sheet is saved. All other information, including formulas and formatting, is lost. - - -Open the Calc sheet that you want to save as a Text CSV file. -Only the current sheet can be exported. - - -Choose File - Save as. - - -In the File name box, enter a name for the file. - - -In the File type box, select "Text CSV". - - -(Optional) Set the field options for the Text CSV file. -Select Edit filter settings. -In the Export of text files dialog, select the options that you want. -Click OK. - - -Click Save. - - -
- - -Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View -Export text files -Import text files -
- - + Comma Separated Values (CSV) is text file format that you can use to exchange data from a database or a spreadsheet between applications. Each line in a Text CSV file represents a record in the database, or a row in a spreadsheet. Each field in a database record or cell in a spreadsheet row is usually separated by a comma. However, you can use other characters to delimit a field, such as a tabulator character. + If the content of a field or cell contains a comma, the contents of the field or cell must be enclosed by single quotes (') or double quotes ("). + To Open a Text CSV File in Calc + + + Choose File - Open. + + + Locate the CSV file that you want to open. + If the file has a *.csv extension, select the file. + If the CSV file has another extension, select the file, and then select "Text CSV" in the File type box + + + Click Open. + The Text Import dialog opens. + + + Specify the options to divide the text in the file into columns. + You can preview the layout of the imported data at the bottom of the Text Import dialog. + Right-click a column in the preview to set the format or to hide the column. + If the CSV file uses a text delimiter character that is not listed in the Text delimiter box, click in the box, and type the character. + + + Click OK. + + + To Save a Sheet as a Text CSV File + When you export a spreadsheet to CSV format, only the data on the current sheet is saved. All other information, including formulas and formatting, is lost. + + + Open the Calc sheet that you want to save as a Text CSV file. + Only the current sheet can be exported. + + + Choose File - Save as. + + + In the File name box, enter a name for the file. + + + In the File type box, select "Text CSV". + + + (Optional) Set the field options for the Text CSV file. + Select Edit filter settings. + In the Export of text files dialog, select the options that you want. + Click OK. + + + Click Save. + + +
+ + + Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View + Export text files + Import text files +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_formula.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_formula.xhp index 126fe5d3a8..5e29c0ea5b 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_formula.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_formula.xhp @@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ * * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * - * $RCSfile: csv_formula.xhp,v $ - * $Revision: 1.10.4.1 $ + * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ + * $Revision: 1.10 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,66 +35,68 @@ - -Importing and Exporting Text Files -/text/scalc/guide/csv_formula.xhp - - - + + Importing and Exporting Text Files + /text/scalc/guide/csv_formula.xhp + + + csv files;formulas -formulas; importing/exporting as csv files -exporting;formulas as csv files -importing;csv files with formulas + formulas; importing/exporting as csv files + exporting;formulas as csv files + importing;csv files with formulas mw deleted "inserting;", copied 4 index entries to scalc/guide/csv_files.xhp, changed "csv files;" and "formulas;" and added 2 index entries -Importing and Exporting CSV Text Files with Formulas +Importing and Exporting CSV Text Files with Formulas -Comma separated values (CSV) files are text files that contain the cell contents of a single sheet. Commas, semicolons, or other characters can be used as the field delimiters between the cells. Text strings are put in quotation marks, numbers are written without quotation marks. -Importing a CSV File - - -Choose File - Open. - - -In the File type field, select the format "Text CSV". Select the file and click Open. When a file has the .csv extension, the file type is automatically recognized. - - -You will see the Import text files dialog. Click OK. - - -If the csv file contains formulas, but you want to import the results of those formulas, then choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View and clear the Formulas check box. -Exporting Formulas and Values as CSV Files - - -Click the sheet to be written as a csv file. - - -If you want to export the formulas as formulas, for example, in the form =SUM(A1:B5), proceed as follows: -Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View. -Under Display, mark the Formulas check box. Click OK. -If you want to export the calculation results instead of the formulas, do not mark Formulas. - - -Choose File - Save as. You will see the Save as dialog. - - -In the File type field select the format "Text CSV". - - -Enter a name and click Save. - - -From the Export of text files dialog that appears, select the character set and the field and text delimiters for the data to be exported, and confirm with OK. -Caution: If the numbers use commas as decimal separators or thousands separators, do not select the comma as the field delimiter. If the text contains double quotation marks, you must select the single quotation mark as separator.not possible to have a table here because that would break the numbering in XML. - - -If necessary, after you have saved, clear the Formulas check box to see the calculated results in the table again. - - -
- -Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View -Export text files -Import text files -
- - + Comma separated values (CSV) files are text files that contain the cell contents of a single sheet. Commas, semicolons, or other characters can be used as the field delimiters between the cells. Text strings are put in quotation marks, numbers are written without quotation marks. + To Import a CSV File + + + Choose File - Open. + + + In the File type field, select the format "Text CSV". Select the file and click Open. When a file has the .csv extension, the file type is automatically recognized. + + + You will see the Text Import dialog. Click OK. + + + If the csv file contains formulas, but you want to import the results of those formulas, then choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View and clear the Formulas check box. + To Export Formulas and Values as CSV Files + + + Click the sheet to be written as a csv file. + + + If you want to export the formulas as formulas, for example, in the form =SUM(A1:B5), proceed as follows: + Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View. + Under Display, mark the Formulas check box. Click OK. + If you want to export the calculation results instead of the formulas, do not mark Formulas. + + + Choose File - Save as. You will see the Save as dialog. + + + In the + File type field select the format "Text CSV". + + + Enter a name and click Save. + + + From the Export of text files dialog that appears, select the character set and the field and text delimiters for the data to be exported, and confirm with OK. + If the numbers use commas as decimal separators or thousands separators, do not select the comma as the field delimiter. If the text contains double quotation marks, you must select the single quotation mark as separator.not possible to have a table here because that would break the numbering in XML. + + + If necessary, after you have saved, clear the Formulas check box to see the calculated results in the table again. + + +
+ + Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View + Export text files + Import text files +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/currency_format.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/currency_format.xhp index 1ad6ba0f35..7eb6a0b67e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/currency_format.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/currency_format.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Cells in Currency Format -/text/scalc/guide/currency_format.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: cleaned up, deleted screenshot - - - + + Cells in Currency Format + /text/scalc/guide/currency_format.xhp + + + currency formats; spreadsheets -cells; currency formats -international currency formats -formats; currency formats in cells -currencies; default currencies -defaults;currency formats -changing;currency formats + cells; currency formats + international currency formats + formats; currency formats in cells + currencies; default currencies + defaults;currency formats + changing;currency formats mw changed one index entry -Cells in Currency Format +Cells in Currency Format -In %PRODUCTNAME Calc you can give numbers any currency format. When you click the Currency icon -Icon - in the Formatting bar to format a number, the cell is given the default currency format set under Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. -Exchanging of %PRODUCTNAME Calc documents can lead to misunderstandings, if your %PRODUCTNAME Calc document is loaded by a user who uses a different default currency format. -In %PRODUCTNAME Calc you can define that a number that you have formatted as "1,234.50 €", still remains in euros in another country and does not become dollars. -You can change the currency format in the Format Cells dialog (choose Format - Cells - Numbers tab) by two country settings. In the Language combo box select the basic setting for currency symbol, decimal and thousands separators. In the Format list box you can select possible variations from the default format for the language. - - -For example, if the language is set to "Default" and you are using a german locale setting, the currency format will be "1.234,00 €". A point is used before the thousand digits and a comma before the decimal places. If you now select the subordinate currency format "$ English (US)" from the Format list box , you will get the following format: "$ 1.234,00". As you can see, the separators have remained the same. Only the currency symbol has been changed and converted, but the underlying format of the notation remains the same as in the locale setting. - - -If, under Language, you convert the cells to "English (US)", the English-language locale setting is also transferred and the default currency format is now "$ 1,234.00". - - -
- -Format - Cell - Numbers -
- - + In %PRODUCTNAME Calc you can give numbers any currency format. When you click the Currency icon +Icon + in the Formatting + bar to format a number, the cell is given the default currency format set under Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. + Exchanging of %PRODUCTNAME Calc documents can lead to misunderstandings, if your %PRODUCTNAME Calc document is loaded by a user who uses a different default currency format. + In %PRODUCTNAME Calc you can define that a number that you have formatted as "1,234.50 €", still remains in euros in another country and does not become dollars. + You can change the currency format in the Format Cells dialog (choose Format - Cells - Numbers tab) by two country settings. In the Language combo box select the basic setting for currency symbol, decimal and thousands separators. In the Format list box you can select possible variations from the default format for the language. + + + For example, if the language is set to "Default" and you are using a german locale setting, the currency format will be "1.234,00 €". A point is used before the thousand digits and a comma before the decimal places. If you now select the subordinate currency format "$ English (US)" from the Format list box , you will get the following format: "$ 1.234,00". As you can see, the separators have remained the same. Only the currency symbol has been changed and converted, but the underlying format of the notation remains the same as in the locale setting. + + + If, under Language, you convert the cells to "English (US)", the English-language locale setting is also transferred and the default currency format is now "$ 1,234.00". + + +
+ + Format - Cell - Numbers +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_define.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_define.xhp index a1de905dda..fd95524886 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_define.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_define.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Defining Database Ranges -/text/scalc/guide/database_define.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: Cleaned up, deleted screenshot -dedr: reviewed - - - + + Defining Database Ranges + /text/scalc/guide/database_define.xhp + + + tables; database ranges -database ranges; defining -ranges; defining database ranges -defining;database ranges + database ranges; defining + ranges; defining database ranges + defining;database ranges -Defining a Database Range +Defining a Database Range -You can define a range of cells in a spreadsheet to use as a database. Each row in this database range corresponds to a database record and each cell in a row corresponds to a database field. You can sort, group, search, and perform calculations on the range as you would in a database. -You can only edit and access a database range in the spreadsheet that contains the range. You cannot access the database range in the %PRODUCTNAME Data Sources view. -To Define a Database Range - - -Select the range of cells that you want to define as a database range. - - -Choose Data - Define Range. - - -In the Name box, enter a name for the database range. - - -Click More. - - -Specify the options for the database range. - - -Click OK. - - -
- - -
- - + You can define a range of cells in a spreadsheet to use as a database. Each row in this database range corresponds to a database record and each cell in a row corresponds to a database field. You can sort, group, search, and perform calculations on the range as you would in a database. + You can only edit and access a database range in the spreadsheet that contains the range. You cannot access the database range in the %PRODUCTNAME Data Sources view. + To define a database range + + + Select the range of cells that you want to define as a database range. + + + Choose Data - Define Range. + + + In the Name box, enter a name for the database range. + + + Click More. + + + Specify the options for the database range. + + + Click OK. + + +
+ + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_filter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_filter.xhp index 55fa23ad8f..077d5037c9 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_filter.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_filter.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Filtering Cell Ranges -/text/scalc/guide/database_filter.xhp - - - + + Filtering Cell Ranges + /text/scalc/guide/database_filter.xhp + + + cell ranges;applying/removing filters -filtering;cell ranges/database ranges -database ranges;applying/removing filters -removing;cell range filters -MW changed "cell ranges," added "removing;" and made one "database ranges;" entry out of two. Same for "filtering;"Filtering Cell Ranges + filtering;cell ranges/database ranges + database ranges;applying/removing filters + removing;cell range filters +MW changed "cell ranges," added "removing;" and made one "database ranges;" entry out of two. Same for "filtering;" +Filtering Cell Ranges -You can use several filters to filter cell ranges in spreadsheets. A standard filter uses the options that you specify to filter the data. An AutoFilter filters data according to a specific value or string. An advanced filter uses filter criteria from specified cells. -To Apply a Standard Filter to a Cell Range - - -Click in a cell range. - - -Choose Data - Filter - Standard Filter. - - -In the Standard Filter dialog, specify the filter options that you want. - - -Click OK. -The records that match the filter options that you specified are shown. - - -To Apply an AutoFilter to a Cell Range - - -Click in a cell range or a database range. -If you want to apply multiple AutoFilters to the same sheet, you must first define database ranges, then apply the AutoFilters to the database ranges. - - -Choose Data - Filter - AutoFilter. -An arrow button is added to the head of each column in the database range. - - -Click the arrow button in the column that contains the value or string that you want to set as the filter criteria. - - -Select the value or string that you want to use as the filter criteria. -The records that match the filter criteria that you selected are shown. - - -To Remove a Filter From a Cell Range - - -Click in a filtered cell range. - - -Choose Data - Filter - Remove Filter. - - -
- - - - -Wiki page about defining a data range -
- - + You can use several filters to filter cell ranges in spreadsheets. A standard filter uses the options that you specify to filter the data. An AutoFilter filters data according to a specific value or string. An advanced filter uses filter criteria from specified cells. + To Apply a Standard Filter to a Cell Range + + + Click in a cell range. + + + Choose Data - Filter - Standard Filter. + + + In the Standard Filter dialog, specify the filter options that you want. + + + Click OK. + The records that match the filter options that you specified are shown. + + + To Apply an AutoFilter to a Cell Range + + + Click in a cell range or a database range. + If you want to apply multiple AutoFilters to the same sheet, you must first define database ranges, then apply the AutoFilters to the database ranges. + + + Choose Data - Filter - AutoFilter. + An arrow button is added to the head of each column in the database range. + + + Click the arrow button in the column that contains the value or string that you want to set as the filter criteria. + + + Select the value or string that you want to use as the filter criteria. + The records that match the filter criteria that you selected are shown. + + + To Remove a Filter From a Cell Range + + + Click in a filtered cell range. + + + Choose Data - Filter - Remove Filter. + + +
+ + + + + Wiki page about defining a data range +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_sort.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_sort.xhp index dd5749e33d..2aaf2e1177 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_sort.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_sort.xhp @@ -2,38 +2,33 @@ @@ -55,18 +50,18 @@ - Click in a database range. - If you select a range of cells, only these cells will get sorted. If you just click one cell without selecting, then the whole database range will get sorted. + Click in a database range. + If you select a range of cells, only these cells will get sorted. If you just click one cell without selecting, then the whole database range will get sorted. - Choose Data - Sort. - The range of cells that will get sorted is shown in inverted colors. + Choose Data - Sort. + The range of cells that will get sorted is shown in inverted colors. - Select the sort options that you want. + Select the sort options that you want. - Click OK. + Click OK.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_createtable.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_createtable.xhp index a2c3aad4e2..9bc374e69f 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_createtable.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_createtable.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Creating DataPilot Tables -/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_createtable.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: fix to #i22166#, deleted 3 hard-to-localize images -YJ: checked - - - + + Creating DataPilot Tables + /text/scalc/guide/datapilot_createtable.xhp + + + DataPilot tables -DataPilot function; calling up and applying + DataPilot function; calling up and applying -Creating DataPilot Tables +Creating DataPilot Tables - - -Position the cursor within a range of cells containing values, row and column headings. - - -Choose Data - DataPilot - Start. The Select Source dialog appears. Choose Current selection and confirm with OK. The table headings are shown as buttons in the DataPilot dialog. Drag these buttons as required and drop them into the layout areas "Page Fields", "Column Fields", "Row Fields" and "Data Fields". - - -Drag the desired buttons into one of the four areas. - - -Drag a button to the Page Fields area to create a button and a listbox on top of the generated datapilot table. The listbox can be used to filter the DataPilot table by the contents of the selected item. You can use drag-and-drop within the generated DataPilot table to use another page field as a filter. -If the button is dropped in the Data Fields area it will be given a caption that also shows the formula that will be used to calculate the data. - - -By double-clicking on one of the fields in the Data Fields area you can call up the Data Field dialog. - - -Use the Data Field dialog to select the calculations to be used for the data. To make a multiple selection, press the Command Ctrl key while clicking the desired calculation. - - -The order of the buttons can be changed at any time by moving them to a different position in the area with the mouse. - - -Remove a button by dragging it back to the area of the other buttons at the right of the dialog. - - -To open the Data Field dialog, double-click one of the buttons in the Row or Column area. Use the dialog to select if and to what extent %PRODUCTNAME calculates display subtotals. - - -Exit the DataPilot dialog by pressing OK. A Filter button will now be inserted, or a page button for every data field that you dropped in the Page Fields area. The DataPilot table is inserted further down. -
- - - - - - - -
- - + + + Position the cursor within a range of cells containing values, row and column headings. + + + Choose Data - DataPilot - Start. The Select Source dialog appears. Choose Current selection and confirm with OK. The table headings are shown as buttons in the DataPilot dialog. Drag these buttons as required and drop them into the layout areas "Page Fields", "Column Fields", "Row Fields" and "Data Fields". + + + Drag the desired buttons into one of the four areas. + + + Drag a button to the Page Fields area to create a button and a listbox on top of the generated datapilot table. The listbox can be used to filter the DataPilot table by the contents of the selected item. You can use drag-and-drop within the generated DataPilot table to use another page field as a filter. + If the button is dropped in the Data Fields area it will be given a caption that also shows the formula that will be used to calculate the data. + + + By double-clicking on one of the fields in the Data Fields area you can call up the Data Field dialog. + + + Use the Data Field dialog to select the calculations to be used for the data. To make a multiple selection, press the Command +Ctrl key while clicking the desired calculation. + + + + + The order of the buttons can be changed at any time by moving them to a different position in the area with the mouse. + + + Remove a button by dragging it back to the area of the other buttons at the right of the dialog. + + + To open the Data Field dialog, double-click one of the buttons in the Row or Column area. Use the dialog to select if and to what extent %PRODUCTNAME calculates display subtotals. + + + Exit the DataPilot dialog by pressing OK. A Filter button will now be inserted, or a page button for every data field that you dropped in the Page Fields area. The DataPilot table is inserted further down. +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_deletetable.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_deletetable.xhp index 8f8b49eaef..20b7ddf137 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_deletetable.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_deletetable.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Deleting DataPilot Tables -/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_deletetable.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Deleting DataPilot Tables + /text/scalc/guide/datapilot_deletetable.xhp + + + DataPilot function; deleting tables -deleting;DataPilot tables + deleting;DataPilot tables -Deleting DataPilot Tables +Deleting DataPilot Tables -In order to delete a DataPilot table, select any cell in the DataPilot table, then choose Delete in the context menu. -
- - - - - - -
- - + In order to delete a DataPilot table, select any cell in the DataPilot table, then choose Delete in the context menu. +
+ + + + + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_edittable.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_edittable.xhp index 802da43faa..b127c48274 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_edittable.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_edittable.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Editing DataPilot Tables -/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_edittable.xhp - - - + + Editing DataPilot Tables + /text/scalc/guide/datapilot_edittable.xhp + + + DataPilot function; editing tables -editing;DataPilot tables + editing;DataPilot tables -Editing DataPilot Tables +Editing DataPilot Tables -Click one of the buttons in the table that the DataPilot has created and hold the mouse button down. A special symbol will appear next to the mouse pointer. -By dragging the button to a different position in the same row you can alter the order of the columns. If you drag a button to the left edge of the table into the row headings area, you can change a column into a row. -In the DataPilot dialog, you can drag a button to the Page Fields area to create a button and a listbox on top of the generated DataPilot table. The listbox can be used to filter the DataPilot table by the contents of the selected item. You can use drag-and-drop within the generated DataPilot table to use another page field as a filter. -To remove a button from the table, just drag it out of the DataPilot table. Release the mouse button when the mouse pointer positioned within the sheet has become a 'not allowed' icon. The button is deleted. -To edit the DataPilot table, click a cell inside the DataPilot table and open the context menu. In the context menu you find the command Start, which displays the DataPilot dialog for the current DataPilot table. -In the DataPilot table, you can use drag-and-drop or cut/paste commands to rearrange the order of data fields. -By double-clicking on some buttons inside the DataPilot table you can hide the subelements below it. -
- - - - - - - -
- - + Click one of the buttons in the table that the DataPilot has created and hold the mouse button down. A special symbol will appear next to the mouse pointer. + By dragging the button to a different position in the same row you can alter the order of the columns. If you drag a button to the left edge of the table into the row headings area, you can change a column into a row. + In the DataPilot dialog, you can drag a button to the Page Fields area to create a button and a listbox on top of the generated DataPilot table. The listbox can be used to filter the DataPilot table by the contents of the selected item. You can use drag-and-drop within the generated DataPilot table to use another page field as a filter. + To remove a button from the table, just drag it out of the DataPilot table. Release the mouse button when the mouse pointer positioned within the sheet has become a 'not allowed' icon. The button is deleted. + To edit the DataPilot table, click a cell inside the DataPilot table and open the context menu. In the context menu you find the command Start, which displays the DataPilot dialog for the current DataPilot table. + In the DataPilot table, you can use drag-and-drop or cut/paste commands to rearrange the order of data fields. + By double-clicking on some buttons inside the DataPilot table you can hide the subelements below it. +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_filtertable.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_filtertable.xhp index a0a240194a..8ccc274ede 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_filtertable.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_filtertable.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Filtering DataPilot Tables -/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_filtertable.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Filtering DataPilot Tables + /text/scalc/guide/datapilot_filtertable.xhp + + + DataPilot function; filtering tables -filtering;DataPilot tables + filtering;DataPilot tables mw deleted "filters;" -Filtering DataPilot Tables +Filtering DataPilot Tables -You can use filters to remove unwanted data from a DataPilot table.UFI: removed help id -Click the Filter button in the sheet to call up the dialog for the filter conditions. Alternatively, call up the context menu of the DataPilot table and select the Filter command. The Filter dialog appears. Here you can filter the DataPilot table. -
- - - - - - - -
- - + You can use filters to remove unwanted data from a DataPilot table.UFI: removed help id +Click the Filter button in the sheet to call up the dialog for the filter conditions. Alternatively, call up the context menu of the DataPilot table and select the Filter command. The Filter dialog appears. Here you can filter the DataPilot table. +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/fraction_enter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/fraction_enter.xhp index cd1a96eb05..1e9ac6278e 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/fraction_enter.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/fraction_enter.xhp @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ Enter "0 1/5" in a cell (without the quotation marks) and press the input key. In the input line above the spreadsheet you will see the value 0.2, which is used for the calculation. -If you enter "0 1/2" AutoCorrect causes the three characters 1, / and 2 to be replaced by a single character. The same applies to 1/4 and 3/4. This replacement is defined in Tools - AutoCorrect - Replace tab. +If you enter "0 1/2" AutoCorrect causes the three characters 1, / and 2 to be replaced by a single character. The same applies to 1/4 and 3/4. This replacement is defined in Tools - AutoCorrect Options - Options tab. If you want to see multi-digit fractions such as "1/10", you must change the cell format to the multi-digit fraction view. Open the context menu of the cell, and choose Format cells. Select "Fraction" from the Category field, and then select "-1234 10/81". You can then enter fractions such as 12/31 or 12/32 - the fractions are, however, automatically reduced, so that in the last example you would see 3/8.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/keyboard.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/keyboard.xhp index b8c81b0617..7a72deb9af 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/keyboard.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/keyboard.xhp @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ -Icon +Icon diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/00/00000004.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/00/00000004.xhp index 9fad52f318..9aa9ca658e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/00/00000004.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/00/00000004.xhp @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/choose_chart_type.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/choose_chart_type.xhp index 9e620e4509..9a72c4d7be 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/choose_chart_type.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/choose_chart_type.xhp @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ - * $Revision: 1.10 $ + * $Revision: 1.8 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@
- The available chart types + The available chart types Choose from the following chart types, depending on data type and intended presentation effect. @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ -Icon +Icon @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ -Icon +Icon diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/wiz_chart_elements.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/wiz_chart_elements.xhp index 613a89d97b..35a4108f54 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/wiz_chart_elements.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/wiz_chart_elements.xhp @@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ * * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * - * $RCSfile: wiz_chart_elements.xhp,v $ - * $Revision: 1.6.36.1 $ + * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ + * $Revision: 1.10 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,90 +35,90 @@ - -Chart Wizard - Chart Elements -/text/schart/01/wiz_chart_elements.xhp - - - -Chart Wizard - Chart Elements + + Chart Wizard - Chart Elements + /text/schart/01/wiz_chart_elements.xhp + + + + Chart Wizard - Chart Elements -On this page of the Chart Wizard you can choose the chart elements to be shown. -
- -
+ On this page of the Chart Wizard you can choose the chart elements to be shown. +
+ +
titles title -Enter a title for your chart. +Enter a title for your chart. subtitle -Enter a subtitle for your chart. +Enter a subtitle for your chart. x axis -Enter a label for the x-axis (horizontal). +Enter a label for the x-axis (horizontal). y axisx axis -Enter a label for the y-axis (vertical). +Enter a label for the y-axis (vertical). z axis -Enter a label for the z-axis. This option is only available for three-dimensional charts. +Enter a label for the z-axis. This option is only available for three-dimensional charts. legend -Displays a legend in your chart. +Displays a legend in your chart. legend left -Positions the legend to the left of the chart. +Positions the legend to the left of the chart. top -Positions the legend to the top of the chart. +Positions the legend to the top of the chart. right -Positions the legend to the right of the chart. +Positions the legend to the right of the chart. bottom -Positions the legend to the bottom of the chart. +Positions the legend to the bottom of the chart. grid x axis -Displays grid lines that are parallel to the x-axis. +Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the x-axis. y axis -Displays grid lines that are parallel to the y-axis. +Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the y-axis. z axis -Displays grid lines that are parallel to the z-axis. This option is only available for three-dimensional charts. +Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the z-axis. This option is only available for three-dimensional charts. secondary x axis ("2nd x axis" in spec doc) -Enter a label for the secondary x-axis. This option is only available for charts that support a secondary x-axis. +Enter a label for the secondary x-axis. This option is only available for charts that support a secondary x-axis. secondary y axis ("2nd y axis" in spec doc) -Enter a label for the secondary y-axis. This option is only available for charts that support a secondary y-axis. - -To enter chart elements -Enter titles or click the elements that you want to be shown on the current chart. -Titles -If you enter text for a title, subtitle, or any axis, the necessary space will be reserved to display the text next to the chart. If you do not enter a text, no space will be reserved, leaving more space to display the chart. -It is not possible to link the title text to a cell. You must enter the text directly.Regina: See wishlist and issues 8099, 64825 -When the chart is finished, you can change the position and other properties by the Format menu. -Legend -The legend displays the labels from the first row or column, or from the range that you have set in the Data Series dialog. If your chart does not contain labels, the legend displays text like "Row 1, Row 2, ...", or "Column A, Column B, ..." according to the row number or column letter of the chart data. -You cannot enter the text directly, it is automatically generated from the Name cell range. -Select one of the position options. When the chart is finished, you can specify other positions using the Format menu. -Grids +Enter a label for the secondary y-axis. This option is only available for charts that support a secondary y-axis. + + To enter chart elements + Enter titles or click the elements that you want to be shown on the current chart. + Titles + If you enter text for a title, subtitle, or any axis, the necessary space will be reserved to display the text next to the chart. If you do not enter a text, no space will be reserved, leaving more space to display the chart. + It is not possible to link the title text to a cell. You must enter the text directly.Regina: See wishlist and issues 8099, 64825 + When the chart is finished, you can change the position and other properties by the Format menu. + Legend + The legend displays the labels from the first row or column, or from the range that you have set in the Data Series dialog. If your chart does not contain labels, the legend displays text like "Row 1, Row 2, ...", or "Column A, Column B, ..." according to the row number or column letter of the chart data. + You cannot enter the text directly, it is automatically generated from the Name cell range. + Select one of the position options. When the chart is finished, you can specify other positions using the Format menu. + Grids grid x axis -Displays grid lines that are parallel to the x-axis. +Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the x-axis. y axis -Displays grid lines that are parallel to the y-axis. +Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the y-axis. z axis -Displays grid lines that are parallel to the z-axis. This option is only available for three-dimensional charts. -The visible grid lines can help to estimate the data values in the chart. -The distance of the grid lines corresponds to the interval settings in the Scale tab of the axis properties. -Grid lines are not available for pie charts. -Additional elements -For additional elements use the Insert menu of the chart in edit mode. There you can define the following elements: - - -Secondary axes - - -Minor grids - - -Data labels - - -Statistics, for example mean values, y error bars and trend lines - - -
- - - - -
- - +Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the z-axis. This option is only available for three-dimensional charts. + The visible grid lines can help to estimate the data values in the chart. + The distance of the grid lines corresponds to the interval settings in the Scale tab of the axis properties. + Grid lines are not available for pie charts. + Additional elements + For additional elements use the Insert menu of the chart in edit mode. There you can define the following elements: + + + Secondary axes + + + Minor grids + + + Data labels + + + Statistics, for example mean values, y error bars and trend lines + + +
+ + + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/wiz_data_range.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/wiz_data_range.xhp index fc7a90386d..33178e454c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/wiz_data_range.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/wiz_data_range.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Chart Wizard - Data Range -/text/schart/01/wiz_data_range.xhp - - - + + Chart Wizard - Data Range + /text/schart/01/wiz_data_range.xhp + + + data ranges in charts -mw added one entryChart Wizard - Data Range +mw added one entry +Chart Wizard - Data Range -On this page of the Chart Wizard you can select one single source of data range. This range may consist of more than one rectangular range of cells.context menu Data Ranges -Opens the Data Ranges dialog where you can edit Data Range and Data Series. -Use the Chart Wizard - Data Series page if you need more control over the data ranges. -
- -
-This dialog is only available for charts based on a Calc or Writer table. - -To specify a data range - - -Select the data range. Do one of the following: -Enter the data range in the text box. -In Calc, an example data range would be "$Sheet1.$B$3:$B$14". Note that a data range may consist of more than one region in a spreadsheet, e.g. "$Sheet1.A1:A5;$Sheet1.D1:D5" is also a valid data range. In Writer, an example data range would be "Table1.A1:E4". -In Calc, click Select data range to minimize the dialog, then drag to select the data range. Click Select data range again to enter the data range. Hold down the Ctrl key and drag to select multiple ranges. --- see issue 71894 -If you want a data range of multiple cell areas that are not next to each other, enter the first range, then manually add a semicolon at the end of the text box, then enter the other ranges. Use a semicolon as delimiter between ranges.UFI: not sure if you can use the mouse to "enter the other ranges". May be you must use the keyboard. - - -Click one of the options for data series in rows or in columns. - - -Check whether the data range has labels in the first row or in the first column or both. - - -In the preview you can see how the final chart will look.data range text box & shrinky + On this page of the Chart Wizard you can select one single source of data range. This range may consist of more than one rectangular range of cells.context menu Data Ranges + +Opens the Data Ranges dialog where you can edit Data Range and Data Series. + Use the Chart Wizard - Data Series page if you need more control over the data ranges. +
+ +
+ This dialog is only available for charts based on a Calc or Writer table. + + To specify a data range + + + Select the data range. Do one of the following: + Enter the data range in the text box. + In Calc, an example data range would be "$Sheet1.$B$3:$B$14". Note that a data range may consist of more than one region in a spreadsheet, e.g. "$Sheet1.A1:A5;$Sheet1.D1:D5" is also a valid data range. In Writer, an example data range would be "Table1.A1:E4". + In Calc, click Select data range to minimize the dialog, then drag over a cell area to select the data range.Hold down the Ctrl key and drag to select multiple ranges. --- see issue 71894 + If you want a data range of multiple cell areas that are not next to each other, enter the first range, then manually add a semicolon at the end of the text box, then enter the other ranges. Use a semicolon as delimiter between ranges. + + + Click one of the options for data series in rows or in columns. + + + Check whether the data range has labels in the first row or in the first column or both. + + + In the preview you can see how the final chart will look.data range text box & shrinky -Enter the data range that you want to include in your chart. To minimize this dialog while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.data series in rows -Data series get their data from consecutive rows in the selected range. For scatter charts, the first data series will contain x-values for all series. All other data series are used as y-values, one for each series.data series in columns -Data series get their data from consecutive columns in the selected range. For scatter charts, the first data column will contain x-values for all series. All other data columns are used as y-values, one for each series.first row as label -For data series in columns: The first row in the range is used as names for data series. For data series in rows: The first row in the range is used as categories. The remaining rows comprise the data series. If this check box is not selected, all rows are data series.first column as label -For data series in columns: The first column in the range is used as names for data series. For data series in rows: The first column in the range is used as categories. The remaining columns comprise the data columns. If this check box is not selected, all columns are data columns. -
- - - - -
- - + +Enter the data range that you want to include in your chart. To minimize this dialog while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.data series in rows + +Data series get their data from consecutive rows in the selected range. For scatter charts, the first data series will contain x-values for all series. All other data series are used as y-values, one for each series.data series in columns + +Data series get their data from consecutive columns in the selected range. For scatter charts, the first data column will contain x-values for all series. All other data columns are used as y-values, one for each series.first row as label + +For data series in columns: The first row in the range is used as names for data series. For data series in rows: The first row in the range is used as categories. The remaining rows comprise the data series. If this check box is not selected, all rows are data series.first column as label + +For data series in columns: The first column in the range is used as names for data series. For data series in rows: The first column in the range is used as categories. The remaining columns comprise the data columns. If this check box is not selected, all columns are data columns. +
+ + + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/04/01020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/04/01020000.xhp index 8e8df32f0c..5958aef1e8 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/04/01020000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/04/01020000.xhp @@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ * * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * - * $RCSfile: 01020000.xhp,v $ - * $Revision: 1.9.4.2 $ + * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ + * $Revision: 1.10 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,471 +35,445 @@ - -Shortcut Keys for Drawings -/text/sdraw/04/01020000.xhp - - - -
+ + Shortcut Keys for Drawings + /text/sdraw/04/01020000.xhp + + + +
shortcut keys;in drawings -drawings; shortcut keys + drawings; shortcut keys -Shortcut Keys for Drawings +Shortcut Keys for Drawings -The following is a list of shortcut keys specific to Drawing documents. -You can also use the general shortcut keys for $[officename]. - -
-Function Keys for Drawings -
- - -Shortcut Keys - - - -Effect - - - - - -F2 - - -Add or edit text. - - - - -F3 - - -Opens group to edit individual objects. - - - - -CommandCtrl+F3 - - -Close group editor. - - - - -Shift+F3 - - -Opens the Duplicate dialog. - - - - -F4 - - -Opens the Position and Size dialog. - - - - -F5 - - -Opens the Navigator. - - - - -F7 - - -Checks spelling. - - - - -CommandCtrl+F7 - - -Opens the Thesaurus. - - - - -F8 - - -Edit points on/off. - - - - -CommandCtrl+Shift+F8 - - -Fits to frame. - - - - -F11 - - -Opens Styles and Formatting window. - - -
+ The following is a list of shortcut keys specific to Drawing documents. + You can also use the general shortcut keys for $[officename]. + +
+ Function Keys for Drawings + + + + Shortcut Keys + + + + Effect + + + + + + F2 + + + Add or edit text. + + + + + F3 + + + Opens group to edit individual objects. + + + + + Command +Ctrl+F3 + + + Close group editor. + + + + + Shift+F3 + + + Opens the Duplicate dialog. + + + + + F4 + + + Opens the Position and Size dialog. + + + + + F5 + + + Opens the Navigator. + + + + + F7 + + + Checks spelling. + + + + + Command +Ctrl+F7 + + + Opens the Thesaurus. + + + + + F8 + + + Edit points on/off. + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Shift+F8 + + + Fits to frame. + + + + + F11 + + + Opens Styles and Formatting window. + + +
zooming;shortcut keys -drawings; zoom function in + drawings; zoom function in -Shortcut Keys for Drawings - - - -Shortcut Keys - - - -Effect - - - - - -Plus(+) Key - - -Zooms in. - - - - -Minus(-) Key - - -Zooms out. - - - - -Multiple(×) Key (number pad) - - -Zooms to fit entire page in screen. - - - - -Divide (÷) Key (number pad) - - -Zooms in on the current selection. - - - - -CommandCtrl+Shift+G - - -Groups selected objects. - - - - -Shift+Command+OptionCtrl+Alt+A - - -Ungroups selected group. - - - - -CommandCtrl+Shift+K - - -Combines selected objects. - - - - -Command+OptionCtrl+Alt+Shift+K - - -Uncombines selected objects. - - - - -CommandCtrl+Shift+ + - - -Bring to front. - - - - -CommandCtrl+ + - - -Bring forward. - - - - -CommandCtrl+ - - - -Send backward. - - - - -CommandCtrl+Shift+ - - - -Send to back. - - -
+Shortcut Keys for Drawings + + + + Shortcut Keys + + + + Effect + + + + + + Plus(+) Key + + + Zooms in. + + + + + Minus(-) Key + + + Zooms out. + + + + + Multiple(×) Key (number pad) + + + Zooms to fit entire page in screen. + + + + + Divide (÷) Key (number pad) + + + Zooms in on the current selection. + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Shift+G + + + Groups selected objects. + + + + + Shift+Command+Option +Ctrl+Alt+A + + + Ungroups selected group. + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Shift+K + + + Combines selected objects. + + + + + Command+Option +Ctrl+Alt+Shift+K + + + Uncombines selected objects. + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Shift+ + + + + Bring to front. + + + + + Command +Ctrl+ + + + + Bring forward. + + + + + Command +Ctrl+ - + + + Send backward. + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Shift+ - + + + Send to back. + + +
-Shortcut Keys Specific to Drawings - - - -Shortcut Keys - - - -Effect - - - - - -Page Up - - -Switch to previous page - - - - -Page Down - - -Switch to next page - - - - -CommandCtrl+Page Up - - -Switch to next layer - - - - -CommandCtrl+Page Down - - -Switch to previous layer - - - - -Arrow Key - - -Moves the selected object in the direction of the arrow key. - - - - -CommandCtrl+Arrow Key - - -Moves the page view in the direction of the arrow key. - - - - -CommandCtrl-click while dragging an object. Note: you must first enable the Copy when moving option in Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Draw - General to use this shortcut key. - - -Creates a copy of the dragged object when mouse button is released. - - - - -CommandCtrl+Enter with keyboard focus (F6) on a drawing object icon on Tools bar - - -Inserts a drawing object of default size into the center of the current view. - - - - -Shift+F10 - - -Opens the context menu for the selected object. - - - - -F2 - - -Enters text mode. - - - - -Enter - - -Enters text mode if a text object is selected. - - - - -CommandCtrl+Enter - - -Enters text mode if a text object is selected. If there are no text objects or if you have cycled through all of the text objects on the page, a new page is inserted. - - - - -OptionAlt - - -Press the OptionAlt key and drag with the mouse to draw or resize an object from the center of the object outward. - - - - -OptionAlt + click on an object - - -Selects the object behind the currently selected object. - - - - -OptionAlt+Shift+click an object - - -Selects the object in front of the currently selected object. - - - - -Shift key while selecting an object - - -Adds or removes object to or from the selection. - - - - -Shift+ drag while moving an object - - -The movement of the selected object is constrained by multiples of 45 degrees. - - - - -Shift+drag while creating or resizing an object - - -Constrains the size to keep the object's aspect ratio. - - - - -Tab - - -Cycles through the objects on the page in the order in which they were created. - - - - -Shift+Tab - - -Cycles through the objects on the page in the reverse-order in which they were created. - - - - -Esc - - -Exits current mode. - - -
- -
-Shortcut Keys for 3D Effects (Illumination tab) - - - -Shortcut Keys - - - -Effect - - - - - -Page Up - - -Changes the light source in the preview window. - - - - -Page Down - - -Changes the light source in the preview window. - - - - -Arrow keys - - -Moves the current light source in the direction of the arrow. - - - - -Spacebar - - -Enables the current light source and turns it on or off. - - -
- -
- -
- - -
- - + Shortcut Keys Specific to Drawings + + + + Shortcut Keys + + + + Effect + + + + + + Page Up + + + Switch to previous page + + + + + Page Down + + + Switch to next page + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Page Up + + + Switch to next layer + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Page Down + + + Switch to previous layer + + + + + Arrow Key + + + Moves the selected object in the direction of the arrow key. + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Arrow Key + + + Moves the page view in the direction of the arrow key. + + + + + Command +Ctrl-click while dragging an object. Note: you must first enable the Copy when moving option in Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Draw - General to use this shortcut key. + + + Creates a copy of the dragged object when mouse button is released. + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Enter with keyboard focus (F6) on a drawing object icon on Tools bar + + + Inserts a drawing object of default size into the center of the current view. + + + + + Shift+F10 + + + Opens the context menu for the selected object. + + + + + F2 + + + Enters text mode. + + + + + Enter + + + Enters text mode if a text object is selected. + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Enter + + + Enters text mode if a text object is selected. If there are no text objects or if you have cycled through all of the text objects on the page, a new page is inserted. + + + + + Option +Alt + + + Press the Option +Alt key and drag with the mouse to draw or resize an object from the center of the object outward. + + + + + Option +Alt + click on an object + + + Selects the object behind the currently selected object. + + + + + Option +Alt+Shift+click an object + + + Selects the object in front of the currently selected object. + + + + + Shift key while selecting an object + + + Adds or removes object to or from the selection. + + + + + Shift+ drag while moving an object + + + The movement of the selected object is constrained by multiples of 45 degrees. + + + + + Shift+drag while creating or resizing an object + + + Constrains the size to keep the object's aspect ratio. + + + + + Tab + + + Cycles through the objects on the page in the order in which they were created. + + + + + Shift+Tab + + + Cycles through the objects on the page in the reverse-order in which they were created. + + + + + Esc + + + Exits current mode. + + +
+ +
+ + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/color_define.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/color_define.xhp index 68e65ae7ba..b3b9405c0d 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/color_define.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/color_define.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Defining Custom Colors -/text/sdraw/guide/color_define.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Defining Custom Colors + /text/sdraw/guide/color_define.xhp + + + colors; defining and saving -user-defined colors -custom colors + user-defined colors + custom colors -Defining Custom Colors +Defining Custom Colors -If you want, you can mix a custom color and add it to a color table. -To define a custom color - - -Choose Format - Area and click the Colors tab. A table of the predefined colors is displayed. -Changes made to the standard color table are permanent and are saved automatically. - - -Click a color in the table that is similar to the one you want to mix. The color appears in the upper preview box to the right of the table. - - -Select the RGB or CMYK color model in the box below the preview boxes. -%PRODUCTNAME uses only the RGB color model for printing in color. The CMYK controls are provided only to ease the input of color values using CMYK notation. -The RGB color model mixes red, green and blue light to create colors on a computer screen. In the RGB model, the three color components are additive and can have values ranging from 0 (black) to 255 (white). The CMYK color model combines Cyan (C), Magenta (M), Yellow (Y), and blacK (K, also used for "Key") to create colors for printing. The four colors of the CMYK models are subtractive and are defined as percentages. Black corresponds to 100 % and white to 0 %. - - -Enter a numeric value in the boxes next to the color components. The new color appears in the preview box directly above the color model box. -You can also create a color using a color spectrum. Click the Edit button to open the Color dialog. Click a color and click OK. Use the Hue, Saturation, and Brightness boxes to adjust your color selection. - - -Do one of the following: - - - - -If you want to replace the color in the standard color table that your custom color is based on, click Modify. - - -If you want to add your custom color to the standard color table, enter a name in the Name text box and click Add. - - -
- - -Color bar -
- - + If you want, you can mix a custom color and add it to a color table. + To define a custom color + + + Choose Format - Area and click the Colors tab. A table of the predefined colors is displayed. + Changes made to the standard color table are permanent and are saved automatically. + + + Click a color in the table that is similar to the one you want to mix. The color appears in the upper preview box to the right of the table. + + + Select the RGB or CMYK color model in the box below the preview boxes. + %PRODUCTNAME uses only the RGB color model for printing in color. The CMYK controls are provided only to ease the input of color values using CMYK notation. + The RGB color model mixes red, green and blue light to create colors on a computer screen. In the RGB model, the three color components are additive and can have values ranging from 0 (black) to 255 (white). The CMYK color model combines Cyan (C), Magenta (M), Yellow (Y), and blacK (K, also used for "Key") to create colors for printing. The four colors of the CMYK models are subtractive and are defined as percentages. Black corresponds to 100 % and white to 0 %. + + + Enter a numeric value in the boxes next to the color components. The new color appears in the preview box directly above the color model box. + You can also create a color using a color spectrum. Click the Edit button to open the Color dialog. Click a color. Use the Hue, Saturation, and Brightness boxes to adjust your color selection. + + + Do one of the following: + + + + + If you want to replace the color in the standard color table that your custom color is based on, click Modify. + + + If you want to add your custom color to the standard color table, enter a name in the Name text box and click Add. + + +
+ + + Color bar +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/text_enter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/text_enter.xhp index ea09ca2a39..18865a01d4 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/text_enter.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/text_enter.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Adding Text -/text/sdraw/guide/text_enter.xhp - - - - - - + + Adding Text + /text/sdraw/guide/text_enter.xhp + + + text frames -inserting;text frames -copying;text from other documents -pasting;text from other documents -legends; drawings - - mw changed "adding;" to "inserting;" - Adding Text + inserting;text frames + copying;text from other documents + pasting;text from other documents + legends; drawings +mw changed "adding;" to "inserting;" +Adding Text - There are several types of text you can add to a drawing or presentation: - - - Text in a text frame - - - Text that changes character size to fill the frame size - - - Text that is added to any drawing object by double-clicking the object - - - Text that is copied from a Writer document - - - Text that is inserted from a text or HTML document - - - Adding a Text Frame - - - Click the Text icon -Icon - and move the mouse pointer to where you want to enter the text. - - - Drag a text frame to the size you want in your document. - - - Type or paste your text in the text frame. - - - Double-click the text to edit it or to format text properties, such as font size or font color. Click the border of the text object to edit the object properties, such as border color or arranging in front or behind other objects. - Fitting Text to Frames - - - Create a text frame as described in the steps above. The size of the frame determines the size of the text. - - - With the text object selected, choose Format - Text. The Text dialog opens. - - - On the Text tab page, clear the Fit height to text checkbox, then select the Fit to frame checkbox. Click OK. - - - Resizing the frame also resizes the text. - Text Tied to a Graphic - You can add text to any graphic after double-clicking the graphic. - To determine the position of the text, use the settings in Format - Text.this is the Draw command. In Writer it is Format - Object - Text attributes. - - - For example, click the arrow next to the Callouts icon -Icon + There are several types of text you can add to a drawing or presentation: + + + Text in a text box + + + Text that changes character size to fill the frame size + + + Text that is added to any drawing object by double-clicking the object + + + Text that is copied from a Writer document + + + Text that is inserted from a text document or HTML document + + + Adding a Text Box + + + Click the Text icon +Icon + and move the mouse pointer to where you want to enter the text box. + + + Drag a text box to the size you want in your document. + + + Type or paste your text into the text box. + + + Double-click the text to edit it or to format text properties, such as font size or font color. Click the border of the text box to edit the object properties, such as border color or arranging in front or behind other objects. + Fitting Text to Frames + + + Create a text box as described in the steps above. + + + With the text object selected, choose Format - Text. The Text dialog opens. + + + On the Text tab page, clear the Fit height to text checkbox, then select the Fit to frame checkbox. Click OK. + + + Now you can resize the text box to change the size and shape of the text characters. + + + Text Tied to a Graphic + You can add text to any graphic after double-clicking the graphic. + To determine the position of the text, use the settings in Format - Text.this is the Draw command. In Writer it is Format - Object - Text attributes. + + + For example, click the arrow next to the Callouts icon +Icon to open the Callouts toolbar. - - - Select a callout and move the mouse pointer to where you want the callout to start. - - - Drag to draw the callout. - - - Enter the text. - - - Copying Text - - - Select the text in your Writer document. - - - Copy the text to the clipboard (Edit - Copy). - - - Click the page or slide where you want to paste the text. - - - Paste the text using Edit - Paste or Edit - Paste special. - Using Paste special, you can choose the text format to be pasted. Depending on formats, you can copy different text attributes.UFI: added an emph tag, see #60923 - - - Importing Text - - - Click the page or slide where you want to import the text. - - - Choose Insert - File. - - - Select a text file (*.txt) or an HTML file and click Insert. The Insert Text dialog opens. Click OK to insert the text. - - -
- - + + + Select a callout and move the mouse pointer to where you want the callout to start. + + + Drag to draw the callout. + + + Enter the text. + + + Copying Text + + + Select the text in your Writer document. + + + Copy the text to the clipboard (Edit - Copy). + + + Click the page or slide where you want to paste the text. + + + Paste the text using Edit - Paste or Edit - Paste special. + Using Paste special, you can choose the text format to be pasted. Depending on formats, you can copy different text attributes.UFI: added an emph tag, see #60923 + + + Importing Text + + + Click the page or slide where you want to import the text. + + + Choose Insert - File. + + + Select a text file (*.txt) or an HTML file and click Insert. The Insert Text dialog opens. Click OK to insert the text. + + +
- - - - + - - -
- - +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000001.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000001.xhp index 55625fbee8..ae61dc49ec 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000001.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000001.xhp @@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ * * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * - * $RCSfile: 00000001.xhp,v $ - * $Revision: 1.17.4.2 $ + * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ + * $Revision: 1.10 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,14 +35,14 @@ - -Frequently-Used Buttons -/text/shared/00/00000001.xhp - - - -Frequently-Used Buttons -
+ + Frequently-Used Buttons + /text/shared/00/00000001.xhp + + + + Frequently-Used Buttons +
@@ -52,42 +52,48 @@ -Cancel -Clicking Cancel closes a dialog without saving any changes made. -
-
+Cancel + Clicking Cancel closes a dialog without saving any changes made. +
+
-Finish -Applies all changes and closes the wizard. -
-
-Toolbars -By clicking the arrow next to some icons you open a toolbar. To move a toolbar, drag the title bar. As soon as you release the mouse button, the toolbar remains at the new position. Drag the title bar to another position, or drag to an edge of the window, where the toolbar will dock. Close a toolbar by clicking the Close Window icon. Make the toolbar visible again by choosing View - Toolbars - (toolbar name). -
-
-Spin button - - -In form controls, a spin button is a property of a numerical field, currency field, date field, or time field. If the property "Spin button" is enabled, the field shows a pair of symbols with arrows pointing to opposing directions, either vertically or horizontally. - - -In the Basic IDE, a spin button is the name used for the numerical field together with the two arrow symbols. - - -You can type a numerical value into the field next to the spin button, or select the value with the up-arrow or down-arrow symbols on the spin button. On the keyboard you can press the up arrow and down arrow keys to increase or reduce the value. You can press the Page Up and Page Down keys to set the maximum and minimum value. -If the field next to the spin button defines numerical values, you can also define a measurement unit, for example, 1 cm or 5 mm, 12 pt or 2". -
-
-Convert -If you click forward through the dialog, this button is called Next. On the last page the button has the name Convert. The conversion is then performed by clicking the button. -
-
-Context Menu -To activate the context menu of an object, first click the object with the -left mouse button to select it, and then, while holding down the Ctrl key or the Command and Option keys, click the mouse button again click the right mouse button. Some context menus can be called even if the object has not been selected. Context menus are found just about everywhere in $[officename]. -
-
+Finish + Applies all changes and closes the wizard. +
+
+ Toolbars + By clicking the arrow next to some icons you open a toolbar. To move a toolbar, drag the title bar. As soon as you release the mouse button, the toolbar remains at the new position. Drag the title bar to another position, or drag to an edge of the window, where the toolbar will dock. Close a toolbar by clicking the Close Window icon. Make the toolbar visible again by choosing View - Toolbars - (toolbar name). +
+
+ Spin button + + + In form controls, a spin button is a property of a numerical field, currency field, date field, or time field. If the property "Spin button" is enabled, the field shows a pair of symbols with arrows pointing to opposing directions, either vertically or horizontally. + + + In the Basic IDE, a spin button is the name used for the numerical field together with the two arrow symbols. + + + You can type a numerical value into the field next to the spin button, or select the value with the up-arrow or down-arrow symbols on the spin button. On the keyboard you can press the up arrow and down arrow keys to increase or reduce the value. You can press the Page Up and Page Down keys to set the maximum and minimum value. + If the field next to the spin button defines numerical values, you can also define a measurement unit, for example, 1 cm or 5 mm, 12 pt or 2". +
+
+ Convert + If you click forward through the dialog, this button is called Next. On the last page the button has the name Convert. The conversion is then performed by clicking the button. +
+
+ Context Menu + To activate the context menu of an object, first click the object with the +left mouse button to select it, and then, while holding down the Ctrl key or the Command and Option keys, click the mouse button again + click the right mouse button. Some context menus can be called even if the object has not been selected. Context menus are found just about everywhere in $[officename]. + +
+
@@ -104,10 +110,11 @@ -Delete -Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation. -
-
+Delete + Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation. +
+
@@ -118,27 +125,31 @@ -Delete -Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation. -
-
-Metrics -You can enter values in the input fields in different units of measurement. The default unit is inches. However, if you want a space of exactly 1cm, then type "1cm". Additional units are available according to the context, for example, 12 pt for a 12 point spacing. If the value of the new unit is unrealistic, the program uses a predefined maximum or minimum value. -
-
-Close -Closes the dialog and saves all changes. -
-
-Close -Closes the dialog. -
-
+Delete + Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation. +
+
+ Metrics + You can enter values in the input fields in different units of measurement. The default unit is inches. However, if you want a space of exactly 1cm, then type "1cm". Additional units are available according to the context, for example, 12 pt for a 12 point spacing. If the value of the new unit is unrealistic, the program uses a predefined maximum or minimum value. +
+
+ Close + Closes the dialog and saves all changes. +
+
+ Close + Closes the dialog. +
+
-Apply -Applies the modified or selected values without closing the dialog. -
-
+Apply + Applies the modified or selected values without closing the dialog. +
+
@@ -168,40 +179,42 @@ -Shrink / Maximize -Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size. -The dialog is automatically minimized when you click into a sheet with the mouse. As soon as you release the mouse button, the dialog is restored and the reference range defined with the mouse is highlighted in the document by a blue frame. - - - - -Icon +Shrink / Maximize + Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size. + The dialog is automatically minimized when you click into a sheet with the mouse. As soon as you release the mouse button, the dialog is restored and the reference range defined with the mouse is highlighted in the document by a blue frame. +
+ + + +Icon - - -Shrink - - - - - -Icon + + + Shrink + + + + + +Icon - - -Maximize - - -
+ + + Maximize + + + -
-
+
+
-Preview Field -Displays a preview of the current selection. -
-
+Preview Field + Displays a preview of the current selection. +
+
@@ -211,34 +224,39 @@ -Next -Click the Next button, and the wizard uses the current dialog settings and proceeds to the next step. If you are on the last step, this button becomes Create. -
-
+Next + Click the Next button, and the wizard uses the current dialog settings and proceeds to the next step. If you are on the last step, this button becomes Create. +
+
-Backin Tools - Options -Resets modified values back to the $[officename] default values. -
-
+Backin Tools - Options + Resets modified values back to the $[officename] default values. +
+
-Resetall tab dialogs -Resets changes made to the current tab to those applicable when this dialog was opened. A confirmation query does not appear when you close the dialog. -
-
-Resetwhats this? -Resets modified values back to the default values. -A confirmation query does not appear. If you confirm the dialog with OK all settings in this dialog are reset. -
-
+Resetall tab dialogs + Resets changes made to the current tab to those applicable when this dialog was opened. A confirmation query does not appear when you close the dialog. +
+
+ Resetwhats this? + Resets modified values back to the default values. + A confirmation query does not appear. If you confirm the dialog with OK all settings in this dialog are reset. +
+
-Standarde.g. in Format - Para StyleUFI: Name is Default on Tools-Options-Writer-Basic Fonts -Resets the values visible in the dialog back to the default installation values. -A confirmation does not appear before the defaults are reloaded. -
-
+Standarde.g. in Format - Para StyleUFI: Name is Default on Tools-Options-Writer-Basic Fonts + Resets the values visible in the dialog back to the default installation values. + A confirmation does not appear before the defaults are reloaded. +
+
@@ -247,24 +265,26 @@ -Back -View the selections in the dialog made in the previous step. The current settings remain unchanged. This button can only be activated from page two on. -
-
-More -Click the More button to expand the dialog to show further options. Click again to restore the dialog. -
-See also the following functions: +Back + View the selections in the dialog made in the previous step. The current settings remain unchanged. This button can only be activated from page two on. +
+
+ More + Click the More button to expand the dialog to show further options. Click again to restore the dialog. +
+ See also the following functions: -The search supports regular expressions. You can enter "all.*", for example to find the first location of "all" followed by any characters. If you want to search for a text that is also a regular expression, you must precede every character with a \ character. You can switch the automatic evaluation of regular expression on and off in Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate. + The search supports regular expressions. You can enter "all.*", for example to find the first location of "all" followed by any characters. If you want to search for a text that is also a regular expression, you must precede every character with a \ character. You can switch the automatic evaluation of regular expression on and off in Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate. -If an error occurs, the function returns a logical or numerical value. + If an error occurs, the function returns a logical or numerical value. -(This command is only accessible through the context menu). + (This command is only accessible through the context menu). -By double-clicking a tool, you can use it for multiple tasks. If you call the tool with a single-click, it reverts back to the last selection after completing the task. + By double-clicking a tool, you can use it for multiple tasks. If you call the tool with a single-click, it reverts back to the last selection after completing the task. -Press Shift+F1 and point to a control to learn more about that control. + Press Shift+F1 and point to a control to learn more about that control. - - + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000402.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000402.xhp index a21661bec0..13d903891f 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000402.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000402.xhp @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -234,7 +234,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000406.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000406.xhp index ded3b8b559..fd0423fd32 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000406.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000406.xhp @@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ * * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * - * $RCSfile: 00000406.xhp,v $ - * $Revision: 1.18.4.4 $ + * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ + * $Revision: 1.10 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -51,16 +51,16 @@ Icon - - -Gallery - - - + + + Gallery + + + -
-
-Choose Tools - Gallery or click the Gallery icon on the Standard Bar - New Theme button - Files tab + + + Choose Tools - Gallery or click the Gallery icon on the Standard Bar - New Theme button - Files tab
Choose Tools - Spelling and Grammar @@ -74,117 +74,117 @@ Icon - - -Spelling and Grammar - - - + + + Spelling and Grammar + + + -
- -Choose Tools - Language - Hangul/Hanja Conversion (Asian language support must be enabled) + + + Choose Tools - Language - Hangul/Hanja Conversion (Asian language support must be enabled) -Choose Tools - Language - Chinese Translation (Asian language support must be enabled) + Choose Tools - Language - Chinese Translation (Asian language support must be enabled) -Choose Tools - Language - Chinese Translation (Asian language support must be enabled) - Edit terms button + Choose Tools - Language - Chinese Translation (Asian language support must be enabled) - Edit terms button -Choose Tools - Spelling and Grammar + Choose Tools - Spelling and Grammar -Choose Tools - Spelling and Grammar, then click Options + Choose Tools - Spelling and Grammar, then click Options -
-Choose Tools - Language - Thesaurus - -Command +
+ Choose Tools - Language - Thesaurus + + Command Ctrl+F7 -
-
-Choose Tools - Eyedropper ($[officename] Draw and $[officename] Impress) -
-Choose Tools - Media Player +
+
+ Choose Tools - Eyedropper ($[officename] Draw and $[officename] Impress) +
+ Choose Tools - Media Player -Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic, or press Option + Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic, or press Option Alt+F11 (if not assigned by your system) -
-Choose Tools - Macros - Record Macro - -
-Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic, click the Organizer button, click the Libraries tab, and then click the Password button +
+ Choose Tools - Macros - Record Macro + +
+ Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic, click the Organizer button, click the Libraries tab, and then click the Password button -Choose Tools - Extension Manager + Choose Tools - Extension Manager -Choose Tools - Extension Manager, click Updates button + Choose Tools - Extension Manager, click Updates button -Choose Tools - XML Filter Settings + Choose Tools - XML Filter Settings -Choose Tools - XML Filter Settings, then click New or Edit + Choose Tools - XML Filter Settings, then click New or Edit -Choose Tools - XML Filter Settings, then click Test XSLTs + Choose Tools - XML Filter Settings, then click Test XSLTs -Choose Tools - Customize + Choose Tools - Customize -Choose Tools - Customize - Menu tab + Choose Tools - Customize - Menu tab -Choose Tools - Customize - Menu tab, click New + Choose Tools - Customize - Menu tab, click New -Choose Tools - Customize - Menu tab, click Menu - Move + Choose Tools - Customize - Menu tab, click Menu - Move -Choose Tools - Customize - Keyboard tab (a document must be opened) + Choose Tools - Customize - Keyboard tab (a document must be opened) -Choose Tools - Customize - Toolbars tab + Choose Tools - Customize - Toolbars tab -Choose Tools - Customize - Events tab + Choose Tools - Customize - Events tab -Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Options + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect + Options -Choose Tools - AutoCorrect -- Optionstab + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect + - Optionstab -Choose Tools - AutoCorrect Options- Smart Tags tab + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect Options- Smart Tags tab -Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Options -- Replace tab + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect + Options + - Replace tab -Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Options -- Exceptions tab + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect + Options + - Exceptions tab -Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Options -- Custom Quotes tab + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect + Options + - Custom Quotes tab -Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Options - - Word Completion tab + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect + Options + - Word Completion tab -Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View + Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View -Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - View + Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - View -Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Draw - General + Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Draw - General -
-Path selection button in various wizards -Click Edit button for a few entries under Tools - Options - $[officename] - Paths - -
-Choose Tools - Options +
+ Path selection button in various wizards + Click Edit button for a few entries under Tools - Options - $[officename] - Paths + +
+ Choose Tools - Options -Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] + Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] -Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - User Data + Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - User Data -Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - General + Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - General -Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Memory + Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Memory -Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - View + Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - View -Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Print + Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Print
Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Paths @@ -209,139 +209,138 @@ Icon - - -Select color on the Color tab page - - - + + + Select color on the Color tab page + + + -
- -Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Fonts + + + Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Fonts -Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Security + Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Security -Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Java + Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Java -Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Online Update + Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Online Update -Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Accessibility + Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Accessibility -Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Appearance + Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Appearance -Choose Tools - Options - Load/Save + Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Improvement Program -Choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - General + Choose Tools - Options - Load/Save -Choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - VBA Properties + Choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - General -Choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - Microsoft Office + Choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - VBA Properties -Choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - HTML -Compatibility + Choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - Microsoft Office -Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings + Choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility -Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages + Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings -Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages - Complex Text Layout + Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages -
-Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages - -
-
-Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids, in the Available language modules list, select one of the language modules and then click Edit. -
-
-Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids - -
-Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Searching in Japanese + Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages - Complex Text Layout -Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Asian Layout +
+ Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages + +
+
+ Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids, in the Available language modules list, select one of the language modules and then click Edit. +
+
+ Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids + +
+ Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Searching in Japanese -Choose Tools - Options - Internet + Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Asian Layout -Choose Tools - Options - Internet - Proxy + Choose Tools - Options - Internet -Choose Tools - Options - Internet - Search + Choose Tools - Options - Internet - Proxy -Open a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer + Choose Tools - Options - Internet - Search -Open a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Compatibility + Open a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer -Open a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General + Open a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Compatibility -Open a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Mail Merge E-mail + Open a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General -Open a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption + Open a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Mail Merge E-mail -Open a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - View + Open a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption -Open a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Formatting Aids + Open a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - View -Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/%PRODUCTNAME Calc/%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Grid + Open a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Formatting Aids -
-Open a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Basic Fonts (Western) - -Open a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Basic Fonts (Asian) (only available if Asian language support is enabled) -
-Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/ %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Print + Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/%PRODUCTNAME Calc/%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Grid + +
+ Open a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Basic Fonts (Western) + + Open a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Basic Fonts (Asian) (only available if Asian language support is enabled) +
+ Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/ %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Print -Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Print + Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Print -Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Table + Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Table -Open a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Changes + Open a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Changes -Open an HTML document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web + Open an HTML document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web -Open an HTML document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Background + Open an HTML document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Background -Open a spreadsheet document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc + Open a spreadsheet document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc -Open a spreadsheet document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - General + Open a spreadsheet document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - General -Open a spreadsheet document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View + Open a spreadsheet document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View -Open a spreadsheet document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate + Open a spreadsheet document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate -Open a spreadsheet document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists + Open a spreadsheet document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists -Open a spreadsheet document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists - Copy button + Open a spreadsheet document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists - Copy button -Open a spreadsheet document, choose Tools - -Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Changes + Open a spreadsheet document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Changes -Open a presentation document, choose Tools -- Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress + Open a presentation document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress -Open a presentation document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - General + Open a presentation document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - General -Open a presentation document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - View + Open a presentation document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - View -Open a presentation document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - Grid + Open a presentation document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - Grid -Open a presentation document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - Print + Open a presentation document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - Print -Open a drawing document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Draw + Open a drawing document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Draw -Open a Math document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Math + Open a Math document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Math -Open a Math document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Math - Settings + Open a Math document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Math - Settings -Choose Tools - Options - Charts + Choose Tools - Options - Charts -Choose Tools - Options - Charts - Default Colors + Choose Tools - Options - Charts - Default Colors -Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base + Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base -Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base - Connections + Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base - Connections -Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases + Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases - - + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040500.xhp index 36585d1c46..83ff63e915 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040500.xhp @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ - * $Revision: 1.8 $ + * $Revision: 1.10 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,300 +35,302 @@ - -Format Menu -/text/shared/00/00040500.xhp - - - -Format Menu -Choose Format - Default Formatting + + Format Menu + /text/shared/00/00040500.xhp + + + + Format Menu + Choose Format - Default Formatting -
-Choose Format - Character - -On Text Formatting Bar (with cursor in object), click -
- - - - -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +
+ Choose Format - Character + + On Text Formatting Bar (with cursor in object), click +
+
+ + + +Icon - - -Character - - -
+ + + Character + + + -
-
-
-Choose Format - Character - Font tab -Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Font tab -Open context menu of a row header in a database table - choose Table Format - Font tab -Choose Format - Title - Character tab (Chart documents) -Choose Format - Legend - Character tab (Chart documents) -Choose Format - Axis - Character tab (Chart documents) +
+ +
+ Choose Format - Character - Font tab + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Font tab + Open context menu of a row header in a database table - choose Table Format - Font tab + Choose Format - Title - Character tab (Chart documents) + Choose Format - Legend - Character tab (Chart documents) + Choose Format - Axis - Character tab (Chart documents) -Choose Format - Cell - Font tab (spreadsheets) -Menu Format - Page - Header/Footer - Edit button (spreadsheets) +Choose Format - Cell - Font tab (spreadsheets) + Menu Format - Page - Header/Footer - Edit button (spreadsheets)
-
-Choose Format - Character - Font Effects tab -Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Font Effects tab +
+ Choose Format - Character - Font Effects tab + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Font Effects tab -Menu Format - Page - Header/Footer - Edit button (spreadsheets) +Menu Format - Page - Header/Footer - Edit button (spreadsheets)
-
-Choose Format - Character - Position tab -Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu of an entry and click Modify/New - Alignment tab +
+ Choose Format - Character - Position tab + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu of an entry and click Modify/New - Alignment tab -Menu Format - Page - Header/Footer - Edit button (spreadsheets) +Menu Format - Page - Header/Footer - Edit button (spreadsheets)
-
-Choose Format - Character - Asian Layout tab -Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu of an entry and click Modify/New - Asian Layout tab -
-
-Choose Format - Paragraph - Asian Typography tab (not in HTML) -Choose Format - Cell - Asian Typography tab +
+ Choose Format - Character - Asian Layout tab + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu of an entry and click Modify/New - Asian Layout tab +
+
+ Choose Format - Paragraph - Asian Typography tab (not in HTML) + Choose Format - Cell - Asian Typography tab -Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu of an entry and click Modify/New - Asian Typography tab -
-
-Choose Format - Character - Hyperlink tab -
-
-Choose Format - Paragraph - -On Text Formatting bar (with cursor in object), click -
- - - - -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu of an entry and click Modify/New - Asian Typography tab + +
+ Choose Format - Character - Hyperlink tab +
+
+ Choose Format - Paragraph + + On Text Formatting bar (with cursor in object), click +
+
+ + + +Icon - - -Paragraph - - -
+ + + Paragraph + + + -
-
-
-Choose Format - Paragraph - Alignment tab -Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Alignment tab -
-
-Choose Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing tab -Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Indents & Spacing tab -
-
-Choose Format - Paragraph - Tabs tab -Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Tabs tab -Double-click the ruler -
-
-(all options only in Writer or Calc) -Choose Format - Paragraph - Borders tab -Choose Format - Picture - Borders tab -Choose Format - Frame/Object - Borders tab -Choose Format - Page - Borders tab -Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Borders tab -Choose Format - Page - Header - More button -Choose Format - Page - Footer - More button -Choose Format - Cells - Borders tab +
+
+
+ Choose Format - Paragraph - Alignment tab + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Alignment tab +
+
+ Choose Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing tab + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Indents & Spacing tab +
+
+ Choose Format - Paragraph - Tabs tab + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Tabs tab + Double-click the ruler +
+
+ (all options only in Writer or Calc) + Choose Format - Paragraph - Borders tab + Choose Format - Picture - Borders tab + Choose Format - Frame/Object - Borders tab + Choose Format - Page - Borders tab + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Borders tab + Choose Format - Page - Header - More button + Choose Format - Page - Footer - More button + Choose Format - Cells - Borders tab -
-
-Menu Format - Paragraph - Border tab - Spacing to contents +
+
+ Menu Format - Paragraph - Border tab - Spacing to contents -Menu Format - Page - Border - Spacing to contents + Menu Format - Page - Border - Spacing to contents -
-
-Choose Format - Paragraph - Background tab -Choose Format - Character - Background tab -Choose Format - Picture - Background tab -Choose Format - Frame/Object - Background tab -Choose Format - Page - Background tab -Choose Format - Page - Header - More button -Choose Format - Page - Footer - More button -Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Background tab -Choose Insert/Edit - Section - Background tab -Choose Format - Cells - Background tab +
+
+ Choose Format - Paragraph - Background tab + Choose Format - Character - Background tab + Choose Format - Picture - Background tab + Choose Format - Frame/Object - Background tab + Choose Format - Page - Background tab + Choose Format - Page - Header - More button + Choose Format - Page - Footer - More button + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Background tab + Choose Insert/Edit - Section - Background tab + Choose Format - Cells - Background tab -
-
-Choose Format - Page - Organizer tab -Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Organizer tab -
-
-Choose Format - Page - Page tab -Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Page tab -
-
-Choose Format - Page - Header tab -Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Header tab -
-
-Choose Format - Page - Footer tab -Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Footer tab -
-
-Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - -F11 key -On Formatting Bar, click - - - - -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} + +
+ Choose Format - Page - Organizer tab + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Organizer tab +
+
+ Choose Format - Page - Page tab + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Page tab +
+
+ Choose Format - Page - Header tab + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Header tab +
+
+ Choose Format - Page - Footer tab + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Footer tab +
+
+ Choose Format - Styles and Formatting + + F11 key + On Formatting Bar, click +
+ + + +Icon - - -Styles and Formatting - - -
+ + + Styles and Formatting + + + -
-
- +
+
+ On the Drawing bar, click -
- - - - -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +
+
+ + + +Icon - - - -3D Effects - - - -
+ + + + 3D Effects + + + + -
-
-Choose Format - 3D Effects - Geometry tab +
+
+ Open the context menu of the 3D object, choose 3D Effects - Geometry tab -Choose Format - 3D Effects - Shading tab + Open the context menu of the 3D object, choose 3D Effects - Shading tab -Choose Format - 3D Effects - Illumination tab + Open the context menu of the 3D object, choose 3D Effects - Illumination tab -Choose Format - 3D Effects - Textures tab + Open the context menu of the 3D object, choose 3D Effects - Textures tab -Choose Format - 3D Effects - Material tab + Open the context menu of the 3D object, choose 3D Effects - Material tab -
-Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering - -On Formatting toolbar, click -
- - - - -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +
+ Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering + + On Formatting toolbar, click +
+
+ + + +Icon - - -Bullets On/Off - - -
+ + + Bullets On/Off + + + -
-
-
-Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering. Open Options tab page -Open Styles and Formatting - Presentation Styles - context menu of an Outline Style - choose New/Modify +
+ +
+ Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering. Open Options tab page + Open Styles and Formatting - Presentation Styles - context menu of an Outline Style - choose New/Modify -Open Styles and Formatting - Numbering Styles - context menu of an entry - choose New/Modify + Open Styles and Formatting - Numbering Styles - context menu of an entry - choose New/Modify -
-
-Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering - Bullets tab -Open Styles and Formatting - Presentation Styles - context menu of an Outline Style - choose New/Modify +
+
+ Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering - Bullets tab + Open Styles and Formatting - Presentation Styles - context menu of an Outline Style - choose New/Modify -Open Styles and Formatting - Numbering Styles - context menu of an entry - choose New/Modify + Open Styles and Formatting - Numbering Styles - context menu of an entry - choose New/Modify -
-
-Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering - Numbering tab -Open Styles and Formatting - Presentation Styles - context menu of an Outline Style - choose New/Modify +
+
+ Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering - Numbering tab + Open Styles and Formatting - Presentation Styles - context menu of an Outline Style - choose New/Modify -Open Styles and Formatting - Numbering Styles - context menu of an entry - choose New/Modify + Open Styles and Formatting - Numbering Styles - context menu of an entry - choose New/Modify -
-
-Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering - Outline tab -Open Styles and Formatting - Numbering Styles - context menu of an entry - choose New/Modify +
+ Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering - Graphics tab + +
+ Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering - Outline tab + Open Styles and Formatting - Numbering Styles - context menu of an entry - choose New/Modify -
-
-Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering. Open Position tab page -Choose Tools - Outline Numbering - Position tab +
+
+ Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering. Open Position tab page + Choose Tools - Outline Numbering - Position tab -Open Styles and Formatting - Numbering Styles - context menu of an entry - choose New/Modify + Open Styles and Formatting - Numbering Styles - context menu of an entry - choose New/Modify -
-
-Menu Format - Picture - Crop tab +
+
+ Menu Format - Picture - Crop tab - + Icon on the Picture toolbar: - - - -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} + + + +Icon - - -Crop - - -
+ + + Crop + + +
-
-Choose Format - Change Case - -Open context menu (text) - choose Case/Characters - -
-
-Menu Format - Asian phonetic guide - -
- - +
+ Choose Format - Change Case + + Open context menu (text) - choose Case/Characters + +
+
+ Menu Format - Asian phonetic guide + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040502.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040502.xhp index 7e0eff3118..48436b43ff 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040502.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040502.xhp @@ -35,522 +35,502 @@ - -Format Menu -/text/shared/00/00040502.xhp - - - -Format Menu -
-Choose Format - Line (Impress and Draw)i64150 -Choose Format - Object - Line (Calc) -Choose Format - Graphic - Line (Writer) -On Line and Filling Bar, click -
- - - - -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} + + Format Menu + /text/shared/00/00040502.xhp + + + + Format Menu +
+ Choose Format - Line (Impress and Draw)i64150 + Choose Format - Object - Line (Writer) + Choose Format - Graphic - Line (Calc) + On Line and Filling Bar, click +
+
+ + + +Icon - - -Line - - -
+ + + Line + + + -
-
-
-Choose Format - Drawing Object - +
+ +
+ Choose Format - Object - Graphic - - -Line - Line tab -Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu and choose Modify/New - Line tab (presentation documents) -Choose Format - Title - Borders tab (charts) -Choose Format - Legend - Borders tab (charts) -Choose Format - Axis - Line tab (charts) -Choose Format - Grid - Line tab (charts) -Choose Format - Chart Wall - Borders tab (charts) -Choose Format - Chart Floor - Borders tab (charts) -Choose Format - Chart Area - Borders tab (charts) -
-Choose Format - Drawing Object - +Line - Line tab + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu and choose Modify/New - Line tab (presentation documents) + Choose Format - Title - Borders tab (charts) + Choose Format - Legend - Borders tab (charts) + Choose Format - Axis - Line tab (charts) + Choose Format - Grid - Line tab (charts) + Choose Format - Chart Wall - Borders tab (charts) + Choose Format - Chart Floor - Borders tab (charts) + Choose Format - Chart Area - Borders tab (charts) + + Choose Format - Object - Graphic - - -Line - Line Styles tab +Line - Line Styles tab -Choose Format - Drawing Object - + Choose Format - Object - Graphic - - -Line - Arrow Styles tab +Line - Arrow Styles tab -
-Choose Format - Drawing Object - +
+ Choose Format - Object - Graphic - - -Area - -On Line and Filling Bar, click -
- - - - -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Area + + On Line and Filling Bar, click +
+
+ + + +Icon - - -Area - - -
+ + + Area + + + -
-
-
-Choose Format - Drawing Object - +
+
+
+ Choose Format - Object - Graphic - - -Area - Area tab -Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu and choose Modify/New - Area tab (presentation documents) -Choose Format - Title - Area tab (chart documents) -Choose Format - Legend - Area tab (chart documents) -Choose Format - Chart Wall - Area tab (chart documents) -Choose Format - Chart Floor - Area tab (chart documents) -Choose Format - Chart Area - Area tab (chart documents) -Choose Format - Page - Background tab (in $[officename] Impress and $[officename] Draw) -
-
-Choose Format - Drawing Object - +Area - Area tab + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu and choose Modify/New - Area tab (presentation documents) + Choose Format - Title - Area tab (chart documents) + Choose Format - Legend - Area tab (chart documents) + Choose Format - Chart Wall - Area tab (chart documents) + Choose Format - Chart Floor - Area tab (chart documents) + Choose Format - Chart Area - Area tab (chart documents) + Choose Format - Page - Background tab (in $[officename] Impress and $[officename] Draw) +
+
+ Choose Format - Object - Graphic - - -Area - Colors tab -Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Colors tab -
-
-Choose Format - Area - Transparency tab (drawing documents) -Choose Format - Area - Transparency tab (presentation documents) -Choose Format - Chart Wall - Transparency tab (chart documents) -Choose Format - Chart Area - Transparency tab (chart documents) -Choose Format - Chart Floor - Transparency tab (chart documents) -Choose Format - Title - All Titles - Transparency tab (chart documents) -Choose Format - Title - Main Title - Transparency tab (chart documents) -Choose Format - Title - Subtitle - Transparency tab (chart documents) -Choose Format - Title - Title (X Axis) - Transparency tab (chart documents) -Choose Format - Title - Title (Y Axis) - Transparency tab (chart documents) -Choose Format - Title - Title (Z Axis) - Transparency tab (chart documents) -Choose Format - Object Properties - Data Point - Transparency - tab (chart documents) -Choose Format - Object Properties - Data Series - Transparency tab (chart documents) -
-Choose Format - Drawing Object - +Area - Colors tab + Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Colors tab + +
+ Choose Format - Area - Transparency tab (drawing documents) + Choose Format - Area - Transparency tab (presentation documents) + Choose Format - Chart Wall - Transparency tab (chart documents) + Choose Format - Chart Area - Transparency tab (chart documents) + Choose Format - Chart Floor - Transparency tab (chart documents) + Choose Format - Title - All Titles - Transparency tab (chart documents) + Choose Format - Title - Main Title - Transparency tab (chart documents) + Choose Format - Title - Subtitle - Transparency tab (chart documents) + Choose Format - Title - Title (X Axis) - Transparency tab (chart documents) + Choose Format - Title - Title (Y Axis) - Transparency tab (chart documents) + Choose Format - Title - Title (Z Axis) - Transparency tab (chart documents) + Choose Format - Object Properties - Data Point - Transparency - tab (chart documents) + Choose Format - Object Properties - Data Series - Transparency tab (chart documents) +
+ Choose Format - Object - Graphic - - -Area - Shadow tab +Area - Shadow tab -Choose Format - Drawing Object - + Choose Format - Object - Graphic - - -Area - Gradients tab +Area - Gradients tab -Choose Format - Drawing Object - + Choose Format - Object - Graphic - - -Area - Hatching tab +Area - Hatching tab -Choose Format - Drawing Object - + Choose Format - Object - Graphic - - -Area - Bitmaps tab +Area - Bitmaps tab -Choose Format - Drawing Object - Text - Text Attributes + Choose Format - Object - Text - Text Attributes Graphic - Define Text Attributes - -Text +Text -Choose Format - Drawing Object - Text - Text Attributes + Choose Format - Object - Text - Text Attributes Graphic - Define Text Attributes - -Text -- Text tab +Text- Text tab -Choose Format - Drawing Object - Text - Text Attributes + Choose Format - Object - Text - Text Attributes Graphic - Define Text Attributes - -Text -- Text Animation tab +Text- Text Animation tab -
-Choose Format - Drawing Object - +
+ Choose Format - Object - Graphic - - -Position and Size - -F4 key +Position and Size + + F4 key F4 key -
-
- - - - -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} + +
+
+ + + +Icon - - -Position and SizeUFI: in Form Design toolbar - - -
+ + + Position and SizeUFI: in Form Design toolbar + + + -
-
-Open the context menu for the object - choose Name - -
-
-Open the context menu for the object - choose Description - -
-Choose Format - Drawing Object - +
+
+ Open the context menu for the object - choose Name + +
+
+ Open the context menu for the object - choose Description + +
+ Choose Format - Object - Graphic - - -Position and Size - Position and Size tab +Position and Size - Position and Size tab -
-Choose Format - Drawing Object - +
+ Choose Format - Object - Graphic - - -Position and Size - Rotation tab - - - - -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Position and Size - Rotation tab +
+ + + +Icon - - -Rotate - - -
+ + + Rotate + + + -
-Choose Format - Drawing Object - +
+ Choose Format - Object - Graphic - - -Position and Size - Slant & Corner Radius tab +Position and Size - Slant & Corner Radius tab -Choose Format - Drawing Object - + Choose Format - Object - Graphic - - -Position and Size - Legend tab (only for textbox callouts, not for custom shapes callouts) +Position and Size - Legend tab (only for textbox callouts, not for custom shapes callouts) -
-Choose Edit - Points - -Open context menu - choose Edit Points +
+ Choose Edit - Points + + Open context menu - choose Edit Points Open context menu - choose Edit Points -F8 key + F8 key F8 key -
- - - - -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +
+
+ + + +Icon - - -Edit Points - - -
+ + + Edit Points + + + -
-
-
-Choose Format - Character (drawing functions) -Open context menu - choose Character - -
-
-Open context menu - choose Size - -
-
-Open context menu - choose Style - -
-
-Open context menu - choose Style - Bold - -
- - - - -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} + + +
+ Choose Format - Character (drawing functions) + Open context menu - choose Character + +
+
+ Open context menu - choose Size + +
+
+ Open context menu - choose Style + +
+
+ Open context menu - choose Style - Bold + +
+
+ + + +Icon - - -Bold - - -
+ + + Bold + + + -
-
-
-Open context menu - choose Style - Italic - -
- - - - -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} + + +
+ Open context menu - choose Style - Italic + +
+
+ + + +Icon - - -Italic - - -
+ + + Italic + + + -
-
-
-open context menu - choose Style - Underline - -
- - - - -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} + + +
+ Open context menu - choose Style - Underline + +
+
+ + + +Icon - - -Underline - - -
+ + + Underline + + + -
-
-
-Open context menu - choose Style - Strikethrough - -
-
-Open context menu - choose Style - Shadow - -
-
-Open context menu - choose Style - Contour - -
-
-Open context menu - choose Style - Superscript - -
-
-Open context menu - choose Style - Subscript - -
-
-Open context menu - choose Line Spacing - -
-
-Open context menu - choose Line Spacing - Single - -
-
-Open context menu - choose Line Spacing - 1.5 Lines - -
-
-Open context menu - choose Line Spacing - Double - -
-
-Choose Format - Alignment - Left (drawing functions) -Open context menu - choose Alignment - Left - -
- - - - -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} + + +
+ Open context menu - choose Style - Strikethrough + +
+
+ Open context menu - choose Style - Shadow + +
+
+ Open context menu - choose Style - Contour + +
+
+ Open context menu - choose Style - Superscript + +
+
+ Open context menu - choose Style - Subscript + +
+
+ Open context menu - choose Line Spacing + +
+
+ Open context menu - choose Line Spacing - Single + +
+
+ Open context menu - choose Line Spacing - 1.5 Lines + +
+
+ Open context menu - choose Line Spacing - Double + +
+
+ Choose Format - Alignment - Left (drawing functions) + Open context menu - choose Alignment - Left + +
+
+ + + +Icon - - -Align Left - - -
+ + + Align Left + + + -
-
-
-Choose Format - Alignment - Right (drawing functions) -Open context menu - choose Alignment - Right - -
- - - - -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} + + +
+ Choose Format - Alignment - Right (drawing functions) + Open context menu - choose Alignment - Right + +
+
+ + + +Icon - - -Align Right - - -
+ + + Align Right + + + -
-
-
-Choose Format - Alignment - Centered (drawing functions) -Open context menu - choose Alignment - Center - -
- - - - -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} + + +
+ Choose Format - Alignment - Centered (drawing functions) + Open context menu - choose Alignment - Center + +
+
+ + + +Icon - - -Align Center Horizontally + + + Align Center Horizontally Centered - - -
+ + + -
-
-
-Choose Format - Alignment - Justified (drawing functions) -Open context menu - choose Alignment - Justified - -
- - - - -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} + + +
+ Choose Format - Alignment - Justified (drawing functions) + Open context menu - choose Alignment - Justified + +
+
+ + + +Icon - - -Justified - - -
+ + + Justified + + + -
-
-Click Fontwork icon on Drawing bar +
+ + Click Fontwork icon on Drawing bar -
-Choose Format - Group - -Open context menu - choose Group - -
-
-Choose Format - Group - Group (text documents, spreadsheets) -Choose Modify - Group (drawing documents) -Open context menu - choose Group - Group (form objects) -
- - - - -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +
+ Choose Format - Group + + Open context menu - choose Group + +
+
+ Choose Format - Group - Group (text documents, spreadsheets) + Choose Modify - Group (drawing documents) + Open context menu - choose Group - Group (form objects) +
+
+ + + +Icon - - -Group - - -
+ + + Group + + + -
-
-
-Choose Format - Group - Ungroup (text documents, spreadsheets) -Choose Modify - Ungroup (drawing documents) -Open context menu - choose Ungroup - -
- - - - -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} + + +
+ Choose Format - Group - Ungroup (text documents, spreadsheets) + Choose Modify - Ungroup (drawing documents) + Open context menu - choose Ungroup + +
+
+ + + +Icon - - -Ungroup - - -
+ + + Ungroup + + + -
-
-
-Choose Format - Group - Exit Group (text documents, spreadsheets) -Choose Modify - Exit Group (drawing documents) -Open context menu - choose Exit Group - -
- - - - -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} + + +
+ Choose Format - Group - Exit Group (text documents, spreadsheets) + Choose Modify - Exit Group (drawing documents) + Open context menu - choose Exit Group + +
+
+ + + +Icon - - -Exit Group - - -
+ + + Exit Group + + + -
-
-
-Choose Format - Group - Enter Group (text documents, spreadsheets) -Choose Modify - Enter Group (drawing documents) -Open context menu - choose Enter Group - -
- - - - -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} + + +
+ Choose Format - Group - Enter Group (text documents, spreadsheets) + Choose Modify - Enter Group (drawing documents) + Open context menu - choose Enter Group + +
+
+ + + +Icon - - -Enter Group - - -
+ + + Enter Group + + + -
-
- - + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010200.xhp index bb8e2c622b..fe29fd8c34 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010200.xhp @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ New Document -Creates a new document entitled "Label1" for editing. +Creates a new document for editing.
Creating labels diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100200.xhp index c4729f3d81..7d7290d66f 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100200.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -General -/text/shared/01/01100200.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: added spec "Electronic Signatures and Encryption GUI" -dedr: reviewed - - - -
+ + General + /text/shared/01/01100200.xhp + + + +
version numbers of documents -documents; version numbers -files; version numbers -editing time of documents -documents; editing time + documents; version numbers + files; version numbers + editing time of documents + documents; editing time -General -Contains basic information about the current file. -
-
- -
+General + Contains basic information about the current file. +
+
+ +
-File -Displays the file name. -Type: -Displays the file type for the current document. -Location: -Displays the path and the name of the directory where the file is stored. -Size: -Displays the size of the current document in bytes. -Created: -Displays the date and time and author when the file was first saved. -Modified: -Displays the date and time and author when the file was last saved in a $[officename] file format. -Digitally signed: -Displays the date and the time when the file was last signed as well as the name of the author who signed the document. -Digital Signature -Opens the Digital Signatures dialog where you can manage digital signatures for the current document. -Last printed: -Displays the date and time and user name when the file was last printed. -Document number: -Displays the number of times that the file has been saved. - Editing time: -Displays the amount of time that the file has been open for editing since the file was created. The editing time is updated when you save the file. +File + Displays the file name. + Type: + Displays the file type for the current document. + Location: + Displays the path and the name of the directory where the file is stored. + Size: + Displays the size of the current document in bytes. + Created: + Displays the date and time and author when the file was first saved. + Modified: + Displays the date and time and author when the file was last saved in a $[officename] file format. + Digitally signed: + Displays the date and the time when the file was last signed as well as the name of the author who signed the document. + Digital Signature + Opens the Digital Signatures dialog where you can manage digital signatures for the current document. + Last printed: + Displays the date and time and user name when the file was last printed. + Revision number: + Displays the number of times that the file has been saved. + Editing time: + Displays the amount of time that the file has been open for editing since the file was created. The editing time is updated when you save the file. -Apply User Data -Saves the user's full name with the file. You can edit the name by choosing Tools - Options - $[officename] - User Data. +Apply User Data + Saves the user's full name with the file. You can edit the name by choosing Tools - Options - $[officename] - User Data. -Delete -Resets the editing time to zero, the creation date to the current date and time, and the version number to 1. The modification and printing dates are also deleted. -Template: -Displays the template that was used to create the file. - - +Delete + Resets the editing time to zero, the creation date to the current date and time, and the version number to 1. The modification and printing dates are also deleted. + Template: + Displays the template that was used to create the file. + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100000.xhp index 0087c1bd60..04edc3b612 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100000.xhp @@ -1,5 +1,4 @@ - - + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100001.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100001.xhp index 6e83808296..c74c9bb561 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100001.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100001.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -List of Regular Expressions -/text/shared/01/02100001.xhp - - - + + List of Regular Expressions + /text/shared/01/02100001.xhp + + + regular expressions; list of -lists;regular expressions -concatenation, see ampersand symbol -ampersand symbol, see also operators -mw added two cross-referencesList of Regular Expressions + lists;regular expressions + replacing;tab stops (regular expressions) + tab stops;regular expressions + concatenation, see ampersand symbol + ampersand symbol, see also operators +mw added "replacing;" and "tab stops;" +List of Regular Expressions - - - -Character - - -Result/Use - - - - -Any character - - -Represents the given character unless otherwise specified. - - - - -. - - -Represents any single character except for a line break or paragraph break. For example, the search term "sh.rt" returns both "shirt" and "short". - - - - -^ - - -Only finds the search term if the term is at the beginning of a paragraph. Special objects such as empty fields or character-anchored frames, at the beginning of a paragraph are ignored. Example: "^Peter". - - - - -$ - - -Only finds the search term if the term appears at the end of a paragraph. Special objects such as empty fields or character-anchored frames at the end of a paragraph are ignored. Example: "Peter$". - - - - -* - - -Finds zero or more of the characters in front of the "*". For example, "Ab*c" finds "Ac", "Abc", "Abbc", "Abbbc", and so on. - - - - -+ - - -Finds one or more of the characters in front of the "+". For example, "AX.+4" finds "AXx4", but not "AX4". -The longest possible string that matches this search pattern in a paragraph is always found. If the paragraph contains the string "AX 4 AX4", the entire passage is highlighted. - - - - -? - - -Finds zero or one of the characters in front of the "?". For example, "Texts?" finds "Text" and "Texts" and "x(ab|c)?y" finds "xy", "xaby", or "xcy". - - - - -\ - - -Search interprets the special character that follows the "\" as a normal character and not as a regular expression (except for the combinations \n, \t, \>, and \<). For example, "tree\." finds "tree.", not "treed" or "trees". - - - - -\n - - -Represents a line break that was inserted with the Shift+Enter key combination. To change a line break into a paragraph break, enter \n in the Search for and Replace with boxes, and then perform a search and replace. -\n in the Search for text box stands for a line break that was inserted with the Shift+Enter key combination. -\n in the Replace with text box stands for a paragraph break that can be entered with the Enter or Return key. - - - - -\t - - -Represents a tab. You can also use this expression in the Replace with box. - - - - -\> - - -Only finds the search term if it appears at the end of a word. For example, "book\>" finds "checkbook", but not "bookmark". - - - - -\< - - -Only finds the search term if it appears at the beginning of a word. For example, "\<book" finds "bookmark", but not "checkbook". - - - - -^$ - - -Finds an empty paragraph. - - - - -^. - - -Finds the first character of a paragraph. - - - - -& or $0 - - -Adds the string that was found by the search criteria in the Search for box to the term in the Replace with box when you make a replacement. -For example, if you enter "window" in the Search for box and "&frame" in the Replace with box, the word "window" is replaced with "windowframe". -You can also enter an "&" in the Replace with box to modify the Attributes or the Format of the string found by the search criteria. - - - - -[abc123] - - -Represents one of the characters that are between the brackets. - - - - -[a-e] - - -Represents any of the characters that are between a and e. - - - - -[a-eh-x] - - -Represents any of the characters that are between a-e and h-x. - - - - -[^a-s] - - -Represents any character that is not between a and s. - - - - -\xXXXX - - -Represents a special character based on its four-digit hexadecimal code (XXXX). -The code for the special character depends on the font used. You can view the codes by choosing Insert - Special Character. - - - - -| - - -Finds the terms that occur before or after the "|". For example, "this|that" finds "this" and "that". - - - - -{2} - - -Defines the number of times that the character in front of the opening bracket occurs. For example, "tre{2}" finds "tree". - - - - -{1,2} - - -Defines the number of times that the character in front of the opening bracket can occur. For example, "tre{1,2}" finds both "tree" and "treated". - - - - -{1,} - - -Defines the minimum number of times that the character in front of the opening bracket can occur. For example, "tre{2,}" finds "tree", "treee", and "treeeee". - - - - -( ) - - -In the Search for box: -Defines the characters inside the parentheses as a reference. You can then refer to the first reference in the current expression with "\1", to the second reference with "\2", and so on. -For example, if your text contains the number 13487889 and you search using the regular expression (8)7\1\1, "8788" is found. -You can also use () to group terms, for example, "a(bc)?d" finds "ad" or "abcd". -In the Replace with box:i83322 -Use $ (dollar) instead of \ (backslash) to replace references. Use $0 to replace the whole found string. - - - - -[:alpha:] - - -Represents an alphabetic character. Use [:alpha:]+ to find one of them. - - - - -[:digit:] - - -Represents a decimal digit. Use [:digit:]+ to find one of them. - - - - -[:alnum:] - - -Represents an alphanumeric character ([:alpha:] and [:digit:]). - - - - -[:space:] - - -Represents a space character (but not other whitespace characters).UFI: see #i41706# - - - - -[:print:] - - -Represents a printable character. - - - - -[:cntrl:] - - -Represents a nonprinting character. - - - - -[:lower:] - - -Represents a lowercase character if Match case is selected in Options. - - - - -[:upper:] - - -Represents an uppercase character if Match case is selected in Options. - - - -
-Examples -You can combine the search terms to form complex searches. -To find three-digit numbers alone in a paragraph -^[:digit:]{3}$ -^ means the match has to be at the start of a paragraph, -[:digit:] matches any decimal digit, -{3} means there must be exactly 3 copies of "digit", -$ means the match must end a paragraph. -
- -Wiki page about regular expressions in Writer -Wiki page about regular expressions in Calc -
- - + + + + Character + + + Result/Use + + + + + Any character + + + Represents the given character unless otherwise specified. + + + + + . + + + Represents any single character except for a line break or paragraph break. For example, the search term "sh.rt" returns both "shirt" and "short". + + + + + ^ + + + Only finds the search term if the term is at the beginning of a paragraph. Special objects such as empty fields or character-anchored frames, at the beginning of a paragraph are ignored. Example: "^Peter". + + + + + $ + + + Only finds the search term if the term appears at the end of a paragraph. Special objects such as empty fields or character-anchored frames at the end of a paragraph are ignored. Example: "Peter$". + + + + + * + + + Finds zero or more of the characters in front of the "*". For example, "Ab*c" finds "Ac", "Abc", "Abbc", "Abbbc", and so on. + + + + + + + + + Finds one or more of the characters in front of the "+". For example, "AX.+4" finds "AXx4", but not "AX4". + The longest possible string that matches this search pattern in a paragraph is always found. If the paragraph contains the string "AX 4 AX4", the entire passage is highlighted. + + + + + ? + + + Finds zero or one of the characters in front of the "?". For example, "Texts?" finds "Text" and "Texts" and "x(ab|c)?y" finds "xy", "xaby", or "xcy". + + + + + \ + + + Search interprets the special character that follows the "\" as a normal character and not as a regular expression (except for the combinations \n, \t, \>, and \<). For example, "tree\." finds "tree.", not "treed" or "trees". + + + + + \n + + + Represents a line break that was inserted with the Shift+Enter key combination. To change a line break into a paragraph break, enter \n in the Search for and Replace with boxes, and then perform a search and replace. + \n in the Search for text box stands for a line break that was inserted with the Shift+Enter key combination. + \n in the Replace with text box stands for a paragraph break that can be entered with the Enter or Return key. + + + + + \t + + + Represents a tab. You can also use this expression in the Replace with box. + + + + + \> + + + Only finds the search term if it appears at the end of a word. For example, "book\>" finds "checkbook", but not "bookmark". + + + + + \< + + + Only finds the search term if it appears at the beginning of a word. For example, "\<book" finds "bookmark", but not "checkbook". + + + + + ^$ + + + Finds an empty paragraph. + + + + + ^. + + + Finds the first character of a paragraph. + + + + + & or $0 + + + Adds the string that was found by the search criteria in the Search for box to the term in the Replace with box when you make a replacement. + For example, if you enter "window" in the Search for box and "&frame" in the Replace with box, the word "window" is replaced with "windowframe". + You can also enter an "&" in the Replace with box to modify the Attributes or the Format of the string found by the search criteria. + + + + + [abc123] + + + Represents one of the characters that are between the brackets. + + + + + [a-e] + + + Represents any of the characters that are between a and e. + + + + + [a-eh-x] + + + Represents any of the characters that are between a-e and h-x. + + + + + [^a-s] + + + Represents any character that is not between a and s. + + + + + \xXXXX + + + Represents a special character based on its four-digit hexadecimal code (XXXX). + The code for the special character depends on the font used. You can view the codes by choosing Insert - Special Character. + + + + + | + + + Finds the terms that occur before or after the "|". For example, "this|that" finds "this" and "that". + + + + + {2} + + + Defines the number of times that the character in front of the opening bracket occurs. For example, "tre{2}" finds "tree". + + + + + {1,2} + + + Defines the number of times that the character in front of the opening bracket can occur. For example, "tre{1,2}" finds both "tree" and "treated". + + + + + {1,} + + + Defines the minimum number of times that the character in front of the opening bracket can occur. For example, "tre{2,}" finds "tree", "treee", and "treeeee". + + + + + ( ) + + + In the Search for box: + Defines the characters inside the parentheses as a reference. You can then refer to the first reference in the current expression with "\1", to the second reference with "\2", and so on. + For example, if your text contains the number 13487889 and you search using the regular expression (8)7\1\1, "8788" is found. + You can also use () to group terms, for example, "a(bc)?d" finds "ad" or "abcd". + In the Replace with box:i83322 + Use $ (dollar) instead of \ (backslash) to replace references. Use $0 to replace the whole found string. + + + + + [:alpha:] + + + Represents an alphabetic character. Use [:alpha:]+ to find one of them. + + + + + [:digit:] + + + Represents a decimal digit. Use [:digit:]+ to find one of them. + + + + + [:alnum:] + + + Represents an alphanumeric character ([:alpha:] and [:digit:]). + + + + + [:space:] + + + Represents a space character (but not other whitespace characters).UFI: see #i41706# + + + + + [:print:] + + + Represents a printable character. + + + + + [:cntrl:] + + + Represents a nonprinting character. + + + + + [:lower:] + + + Represents a lowercase character if Match case is selected in Options. + + + + + [:upper:] + + + Represents an uppercase character if Match case is selected in Options. + + + +
+ + Examples + You can combine the search terms to form complex searches. + To find three-digit numbers alone in a paragraph + ^[:digit:]{3}$ + ^ means the match has to be at the start of a paragraph, + [:digit:] matches any decimal digit, + {3} means there must be exactly 3 copies of "digit", + $ means the match must end a paragraph. +
+ + Wiki page about regular expressions in Writer + Wiki page about regular expressions in Calc +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02180000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02180000.xhp index ad65cf89cb..5f91dd86fe 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02180000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02180000.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Edit Links -/text/shared/01/02180000.xhp - - - + + Edit Links + /text/shared/01/02180000.xhp + + + @@ -51,37 +49,49 @@ opening; files with links -links; updating specific links -updating; links, on opening -links; opening files with + links; updating specific links + updating; links, on opening + links; opening files with -Edit Links -Lets you edit the properties of each link in the current document, including the path to the source file. This command is not available if the current document does not contain links to other files. +Edit Links + Lets you edit the properties of each link in the current document, including the path to the source file. This command is not available if the current document does not contain links to other files. -
- -
-When you open a file that contains links, you are prompted to update the links. Depending on where the linked files are stored, the update process can take several minutes to complete. -If you are loading a file that contains DDE links, you are prompted to update the links. Decline the update if you do not want to establish a connection to the DDE server. -Double-click a link in the list to open a file dialog where you can select another object for this link. -Source file -Lists the path to the source file. -Element -Lists the application (if known) that last saved the source file. -Type -Lists the file type, such as graphic, of the source file. -Status -Lists additional information about the source file. -Automatic -Automatically updates the contents of the link when you open the file. Any changes made in the source file are then displayed in the file containing the link. Linked graphic files can only be updated manually. This option is not available for a linked graphic file. -The Automatic option is only available for DDE links. You can insert a DDE link by copying the contents from one file and pasting by choosing Edit - Paste Special, and then selecting the Link box. As DDE is a text based linking system, only the displayed decimals are copied into the target sheet.removed Calc switch: this feature can be used wherever a cell area can be pasted: everywhere -Manual -Only updates the link when you click the Update button. -Update -Updates the selected link so that the most recently saved version of the linked file is displayed in the current document. -Modify -Change the source file for the selected link. -Break Link -Breaks the link between the source file and the current document. The most recently updated contents of the source file are kept in the current document. - - +
+ +
+ When you open a file that contains links, you are prompted to update the links. Depending on where the linked files are stored, the update process can take several minutes to complete. + If you are loading a file that contains DDE links, you are prompted to update the links. Decline the update if you do not want to establish a connection to the DDE server. + +Double-click a link in the list to open a file dialog where you can select another object for this link. + Source file + Lists the path to the source file. + Element + Lists the application (if known) that last saved the source file. + Type + Lists the file type, such as graphic, of the source file. + Status + Lists additional information about the source file. + +Automatic + Automatically updates the contents of the link when you open the file. Any changes made in the source file are then displayed in the file containing the link. Linked graphic files can only be updated manually. This option is not available for a linked graphic file. + The Automatic option is only available for DDE links. You can insert a DDE link by copying the contents from one file and pasting by choosing Edit - Paste Special, and then selecting the Link box. As DDE is a text based linking system, only the displayed decimals are copied into the target sheet.removed Calc switch: this feature can be used wherever a cell area can be pasted: everywhere + +Manual + Only updates the link when you click the Update button. + +Update + Updates the selected link so that the most recently saved version of the linked file is displayed in the current document. + +Modify + Change the source file for the selected link. + +Break Link + Breaks the link between the source file and the current document. The most recently updated contents of the source file are kept in the current document. + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02220100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02220100.xhp index 41414cb091..60d5535269 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02220100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02220100.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Description -/text/shared/01/02220100.xhp - - - -Description -Lists the properties for the selected hotspot. -
- -
-Hyperlink -Lists the properties of the URL that is attached to the hotspot. -URL: -Enter the URL for the file that you want to open when you click the selected hotspot. If you want to jump to a named anchor within the current document, the address should be of the form “file:///C/[current_document_name]#anchor_name”. -Alternative text: -Enter the text that you want to display when the mouse rests on the hotspot in a browser.If you do not enter any text, the Address is displayed. -Frame: -Enter the name of the target frame that you want to open the URL in. You can also select a standard frame name that is recognized by all browsers from the list.. -Name: -Enter a name for the image. -Description -Enter a description for the hotspot.see http://specs.openoffice.org/appwide/drawing_layer/imagemapdialog.odt -
-Priority Table -
- - + + Description + /text/shared/01/02220100.xhp + + + + +Description + Lists the properties for the selected hotspot. +
+ +
+ Hyperlink + Lists the properties of the URL that is attached to the hotspot. + +URL: + Enter the URL for the file that you want to open when you click the selected hotspot. If you want to jump to a named anchor within the current document, the address should be of the form "file:///C/[current_document_name]#anchor_name". + +Alternative text: + Enter the text that you want to display when the mouse rests on the hotspot in a browser.If you do not enter any text, the Address is displayed. + +Frame: + Enter the name of the target frame that you want to open the URL in. You can also select a standard frame name that is recognized by all browsers from the list.. + +Name: + Enter a name for the image. + +Description + Enter a description for the hotspot.see http://specs.openoffice.org/appwide/drawing_layer/imagemapdialog.odt +
+ Priority Table +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230402.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230402.xhp index 09c62ee20a..5440ae2ee4 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230402.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230402.xhp @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ -Icon +Icon diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02250000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02250000.xhp index 1785afe06c..598d11072c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02250000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02250000.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Bibliography Database -/text/shared/01/02250000.xhp - - - -
+ + Bibliography Database + /text/shared/01/02250000.xhp + + + +
-Bibliography Database -
-Insert, delete, edit, and organize records in the bibliography database. + +Bibliography Database +
+ Insert, delete, edit, and organize records in the bibliography database. -
- -
-If the fields in your database are read-only, ensure that the data source view is closed. -The supplied bibliography database contains sample records of books. -Use the toolbar to select a table in the bibliography database, to search for records, or to sort the records using filters. -Lists the available tables in the current database. Click a name in the list to display the records for that table.removed icons; converted to hidden help text -Go to the first record in the table. -Go to the previous record in the table. -Go to the next record in the table. -Go to the last record in the table. -Type the number of the record that you want to display, and then press Enter. -Inserting a New Record -Inserts a new record into the current table.To create a record, click the asterisk (*) button at the bottom of the table view. An empty row is added at the end of the table. -Select the type of record that you want to create. $[officename] inserts a number in the Type column of the record that corresponds to the type that you select here. -Enter a short name for the record. The short name appears in the Identifier column in the list of records. +
+ +
+ If the fields in your database are read-only, ensure that the data source view is closed. + The supplied bibliography database contains sample records of books. + Use the toolbar to select a table in the bibliography database, to search for records, or to sort the records using filters. + +Lists the available tables in the current database. Click a name in the list to display the records for that table.removed icons; converted to hidden help text + +Go to the first record in the table. + +Go to the previous record in the table. + +Go to the next record in the table. + +Go to the last record in the table. + +Type the number of the record that you want to display, and then press Enter. + +Inserting a New Record + Inserts a new record into the current table.To create a record, click the asterisk (*) button at the bottom of the table view. An empty row is added at the end of the table. + +Select the type of record that you want to create. $[officename] inserts a number in the Type column of the record that corresponds to the type that you select here. + +Enter a short name for the record. The short name appears in the Identifier column in the list of records. @@ -89,26 +97,39 @@ -Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table. -Finding and Filtering Records -You can search for records by matching a keyword to a field entry. -Entering Search key -Type the information that you want to search for, and then press Enter. To change the filter options for the search, long-click the AutoFilter icon, and then select a different data field. You can use wildcards such as % or * for any number of characters, and _ or ? for one character in your search. To display all of the records in the table, clear this box, and then press Enter. -AutoFilter -Long-click to select the data field that you want to search using the term that you entered in the Search Key box. You can only search one data field. -The list of table records is automatically updated to match the new filter settings. -Use the Standard Filter to refine and to combine AutoFilter search options. - -To display all of the records in a table, click the Remove Filter icon. -Deleting a Record -To delete a record in the current table, right-click the row header of the record, and then select Delete. Deletes the selected record. -Changing the data source -Data Source -Select the data source for the bibliography database. -Only the data sources that are registered in $[officename] are listed. To add a data source to the list, choose Tools – Data Sources. + +Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table. + Finding and Filtering Records + You can search for records by matching a keyword to a field entry. + +Entering Search key + Type the information that you want to search for, and then press Enter. To change the filter options for the search, long-click the AutoFilter icon, and then select a different data field. You can use wildcards such as % or * for any number of characters, and _ or ? for one character in your search. To display all of the records in the table, clear this box, and then press Enter. + +AutoFilter + Long-click to select the data field that you want to search using the term that you entered in the Search Key box. You can only search one data field. + The list of table records is automatically updated to match the new filter settings. + +Use the Standard Filter to refine and to combine AutoFilter search options. + + +To display all of the records in a table, click the Remove Filter icon. + +Deleting a Record + To delete a record in the current table, right-click the row header of the record, and then select Delete. Deletes the selected record. + Changing the data source + +Data Source + Select the data source for the bibliography database. -Column Arrangement -Lets you map the column headings to data fields from a different data source. To define a different data source for your bibliography, click the Data Source button on the record Object Bar. + +Column Arrangement + Lets you map the column headings to data fields from a different data source. To define a different data source for your bibliography, click the Data Source button on the record Object Bar. @@ -139,9 +160,12 @@ -Select the data field that you want to map to the current Column name. To change the available data fields, select a different data source for your bibliography. -Deletes the current record. -Lets you choose a different data source for your bibliography. -Inserts a new record into the current table. - - + +Select the data field that you want to map to the current Column name. To change the available data fields, select a different data source for your bibliography. + +Deletes the current record. + Lets you choose a different data source for your bibliography. + +Inserts a new record into the current table. + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp index 04573dcba0..ce63206358 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ -Click to apply the current font color to the selected characters. You can also click here, and then drag a selection to change the text color. Click the arrow next to the icon to open the Font color toolbar. +Click to apply the current font color to the selected characters. You can also click here, and then drag a selection to change the text color. Click the arrow next to the icon to open the Font color toolbar. @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ -Overlines or removes overlining from the selected text. If the cursor is not in a word, the new text that you enter is overlined. +Overlines or removes overlining from the selected text. If the cursor is not in a word, the new text that you enter is overlined. Overlining Select the overlining style that you want to apply. To apply the overlining to words only, select the Individual Words box. @@ -199,4 +199,4 @@
- \ No newline at end of file + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030100.xhp index 9cd75a17cd..a64e65ccd0 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030100.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Indents and Spacing -/text/shared/01/05030100.xhp - - - -
+ + Indents and Spacing + /text/shared/01/05030100.xhp + + + +
spacing; between paragraphs in footnotes -line spacing; paragraph -spacing; lines and paragraphs -single-line spacing in text -one and a half line spacing in text -double-line spacing in paragraphs -leading between paragraphs -paragraphs;spacing + line spacing; paragraph + spacing; lines and paragraphs + single-line spacing in text + one and a half line spacing in text + double-line spacing in paragraphs + leading between paragraphs + paragraphs;spacing mw deleted "footnote spacings" and added "paragraphs;spacing" -Indents and Spacing -Sets the indenting and the spacing options for the paragraph. -
-To change the measurement units used in this dialog, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General, and then select a new measurement unit in the Settings area. + +Indents and Spacing + Sets the indenting and the spacing options for the paragraph. +
+ To change the measurement units used in this dialog, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General, and then select a new measurement unit in the Settings area. -You can also set indents using the ruler. To display the ruler, choose View - Ruler. + +You can also set indents using the ruler. To display the ruler, choose View - Ruler.
- -
-Indent -Specify the amount of space to leave between the left and the right page margins and the paragraph. -Before text -Enter the amount of space that you want to indent the paragraph from the page margin. If you want the paragraph to extend into the page margin, enter a negative number. In Left-to-Right languages, the left edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the left page margin. In Right-to-Left languages, the right edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the right page margin. -After text -Enter the amount of space that you want to indent the paragraph from the page margin. If you want the paragraph to extend into the page margin, enter a negative number. In Left-to-Right languages, the right edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the right page margin. In Right-to-Left languages, the left edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the left page margin. -First line -Indents the first line of a paragraph by the amount that you enter. To create a hanging indent enter a positive value for "Before text" and a negative value for "First line". To indent the first line of a paragraph that uses numbering or bullets, choose "Format - Bullets and Numbering", click the Position tab, and then enter an amount in the "Minimum space numbering <-> text" box.UFI: for complicated UI names, prefer quotes rather than emph tags for the Extended Help text because the yellow bubbles currently don't know any formatting -Automatic + + + Indent + Specify the amount of space to leave between the left and the right page margins and the paragraph. + +Before text + Enter the amount of space that you want to indent the paragraph from the page margin. If you want the paragraph to extend into the page margin, enter a negative number. In Left-to-Right languages, the left edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the left page margin. In Right-to-Left languages, the right edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the right page margin. + +After text + Enter the amount of space that you want to indent the paragraph from the page margin. If you want the paragraph to extend into the page margin, enter a negative number. In Left-to-Right languages, the right edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the right page margin. In Right-to-Left languages, the left edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the left page margin. + +First line + Indents the first line of a paragraph by the amount that you enter. To create a hanging indent enter a positive value for "Before text" and a negative value for "First line". To indent the first line of a paragraph that uses numbering or bullets, choose "Format - Bullets and Numbering - Position". + +Automatic -Automatically indents a paragraph according to the font size and the line spacing. The setting in the First Line box is ignored. + Automatically indents a paragraph according to the font size and the line spacing. The setting in the First Line box is ignored. -Spacing -Specify the amount of space to leave between selected paragraphs. -Above paragraph -Enter the amount of space that you want to leave above the selected paragraph(s). + Spacing + Specify the amount of space to leave between selected paragraphs. + +Above paragraph + Enter the amount of space that you want to leave above the selected paragraph(s). @@ -104,45 +112,63 @@ -Below paragraph -Enter the amount of space that you want to leave below the selected paragraph(s). -Line spacing -Specify the amount of space to leave between lines of text in a paragraph. -Single -Applies single line spacing to the current paragraph. This is the default setting. + +Below paragraph + Enter the amount of space that you want to leave below the selected paragraph(s). + +Line spacing + Specify the amount of space to leave between lines of text in a paragraph. + Single + Applies single line spacing to the current paragraph. This is the default setting. -1.5 lines -Sets the line spacing to 1.5 lines. + 1.5 lines + Sets the line spacing to 1.5 lines. -Double -Sets the line spacing to two lines. + Double + Sets the line spacing to two lines. -Proportional -Select this option and then enter a percentage value in the box, where 100% corresponds to single line spacing. -At Least -Sets the minimum line spacing to the value that you enter in the box. -If you use different font sizes within a paragraph, the line spacing is automatically adjusted to the largest font size. If you prefer to have identical spacing for all lines, specify a value in At least that corresponds to the largest font size. -Leading -Sets the height of the vertical space that is inserted between two lines. -Fixed + Proportional + Select this option and then enter a percentage value in the box, where 100% corresponds to single line spacing. + At Least + Sets the minimum line spacing to the value that you enter in the box. + If you use different font sizes within a paragraph, the line spacing is automatically adjusted to the largest font size. If you prefer to have identical spacing for all lines, specify a value in At least that corresponds to the largest font size. + Leading + Sets the height of the vertical space that is inserted between two lines. + Fixed -Sets the line spacing to exactly match the value that you enter in the box. This can result in cropped characters. + Sets the line spacing to exactly match the value that you enter in the box. This can result in cropped characters. -of -Enter the value to use for the line spacing. - -Register-true + +of + Enter the value to use for the line spacing. + + Register-true -Activate + +Activate -Aligns the baseline of each line of text to a vertical document grid, so that each line is the same height. To use this feature, you must first activate the Register-true option for the current page style. To do this, choose Format - Page, click on the Page tab, and then select the Register-true box in the Layout settings area. + Aligns the baseline of each line of text to a vertical document grid, so that each line is the same height. To use this feature, you must first activate the Register-true option for the current page style. To do this, choose Format - Page, click on the Page tab, and then select the Register-true box in the Layout settings area. -
- -Writing Register-true -
+ +
+ + Writing Register-true +
- - + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040300.xhp index 293ffc9379..e7e72e7f84 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040300.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Header -/text/shared/01/05040300.xhp - - - -
-Header -Adds a header to the current page style. A header is an area in the top page margin, where you can add text or graphics. -
-If you want, you can also add borders or a background fill to a header. + + Header + /text/shared/01/05040300.xhp + + + +
+ +Header + Adds a header to the current page style. A header is an area in the top page margin, where you can add text or graphics. +
+ If you want, you can also add borders or a background fill to a header.
- -
-To add a header to the current page style, select Header on, and then click OK. + + + To add a header to the current page style, select Header on, and then click OK. -If you want to extend a header into the page margins, insert a frame into the header. + If you want to extend a header into the page margins, insert a frame into the header. -To quickly move the text cursor from the document text to the header or footer, press CommandCtrl+Page Up or Page Down. Press the same key again to move the text cursor back into the document text. + +To quickly move the text cursor from the document text to the header or footer, press Command +Ctrl+Page Up or Page Down. Press the same key again to move the text cursor back into the document text. -Header -Set the properties of the header. -Header on -Adds a header to the current page style. -Same content left/righti80087 -Even and odd pages share the same content. To assign a different header to even and odd pages, clear this option, and then click Edit. +Header + Set the properties of the header. + +Header on + Adds a header to the current page style. + +Same content left/righti80087 + Even and odd pages share the same content. To assign a different header to even and odd pages, clear this option, and then click Edit. -Left margin -Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the left edge of the header. -Right margin -Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the page and the right edge of the header. -Spacing -Enter the amount of space that you want to maintain between the bottom edge of the header and the top edge of the document text. -Use dynamic spacing -Overrides the Spacing setting, and allows the header to expand into the area between the header and the document text. -Height -Enter the height that you want for the header. -AutoFit height -Automatically adjusts the height of the header to fit the content that you enter. - -More -Defines a border, a background color, or a background pattern for the header. -Edit + +Left margin + Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the left edge of the header. + +Right margin + Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the page and the right edge of the header. + +Spacing + Enter the amount of space that you want to maintain between the bottom edge of the header and the top edge of the document text. + +Use dynamic spacing + Overrides the Spacing setting, and allows the header to expand into the area between the header and the document text. + +Height + Enter the height that you want for the header. + +AutoFit height + Automatically adjusts the height of the header to fit the content that you enter. + + +More + Defines a border, a background color, or a background pattern for the header. + +Edit -Add or edit header text. + Add or edit header text. + Add or edit header text. -
-Headers -Changing measurement units -Borders -Backgrounds -
- - +
+ Headers + Changing measurement units + Borders + Backgrounds +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040400.xhp index ffc76d66af..c44ab73039 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040400.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Footer -/text/shared/01/05040400.xhp - - - -
-Footer -Adds a footer to the current page style. A footer is an area in the bottom page margin, where you can add text or graphics. -
-If you want, you can also add borders or a background fill to a footer. + + Footer + /text/shared/01/05040400.xhp + + + +
+ +Footer + Adds a footer to the current page style. A footer is an area in the bottom page margin, where you can add text or graphics. +
+ If you want, you can also add borders or a background fill to a footer.
- -
-To insert a footer into the current document, select Footer on, and then click OK. + + + To insert a footer into the current document, select Footer on, and then click OK. -If you want to extend a footer into the page margins, insert a frame into the footer. + If you want to extend a footer into the page margins, insert a frame into the footer. -To quickly move the text cursor from the document text to the header or footer, press CommandCtrl+Page Up or Page Down. Press the same key again to move the text cursor back into the document text. + +To quickly move the text cursor from the document text to the header or footer, press Command +Ctrl+Page Up or Page Down. Press the same key again to move the text cursor back into the document text. -Footer -Set the properties of the footer. -Footer on -Adds a footer to the current page style. -Same content left/right -Even and odd pages share the same content. To assign a different footer to even and odd pages, clear this option, and then click Edit. +Footer + Set the properties of the footer. + +Footer on + Adds a footer to the current page style. + +Same content left/right + Even and odd pages share the same content. To assign a different footer to even and odd pages, clear this option, and then click Edit. -Left margin -Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the left edge of the footer. -Right margin -Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the page and the right edge of the footer. -Spacing -Enter the amount of space that you want to maintain between the bottom edge of the document text and the top edge of the footer. -Use dynamic spacing -Overrides the Spacing setting and allows the footer to expand into the area between the footer and document text. -Height -Enter the height you want for the footer. -AutoFit height -Automatically adjusts the height of the footer to fit the content you enter. - -More -Defines a border, a background color, or a background pattern for the footer. -Edit + +Left margin + Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the left edge of the footer. + +Right margin + Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the page and the right edge of the footer. + +Spacing + Enter the amount of space that you want to maintain between the bottom edge of the document text and the top edge of the footer. + +Use dynamic spacing + Overrides the Spacing setting and allows the footer to expand into the area between the footer and document text. + +Height + Enter the height you want for the footer. + +AutoFit height + Automatically adjusts the height of the footer to fit the content you enter. + + +More + Defines a border, a background color, or a background pattern for the footer. + +Edit -Add or edit footer text. + Add or edit footer text. + Add or edit footer text. -
-Footers -Changing measurement units -Borders -Backgrounds -
- - +
+ Footers + Changing measurement units + Borders + Backgrounds +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210300.xhp index 4db7de5d5f..f8a106f190 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210300.xhp @@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ * * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * - * $RCSfile: 05210300.xhp,v $ - * $Revision: 1.6.4.1 $ + * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ + * $Revision: 1.8 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,61 +35,69 @@ - -Gradients -/text/shared/01/05210300.xhp - - - -
+ + Gradients + /text/shared/01/05210300.xhp + + + +
-Gradients -Set the properties of a gradient, or save and load gradient lists. -
-
- -
+Gradients + Set the properties of a gradient, or save and load gradient lists. +
+
+ +
-Type -Lists the available gradients. Click the gradient that you want to apply, and then click OK. +Type + Select the gradient that you want to apply. -Center X -Enter the horizontal offset for the gradient, where 0% corresponds to the current horizontal location of the endpoint color in the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To box. +Center X + Enter the horizontal offset for the gradient, where 0% corresponds to the current horizontal location of the endpoint color in the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To box. -Center Y -Enter the vertical offset for the gradient, where 0% corresponds to the current vertical location of the endpoint color in the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To box. +Center Y + Enter the vertical offset for the gradient, where 0% corresponds to the current vertical location of the endpoint color in the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To box. -Angle -Enter a rotation angle for the selected gradient. +Angle + Enter a rotation angle for the selected gradient. -Border -Enter the amount by which you want to adjust the area of the endpoint color on the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To box. -From +Border + Enter the amount by which you want to adjust the area of the endpoint color on the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To box. + From -Select a color for the beginning point of the gradient. +Select a color for the beginning point of the gradient. -Enter the intensity for the color in the From box, where 0% corresponds to black, and 100 % to the selected color. -To +Enter the intensity for the color in the From box, where 0% corresponds to black, and 100 % to the selected color. + To -Select a color for the endpoint of the gradient. +Select a color for the endpoint of the gradient. -Enter the intensity for the color in the To box, where 0% corresponds to black, and 100 % to the selected color. +Enter the intensity for the color in the To box, where 0% corresponds to black, and 100 % to the selected color. -Gradients -Select the type of gradient that you want to apply or create. +Gradients + Select the type of gradient that you want to apply or create. -Add -Adds a custom gradient to the current list. Specify the properties of your gradient, and then click this button +Add + Adds a custom gradient to the current list. Specify the properties of your gradient, and then click this button -Modify -Applies the current gradient properties to the selected gradient. If you want, you can save the gradient under a different name. - - +Modify + Applies the current gradient properties to the selected gradient. If you want, you can save the gradient under a different name. + + -Load Gradients List -Load a different list of gradients. +Load Gradients List + Load a different list of gradients. -Save Gradients List -Saves the current list of gradients, so that you can load it later. - - +Save Gradients List + Saves the current list of gradients, so that you can load it later. + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05220000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05220000.xhp index 5c653382fa..dce8233dc5 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05220000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05220000.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Text -/text/shared/01/05220000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: some changes to fix #i32887# - - - -
+ + Text + /text/shared/01/05220000.xhp + + + +
text; text/draw objects -draw objects; text in -frames; text fitting to frames + draw objects; text in + frames; text fitting to frames -Text -Sets the layout and anchoring properties for text in the selected drawing or text object. -
-
- -
-The text is positioned relative to the edges of the drawing or text object. -Text +Text + Sets the layout and anchoring properties for text in the selected drawing or text object. +
+
+ +
+ The text is positioned relative to the edges of the drawing or text object. + Text -Fit width to text -Expands the width of the object to the width of the text, if the object is smaller than the text. +Fit width to text + Expands the width of the object to the width of the text, if the object is smaller than the text. -Fit height to text -Expands the height of the object to the height of the text, if the object is smaller than the text. +Fit height to text + Expands the height of the object to the height of the text, if the object is smaller than the text. -Fit to frame -Resizes the text to fit the entire area of the drawing or text object. +Fit to frame + Resizes the text to fit the entire area of the drawing or text object. -Adjust to contour -Adapts the text flow so that it match the contours of the selected drawing object. +Adjust to contour + Adapts the text flow so that it matches the contours of the selected drawing object. -Word wrap text in shape -Wraps the text that you add after double-clicking a custom shape to fit inside the shape. +Word wrap text in shape + Wraps the text that you add after double-clicking a custom shape to fit inside the shape. -Resize shape to fit text -Resizes a custom shape to fit the text that you enter after double-clicking the shape. -Spacing to borders -Specify the amount of space to leave between the edges of the drawing or text object and the borders of the text. +Resize shape to fit text + Resizes a custom shape to fit the text that you enter after double-clicking the shape. + Spacing to borders + Specify the amount of space to leave between the edges of the drawing or text object and the borders of the text. -Left -Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the drawing or text object and the left border of the text. +Left + Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the drawing or text object and the left border of the text. -Right -Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the drawing or text object and the right border of the text. +Right + Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the drawing or text object and the right border of the text. -Top -Enter the amount of space to leave between the top edge of the drawing or text object and the upper border of the text. +Top + Enter the amount of space to leave between the top edge of the drawing or text object and the upper border of the text. -Bottom -Enter the amount of space to leave between the bottom edge of the drawing or text object and the lower border of the text. -Text anchor -Set the anchor type and the anchor position. +Bottom + Enter the amount of space to leave between the bottom edge of the drawing or text object and the lower border of the text. + Text anchor + Set the anchor type and the anchor position. -Graphic field -Click where you want to place the anchor for the text. +Graphic field + Click where you want to place the anchor for the text. -Full width -Anchors the text to the full width of the drawing or text object. - - +Full width + Anchors the text to the full width of the drawing or text object. + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050000.xhp index 93cb1e7957..f965015207 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050000.xhp @@ -61,7 +61,8 @@ - + + Remove diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050400.xhp new file mode 100755 index 0000000000..b192d66336 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + + + Graphics + /text/shared/01/06050400.xhp + + + +
+ Graphics + Displays the different graphics that you can use as bullets in a bulleted list. +
+
+ +
+ +Selection + Click the graphics that you want to use as bullets. + +Link graphics + If enabled, the graphics are inserted as links. If not enabled, the graphics are embedded into the document. +
+ Position tab (Bullets and Numbering dialog) + Options tab (Bullets and Numbering dialog) +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050500.xhp index 2389b2ff12..9c84f02abb 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050500.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Options -/text/shared/01/06050500.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -
+ + Options + /text/shared/01/06050500.xhp + + + +
numbering;options -bullet lists; formatting options -font sizes;bullets + bullet lists; formatting options + font sizes;bullets -OptionsUFI: new name Customize Bullets and Numbering, tab page Options -Sets the formatting options for numbered or bulleted lists. If you want, you can apply formatting to individual levels in the list hierarchy. -
-
- -
-Format -Select the level(s) that you want to modify, and then specify the formatting that you want to use. +OptionsUFI: new name Customize Bullets and Numbering, tab page Options + Sets the formatting options for numbered or bulleted lists. If you want, you can apply formatting to individual levels in the list hierarchy. +
+
+ +
+ Format + Select the level(s) that you want to modify, and then specify the formatting that you want to use. -Level -Select the level(s) that you want to define the formatting options for. The selected level is highlighted in the preview. +Level + Select the level(s) that you want to define the formatting options for. The selected level is highlighted in the preview. -Numbering -Select a numbering style for the selected levels. - - - -Selection - - -Description - - - - -1, 2, 3, ... - - -Arabic numerals - - - - -A, B, C, ... - - -Capital letters - - - - -a, b, c, ... - - -Lowercase letters - - - - -I, II, III, ... - - -Roman numerals (uppercase) - - - - -i, ii, iii, ... - - -Roman numerals (lowercase) - - - - -A,... AA,... AAA,... - - -Alphabetical numbering with uppercase letters - - - - -a,... aa,... aaa,... - - -Alphabetical numbering with lowercase letters - - - - -Bullet - - -Adds a bullet to the beginning of a line. Select this option, and then click the Character button to choose a bullet style. -Bullets are resized to fit the current line height. If you want, you can define a Character Style that uses a different font size for bullets. +Numbering + Select a numbering style for the selected levels. +
+ + + Selection + + + Description + + + + + 1, 2, 3, ... + + + Arabic numerals + + + + + A, B, C, ... + + + Capital letters + + + + + a, b, c, ... + + + Lowercase letters + + + + + I, II, III, ... + + + Roman numerals (uppercase) + + + + + i, ii, iii, ... + + + Roman numerals (lowercase) + + + + + A,... AA,... AAA,... + + + Alphabetical numbering with uppercase letters + + + + + a,... aa,... aaa,... + + + Alphabetical numbering with lowercase letters + + + + + Bullet + + + Adds a bullet to the beginning of a line. Select this option, and then click the Character button to choose a bullet style. + Bullets are resized to fit the current line height. If you want, you can define a Character Style that uses a different font size for bullets. - - - - -Graphics - - -Displays an image for the bullet. Select this options, and then click Select to locate the image file that you want to use. - - - - -Linked graphics - - -Links the image to the current file. To embed the image in the current file, clear this checkbox. - - - - -None - - -Does not apply a numbering style. - - -
+ + + + + Graphics + + + Displays an image for the bullet. Select this option, and then click Select to locate the image file that you want to use. The image gets embedded into the document. + + + + + Linked graphics + + + Displays an image for the bullet. Select this option, and then click Select to locate the image file that you want to use. The image gets inserted as a link to the image file. + + + + + None + + + Does not apply a numbering style. + + + -The availability of the following fields depends on the style that you select in the Numbering box. + The availability of the following fields depends on the style that you select in the Numbering box. -Before -Enter a character or the text to display in front of the number in the list. +Before + Enter a character or the text to display in front of the number in the list. -After -Enter a character or the text to display behind the number in the list. If you want to create a numbered list that uses the style "1.)", enter ".)" in this box. +After + Enter a character or the text to display behind the number in the list. If you want to create a numbered list that uses the style "1.)", enter ".)" in this box. -Character Styles +Character Styles -Select the Character Style that you want to use in the numbered list. To create or edit a Character Style, open the Styles and Formatting window, click the Character Styles icon, right-click a style, and then choose New. + Select the Character Style that you want to use in the numbered list. To create or edit a Character Style, open the Styles and Formatting window, click the Character Styles icon, right-click a style, and then choose New. -Show sublevels +Show sublevels -Enter the number of previous levels to include in the numbering style. For example, if you enter "2" and the previous level uses the "A, B, C..." numbering style, the numbering scheme for the current level becomes: "A.1". + Enter the number of previous levels to include in the numbering style. For example, if you enter "2" and the previous level uses the "A, B, C..." numbering style, the numbering scheme for the current level becomes: "A.1". -Start at -Enter a new starting number for the current level. +Start at + Enter a new starting number for the current level. -Color +Color Color - + Select a color for the current numbering style. -Relative size +Relative size Relative size - + Enter the amount by which you want to resize the bullet character with respect to the font height of the current paragraph. -Character -Opens the Special Characters dialog, where you can select a bullet symbol. -Options for graphics: +Character + Opens the Special Characters dialog, where you can select a bullet symbol. + Options for graphics: -Select... -Select the graphic, or locate the graphic file that you want to use as a bullet. +Select... + Select the graphic, or locate the graphic file that you want to use as a bullet. -Width -Enter a width for the graphic. +Width + Enter a width for the graphic. -Height -Enter a height for the graphic. +Height + Enter a height for the graphic. -Keep ratio -Maintains the size proportions of the graphic. +Keep ratio + Maintains the size proportions of the graphic. -Alignment -Select the alignment option for the graphic. -All levels +Alignment + Select the alignment option for the graphic. + All levels -Set the numbering options for all of the levels. + Set the numbering options for all of the levels. -Consecutive numbering +Consecutive numbering -Increases the numbering by one as you go down each level in the list hierarchy. + Increases the numbering by one as you go down each level in the list hierarchy. - - + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050600.xhp index 5d50012a57..76afba376d 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050600.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050600.xhp @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ -
+
Position Sets the indent, spacing, and alignment options for the numbered or bulleted list.
do we have a how-to for numbering/bullets/outlines with/without styles? seems we really need one diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/makefile.mk b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/makefile.mk index fd665cd49b..14255b6847 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/makefile.mk +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/makefile.mk @@ -285,6 +285,7 @@ XHPFILES = \ 06050100.xhp \ 06050200.xhp \ 06050300.xhp \ + 06050400.xhp \ 06050500.xhp \ 06050600.xhp \ 06130000.xhp \ diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/password_dlg.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/password_dlg.xhp index 2c7522e04f..d2bcbb9d94 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/password_dlg.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/password_dlg.xhp @@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ * * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * - * $RCSfile: password_dlg.xhp,v $ - * $Revision: 1.4.4.1 $ + * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ + * $Revision: 1.10 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,25 +35,30 @@ - -Password -/text/shared/01/password_dlg.xhp - - - -
-Password -Assigns a password to prevent users from making unauthorized changes. + + Password + /text/shared/01/password_dlg.xhp + + + +
+ Password + Assigns a password to prevent users from making unauthorized changes. + -Password -Type a password that is at least five characters long. A password is case sensitive. +Password + Type a password that is at least five characters long. A password is case sensitive. -Confirm -Re-enter the password. -Undoing password protection -To remove a password, re-open this dialog, and then enter the password. -
- - +Confirm + Re-enter the password. + Undoing password protection + To remove a password, re-open this dialog, and then enter the password. +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/password_main.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/password_main.xhp index 877d79bab2..23466ce84d 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/password_main.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/password_main.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Enter Master Password -/text/shared/01/password_main.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -
-Enter Master Password + + Enter Master Password + /text/shared/01/password_main.xhp + + + +
+ Enter Master Password -Assign a master password to protect the access to a saved password. -
-You can save some passwords for the duration of a session, or permanently to a file protected by a master password. For example, passwords for accessing WebDAV or FTP servers are stored permanently if you enter a master password when prompted. Otherwise, they are only stored for the current session.removed text see i71792 -You must enter the master password to access a file or service that is protected by a saved password. You only need to enter the master password once during a session. -
+ Assign a master password to protect the access to a saved password. +
+ You can save some passwords for the duration of a session, or permanently to a file protected by a master password. For example, passwords for accessing WebDAV or FTP servers are stored permanently if you enter a master password when prompted. Otherwise, they are only stored for the current session.removed text see i71792 + You must enter the master password to access a file or service that is protected by a saved password. You only need to enter the master password once during a session. +
+
+ You should only use passwords that are hard to find by other persons or programs. A password should follow these rules: + + + Length of eight or more characters. + + + Contains a mix of lower case and upper case letters, numbers, and special characters. + + + Cannot be found in any wordbook or encyclopedia. + + + Has no direct relation to your personal data, e.g., date of birth or car plate. + + +
-Master password -Type a master password to prevent unauthorized users from accessing stored passwords. +Master password + Type a master password to prevent unauthorized users from accessing stored passwords. -Confirm master password -Re-enter the master password. -
-
- -
- - +Confirm master password + Re-enter the master password. +
+
+ +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export.xhp index 31dcfcb86a..70d4f6b082 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export.xhp @@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ * * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * - * $RCSfile: ref_pdf_export.xhp,v $ - * $Revision: 1.23.4.1 $ + * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ + * $Revision: 1.8 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,254 +35,257 @@ - -Export as PDF -/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export.xhp - - - -
+ + Export as PDF + /text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export.xhp + + + +
PDF;export -portable document format -exporting;to PDF + portable document format + exporting;to PDF MW made "PDF export a two level entry"UFI: write guide and move bookmarks there -Export as PDF +Export as PDF -Saves the current file to Portable Document Format (PDF) version 1.4. A PDF file can be viewed and printed on any platform with the original formatting intact, provided that supporting software is installed. + Saves the current file to Portable Document Format (PDF) version 1.4. A PDF file can be viewed and printed on any platform with the original formatting intact, provided that supporting software is installed. -
-
- -
-GeneralUFI: all on one page because they were intended to shrink to AHID tags with OOo3 anyway. Sadly cws help9s stalled ... -Pages -Sets the export options for the pages included in the PDF file. +
+
+ +
+ GeneralUFI: all on one page because they were intended to shrink to AHID tags with OOo3 anyway. Sadly cws help9s stalled ... + Pages + Sets the export options for the pages included in the PDF file. -All -Exports all defined print ranges. If no print range is defined, exports the entire document. +All + Exports all defined print ranges. If no print range is defined, exports the entire document. -Range -Exports the pages you type in the box. -To export a range of pages, use the format 3-6. To export single pages, use the format 7;9;11. If you want, you can export a combination of page ranges and single pages, by using a format like 3-6;8;10;12. +Range + Exports the pages you type in the box. + To export a range of pages, use the format 3-6. To export single pages, use the format 7;9;11. If you want, you can export a combination of page ranges and single pages, by using a format like 3-6;8;10;12. -Selection -Exports the current selection. -Images -Sets the PDF export options for images inside your document. -EPS images with embedded previews are exported only as previews. EPS images without embedded previews are exported as empty placeholders. +Selection + Exports the current selection. + Images + Sets the PDF export options for images inside your document. + EPS images with embedded previews are exported only as previews. EPS images without embedded previews are exported as empty placeholders. -Lossless compression -Selects a lossless compression of images. All pixels are preserved. +Lossless compression + Selects a lossless compression of images. All pixels are preserved. -JPEG compression -Selects a JPEG compression of images. With a high quality level, almost all pixels are preserved. With a low quality level, some pixels get lost and artefacts are introduced, but file sizes are reduced. +JPEG compression + Selects a JPEG compression of images. With a high quality level, almost all pixels are preserved. With a low quality level, some pixels get lost and artefacts are introduced, but file sizes are reduced. -Quality -Enter the quality level for JPEG compression. +Quality + Enter the quality level for JPEG compression. -Reduce image resolution -Selects to resample or down-size the images to a lower number of pixels per inch. +Reduce image resolution + Selects to resample or down-size the images to a lower number of pixels per inch. -Select the target resolution for the images. -General -Sets general PDF export options. +Select the target resolution for the images. + General + Sets general PDF export options. -PDF/A-1a -Converts to the PDF/A-1a format. This is defined as an electronic document file format for long term preservation. All fonts that were used in the source document will be embedded into the generated PDF file. PDF tags will be written. +PDF/A-1a + Converts to the PDF/A-1a format. This is defined as an electronic document file format for long term preservation. All fonts that were used in the source document will be embedded into the generated PDF file. PDF tags will be written. -Tagged PDF -Selects to write PDF tags. This can increase file size by huge amounts. -Tagged PDF contains information about the structure of the document contents. This can help to display the document on devices with different screens, and when using screen reader software. +Tagged PDF + Selects to write PDF tags. This can increase file size by huge amounts. + Tagged PDF contains information about the structure of the document contents. This can help to display the document on devices with different screens, and when using screen reader software. -Export notes -Selects to export notes of Writer and Calc documents as PDF notes. +Export notes + Selects to export notes of Writer and Calc documents as PDF notes. -Export bookmarks -Selects to export bookmarks of Writer documents as PDF bookmarks. Bookmarks are created for all outline paragraphs (Tools - Outline Numbering) and for all table of contents entries for which you did assign hyperlinks in the source document. +Export bookmarks + Selects to export bookmarks of Writer documents as PDF bookmarks. Bookmarks are created for all outline paragraphs (Tools - Outline Numbering) and for all table of contents entries for which you did assign hyperlinks in the source document. -Create PDF form -Choose to create a PDF form. This can be filled out and printed by the user of the PDF document. +Create PDF form + Choose to create a PDF form. This can be filled out and printed by the user of the PDF document. -Submit format -Select the format of submitting forms from within the PDF file. -Select the format of the data that you will receive from the submitter: FDF (Forms Data Format), PDF, HTML, or XML. -This setting overrides the control's URL property that you set in the document. +Submit format + Select the format of submitting forms from within the PDF file. + Select the format of the data that you will receive from the submitter: FDF (Forms Data Format), PDF, HTML, or XML. + This setting overrides the control's URL property that you set in the document. -Export automatically inserted blank pages -If switched on, automatically inserted blank pages are being exported to pdf file. This is best if you are printing the pdf file double-sided. Example: In a book a chapter paragraph style is set to always start with an odd numbered page. The previous chapter ends on an odd page. %PRODUCTNAME inserts an even numbered blank page. This option controls whether to export that even numbered page or not. +Export automatically inserted blank pages + If switched on, automatically inserted blank pages are being exported to pdf file. This is best if you are printing the pdf file double-sided. Example: In a book a chapter paragraph style is set to always start with an odd numbered page. The previous chapter ends on an odd page. %PRODUCTNAME inserts an even numbered blank page. This option controls whether to export that even numbered page or not. -Create hybrid file -When the Sun PDF Import Extension is installed, this setting enables you to export the document as a .pdf file containing two file formats: PDF and ODF. -Initial View -Panes +Create hybrid file + When the Sun PDF Import Extension is installed, this setting enables you to export the document as a .pdf file containing two file formats: PDF and ODF. + Initial View + Panes -Page only -Select to generate a PDF file that shows only the page contents. +Page only + Select to generate a PDF file that shows only the page contents. -Bookmarks and page -Select to generate a PDF file that shows a bookmarks palette and the page contents.UFI: Adobe reader help names the panes as "palettes" +Bookmarks and page + Select to generate a PDF file that shows a bookmarks palette and the page contents.UFI: Adobe reader help names the panes as "palettes" -Thumbnails and page -Select to generate a PDF file that shows a thumbnails palette and the page contents. +Thumbnails and page + Select to generate a PDF file that shows a thumbnails palette and the page contents. -Open on page -Select to show the given page when the reader opens the PDF file. -Magnification +Open on page + Select to show the given page when the reader opens the PDF file. + Magnification -Default -Select to generate a PDF file that shows the page contents without zooming. If the reader software is configured to use a zoom factor by default, the page shows with that zoom factor. +Default + Select to generate a PDF file that shows the page contents without zooming. If the reader software is configured to use a zoom factor by default, the page shows with that zoom factor. -Fit in window -Select to generate a PDF file that shows the page zoomed to fit entirely into the reader's window. +Fit in window + Select to generate a PDF file that shows the page zoomed to fit entirely into the reader's window. -Fit width -Select to generate a PDF file that shows the page zoomed to fit the width of the reader's window. +Fit width + Select to generate a PDF file that shows the page zoomed to fit the width of the reader's window. -Fit visible -Select to generate a PDF file that shows the text and graphics on the page zoomed to fit the width of the reader's window. +Fit visible + Select to generate a PDF file that shows the text and graphics on the page zoomed to fit the width of the reader's window. -Zoom factor -Select a given zoom factor when the reader opens the PDF file. -Page layout +Zoom factor + Select a given zoom factor when the reader opens the PDF file. + Page layout -Default -Select to generate a PDF file that shows the pages according to the layout setting of the reader software. +Default + Select to generate a PDF file that shows the pages according to the layout setting of the reader software. -Single page -Select to generate a PDF file that shows one page at a time. +Single page + Select to generate a PDF file that shows one page at a time. -Continuous -Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages in a continuous vertical column. +Continuous + Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages in a continuous vertical column. -Continuous facing -Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages side by side in a continuous column. For more than two pages, the first page is displayed on the right. +Continuous facing + Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages side by side in a continuous column. For more than two pages, the first page is displayed on the right. -First page is left -Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages side by side in a continuous column. For more than two pages, the first page is displayed on the left. You must enable support for complex text layout on Tools - Options - Language settings - Languages. -User Interface -Window options +First page is left + Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages side by side in a continuous column. For more than two pages, the first page is displayed on the left. You must enable support for complex text layout on Tools - Options - Language settings - Languages. + User Interface + Window options -Resize window to initial page -Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a full screen reader window. +Resize window to initial page + Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a window displaying the whole initial page. -Center window on screen -Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a reader window centered on screen. +Center window on screen + Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a reader window centered on screen. -Open in full screen mode -Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a full screen reader window in front of all other windows. +Open in full screen mode + Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a full screen reader window in front of all other windows. -Display document title -Select to generate a PDF file that is shown with the document title in the reader's title bar. -User interface options +Display document title + Select to generate a PDF file that is shown with the document title in the reader's title bar. + User interface options -Hide menu bar -Select to hide the reader's menu bar when the document is active. +Hide menu bar + Select to hide the reader's menu bar when the document is active. -Hide toolbar -Select to hide the reader's toolbar when the document is active. +Hide toolbar + Select to hide the reader's toolbar when the document is active. -Hide window controls -Select to hide the reader's controls when the document is active. -Transitions +Hide window controls + Select to hide the reader's controls when the document is active. + Transitions -Use transition effects -Selects to export Impress slide transition effects to respective PDF effects. -Bookmarks +Use transition effects + Selects to export Impress slide transition effects to respective PDF effects. + Bookmarks -All bookmark levels -Select to show all bookmark levels when the reader opens the PDF file. +All bookmark levels + Select to show all bookmark levels when the reader opens the PDF file. -Visible bookmark levels -Select to show bookmark levels down to the selected level when the reader opens the PDF file. -Links -Specify how to export bookmarks and hyperlinks in your document. +Visible bookmark levels + Select to show bookmark levels down to the selected level when the reader opens the PDF file. + Links + Specify how to export bookmarks and hyperlinks in your document. -Export bookmarks as named destinations -The bookmarks (targets of references) in PDF files can be defined as rectangular areas. Additionally, bookmarks to named objects can be defined by their names. Enable the checkbox to export the names of objects in your document as valid bookmark targets. This allows to link to those objects by name from other documents. +Export bookmarks as named destinations + The bookmarks (targets of references) in PDF files can be defined as rectangular areas. Additionally, bookmarks to named objects can be defined by their names. Enable the checkbox to export the names of objects in your document as valid bookmark targets. This allows to link to those objects by name from other documents. -Convert document references to PDF targets -Enable this checkbox to convert the URLs referencing other ODF files to PDF files with the same name. In the referencing URLs the extensions .odt, .odp, .ods, .odg, and .odm are converted to the extension .pdf. +Convert document references to PDF targets + Enable this checkbox to convert the URLs referencing other ODF files to PDF files with the same name. In the referencing URLs the extensions .odt, .odp, .ods, .odg, and .odm are converted to the extension .pdf. -Export URLs relative to file system -Enable this checkbox to export URLs to other documents as relative URLs in the file system. See "relative hyperlinks" in the Help. -Cross-document links -Specify how to handle hyperlinks from your PDF file to other files. +Export URLs relative to file system + Enable this checkbox to export URLs to other documents as relative URLs in the file system. See "relative hyperlinks" in the Help. + Cross-document links + Specify how to handle hyperlinks from your PDF file to other files. -Default mode -Links from your PDF document to other documents will be handled as it is specified in your operating system. +Default mode + Links from your PDF document to other documents will be handled as it is specified in your operating system. -Open with PDF reader application -Cross-document links are opened with the PDF reader application that currently shows the document. The PDF reader application must be able to handle the specified file type inside the hyperlink. +Open with PDF reader application + Cross-document links are opened with the PDF reader application that currently shows the document. The PDF reader application must be able to handle the specified file type inside the hyperlink. -Open with Internet browser -Cross-document links are opened with the Internet browser. The Internet browser must be able to handle the specified file type inside the hyperlink. -Security +Open with Internet browser + Cross-document links are opened with the Internet browser. The Internet browser must be able to handle the specified file type inside the hyperlink. + Security -Encrypt the PDF document -Select to encrypt the PDF document with a password. The PDF file can be opened only when the user enters the correct password. +Encrypt the PDF document + Select to encrypt the PDF document with a password. The PDF file can be opened only when the user enters the correct password. -Set open password -Click to open a dialog where you enter the password. +Set open password + Click to open a dialog where you enter the password. -Restrict permission -Select to restrict some permissions. The permissions can be changed only when the user enters the correct password. +Restrict permission + Select to restrict some permissions. The permissions can be changed only when the user enters the correct password. -Set permission password -Click to open a dialog where you enter the password. -Printing +Set permission password + Click to open a dialog where you enter the password. + Printing -Not permitted -Printing the document is not permitted. +Not permitted + Printing the document is not permitted. -Low resolution (150 dpi) -The document can only be printed in low resolution (150 dpi). Not all PDF readers honor this setting. +Low resolution (150 dpi) + The document can only be printed in low resolution (150 dpi). Not all PDF readers honor this setting. -High resolution -The document can be printed in high resolution. -Changes +High resolution + The document can be printed in high resolution. + Changes -Not permitted -No changes of the content are permitted. +Not permitted + No changes of the content are permitted. -Inserting, deleting, and rotating pages -Only inserting, deleting, and rotating pages is permitted. +Inserting, deleting, and rotating pages + Only inserting, deleting, and rotating pages is permitted. -Filling in form fields -Only filling in form fields is permitted. +Filling in form fields + Only filling in form fields is permitted. -Commenting, filling in form fields -Only commenting and filling in form fields is permitted. +Commenting, filling in form fields + Only commenting and filling in form fields is permitted. -Any except extracting pages -All changes are permitted, except extracting pages. +Any except extracting pages + All changes are permitted, except extracting pages. -Enable copying of content -Select to enable copying of content to the clipboard. +Enable copying of content + Select to enable copying of content to the clipboard. -Enable text access for accessibility tools -Select to enable text access for accessibility tools. -Export -Exports the current file in PDF format. - - +Enable text access for accessibility tools + Select to enable text access for accessibility tools. + Export + Exports the current file in PDF format. + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdatatab.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdatatab.xhp index 26d3aee7fc..dcbf6ac56c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdatatab.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdatatab.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Data (for XML Form Documents) -/text/shared/01/xformsdatatab.xhp - - -UFI: XForms, Data Navigator, Add/Edit Item, Condition, Edit Namespaces -UFI: copied this as new file - - - -
-Data (for XML Form Documents) -The Data tab page of the Properties dialog for an XML Form document offers some XML forms settings. -
-
- -
-The possible settings of the Data tab page of a control depend on the respective control. You will only see the options that are available for the current control and context. The following fields are available: + + Data (for XML Form Documents) + /text/shared/01/xformsdatatab.xhp + + + +
+ Data (for XML Form Documents) + The Data tab page of the Properties dialog for an XML Form document offers some XML forms settings. +
+
+ +
+ The possible settings of the Data tab page of a control depend on the respective control. You will only see the options that are available for the current control and context. The following fields are available: -XML data model -Select a model from the list of all models in the current document. +XML data model + Select a model from the list of all models in the current document. -Binding -Select or enter the name of a binding. Selecting the name of an existing binding associates the binding with the form control. Entering a new name creates a new binding and associates it with the form control. +Binding + Select or enter the name of a binding. Selecting the name of an existing binding associates the binding with the form control. Entering a new name creates a new binding and associates it with the form control. -Binding expression -Enter the DOM node what's a DOM node? spec doesn't tellto bind the control model towhat's a control model? spec doesn't tell. may be a typo in spec: control's model?. Click the ... button for a dialog to enter the XPath expression. +Binding expression + Enter the DOM node what's a DOM node? spec doesn't tellto bind the control model towhat's a control model? spec doesn't tell. may be a typo in spec: control's model?. Click the ... button for a dialog to enter the XPath expression. -Required -Specifies if the item must be included on the XForm. +Required + Specifies if the item must be included on the XForm. -Relevant -Declares the item as relevant. +Relevant + Declares the item as relevant. -Read-only -Declares the item as read-only. +Read-only + Declares the item as read-only. -Constraint -Declares the item as a constraint. +Constraint + Declares the item as a constraint. -Calculation -Declares that the item is calculated. +Calculation + Declares that the item is calculated. -Data type -Select a data type which the control should be validated against. +Data type + Select a data type which the control should be validated against. -x -Select a user-defined data type and click the button to delete the user-defined data type. +x + Select a user-defined data type and click the button to delete the user-defined data type. -+ -Click the button to open a dialog where you can enter the name of a new user-defined data type. The new data type inherits all facets from the currently selected data type. -The following lists all facets that are valid for data types. Some facets are only available for some data types. ++ + Click the button to open a dialog where you can enter the name of a new user-defined data type. The new data type inherits all facets from the currently selected data type. + The following lists all facets that are valid for data types. Some facets are only available for some data types. -Whitespaces -Specifies how whitespaces are to be handled when a string of the current data type is being processed. Possible values are Preserve, Replace, and Collapse. The sematics follow the definition at http://www.w3.org/TR/xmlschema-2/#rf-whiteSpace. +Whitespaces + Specifies how whitespaces are to be handled when a string of the current data type is being processed. Possible values are Preserve, Replace, and Collapse. The sematics follow the definition at http://www.w3.org/TR/xmlschema-2/#rf-whiteSpace. -Pattern -Specifies a regular expression pattern. Strings validated against the data type must conform to this pattern to be valid. The XSD data type syntax for regular expressions is different from the regular expression syntax used elseswhere in %PRODUCTNAME, for example in the Find & Replace dialog. +Pattern + Specifies a regular expression pattern. Strings validated against the data type must conform to this pattern to be valid. The XSD data type syntax for regular expressions is different from the regular expression syntax used elseswhere in %PRODUCTNAME, for example in the Find & Replace dialog. -Digits (total) -Specifies the maximum total number of digits that values of the decimal data type can have. +Digits (total) + Specifies the maximum total number of digits that values of the decimal data type can have. -Digits (fraction) -Specifies the maximum total number of fractional digits that values of the decimal data type can have. +Digits (fraction) + Specifies the maximum total number of fractional digits that values of the decimal data type can have. -Max. (inclusive) -Specifies an inclusive upper bound for values. +Max. (inclusive) + Specifies an inclusive upper bound for values. -Max. (exclusive) -Specifies an exclusive upper bound for values. +Max. (exclusive) + Specifies an exclusive upper bound for values. -Min. (inclusive) -Specifies an inclusive lower bound for values. +Min. (inclusive) + Specifies an inclusive lower bound for values. -Min. (exclusive) -Specifies an exclusive lower bound for values. +Min. (exclusive) + Specifies an exclusive lower bound for values. -Length -Specifies the number of characters for a string. +Length + Specifies the number of characters for a string. UFI: found 37998 which is already in use -Length (at least) -Specifies the minimum number of characters for a string. +Length (at least) + Specifies the minimum number of characters for a string. -Length (at most) -Specifies the maximum number of characters for a string. - - +Length (at most) + Specifies the maximum number of characters for a string. + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01220000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01220000.xhp index c7378a509d..67908f7682 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01220000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01220000.xhp @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07010000.xhp index 9f66388a0b..c3187c9a50 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07010000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07010000.xhp @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@
Load URL -Loads a document specified by an entered URL. You can type a new URL or select one that is already registered. %PRODUCTNAME automatically converts file paths into URL notation. +Loads a document specified by an entered URL. You can type a new URL or select one from the list. %PRODUCTNAME automatically converts file paths into URL notation. Enable Load URL with the Visible Buttons command (click the arrow at the end of the toolbar).i73505
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100200.xhp index 82159826fd..3d3f2d929c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100200.xhp @@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ * * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * - * $RCSfile: 12100200.xhp,v $ - * $Revision: 1.10.4.1 $ + * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ + * $Revision: 1.8 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,284 +35,301 @@ - -Find Record -/text/shared/02/12100200.xhp - - - + + Find Record + /text/shared/02/12100200.xhp + + + tables in databases; searching -forms; browsing -records; searching in databases -searching; databases -databases; searching records + forms; browsing + records; searching in databases + searching; databases + databases; searching records mw changed" database tables;" to "tables in databases;"
-Find Record + Find Record -Searches database tables and forms.In forms or database tables, you can search through data fields, list boxes, and check boxes for specific values. + Searches database tables and forms.In forms or database tables, you can search through data fields, list boxes, and check boxes for specific values. -
-
- -
-When searching a table, the data fields of the current table are searched. When searching in a form, the data fields of the table linked with the form are searched. -The search described here is carried out by %PRODUCTNAME. If you want to use the SQL server to search in a database, then you should use the Form-based Filters icon on the Form Bar. -The search function is also available for table controls. When calling the search function from a table control, you can search each column of the table control corresponding to the database columns of the linked database table. -Search for -Specifies the type of search. +
+
+ +
+ When searching a table, the data fields of the current table are searched. When searching in a form, the data fields of the table linked with the form are searched. + The search described here is carried out by %PRODUCTNAME. If you want to use the SQL server to search in a database, then you should use the Form-based Filters icon on the Form Bar. + The search function is also available for table controls. When calling the search function from a table control, you can search each column of the table control corresponding to the database columns of the linked database table. + Search for + Specifies the type of search. -Text: -Enter the search term in the box or select it from the list. The text under the cursor is already copied into the Text combo box. Note that while running a search in a form, tabs and line breaks cannot be processed. -Your search terms will be saved as long as the table or the formula document is open. If you are running more than one search and you would like to repeat the search term, you can select a previously used search term from the combo box. +Text: + Enter the search term in the box or select it from the list. The text under the cursor is already copied into the Text combo box. Note that while running a search in a form, tabs and line breaks cannot be processed. + Your search terms will be saved as long as the table or the formula document is open. If you are running more than one search and you would like to repeat the search term, you can select a previously used search term from the combo box. -Field content is NULL -Specifies that fields will be found that contain no data. +Field content is NULL + Specifies that fields will be found that contain no data. -Field content is not NULL -Specifies that fields will be found that contain data. -Where to search -Specifies the fields for the search. +Field content is not NULL + Specifies that fields will be found that contain data. + Where to search + Specifies the fields for the search. -Form -Specifies the logical form in which you want the search to take place. -The Form combo box is only visible if the current document is a form document with more than one logical form. It does not appear during a search in tables or queries. -Form documents may contain multiple logical forms. These are individual form components, which are each linked to a table. -The Form combo box contains the names of all logical forms for which controls exist. +Form + Specifies the logical form in which you want the search to take place. + The Form combo box is only visible if the current document is a form document with more than one logical form. It does not appear during a search in tables or queries. + Form documents may contain multiple logical forms. These are individual form components, which are each linked to a table. + The Form combo box contains the names of all logical forms for which controls exist. -All Fields -Searches through all fields. If you are running a search in a table, all fields in the table will be searched. If you are running a search in a form, all fields of the logical form (entered under Form) will be searched. If you are running a search in a table control field, all columns that are linked to a valid database table field will be searched. -Note that the fields of the current logical form do not have to be identical to the fields of the form document. If the form document contains fields that point to multiple data sources (that is, multiple logical forms), the All Fields option will only search for the fields linked to data sources in the form document. +All Fields + Searches through all fields. If you are running a search in a table, all fields in the table will be searched. If you are running a search in a form, all fields of the logical form (entered under Form) will be searched. If you are running a search in a table control field, all columns that are linked to a valid database table field will be searched. + Note that the fields of the current logical form do not have to be identical to the fields of the form document. If the form document contains fields that point to multiple data sources (that is, multiple logical forms), the All Fields option will only search for the fields linked to data sources in the form document. -Single field -Searches through a specified data field. -Settings -Defines settings to control the search. +Single field + Searches through a specified data field. + Settings + Defines settings to control the search. -Position -Specifies the relationship of the search term and the field contents. The following options are available: - - - -anywhere in the field - - -Returns all fields containing the search pattern anywhere in the field. - - - - -beginning of field - - -Returns all fields containing the search pattern at the beginning of the field. - - - - -end of field - - -Returns all fields containing the search pattern at the end of the field. - - - - -entire field - - -Returns all fields containing the search pattern as an exact match to the contents of the field. - - -
+Position + Specifies the relationship of the search term and the field contents. The following options are available: + + + + anywhere in the field + + + Returns all fields containing the search pattern anywhere in the field. + + + + + beginning of field + + + Returns all fields containing the search pattern at the beginning of the field. + + + + + end of field + + + Returns all fields containing the search pattern at the end of the field. + + + + + entire field + + + Returns all fields containing the search pattern as an exact match to the contents of the field. + + +
-If the Wildcard expression check box is marked, this function is not available. + If the Wildcard expression check box is marked, this function is not available. -Apply field format -Specifies that all field formats are considered when searching in the current document. Field formats are all visible formats that are created using the following possibilities: - - -in table design mode for field properties, - - -in data source view on column formatting, - - -in forms on control properties. - - -If the Apply field format box is marked, the data source view of the table or form is searched using the formatting set there. If the box is not marked, the database is searched using the formatting saved in the database. -Example: -You have a date field, which is saved in "DD.MM.YY" format in the database (for example, 17.02.65). The format of the entry is changed in the data source view to "DD. MMM YYYY" (17 Feb 1965). Following this example, a record containing February 17 is only found when the Apply field format option is on: - - - -Apply field format - - -Search pattern - - - - -on - - -"Feb" is returned, but not "2". - - - - -off - - -"2" is returned, but not "Feb". - - -
+Apply field format + Specifies that all field formats are considered when searching in the current document. Field formats are all visible formats that are created using the following possibilities: + + + in table design mode for field properties, + + + in data source view on column formatting, + + + in forms on control properties. + + + If the Apply field format box is marked, the data source view of the table or form is searched using the formatting set there. If the box is not marked, the database is searched using the formatting saved in the database. + Example: + You have a date field, which is saved in "DD.MM.YY" format in the database (for example, 17.02.65). The format of the entry is changed in the data source view to "DD MMM YYYY" (17 Feb 1965). Following this example, a record containing February 17 is only found when the Apply field format option is on: + + + + Apply field format + + + Search pattern + + + + + on + + + "Feb" is returned, but not "2". + + + + + off + + + "2" is returned, but not "Feb". + + +
-It is recommended that you always search using field formatting. -The following examples show possible issues when searching without field formatting. These issues depend on the database used and only occur for certain internal default formatting: - - - -Search results - - -Cause - - - - -"5" returns "14:00:00" as a time - - -Time fields are not defined for dBASE databases and must be simulated. To internally display the time "14:00:00", a 5 is necessary. - - - - -"00:00:00" returns all records of a standard date field - - -The database stores a date value internally using a combined date/time field. - - - - -"45.79" does not return "45.79" although the entire field option is selected under Position. - - -The view shown does not match what is stored internally. For example, if value 45.789 is stored in the database as a field of type Number/Double and the shown formatting is set to display only two decimals, "45.79" is only returned in searches with field formatting. - - -
+ It is recommended that you always search using field formatting. + The following examples show possible issues when searching without field formatting. These issues depend on the database used and only occur for certain internal default formatting: + + + + Search results + + + Cause + + + + + "5" returns "14:00:00" as a time + + + Time fields are not defined for dBASE databases and must be simulated. To internally display the time "14:00:00", a 5 is necessary. + + + + + "00:00:00" returns all records of a standard date field + + + The database stores a date value internally using a combined date/time field. + + + + + "45.79" does not return "45.79" although the entire field option is selected under Position. + + + The view shown does not match what is stored internally. For example, if value 45.789 is stored in the database as a field of type Number/Double and the shown formatting is set to display only two decimals, "45.79" is only returned in searches with field formatting. + + +
-In this case, standard formatting is formatting that refers to the internally stored data. It is not always visible to the user, especially if it is used for simulating data types (for example, time fields in dBASE databases). This depends on the database used and the individual data type. Searching with field formatting is appropriate if you only want to find what is actually shown. This includes fields of type Date, Time, Date/Time and Number/Double. -However, searching without Apply field format is appropriate for larger databases with no formatting issues, because it is faster. -If you are searching the values of check boxes, and Apply field format is on, then you will receive a "1" for marked check boxes, a "0" for unmarked check boxes, and an empty string for undefined (tristate) check boxes. If the search has been carried out with Apply field format set to off, you will see the language-dependent default values "TRUE" or "FALSE". -If you use Apply field format when searching in list boxes, you find the text displayed in list boxes. If you do not use Apply field format, you will find the contents corresponding to the standard field format. + In this case, standard formatting is formatting that refers to the internally stored data. It is not always visible to the user, especially if it is used for simulating data types (for example, time fields in dBASE databases). This depends on the database used and the individual data type. Searching with field formatting is appropriate if you only want to find what is actually shown. This includes fields of type Date, Time, Date/Time and Number/Double. + However, searching without Apply field format is appropriate for larger databases with no formatting issues, because it is faster. + If you are searching the values of check boxes, and Apply field format is on, then you will receive a "1" for marked check boxes, a "0" for unmarked check boxes, and an empty string for undefined (tristate) check boxes. If the search has been carried out with Apply field format set to off, you will see the language-dependent default values "TRUE" or "FALSE". + If you use Apply field format when searching in list boxes, you find the text displayed in list boxes. If you do not use Apply field format, you will find the contents corresponding to the standard field format. -Match case -Specifies that upper and lower case are taken into consideration during the search. +Match case + Specifies that upper and lower case are taken into consideration during the search. -Search backwards -Specifies that the search process will run in reverse direction, from the last to the first record. +Search backwards + Specifies that the search process will run in reverse direction, from the last to the first record. -From top / From bottom -Restarts the search. A forward search restarts with the first record. A backwards search restarts with the last record. +From top / From bottom + Restarts the search. A forward search restarts with the first record. A backwards search restarts with the last record. -Wildcard expression -Allows a search with a * or ? wildcard. You can use the following wildcards: - - - -Wildcards - - -Meaning - - -Example - - - - -? - - -for exactly one arbitrary character - - -"?loppy" returns "Floppy" -"M?ller" returns, for example, Miller and Moller - - - - -* - - -for 0 or more arbitrary characters - - -"*-*" returns "ZIP-Drive" and "CD-ROM" -"M*er" returns all entries starting with an "M" and ending in "er" (for example, Miller, Moller, Mather) - - -
+Wildcard expression + Allows a search with a * or ? wildcard. You can use the following wildcards: + + + + Wildcards + + + Meaning + + + Example + + + + + ? + + + for exactly one arbitrary character + + + "?loppy" returns "Floppy" + "M?ller" returns, for example, Miller and Moller + + + + + * + + + for 0 or more arbitrary characters + + + "*-*" returns "ZIP-Drive" and "CD-ROM" + "M*er" returns all entries starting with an "M" and ending in "er" (for example, Miller, Moller, Mather) + + +
-If you want to search for the actual characters ? or *, preface them with a backslash: "\?" or "\*". However, this is only necessary when Wildcard expression is enabled. When the option is not enabled, the wildcard characters are processed like normal characters. + If you want to search for the actual characters ? or *, preface them with a backslash: "\?" or "\*". However, this is only necessary when Wildcard expression is enabled. When the option is not enabled, the wildcard characters are processed like normal characters. -Regular expression -Searches with regular expressions. The same regular expressions that are supported here are also supported in the %PRODUCTNAMEFind & Replace dialog. -Searching with regular expressions offers more options than searching with wildcard expressions. If you search with regular expressions, the following characters correspond to those used in searches with wildcards: - - - -Search with wildcard expression - - -Search with regular expressions - - - - -? - - -. - - - - -* - - -.* - - -
- - - - - - - -State -The State line shows the records returned by the search. If the search reaches the end (or the beginning) of a table, the search is automatically continued at the other end. -In very large databases, finding the record in reverse search order can take some time. In this case, the status bar informs you that the records are still being counted. +Regular expression + Searches with regular expressions. The same regular expressions that are supported here are also supported in the %PRODUCTNAMEFind & Replace dialog. + Searching with regular expressions offers more options than searching with wildcard expressions. If you search with regular expressions, the following characters correspond to those used in searches with wildcards: + + + + Search with wildcard expression + + + Search with regular expressions + + + + + ? + + + . + + + + + * + + + .* + + +
+ + + + + + + + State + The State line shows the records returned by the search. If the search reaches the end (or the beginning) of a table, the search is automatically continued at the other end. + In very large databases, finding the record in reverse search order can take some time. In this case, the status bar informs you that the records are still being counted. -Search / Cancel -Starts or cancels the search. If the search is successfully completed, the corresponding field in the table is highlighted. You can continue the search by clicking the Search button again. You can cancel a search process by clicking the Cancel button. +Search / Cancel + Starts or cancels the search. If the search is successfully completed, the corresponding field in the table is highlighted. You can continue the search by clicking the Search button again. You can cancel a search process by clicking the Cancel button. -Close -Closes the dialog. The settings of the last search will be saved until you quit %PRODUCTNAME. -If several tables or forms are open, you can set different search options for each document. When you close the documents only the search options of the document last closed are saved. - - +Close + Closes the dialog. The settings of the last search will be saved until you quit %PRODUCTNAME. + If several tables or forms are open, you can set different search options for each document. When you close the documents only the search options of the document last closed are saved. + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20020000.xhp index 850be4885d..10184c57ce 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20020000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20020000.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Current Page Style -/text/shared/02/20020000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -
+ + Current Page Style + /text/shared/02/20020000.xhp + + + +
page styles;editing/applying with statusbar @@ -53,16 +50,16 @@ -Current Page Style -Displays the current Page Style. Double-click to edit the style, right-click to select another style. -
-Double-click the Page Style field to open the Page Style dialog, in which you can edit the style for the current page. In the context menu of this field, you can apply a Page Style. +Current Page Style + Displays the current Page Style. Double-click to edit the style, right-click to select another style. +
+ Double-click the Page Style field to open the Page Style dialog, in which you can edit the style for the current page. In the context menu of this field, you can apply a Page Style. -Double-click the Page Style field to open the Page Style dialog, in which you can edit the style for the current page. + Double-click the Page Style field to open the Page Style dialog, in which you can edit the style for the current page. -Double-click the Page Style field to open the Page Style dialog in which you can select the style for the active page. You can select a different paper format or background. + Double-click this field to open the Slide Design dialog in which you can select the style for the current slide. You can select a different paper format or background. -Double-click the Page Style field to open the Page Style dialog in which you select the style for the current page. You can select a different paper format or background. + Double-click this field to open the Slide Design dialog in which you select the style for the current page. You can select a different paper format or background. - - + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01010000.xhp index 5f7dfe45ce..aece2782d2 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01010000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01010000.xhp @@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ * * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * - * $RCSfile: 01010000.xhp,v $ - * $Revision: 1.12.4.2 $ + * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ + * $Revision: 1.8 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,1006 +35,1025 @@ - -General Shortcut Keys in $[officename] -/text/shared/04/01010000.xhp - - - -
+ + General Shortcut Keys in $[officename] + /text/shared/04/01010000.xhp + + + +
keyboard;general commands -shortcut keys;general -text input fields -AutoComplete function in text and list boxes -macros; interrupting + shortcut keys;general + text input fields + AutoComplete function in text and list boxes + macros; interrupting -General Shortcut Keys in $[officename] +General Shortcut Keys in $[officename] -
- -Using Shortcut Keys -A great deal of your application's functionality can be called up by using shortcut keys. For example, the Command+O -Ctrl+O shortcut keys are shown next to the Open entry in the File menu. If you want to access this function by using the shortcut keys, press and hold down Command +
+ + Using Shortcut Keys + A great deal of your application's functionality can be called up by using shortcut keys. For example, the Command+O +Ctrl+O shortcut keys are shown next to the Open entry in the File menu. If you want to access this function by using the shortcut keys, press and hold down Command Ctrl and then press the O key. Release both keys after the dialog appears. -When operating your application, you can choose between using the mouse or the keyboard for almost all of the operations available. - + When operating your application, you can choose between using the mouse or the keyboard for almost all of the operations available. + Calling Menus With Shortcut Keys - + Some of the characters shown on the menu bar are underlined. You can access these menus directly by pressing the underlined character together with the ALT key. Once the menu is opened, you will again find underlined characters. You can access these menu items directly by simply pressing the underlined character key. -Using Shortcut Keys to Control Dialogs -There is always one element highlighted in any given dialog - usually shown by a broken frame. This element, which can be either a button, an option field, an entry in a list box or a check box, is said to have the focus on it. If the focal point is a button, pressing Enter runs it as if you had clicked it. A check box is toggled by pressing the spacebar. If an option field has the focus, use the arrow keys to change the activated option field in that area. Use the Tab key to go from one element or area to the next one, use Shift + Tab to go in the reverse direction. -Pressing ESC closes the dialog without saving changes. + Using Shortcut Keys to Control Dialogs + There is always one element highlighted in any given dialog - usually shown by a broken frame. This element, which can be either a button, an option field, an entry in a list box or a check box, is said to have the focus on it. If the focal point is a button, pressing Enter runs it as if you had clicked it. A check box is toggled by pressing the spacebar. If an option field has the focus, use the arrow keys to change the activated option field in that area. Use the Tab key to go from one element or area to the next one, use Shift + Tab to go in the reverse direction. + Pressing ESC closes the dialog without saving changes. If you place the focus on a button, not only will you see the dotted line framing the name of the button, but also a thicker shadow under the button selected. This indicates that if you exit the dialog by pressing the Enter key, it is the equivalent of pressing that button itself. -Shortcut Keys for Mouse Actions -If you are using drag-and-drop, selecting with the mouse or clicking objects and names, you can use the keys Shift, Command -Ctrl and occasionally Option + Shortcut Keys for Mouse Actions + If you are using drag-and-drop, selecting with the mouse or clicking objects and names, you can use the keys Shift, Command +Ctrl and occasionally Option Alt to access additional functionality. The modified functions available when holding down keys during drag-and-drop are indicated by the mouse pointer changing form. When selecting files or other objects, the modifier keys can extend the selection - the functions are explained where applicable. -Practical Text Input Fields - - -You can open a context menu, which contains some of the most often-used commands. - - -Use the shortcut keys Shift+Command + Practical Text Input Fields + + + You can open a context menu, which contains some of the most often-used commands. + + + Use the shortcut keys Shift+Command Ctrl+S to open the Special Characters dialog to insert one or more special characters. - - -Use Command + + + Use Command Ctrl+A to select the entire text. Use the right or left arrow key to remove the selection. - - -Double-click a word to select it. - - -A triple-click in a text input field selects the entire field. A triple-click in a text document selects the current sentence. - - -Use Command + + + Double-click a word to select it. + + + A triple-click in a text input field selects the entire field. A triple-click in a text document selects the current sentence. + + + Use Command Ctrl+Del to delete everything from the cursor position to the end of the word. - - -By using Command + + + By using Command Ctrl and right or left arrow key, the cursor will jump from word to word; if you also hold down the Shift key, one word after the other is selected. - - -INSRT is used to switch between the insert mode and the overwrite mode and back again. - - -Drag-and-drop can be used within and outside of a text box. - - -The Command + + + INSRT is used to switch between the insert mode and the overwrite mode and back again. + + + Drag-and-drop can be used within and outside of a text box. + + + The Command Ctrl+Z shortcut keys are used to undo modifications one step at a time; the text will then have the status it had before the first change. - - -
- - - $[officename] has an AutoComplete function which activates itself in some text and list boxes. For example, enter c:\a + + +
+ + + $[officename] has an AutoComplete function which activates itself in some text and list boxes. For example, enter c:\a ~/a into the URL field and the AutoComplete function displays the first file or first directory found on the C: drive in your home folder that starts with the letter "a". - - -Use the down arrow key to scroll through the other files and directories. Use the right arrow key to also display an existing subdirectory in the URL field. Quick AutoComplete is available if you press the End key after entering part of the URL. Once you find the document or directory you want, press Enter. - - -
-Interrupting Macros -If you want to terminate a macro that is currently running, press Shift+ Command + + + Use the down arrow key to scroll through the other files and directories. Use the right arrow key to also display an existing subdirectory in the URL field. Quick AutoComplete is available if you press the End key after entering part of the URL. Once you find the document or directory you want, press Enter. + + +
+ Interrupting Macros + If you want to terminate a macro that is currently running, press Shift+ Command Ctrl+Q. -List of General Shortcut Keys in $[officename] -The shortcut keys are shown on the right hand side of the menu lists next to the corresponding menu command. (Not all of the mentioned keys for controlling dialogs are available on the Macintosh.) + List of General Shortcut Keys in $[officename] + The shortcut keys are shown on the right hand side of the menu lists next to the corresponding menu command. (Not all of the mentioned keys for controlling dialogs are available on the Macintosh.) - - - -Shortcut Keys - - - -Effect - - - - - -Enter key - - -Activates the focused button in a dialog - - - - -Esc - - -Terminates the action or dialog. If in $[officename] Help: goes up one level. - - - - -Spacebar - - -Toggles the focused check box in a dialog. - - - - -Arrow keys - - -Changes the active control field in an option section of a dialog. - - - - -Tab - - -Advances focus to the next section or element in a dialog. - - - - -Shift + Tab - - -Moves the focus to the previous section or element in a dialog. - - - - -Option +
+ + + Shortcut Keys + + + + Effect + + + + + + Enter key + + + Activates the focused button in a dialog + + + + + Esc + + + Terminates the action or dialog. If in $[officename] Help: goes up one level. + + + + + Spacebar + + + Toggles the focused check box in a dialog. + + + + + Arrow keys + + + Changes the active control field in an option section of a dialog. + + + + + Tab + + + Advances focus to the next section or element in a dialog. + + + + + Shift + Tab + + + Moves the focus to the previous section or element in a dialog. + + + + + Option Alt+Down Arrow - - -Opens the list of the control field currently selected in a dialog. These shortcut keys apply not only to combo boxes but also to icon buttons with pop-up menus. Close an opened list by pressing the Escape key. - - - - -Del - - -Deletes the selected item(s) into the recycle bin. - - - - -Shift+Del - - -Deletes the selected item(s) without putting them in the recycle bin. - - - - -Backspace - - -When a folder is shown: goes up one level (goes back) - - - - -Command + + + Opens the list of the control field currently selected in a dialog. These shortcut keys apply not only to combo boxes but also to icon buttons with pop-up menus. Close an opened list by pressing the Escape key. + + + + + Del + + + Deletes the selected item(s) into the recycle bin. + + + + + Shift+Del + + + Deletes the selected item(s) without putting them in the recycle bin. + + + + + Backspace + + + When a folder is shown: goes up one level (goes back) + + + + + Command Ctrl+M - - -Removes direct formatting from selected text or objects (as in Format - Default Formatting) - - - - -Command + + + Removes direct formatting from selected text or objects (as in Format - Default Formatting) + + + + + Command Ctrl+Tab - - -When positioned at the start of a header, a tab is inserted.UFI: fixes #i21687# - - - - -Enter (if an OLE object is selected) - - -Activates the selected OLE object. - - - - -Enter (if a drawing object or text object is selected) - - -Activates text input mode. - - - - -Command + + + When positioned at the start of a header, a tab is inserted.UFI: fixes #i21687# + + + + + Enter (if an OLE object is selected) + + + Activates the selected OLE object. + + + + + Enter (if a drawing object or text object is selected) + + + Activates text input mode. + + + + + Command Ctrl+O - - -Opens a document. - - - - -Command + + + Opens a document. + + + + + Command Ctrl+S - - -Saves the current document. - - - - -Command + + + Saves the current document. + + + + + Command Ctrl+N - - -Creates a new document. - - - - -Shift+Command + + + Creates a new document. + + + + + Shift+Command Ctrl+N - - -Opens Templates and Documents dialog. - - - - -Command + + + Opens Templates and Documents dialog. + + + + + Command Ctrl+P - - -Prints document. - - - - -Command + + + Prints document. + + + + + Command Ctrl+Q - - -Exits application. - - - - -Command + + + Exits application. + + + + + Command Ctrl+X - - -Cuts out the selected elements. - - - - -Command + + + Cuts out the selected elements. + + + + + Command Ctrl+C - - -Copies the selected items. - - - - -Command + + + Copies the selected items. + + + + + Command Ctrl+V - - -Pastes from the clipboard. - - - - -Command + + + Pastes from the clipboard. + + + + + Command+Option +Ctrl+Alt+Shift+V + + + Pastes unformatted text from the clipboard. The text is pasted using the format that exists at the insertion point.CWS mox01 + + + + + Command Ctrl+Shift+V - - -Opens the Paste Special dialog. - - - - -Command + + + Opens the Paste Special dialog. + + + + + Command Ctrl+A - - -Selects all. - - - - -Command + + + Selects all. + + + + + Command Ctrl+Z - - -Undoes last action. - - - - -Command + + + Undoes last action. + + + + + Command Ctrl+Y - - -Redoes last action. - - - - -Command + + + Redoes last action. + + + + + Command Ctrl+Shift+Y - - -Repeats last command.[framework-features] new/SRC680_m221 : Shortcut for "Repeat" - - - - -Command + + + Repeats last command.[framework-features] new/SRC680_m221 : Shortcut for "Repeat" + + + + + Command Ctrl+F - - -Calls the Find & Replace dialog. - - - - -Command + + + Calls the Find & Replace dialog. + + + + + Command Ctrl+Shift+F - - -Searches for the last entered search term. - - - - - + + + Searches for the last entered search term. + + + + + Ctrl+Shift+J - - - + + + Toggles the view between fullscreen mode and normal mode in Writer or Calc - - - - -Command + + + + + Command Ctrl+Shift+R - - -Redraws the document view. - - - - -Shift+Command + + + Redraws the document view. + + + + + Shift+Command Ctrl+I - - -Enable or disable the selection cursor in read-only text. - - - - -Command + + + Enable or disable the selection cursor in read-only text. + + + + + Command Ctrl+I - - -The Italic attribute is applied to the selected area. If the cursor is positioned in a word, this word is also marked in italic. - - - - -Command + + + The Italic attribute is applied to the selected area. If the cursor is positioned in a word, this word is also marked in italic. + + + + + Command Ctrl+B - - -The Bold attribute is applied to the selected area. If the cursor is positioned in a word, this word is also put in bold. - - - - -Command + + + The Bold attribute is applied to the selected area. If the cursor is positioned in a word, this word is also put in bold. + + + + + Command Ctrl+U - - -The Underlined attribute is applied to the selected area. If the cursor is positioned in a word, this word is also underlined. - - -
+ + + The Underlined attribute is applied to the selected area. If the cursor is positioned in a word, this word is also underlined. + + + -Shortcut Keys Using the Function Keys -Not all of the function shortcut keys are available on the Mac. + Shortcut Keys Using the Function Keys + Not all of the function shortcut keys are available on the Mac. - - - -Shortcut keys - - - -Effect - - - - - - +
+ + + Shortcut keys + + + + Effect + + + + + + F1 - - - + + + Starts the $[officename] Help -In the $[officename] Help: jumps to main help page. - - - - - + In the $[officename] Help: jumps to main help page. + + + + + Shift + F1 - - - + + + Context Help - - - - -Shift+F2 - - -Turns on Extended Tips for the currently selected command, icon or control. - - - - -Command -Ctrl+F4 or Option + + + + + Shift+F2 + + + Turns on Extended Tips for the currently selected command, icon or control. + + + + + Command +Ctrl+F4 or Option Alt+F4 - - -Closes the current document (close $[officename] when the last open document is closed) - - - - -F6 - - -Sets focus in next subwindow (for example, document/data source view) - - - - -Shift+F6 - - -Sets focus in previous subwindow. - - - - -F10 - - -Activates the first menu (File menu) - - - - -Shift+F10 - - -Opens the context menu. - - -
+ + + Closes the current document (close $[officename] when the last open document is closed) + + + + + F6 + + + Sets focus in next subwindow (for example, document/data source view) + + + + + Shift+F6 + + + Sets focus in previous subwindow. + + + + + F10 + + + Activates the first menu (File menu) + + + + + Shift+F10 + + + Opens the context menu. + + + -Shortcut keys in the Gallery - - - -Shortcut keys - - -Result - - - - -Tab - - -Moves between areas. - - - - -Shift+Tab - - -Moves between areas (backwards) - - -
+ Shortcut keys in the Gallery + + + + Shortcut keys + + + Result + + + + + Tab + + + Moves between areas. + + + + + Shift+Tab + + + Moves between areas (backwards) + + +
-Shortcut keys in the New Theme area of the Gallery: - - - -Shortcut keys - - -Result - - - - -Up arrow - - -Moves the selection up one. - - - - -Down arrow - - -Moves the selection down. - - - - -Command + Shortcut keys in the New Theme area of the Gallery: +
+ + + Shortcut keys + + + Result + + + + + Up arrow + + + Moves the selection up one. + + + + + Down arrow + + + Moves the selection down. + + + + + Command Ctrl+Enter - - -Opens the Properties dialog. - - - - -Shift+F10 - - -Opens a context menu. - - - - -Command + + + Opens the Properties dialog. + + + + + Shift+F10 + + + Opens a context menu. + + + + + Command Ctrl+U - - -Refreshes the selected theme. - - - - -Command + + + Refreshes the selected theme. + + + + + Command Ctrl+R - - -Opens the Enter Title dialog. - - - - -Command + + + Opens the Enter Title dialog. + + + + + Command Ctrl+D - - -Deletes the selected theme. - - - - -Insert - - -Inserts a new theme - - -
+ + + Deletes the selected theme. + + + + + Insert + + + Inserts a new theme + + + -Shortcut keys in the Gallery preview area: - - - -Shortcut keys - - -Result - - - - -Home - - -Jumps to the first entry. - - - - -End - - -Jumps to the last entry. - - - - -Left Arrow - - -Selects the next Gallery element on the left. - - - - -Right Arrow - - -Selects the next Gallery element on the right. - - - - -Up Arrow - - -Selects the next Gallery element above. - - - - -Down Arrow - - -Selects the next Gallery element below. - - - - -Page Up - - -Scroll up one screen. - - - - -Page Down - - -Scroll down one screen. - - - - -Command + Shortcut keys in the Gallery preview area: +
+ + + Shortcut keys + + + Result + + + + + Home + + + Jumps to the first entry. + + + + + End + + + Jumps to the last entry. + + + + + Left Arrow + + + Selects the next Gallery element on the left. + + + + + Right Arrow + + + Selects the next Gallery element on the right. + + + + + Up Arrow + + + Selects the next Gallery element above. + + + + + Down Arrow + + + Selects the next Gallery element below. + + + + + Page Up + + + Scroll up one screen. + + + + + Page Down + + + Scroll down one screen. + + + + + Command Ctrl+Shift+Insert - - -Inserts the selected object as a linked object into the current document. - - - - -Command + + + Inserts the selected object as a linked object into the current document. + + + + + Command Ctrl+I - - -Inserts a copy of the selected object into the current document. - - - - -Command + + + Inserts a copy of the selected object into the current document. + + + + + Command Ctrl+T - - -Opens the Enter Title dialog. - - - - -Command + + + Opens the Enter Title dialog. + + + + + Command Ctrl+P - - -Switches between themes view and object view. - - - - -Spacebar - - -Switches between themes view and object view. - - - - -Enter - - -Switches between themes view and object view. - - - - -Step backward (only in object view) - - -Switches back to main overview. - - -
+ + + Switches between themes view and object view. + + + + + Spacebar + + + Switches between themes view and object view. + + + + + Enter + + + Switches between themes view and object view. + + + + + Step backward (only in object view) + + + Switches back to main overview. + + + -
-Selecting Rows and Columns in a Database Table (opened by F4) - - - -Shortcut keys - - -Result - - - - -Spacebar - - -Toggles row selection, except when the row is in edit mode. - - - - -Command +
+ Selecting Rows and Columns in a Database Table (opened by F4) +
+ + + Shortcut keys + + + Result + + + + + Spacebar + + + Toggles row selection, except when the row is in edit mode. + + + + + Command Ctrl+spacebar - - -Toggles row selection - - - - -Shift+spacebar - - -Selects the current column - - - - -Command + + + Toggles row selection + + + + + Shift+spacebar + + + Selects the current column + + + + + Command Ctrl+PgUp - - -Moves pointer to the first row - - - - -Command + + + Moves pointer to the first row + + + + + Command Ctrl+PgDn - - -Moves pointer to the last row - - -
+ + + Moves pointer to the last row + + + -
-
-Shortcut Keys for Drawing Objects - - - -Shortcut keys - - -Result - - - - -Select the toolbar with F6. Use the Down Arrow and Right Arrow to select the desired toolbar icon and press Command + +
+ Shortcut Keys for Drawing Objects +
+ + + Shortcut keys + + + Result + + + + + Select the toolbar with F6. Use the Down Arrow and Right Arrow to select the desired toolbar icon and press Command Ctrl+Enter - - -Inserts a Drawing Object. - - - - -Select the document with Command + + + Inserts a Drawing Object. + + + + + Select the document with Command Ctrl+F6 and press Tab - - -Selects a Drawing Object. - - - - -Tab - - -Selects the next Drawing Object. - - - - -Shift+Tab - - -Selects the previous Drawing Object. - - - - -Command + + + Selects a Drawing Object. + + + + + Tab + + + Selects the next Drawing Object. + + + + + Shift+Tab + + + Selects the previous Drawing Object. + + + + + Command Ctrl+Home - - -Selects the first Drawing Object. - - - - -Command + + + Selects the first Drawing Object. + + + + + Command Ctrl+End - - -Selects the last Drawing Object. - - - - -Esc - - -Ends Drawing Object selection. - - - - -Esc (in Handle Selection Mode) - - -Exit Handle Selection Mode and return to Object Selection Mode. - - - - -Up/down/left/right arrow - - -Move the selected point (the snap-to-grid functions are temporarily disabled, but end points still snap to each other). - - - - -Option + + + Selects the last Drawing Object. + + + + + Esc + + + Ends Drawing Object selection. + + + + + Esc (in Handle Selection Mode) + + + Exit Handle Selection Mode and return to Object Selection Mode. + + + + + Up/down/left/right arrow + + + Move the selected point (the snap-to-grid functions are temporarily disabled, but end points still snap to each other). + + + + + Option Alt+Up/Down/Left/Right Arrow - - -Moves the selected Drawing Object one pixel (in Selection Mode) -Re-sizes a Drawing Object (in Handle Selection Mode) -Rotates a Drawing Object (in Rotation Mode) -Opens the properties dialog for a Drawing Object. -Activates the Point Selection mode for the selected drawing object. - - - - -Spacebar - - -Select a point of a drawing object (in Point Selection mode) / Cancel selection. -The selected point blinks once per second. - - - - -Shift+spacebar - - -Select an additional point in Point Selection mode. - - - - -Command + + + Moves the selected Drawing Object one pixel (in Selection Mode) + Re-sizes a Drawing Object (in Handle Selection Mode) + Rotates a Drawing Object (in Rotation Mode) + Opens the properties dialog for a Drawing Object. + Activates the Point Selection mode for the selected drawing object. + + + + + Spacebar + + + Select a point of a drawing object (in Point Selection mode) / Cancel selection. + The selected point blinks once per second. + + + + + Shift+spacebar + + + Select an additional point in Point Selection mode. + + + + + Command Ctrl+Tab - - -Select the next point of the drawing object (Point Selection mode) -In Rotation mode, the center of rotation can also be selected. - - - - -Shift+Command + + + Select the next point of the drawing object (Point Selection mode) + In Rotation mode, the center of rotation can also be selected. + + + + + Shift+Command Ctrl+Tab - - -Select the previous point of the drawing object (Point Selection mode) - - - - -Command + + + Select the previous point of the drawing object (Point Selection mode) + + + + + Command Ctrl+Enter - - -A new drawing object with default size is placed in the center of the current view. - - - - -Command + + + A new drawing object with default size is placed in the center of the current view. + + + + + Command Ctrl+Enter at the Selection icon - - -Activates the first drawing object in the document. - - - - -Esc - - -Leave the Point Selection mode. The drawing object is selected afterwards. -Edit a point of a drawing object (Point Edit mode) - - - - -Any text or numerical key - - -If a drawing object is selected, switches to edit mode and places the cursor at the end of the text in the drawing object. A printable character is inserted. - - - - -Option + + + Activates the first drawing object in the document. + + + + + Esc + + + Leave the Point Selection mode. The drawing object is selected afterwards. + Edit a point of a drawing object (Point Edit mode) + + + + + Any text or numerical key + + + If a drawing object is selected, switches to edit mode and places the cursor at the end of the text in the drawing object. A printable character is inserted. + + + + + Option Alt key while creating or scaling a graphic object - - -The position of the object's center is fixed. - - - - -Shift key while creating or scaling a graphic object - - -The ratio of the object's width to height is fixed. - - -
+ + + The position of the object's center is fixed. + + + + + Shift key while creating or scaling a graphic object + + + The ratio of the object's width to height is fixed. + + + -
-
- - -
- - + +
+ + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110200.xhp index 05a4ad6128..bfce5bc5a3 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110200.xhp @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ Exporting -To export to ASP, in a $[officename] Impress document choose File - Export. You then see the Export dialog in which you select HTML Document as the file type. Once you have selected a directory and entered a file name, click Save. For export as ASP, we recommend selecting a "secret" file name for the HTML file (see below for more details). You then see the HTML Export dialog. Several files will be written to the directory you have just selected. +To export to ASP, in a $[officename] Impress document choose File - Export. You then see the Export dialog in which you select HTML Document as the file type. Once you have selected a directory and entered a file name, click Export. For export as ASP, we recommend selecting a "secret" file name for the HTML file (see below for more details). You then see the HTML Export dialog. Several files will be written to the directory you have just selected. The presenter uses the entered file name to change between the slides viewed by the audience. You can save the WebCast files locally or save them directly to an HTTP server. You can later transfer locally saved files to the HTTP server by FTP. Note that WebCast only works if the files are requested over an HTTP server. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard01.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard01.xhp index ca57d65dbc..0813d45a5a 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard01.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard01.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Web Wizard - Introduction -/text/shared/autopi/webwizard01.xhp - - - -
UFI: removed help idWeb Wizard - Introduction -You can use the Web Wizard to maintain web pages on a server. You can also load previously saved Web Wizard settings to maintain an existing web page. These settings include information about the local folder and the FTP server. -
-Choose Web Wizard settings -Select the settings that you want to load and then click Load. To start the wizard with the default settings, select "none". -Delete -Deletes the selected settings. -Web Wizard - Documents - - + + Web Wizard - Introduction + /text/shared/autopi/webwizard01.xhp + + + +
UFI: removed help id +Web Wizard - Introduction + You can use the Web Wizard to maintain web pages on a server. You can also load previously saved Web Wizard settings to maintain an existing web page. These settings include information about the local folder and the FTP server. +
+ +Choose Web Wizard settings + Select the settings that you want to load and then click Load. To start the wizard with the default settings, select "default". + +Delete + Deletes the selected settings. + Web Wizard - Documents + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_addressbook.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_addressbook.xhp index 21fa70e963..10d550cf7b 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_addressbook.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_addressbook.xhp @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ In the Data source combo box, select the system address book or the data source you want to use as an address book. -If you have not yet registered the system address book in %PRODUCTNAME as the data source, click the Configure button. This takes you to the Address Book Data Source Wizard, in which you can register your address book as a new data source in %PRODUCTNAME. +If you have not yet registered the system address book in %PRODUCTNAME as the data source, click the Address Data Source ... button. This takes you to the Address Book Data Source Wizard, in which you can register your address book as a new data source in %PRODUCTNAME. In the Table combo box, select the database table you want to use as the address book. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/error_report.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/error_report.xhp index bef3d05e18..490d56a38c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/error_report.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/error_report.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Error Report Tool -/text/shared/guide/error_report.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Error Report Tool + /text/shared/guide/error_report.xhp + + + Error Report Tool -reports;error reports -crash reports -activating;Error Report Tool + reports;error reports + crash reports + activating;Error Report Tool MW changed "reporting..." to "reports;" -Error Report Tool +Error Report Tool -The Error Report Tool starts automatically when a program crash occurs. If the program enters into an endless loop, so that it does not respond to mouse-clicks or keypresses, you can also start the Error Report Tool manually. -The Error Report Tool gathers all necessary information that can help the program developers to improve the code, so that in later versions this error can possibly be avoided. Please help us to improve the software and send the generated error report. -Sun Microsystems is committed to respecting your online privacy and recognizes your need for appropriate protection and management of any personally identifiable information you share with us. See the statement at http://www.sun.com/privacy/ on your online data privacy at Sun Microsystems. -Starting the Error Report Tool -With most program crashes the Error Report Tool will start automatically. However, if the program seems to be stuck and the tool does not start automatically, you can start the tool manually: - - -Go to the {office_install_path}\ -/program folder and start the crashrep.exe - file. - - -Completing the Report -On the main Error Report Tool dialog, you can enter some additional information that may help the developers to localize the error. For example, if the error only appears after a change in your hardware or software environment, or if you clicked on a button, please include that information. -Sending the Error Report -The Error Report Tool uses the HTTP PUT / SOAP protocol to send the report data. You may optionally enter some descriptive text that will help us to identify the context of the program crash. Then click the Send button. -You will not get an answer to your error report. If you need support, please visit the support forum on the Internet. -You may choose to respond to questions that the developers may have about the reported error. Mark the check box if you allow to be contacted by e-mail, should additional information be required. By default this box is not marked, so you will not get any e-mail. -What Data is Sent? -The error report consists of several files. The main file contains information about the error type, operating system name and version, memory usage, and the description that you entered. You can click the Show Report button on the main dialog of the Error Report Tool to view what will get sent in the main file. -In addition, relevant memory contents and stack traces are gathered by some system standard tools ("dbhhelp.dll" on Windows systems, "pstack" on UNIX systems). This information will be sent also. - - + The Error Report Tool starts automatically when a program crash occurs.removed sentene about manually - i96770 + The Error Report Tool gathers all necessary information that can help the program developers to improve the code, so that in later versions this error can possibly be avoided. Please help us to improve the software and send the generated error report. + Sun Microsystems is committed to respecting your online privacy and recognizes your need for appropriate protection and management of any personally identifiable information you share with us. See the statement at http://www.sun.com/privacy/ on your online data privacy at Sun Microsystems. + Starting the Error Report Tool + With most program crashes the Error Report Tool will start automatically. + Completing the Report + On the main Error Report Tool dialog, you can enter some additional information that may help the developers to localize the error. For example, if the error only appears after a change in your hardware or software environment, or if you clicked on a button, please include that information. + Sending the Error Report + The Error Report Tool uses the HTTP PUT / SOAP protocol to send the report data. You may optionally enter some descriptive text that will help us to identify the context of the program crash. Then click the Send button. + You will not get an answer to your error report. If you need support, please visit the support forum on the Internet. + You may choose to respond to questions that the developers may have about the reported error. Mark the check box if you allow to be contacted by e-mail, should additional information be required. By default this box is not marked, so you will not get any e-mail. + What Data is Sent? + The error report consists of several files. The main file contains information about the error type, operating system name and version, memory usage, and the description that you entered. You can click the Show Report button on the main dialog of the Error Report Tool to view what will get sent in the main file. + In addition, relevant memory contents and stack traces are gathered by some system standard tools ("dbhhelp.dll" on Windows systems, "pstack" on UNIX systems). This information will be sent also. + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/export_ms.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/export_ms.xhp index 44fb30f082..32f416c834 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/export_ms.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/export_ms.xhp @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Enter a name in the File name box and click Save. -If you want the file dialogs to offer another file format as default, select that format in Tools - Options - Load/Save - General in the Standard file format area. +If you want the file dialogs to offer another file format as default, select that format in Tools - Options - Load/Save - General in the Default file format area. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/import_ms.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/import_ms.xhp index ed09d43352..e61306daf5 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/import_ms.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/import_ms.xhp @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ saving; default file formats defaults; file formats in file dialogs file formats; saving always in other formats -Microsoft Office; as standard file format +Microsoft Office; as default file format files;importing XML converters converters; XML @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Select a file name and click Open. -If you always want the file dialogs to show another format by default, choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - General and select that format as Standard file format. +If you always want the file dialogs to show another format by default, choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - General and select that format as Default file format. Converting all documents of a folder Open the wizard, which guides you through the operation, to copy and convert all documents from Microsoft Word, Microsoft Excel or Microsoft PowerPoint into OpenDocument file format documents. You can select a source and target directory, specify whether to convert documents and/or templates, and more besides. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/keyboard.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/keyboard.xhp index df46aff9da..088b863ab9 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/keyboard.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/keyboard.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Shortcuts (%PRODUCTNAME Accessibility) -/text/shared/guide/keyboard.xhp - - - + + Shortcuts (%PRODUCTNAME Accessibility) + /text/shared/guide/keyboard.xhp + + + accessibility;general shortcuts -shortcut keys; %PRODUCTNAME accessibility + shortcut keys; %PRODUCTNAME accessibility -Shortcuts (%PRODUCTNAME Accessibility) +Shortcuts (%PRODUCTNAME Accessibility) -You can control %PRODUCTNAME without using a mouse device, using only the keyboard. -On each module's main help page (for example, the %PRODUCTNAME Writer or %PRODUCTNAME Calc main help page) there is a link to access the keyboard shortcuts' help for that module. -In addition, under the keyword "Accessibility" you find step-by-step instructions about how to control the selected module without a mouse device. - -Working with the %PRODUCTNAME user interface without mouse -Activating menu bar, toolbars, windows, and document -Repeatedly pressing F6 switches the focus and circles through the following objects: - - -menu bar, - - -every toolbar from top to bottom and from left to right, - - -every free window from left to right, - - -document - - -If the focus is on a menu bar or a toolbar, and you press CommandCtrl+Tab, you switch through the previously mentioned objects just as with F6, but without switching through to the document. Some X Window Managers evaluate this shortcut themselves, in which case you cannot use the shortcut for %PRODUCTNAME. + You can control %PRODUCTNAME without using a mouse device, using only the keyboard. + On each module's main help page (for example, the %PRODUCTNAME Writer or %PRODUCTNAME Calc main help page) there is a link to access the keyboard shortcuts' help for that module. + In addition, under the keyword "Accessibility" you find step-by-step instructions about how to control the selected module without a mouse device. + + Working with the %PRODUCTNAME user interface without mouse + Activating menu bar, toolbars, windows, and document + Repeatedly pressing F6 switches the focus and circles through the following objects: + + + menu bar, + + + every toolbar from top to bottom and from left to right, + + + every free window from left to right, + + + document + + + If the focus is on a menu bar or a toolbar, and you press Command +Ctrl+Tab, you switch through the previously mentioned objects just as with F6, but without switching through to the document. Some X Window Managers evaluate this shortcut themselves, in which case you cannot use the shortcut for %PRODUCTNAME. -Press Shift+F6 or Shift+CommandCtrl+Tab to switch through objects in the opposite direction. -Press CommandCtrl+F6 to switch to the document. -Press F10 to switch to the menu bar and back. -Escape closes an open submenu, a toolbar, or the current free window. -Calling a menu command -Press OptionAlt or F6 or F10 to select the first menu (the File menu). With right arrow, the next menu to the right is selected; with left arrow, the previous menu. -Arrow down opens a selected menu. Any additional arrow down and up arrow move the selection through the menu commands. With right arrow you open any existing submenus. -Press Enter to execute the selected menu command. -Executing an icon command -Press F6 repeatedly until the first icon on the toolbar is selected. Use the right and left arrows to select an icon on a horizontal toolbar. Similarly, use the up and down arrows to select an icon on a vertical toolbar. The Home key selects the first icon on a toolbar and the End key, the last. -Press Enter to execute the selected icon. If the selected icon normally demands a consecutive mouse action, such as inserting a rectangle, then pressing the Enter key is not sufficient: in these cases press CommandCtrl+Enter. - - -Pressing CommandCtrl+Enter on an icon for creating a draw object. A draw object will be placed into the middle of the view, with a predefined size. - - -Press CommandCtrl+Enter on the Selection tool to select the first draw object in the document. If you want to edit, size, or move the selected draw object, first use CommandCtrl+F6 to set the focus into the document. - - -If a toolbar is longer than can be displayed on screen, it shows an icon at the right or lower edge. Select the toolbar and press PageUp or PageDown to display the remaining icons. -Special hints for toolbars -Press the down arrow or right arrow to open the selected toolbar. This is equivalent to a mouse click. In the toolbar use the right arrow and left arrow keys. The Home and End keys select the first and last icon in the toolbar, respectively. -Close the toolbar with Esc. It is not possible to move the toolbar without a mouse. -Selection from a combo box - - - - -Combo box + Press Shift+F6 or Shift+Command +Ctrl+Tab to switch through objects in the opposite direction. + Press Command +Ctrl+F6 to switch to the document. + Press F10 to switch to the menu bar and back. + Escape closes an open submenu, a toolbar, or the current free window. + Calling a menu command + Press Option +Alt or F6 or F10 to select the first menu (the File menu). With right arrow, the next menu to the right is selected; with left arrow, the previous menu. + Arrow down opens a selected menu. Any additional arrow down and up arrow move the selection through the menu commands. With right arrow you open any existing submenus. + Press Enter to execute the selected menu command. + Executing an icon command + Press F6 repeatedly until the first icon on the toolbar is selected. Use the right and left arrows to select an icon on a horizontal toolbar. Similarly, use the up and down arrows to select an icon on a vertical toolbar. The Home key selects the first icon on a toolbar and the End key, the last. + Press Enter to execute the selected icon. If the selected icon normally demands a consecutive mouse action, such as inserting a rectangle, then pressing the Enter key is not sufficient: in these cases press Command +Ctrl+Enter. + + + Pressing Command +Ctrl+Enter on an icon for creating a draw object. A draw object will be placed into the middle of the view, with a predefined size. + + + Press Command +Ctrl+Enter on the Selection tool to select the first draw object in the document. If you want to edit, size, or move the selected draw object, first use Command +Ctrl+F6 to set the focus into the document. + + + If a toolbar is longer than can be displayed on screen, it shows an icon at the right or lower edge. Select the toolbar and press PageUp or PageDown to display the remaining icons. + Special hints for toolbars + Press the down arrow or right arrow to open the selected toolbar. This is equivalent to a mouse click. In the toolbar use the right arrow and left arrow keys. The Home and End keys select the first and last icon in the toolbar, respectively. + Close the toolbar with Esc. It is not possible to move the toolbar without a mouse. + Selection from a combo box +
+ + + +Combo box - - -Select the combo box. Press Enter. -Use the down arrow or Page Down key to scroll down the combo box entries, or the up arrow or Page Up key to scroll upwards. The Home key takes you to the first entry and the End key takes you to the last entry. -Press Enter to execute the selected entry. - - -
-Selection in Tables -In several windows, dialogs, and in the table control field, there are tables to select data, for instance, in the right part of the Data Source View. The following keys are used for selections in these tables: - - -Spacebar: switches from selection of the current row and cancellation of any selection, but not if the current cell is in edit mode. - - -CommandCtrl+spacebar: switches between selection of the current row and cancellation of this selection - - -Shift+Spacebar: selection of the current column - - -OptionAlt+Up Arrow or OptionAlt+Down Arrow: moves the window separator between table and form, for instance in the bibliography database. - - -In a table control or in the data source view, the Tab key moves to the next column. To move to the next control, press CommandCtrl+Tab. To move to the previous control, press Shift+CommandCtrl+Tab. - - -Size and Position of Windows and Dialogs - - -First press OptionAlt+spacebar. -A system menu opens with menu commands like Move, Resize and Close. - - -Choose a command (down arrow, then Enter). - - -Now you can use the arrow keys to move or resize the dialog or window. - - -Press Enter to accept the change. Press Escape to cancel the changes. - - -Docking and Undocking Windows and Toolbars - - -Press F6 until the window or toolbar is selected. - - -Press CommandCtrl+Shift+F10. - - -Selecting objects -Press Shift+F4 to select the first object in the current document. When an object is selected, press Tab to select the next object, or press Esc to go back to the text. -Edit Objects -A selected OLE object can be activated with the Enter key. -Edit Position and Size of Objects - - -Use the arrow keys to move the selected object by one grid resolution unit. -Set the grid resolution unit with Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Grid in the Resolution area. If you enter a number greater than 1 in the Subdivision area, you must press the arrow key as often as the number states to move the selected object by one grid resolution unit. - - -Use the OptionAlt and arrow keys to move the selected object by one pixel. - - -Use CommandCtrl+Tab to enter the handle edit mode. The upper left handle is the active handle, it starts blinking. Use CommandCtrl+Tab to select the next handle. Press Escape to exit the handle edit mode. - - -In the handle edit mode, the arrow keys move the selected handle, which changes the object size. - - -Edit the Anchors of Objects -You can move the anchor of an object with the arrow keys. First enter the handle edit mode and select the anchor. Depending on the type of anchor, you can then move the anchor in different directions. - - -Select the object. - - -Enter the handle edit mode with CommandCtrl+Tab. - - -The upper left handle starts blinking. Press CommandCtrl+Tab several times, until no handle blinks. This signals that now the anchor of the object is activated. In text documents you can press Shift+CommandCtrl+A to activate the anchor directly. + + + Select the combo box. Press Enter. + Use the down arrow or Page Down key to scroll down the combo box entries, or the up arrow or Page Up key to scroll upwards. The Home key takes you to the first entry and the End key takes you to the last entry. + Press Enter to execute the selected entry. + + + + + Selection in Tables + In several windows, dialogs, and in the table control field, there are tables to select data, for instance, in the right part of the Data Source View. The following keys are used for selections in these tables: + + + Spacebar: switches from selection of the current row and cancellation of any selection, but not if the current cell is in edit mode. + + + Command +Ctrl+spacebar: switches between selection of the current row and cancellation of this selection. + + + Command +Ctrl+Shift+spacebar: switches between selection of the current column and cancellation of this selection. + + + Option +Alt+Up Arrow or Option +Alt+Down Arrow: moves the window separator between table and form, for instance in the bibliography database. + + + In a table control or in the data source view, the Tab key moves to the next column. To move to the next control, press Command +Ctrl+Tab. To move to the previous control, press Shift+Command +Ctrl+Tab. + + + Size and Position of Windows and Dialogs + + + First press Option +Alt+spacebar. + A system menu opens with menu commands like Move, Resize and Close. + + + Choose a command (down arrow, then Enter). + + + Now you can use the arrow keys to move or resize the dialog or window. + + + Press Enter to accept the change. Press Escape to cancel the changes. + + + Docking and Undocking Windows and Toolbars + + + Press F6 until the window or toolbar is selected. + + + Press Command +Ctrl+Shift+F10. + + + Selecting objects + Press Shift+F4 to select the first object in the current document. When an object is selected, press Tab to select the next object, or press Esc to go back to the text. + Edit Objects + A selected OLE object can be activated with the Enter key. + Edit Position and Size of Objects + + + Use the arrow keys to move the selected object by one grid resolution unit. + Set the grid resolution unit with Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Grid in the Resolution area. If you enter a number greater than 1 in the Subdivision area, you must press the arrow key as often as the number states to move the selected object by one grid resolution unit. + + + Use the Option +Alt and arrow keys to move the selected object by one pixel. + + + Use Command +Ctrl+Tab to enter the handle edit mode. The upper left handle is the active handle, it starts blinking. Use Command +Ctrl+Tab to select the next handle. Press Escape to exit the handle edit mode. + + + In the handle edit mode, the arrow keys move the selected handle, which changes the object size. + + + Edit the Anchors of Objects + You can move the anchor of an object with the arrow keys. First enter the handle edit mode and select the anchor. Depending on the type of anchor, you can then move the anchor in different directions. + + + Select the object. + + + Enter the handle edit mode with Command +Ctrl+Tab. + + + The upper left handle starts blinking. Press Command +Ctrl+Tab several times, until no handle blinks. This signals that now the anchor of the object is activated. In text documents you can press Shift+Command +Ctrl+A to activate the anchor directly. - - -Use the arrow keys to move the anchor. The object follows the anchor as appropriate. - - -You can change the anchor of the selected object for example in the object's context menu. - - -If the object is anchored To Paragraph, the arrow keys move the object to the previous or next paragraph. - - -If the object is anchored To page, the keys Page Up or Page Down move it to the previous or next page. - - -If the object is anchored To character, the Arrow keys move it through the current paragraph. - - -If the object is anchored As character, no anchor icon exists. You cannot move the object. - - -If the object is anchored To frame, the Arrow keys move it to the next frame in the respective direction. - - -Controlling the Dividing Lines -Documents of %PRODUCTNAME Calc, %PRODUCTNAME Draw, and %PRODUCTNAME Impress can be split horizontally and vertically into separate views. Each view can show other parts of the document. Using the mouse, you can drag a dividing line from the scrollbar into the document. - - -Shift+CommandCtrl+F6: shows the dividing lines at default positions and focus a line. - - -Arrow keys: moves the current dividing line a big step in the arrow direction. - - -Shift+Arrow keys: moves the current dividing line a small step in the arrow direction. - - -Delete: deletes the current dividing line - - -Shift+Delete: deletes both dividing lines - - -Enter: fixes the current position of the dividing lines - - -Escape: resets the current dividing line to its default position - - -
-Controlling the Data Source View -F4: opens and closes the data source view. -F6: switches between document and toolbars. -+ (plus key): expands the selected entry in the data source explorer. -- (minus key): collapses the selected entry in the data source explorer. -CommandCtrl+Shift+E: switches between data source explorer and table. -Shortcuts in the Query Design Window -F6: switches between object bar, table view, and selection area. -OptionAlt+Up arrow or OptionAlt+Down arrow: moves the border between table view and selection area up or down. -Keys in the Table View (upper area of the query design) and in the Relations window -CommandCtrl+Arrow key: moves the selected table in the direction of the arrow. -CommandCtrl+Shift+Arrow key: resizes the selected table in the table view. -Del: removes the selected table or connection from the table view. -Tab: switches between tables and connections in the table view. -Enter: when a connection is selected, the Enter key opens the Properties dialog of the connection. -Enter: when a table is selected, the Enter key enters the first data field from the list box into the selection area. -Keys in the Selection Area (bottom area of the query design) -Shift+Space key: selects the column in the selection area, so you can open its context menu. -Space key: selects the row. Cancels previous selection. -CommandCtrl+Left Arrow or Right Arrow: moves the selected column to the left or to the right. -Keys in the Table Design Window -F6: switches between toolbar, column view, and properties area. -
-
-Controlling the ImageMap Editor - - -Press Tab to select an icon. If you selected one of the icons from Rectangle to Freeform Polygon and you press CommandCtrl+Enter, an object of the selected type is created in default size. - - -If you press Enter while the icon Select is selected, the focus is set into the image window of the ImageMap Editor. Press Esc to set the focus back to the icons and input boxes. - - -If the Select icon is selected and you press Ctrl+Enter, the first object in the image window gets selected. - - -Use the icon Edit Points to switch into the point edit mode for polygons and back. - - -Use Ctrl+Tab in the image window to select the next point. Use Shift+Ctrl+Tab to select the previous point. - - -Use the Delete key with the focus in the image window to delete the selected object. - - -
-Controlling the Help -Press Shift+F1 to display the Extended Tips for the currently selected command, icon or control. -Navigating the main help pages - - -In the main help pages, use Tab to jump to the next hyperlink or Shift+Tab to jump to the previous link. - - -Press Enter to execute the selected hyperlink. - - -Press Backspace above the Enter key to return to the previous help page. - - -Controlling the Text Import dialog (CSV file import) -Ruler - - -Left or Right Arrow: go one position to the left or to the right - - -Ctrl+Left Arrow or Ctrl+Right Arrow: jump to the previous or to the next split - - -Ctrl+Shift+Left Arrow or Ctrl+Shift+Right Arrow: move a split one position to the left or to the right - - -Home or End: jump to the first or the last possible position - - -Ctrl+Home or Ctrl+End: jump to the first or the last split - - -Shift+Ctrl+Home or Shift+Ctrl+End: move split to the first or to the last position - - -Space key: insert or remove a split - - -Insert key: insert a split (leave existing splits unchanged) - - -Delete key: delete a split - - -Shift+Delete: delete all splits - - -Up Arrow or Down Arrow: scroll table down or up one row - - -Page Up or Page Down: scroll table down or up one page - - -Escape key (during mouse drag): cancel drag, move split to old position - - -Preview - - -Left Arrow or Right Arrow: select left or right column and clear other selections - - -Ctrl+Left Arrow or Ctrl+Right Arrow: move focus to the left or to the right column (does not change selection) - - -Shift+Left Arrow or Shift+Right Arrow: expand or shrink the selected range - - -Ctrl+Shift+Left Arrow or Ctrl+Shift+Right Arrow: expand or shrink the selected range (does not change other selections) - - -Home or End: select the first or the last column (use Shift or Ctrl as with cursor keys) - - -Space key: select the current column and deselect all of the other columns - - -Ctrl+Space key: select or deselect the current column - - -Shift+Space key: select the range from the last selected column to the current column - - -Ctrl+Shift+Space key: select the range from the last selected column to the current column (does not change other selections) - - -Ctrl+A: select all columns - - -Shift+F10: open a context menu - - -Ctrl+1 ... Ctrl+7: set the 1st ... 7th column type for the selected columns - - -Up Arrow or Down Arrow: scroll table down or up one row - - -Page Up or Page Down: scroll table down or up one page - - -Ctrl+Home or Ctrl+End: scroll to the top or bottom of a table - - -Controlling the Insert - Special Character Dialog - - -Tab switches through all controls in the dialog. - - -OptionAlt+Down Arrow opens a combo box. Enter selects the current entry in the combo box. - - -Arrow buttons move through the main selection area. Spacebar adds the current character to the list of characters to be inserted. - - - - - - - + + + Use the arrow keys to move the anchor. The object follows the anchor as appropriate. + + + You can change the anchor of the selected object for example in the object's context menu. + + + If the object is anchored To Paragraph, the arrow keys move the object to the previous or next paragraph. + + + If the object is anchored To page, the keys Page Up or Page Down move it to the previous or next page. + + + If the object is anchored To character, the Arrow keys move it through the current paragraph. + + + If the object is anchored As character, no anchor icon exists. You cannot move the object. + + + If the object is anchored To frame, the Arrow keys move it to the next frame in the respective direction. + + + Controlling the Dividing Lines + Documents of %PRODUCTNAME Calc, %PRODUCTNAME Draw, and %PRODUCTNAME Impress can be split horizontally and vertically into separate views. Each view can show other parts of the document. Using the mouse, you can drag a dividing line from the scrollbar into the document. + + + Shift+Command +Ctrl+F6: shows the dividing lines at default positions and focus a line. + + + Arrow keys: moves the current dividing line a big step in the arrow direction. + + + Shift+Arrow keys: moves the current dividing line a small step in the arrow direction. + + + Delete: deletes the current dividing line + + + Shift+Delete: deletes both dividing lines + + + Enter: fixes the current position of the dividing lines + + + Escape: resets the current dividing line to its default position + + +
+ Controlling the Data Source View + F4: opens and closes the data source view. + F6: switches between document and toolbars. + + (plus key): expands the selected entry in the data source explorer. + - (minus key): collapses the selected entry in the data source explorer. + Command +Ctrl+Shift+E: switches between data source explorer and table. + Shortcuts in the Query Design Window + F6: switches between object bar, table view, and selection area. + Option +Alt+Up arrow or Option +Alt+Down arrow: moves the border between table view and selection area up or down. + Keys in the Table View (upper area of the query design) and in the Relations window + Command +Ctrl+Arrow key: moves the selected table in the direction of the arrow. + Command +Ctrl+Shift+Arrow key: resizes the selected table in the table view. + Del: removes the selected table or connection from the table view. + Tab: switches between tables and connections in the table view. + Enter: when a connection is selected, the Enter key opens the Properties dialog of the connection. + Enter: when a table is selected, the Enter key enters the first data field from the list box into the selection area. + Keys in the Selection Area (bottom area of the query design) + Command +Ctrl+Left Arrow or Right Arrow: moves the selected column to the left or to the right. + Keys in the Table Design Window + F6: switches between toolbar, column view, and properties area. +
+
+ Controlling the ImageMap Editor + + + Press Tab to select an icon. If you selected one of the icons from Rectangle to Freeform Polygon and you press Command +Ctrl+Enter, an object of the selected type is created in default size. + + + If you press Enter while the icon Select is selected, the focus is set into the image window of the ImageMap Editor. Press Esc to set the focus back to the icons and input boxes. + + + If the Select icon is selected and you press Ctrl+Enter, the first object in the image window gets selected. + + + Use the icon Edit Points to switch into the point edit mode for polygons and back. + + + Use Ctrl+Tab in the image window to select the next point. Use Shift+Ctrl+Tab to select the previous point. + + + Use the Delete key with the focus in the image window to delete the selected object. + + +
+ Controlling the Help + Press Shift+F1 to display the Extended Tips for the currently selected command, icon or control. + Navigating the main help pages + + + In the main help pages, use Tab to jump to the next hyperlink or Shift+Tab to jump to the previous link. + + + Press Enter to execute the selected hyperlink. + + + Press Backspace above the Enter key to return to the previous help page. + + + Controlling the Text Import dialog (CSV file import) + Ruler + + + Left or Right Arrow: go one position to the left or to the right + + + Ctrl+Left Arrow or Ctrl+Right Arrow: jump to the previous or to the next split + + + Ctrl+Shift+Left Arrow or Ctrl+Shift+Right Arrow: move a split one position to the left or to the right + + + Home or End: jump to the first or the last possible position + + + Ctrl+Home or Ctrl+End: jump to the first or the last split + + + Shift+Ctrl+Home or Shift+Ctrl+End: move split to the first or to the last position + + + Space key: insert or remove a split + + + Insert key: insert a split (leave existing splits unchanged) + + + Delete key: delete a split + + + Shift+Delete: delete all splits + + + Up Arrow or Down Arrow: scroll table down or up one row + + + Page Up or Page Down: scroll table down or up one page + + + Escape key (during mouse drag): cancel drag, move split to old position + + + Preview + + + Left Arrow or Right Arrow: select left or right column and clear other selections + + + Ctrl+Left Arrow or Ctrl+Right Arrow: move focus to the left or to the right column (does not change selection) + + + Shift+Left Arrow or Shift+Right Arrow: expand or shrink the selected range + + + Ctrl+Shift+Left Arrow or Ctrl+Shift+Right Arrow: expand or shrink the selected range (does not change other selections) + + + Home or End: select the first or the last column (use Shift or Ctrl as with cursor keys) + + + Shift+Space key: select the range from the last selected column to the current column + + + Ctrl+Shift+Space key: select the range from the last selected column to the current column (does not change other selections) + + + Ctrl+A: select all columns + + + Shift+F10: open a context menu + + + Ctrl+1 ... Ctrl+7: set the 1st ... 7th column type for the selected columns + + + Up Arrow or Down Arrow: scroll table down or up one row + + + Page Up or Page Down: scroll table down or up one page + + + Ctrl+Home or Ctrl+End: scroll to the top or bottom of a table + + + Controlling the Insert - Special Character Dialog + + + Tab switches through all controls in the dialog. + + + Option +Alt+Down Arrow opens a combo box. Enter selects the current entry in the combo box. + + + Arrow buttons move through the main selection area. Spacebar adds the current character to the list of characters to be inserted. + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/line_intext.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/line_intext.xhp index 001bd5d320..52bbe8feaf 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/line_intext.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/line_intext.xhp @@ -57,10 +57,10 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp index 5525bec140..0ba1818bd2 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - General. -In the Standard file format area, first select a document type, then select the file type for saving. +In the Default file format area, first select a document type, then select the file type for saving. From now on, if you save a document, the File type will be set according to your choice. Of course, you still can select another file type in the file save dialog. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/protection.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/protection.xhp index b42a207520..7983488972 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/protection.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/protection.xhp @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ - * $Revision: 1.8 $ + * $Revision: 1.10 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,118 +35,121 @@ - -Protecting Content in %PRODUCTNAME -/text/shared/guide/protection.xhp - - - + + Protecting Content in %PRODUCTNAME + /text/shared/guide/protection.xhp + + + protecting; contents -protected contents -contents protection -encryption of contents -passwords for protecting contents -security;protecting contents -form controls; protecting -draw objects;protecting -OLE objects;protecting -graphics;protecting -frames;protecting + protected contents + contents protection + encryption of contents + passwords for protecting contents + security;protecting contents + form controls; protecting + draw objects;protecting + OLE objects;protecting + graphics;protecting + frames;protecting mw moved 4 index entries to swriter/guide/protection.xhp -Protecting Content in %PRODUCTNAME +Protecting Content in %PRODUCTNAME -The following is an overview of the different ways of protecting contents in %PRODUCTNAME from being modified, deleted or viewed. -Protecting All Documents When Saving -All documents that are saved in OpenDocument format can be saved with a password. Documents that are saved with a password cannot be opened without the password. The content is secured so that it cannot be read with an external editor. This applies to content, graphics and OLE objects. - - - -Turning on protection - - -Choose File - Save As and mark the Save with password check box. Save the document. - - - - -Turning off protection - - -Open the document, entering the correct password. Choose File - Save As and clear the Save with password check box. - - -
+ The following is an overview of the different ways of protecting contents in %PRODUCTNAME from being modified, deleted or viewed. + Protecting All Documents When Saving + All documents that are saved in OpenDocument format can be saved with a password. Documents that are saved with a password cannot be opened without the password. The content is secured so that it cannot be read with an external editor. This applies to content, graphics and OLE objects. + + + + Turning on protection + + + Choose File - Save As and mark the Save with password check box. Save the document. + + + + + Turning off protection + + + Open the document, entering the correct password. Choose File - Save As and clear the Save with password check box. + + +
-Information entered in File - Properties is not encrypted. This includes the name of the author, creation date, word and character counts. -Protecting Revision Marking -With every change made in %PRODUCTNAME Calc and %PRODUCTNAME Writer, the review function records who made the change. This function can be turned on with protection, so that it can only be turned off when the correct password is entered. Until then, all changes will continue to be recorded. Acceptance or rejection of changes is not possible. - - - -Turning on protection - - -Choose Edit - Changes - Protect Records. Enter and confirm a password of at least 5 characters. - - - - -Turning off protection - - -Choose Edit - Changes - Protect Records. Enter the correct password. - - -
+ Information entered in File - Properties is not encrypted. This includes the name of the author, creation date, word and character counts. + Protecting Revision Marking + With every change made in %PRODUCTNAME Calc and %PRODUCTNAME Writer, the review function records who made the change. This function can be turned on with protection, so that it can only be turned off when the correct password is entered. Until then, all changes will continue to be recorded. Acceptance or rejection of changes is not possible. + + + + Turning on protection + + + Choose Edit - Changes - Protect Records. Enter and confirm a password of at least 5 characters. + + + + + Turning off protection + + + Choose Edit - Changes - Protect Records. Enter the correct password. + + +
MW moved contents of "Protecting Cell Ranges in StarOffice Calc" to the Calc guides cell_protect.xhp and cell_unprotect.xhp.MW moved Writer specific contents to the new writer guide protection.xhp -Protecting Frames, Graphics, and OLE Objects -You can protect the content, position and size of inserted graphics. The same applies to frames (in Writer) and OLE objects. - - - -Turning on protection - - -For example, for graphics inserted in Writer: Choose Format - Graphics - Options tab. Under Protect, mark Contents, Position and/or Size. - - - - -Turning off protection - - -For example, for graphics inserted in Writer: Choose Format - Graphics - Options tab. Under Protect, unmark as appropriate. - - -
+Protecting Frames, Graphics, and OLE Objects + You can protect the content, position and size of inserted graphics. The same applies to frames (in Writer) and OLE objects. + + + + Turning on protection + + + For example, for graphics inserted in Writer: Choose Format - Picture - Options tab. Under Protect, mark Contents, Position and/or Size. + + + + + Turning off protection + + + For example, for graphics inserted in Writer: Choose Format - Picture - Options tab. Under Protect, unmark as appropriate. + + +
-Protecting Drawing Objects and Form Objects -The draw objects that you insert into your documents with the Drawing toolbar can be protected from being accidentally moved or changed in size. You can do the same with form objects inserted with the Form Controls toolbar. - - - -Turning on protection - - -Choose Format - Drawing Object - Position and Size - Position and Size tab. Mark the Position or Size check box. - - - - -Turning off protection - - -Choose Format - Drawing Object - Position and Size - Position and Size tab. Unmark the Position or Size check box. - - -
+ Protecting Drawing Objects and Form Objects + The draw objects that you insert into your documents with the Drawing toolbar can be protected from being accidentally moved or changed in size. You can do the same with form objects inserted with the Form Controls toolbar. + + + + Turning on protection + + + Choose Format - Object - Position and Size - Position and Size tab. Mark the Position or Size check box. + + + + + Turning off protection + + + Choose Format - Object - Position and Size - Position and Size tab. Unmark the Position or Size check box. + + +
removed webdav text, see i71792MW moved "Opening Microsoft Office Documents That Are Protected With a Password" to shared/guide/ms_import_export_limitations.xhp - - - - - -Protecting Content in %PRODUCTNAME Writer -Protecting Cells in %PRODUCTNAME Calc - - + + + + + + Protecting Content in %PRODUCTNAME Writer + Protecting Cells in %PRODUCTNAME Calc + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/scripting.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/scripting.xhp index 0b02734ac4..1fc3d0f77a 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/scripting.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/scripting.xhp @@ -90,10 +90,10 @@ Open any scripting language entry to see the available scripts. Select a script. -A list of the script functions appears in the Functions list box. Select a function. +A list of the script functions appears in the Commands list box. Select a function. -Click New to create a new menu assignment. The new menu entry appears in the Menu entries list box. Click the menu entry and enter text to rename the entry. +Click Add to create a new menu assignment. The new menu entry appears in the Entries list box. To assign a script to a key combination @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Open any scripting language entry to see the available scripts. Select any script. -A list of the script functions will appear in the Functions list box. Select any function. +A list of the script functions will appear in the Commands list box. Select any function. Click the option button for %PRODUCTNAME or Writer (or whichever application is currently open). @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ Choose Tools - Customize - Events. -Click Assign Macro. +Click Macro button. In the Library list box, scroll down and open the "%PRODUCTNAME Macros" entry. @@ -139,14 +139,14 @@ Open any scripting language entry to see the available scripts. Select any script. -A list of the script functions will appear in the Assigned Macros list box. Select any function. +A list of the script functions will appear in the Assigned Action list box. Select any function. Select to save in %PRODUCTNAME or current document. This sets the scope of the new event assignment to be applicable in all of %PRODUCTNAME or only in documents of the current module. -Select an event from the list and click Assign. +Select an event from the list and click OK. To assign a script to an event for an embedded object @@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ A list of the script functions will appear in the Existing macros in list box. Select any function. -Select an event from the list and click Assign. +Select an event from the list and click OK. To assign a script to a hyperlink diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/workfolder.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/workfolder.xhp index f09f61d31e..85ee67bb38 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/workfolder.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/workfolder.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Changing Your Working Directory -/text/shared/guide/workfolder.xhp - - - -
+ + Changing Your Working Directory + /text/shared/guide/workfolder.xhp + + + +
working directory change -My Documents folder;changing work directory -paths; changing work directory -pictures; changing paths -changing;work directory -work --> working, i85615Changing Your Working Directory + My Documents folder;changing work directory + paths; changing work directory + pictures; changing paths + changing;work directory +work --> working, i85615 +Changing Your Working Directory -When you start a dialog to open or save a document, $[officename] initially displays your working directory. To change this directory: - - -Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Paths. - - -Click My Documents and click the Edit button, or double-click on My Documents. - - -In the Select Path dialog, choose the working directory you want and click OK. - - -You also use this procedure to change the directory displayed by $[officename] when you want to insert a graphic. Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Paths - Graphics, then follow step 3. -
- -Paths - - + When you start a dialog to open or save a document, $[officename] initially displays your working directory. To change this directory: + + + Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Paths. + + + Click My Documents and click the Edit button, or double-click on My Documents. + + + In the Select Path dialog, choose the working directory you want and click Select. + + + You also use this procedure to change the directory displayed by $[officename] when you want to insert a graphic. Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Paths - Graphics, then follow step 3. +
+ + Paths + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010000.xhp index 3e30f0d373..22e7a8741c 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010000.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -$[officename] -/text/shared/optionen/01010000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + $[officename] + /text/shared/optionen/01010000.xhp + + + -$[officename] -Use this dialog to create general settings for working with $[officename]. The information covers topics such as user data, saving, printing, paths to important files and directories, and color defaults. +$[officename] + Use this dialog to create general settings for working with $[officename]. The information covers topics such as user data, saving, printing, paths to important files and directories, and color defaults. These settings are saved automatically. -
- -
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010800.xhp index 7b18072d5d..d584516981 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010800.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010800.xhp @@ -2,38 +2,33 @@ @@ -75,13 +70,16 @@ The Scaling setting does not affect the font size of text in a document. + Icon size and style Specifies the display size of toolbar icons.The Automatic option uses the font size settings of your operating system for menus. + Select the icon style for icons in toolbars and dialogs. + Use system font for user interface Specifies to use the system font to display all menus and dialogs. Else another installed font is used. @@ -96,9 +94,10 @@ Menu -Show icons in menus - Displays icons next to the corresponding menu items. + +Icons in menus + Displays icons next to the corresponding menu items. Select from "Automatic", "Hide" and "Show". "Automatic" displays icons according to system settings and themes. - Pasting into another - document + Pasting into another document diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020400.xhp index 23d72c8c4d..87fc84fa69 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020400.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Mozilla Plug-in -/text/shared/optionen/01020400.xhp - - - -
-Mozilla/Netscape Plug-in -
-Specifies to use the Mozilla plug-in to show %PRODUCTNAME documents. -When you click any %PRODUCTNAME document hyperlink in your Mozilla or Netscape browser, one of the following can happen: - - -The browser asks you whether you want to save the document on your disk, or whether you want to use an application to open the document. This request dialog appears by default when you click any %PRODUCTNAME document hyperlink the first time and you did not enable the Mozilla plug-in. - - -The browser downloads the document to a temporary folder, then tells your system to run %PRODUCTNAME and open the document in %PRODUCTNAME. This is the default when you did not enable the Mozilla plug-in and chose to open the document with %PRODUCTNAME when you were first asked. - - -The browser opens a new browser window that shows some of the %PRODUCTNAME icons, and displays the document in the browser window. This is the default when you enable the Mozilla plug-in. When you click the Edit File icon, a copy of the document is downloaded to a temporary folder on your disk, then %PRODUCTNAME starts and loads the copy for editing. - - -Viewing of %PRODUCTNAME and MS Office documents in Mozilla/Netscape enabled -Enables the Mozilla plug-in to show %PRODUCTNAME documents in a browser window. Select, click OK, then restart your browser. Then, in the browser window, click any %PRODUCTNAME document hyperlink. -The plug-in needs a version of Mozilla 1.x, Netscape 6.x, or Netscape 7.x installed on your system. + + Browser Plug-in + /text/shared/optionen/01020400.xhp + + + +
+ Browser Plug-in +
+ Specifies to use the Mozilla plug-in to show %PRODUCTNAME documents. + When you click any %PRODUCTNAME document hyperlink in your Mozilla or Netscape browser, one of the following can happen: + + + The browser asks you whether you want to save the document on your disk, or whether you want to use an application to open the document. This request dialog appears by default when you click any %PRODUCTNAME document hyperlink the first time and you did not enable the Browser Plug-in. + + + The browser downloads the document to a temporary folder, then tells your system to run %PRODUCTNAME and open the document in %PRODUCTNAME. This is the default when you did not enable the Browser Plug-in and chose to open the document with %PRODUCTNAME when you were first asked. + + + The browser opens a new browser window that shows some of the %PRODUCTNAME icons, and displays the document in the browser window. This is the default when you enable the Browser Plug-in. When you click the Edit File icon, a copy of the document is downloaded to a temporary folder on your disk, then %PRODUCTNAME starts and loads the copy for editing. + + + +Display documents in browser + Enables the Browser Plug-in to show %PRODUCTNAME documents in a browser window. Select, click OK, then restart your browser. Then, in the browser window, click any %PRODUCTNAME document hyperlink. + The plug-in needs a version of Mozilla, Netscape, or Firefox installed on your system. -
- -
+ +
+ +
- - + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030000.xhp index 672fe43cfe..c727e0e01d 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030000.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Internet options -/text/shared/optionen/01030000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -Internet options -Specifies Internet settings. + + Internet options + /text/shared/optionen/01030000.xhp + + + + Internet options + Specifies Internet settings. -
- -
- - +
+ +
+ + + + - - - - + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030300.xhp index 105bfe0fb8..2adcb3770f 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030300.xhp @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Select to see a warning dialog when you try to export a document to PDF format that displays recorded changes in Writer, or that displays notes. Remove personal information on saving -Select to always remove user data from the file properties. If this option is not selected, you can still remove the personal information for the current document with the Delete button on File - Properties - General. +Select to always remove user data from the file properties. If this option is not selected, you can still remove the personal information for the current document with the Reset button on File - Properties - General. Recommend password protection on saving Select to always enable the Save with password option in the file save dialogs. Deselect the option to save files by default without password. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030500.xhp index ba421fb4e6..376a79adfa 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030500.xhp @@ -95,7 +95,6 @@ $[officename] Basic Mark this check box to include the $[officename] Basic instructions when exporting to HTML format. You must activate this option before you create the $[officename] Basic Script, since otherwise it will not be inserted. $[officename] Basic Scripts must be located in the header of the HTML document. Once you have created the macro in the $[officename] Basic IDE, it appears in the source text of the HTML document in the header. -If you want the macro to run automatically when the HTML document is opened, choose Tools - Customize - Events. Select the "Document" check box and "Open Document" in the Events list. In Macros select your document, its standard library, module1 and the macro and click Assign. Display warning diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040700.xhp index 3d06e10947..bb06c81c69 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040700.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040700.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Changes -/text/shared/optionen/01040700.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -
+ + Changes + /text/shared/optionen/01040700.xhp + + + +
-Changes -Defines the appearance of changes in the document. -
-To record or show changes, with the text or spreadsheet document open, choose Edit - Changes. -
- -
-Text display -Defines the settings for displaying recorded changes. Select the type of change with the radio buttons, and the corresponding display attribute and color. The preview field shows the effect of the selected display options. +Changes + Defines the appearance of changes in the document. +
+ To record or show changes in your text or spreadsheet document, choose Edit - Changes - Record or Edit - Changes - Show. +
+ +
+ Text display + Defines the settings for displaying recorded changes. Select the type of change and the corresponding display attribute and color. The preview field shows the effect of the selected display options. -Insertions / Attributes -Specifies how changes in the document are displayed when text is inserted. +Insertions / Attributes + Specifies how changes in the document are displayed when text is inserted. -Deletions / Attributes -Specifies how changes in the document are displayed when text is deleted. If you record text deletions, the text is displayed with the selected attribute (for example, strikethrough) and is not deleted. +Deletions / Attributes + Specifies how changes in the document are displayed when text is deleted. If you record text deletions, the text is displayed with the selected attribute (for example, strikethrough) and is not deleted. -Changed attributes / Attributes -Defines how changes to text attributes are displayed in the document. These changes affect attributes such as bold, italic or underline. +Changed attributes / Attributes + Defines how changes to text attributes are displayed in the document. These changes affect attributes such as bold, italic or underline. -Color -You can also choose a color to display each type of recorded change. When you choose the condition "By author" in the list, the color is automatically determined by $[officename], then modified to match to the author of each change. -Lines changed -To indicate which lines of the text have been changed, you can define a mark that appears in the left or right page margin. +Color + You can also choose a color to display each type of recorded change. When you choose the condition "By author" in the list, the color is automatically determined by $[officename], then modified to match to the author of each change. + Lines changed + To indicate which lines of the text have been changed, you can define a mark that appears in the left or right page margin. -Mark -Defines if and where changed lines in the document are marked. You can set the markings so that they always appear on the left or right page margin, or on even or uneven pages. +Mark + Defines if and where changed lines in the document are marked. You can set the markings so that they always appear on the left or right page margin, or on the outer or inner margin. -Color -Specifies the color for highlighting the changed lines in the text. - - - +Color + Specifies the color for highlighting the changed lines in the text. + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01050100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01050100.xhp index 06f8cf0662..80c291b827 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01050100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01050100.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Grid -/text/shared/optionen/01050100.xhp - - - -
+ + Grid + /text/shared/optionen/01050100.xhp + + + +
grids; defaults (Writer/Calc) -defaults; grids (Writer/Calc) -snap grid defaults (Writer/Calc) + defaults; grids (Writer/Calc) + snap grid defaults (Writer/Calc) -Grid -Specifies the settings for the configurable grid on your document pages. This grid helps you determine the exact position of your objects. You can also set this grid in line with the "magnetic" snap grid. -
-
- -
-Grid -Specifies the subdivision of the grid. You have the option of using different units of measure. -Snap to grid -
-Specifies whether to move frames, drawing elements, and controls only between grid points. To change the status of the snap grip only for the current action, drag an object while holding down the Control key + +Grid + Specifies the settings for the configurable grid on your document pages. This grid helps you determine the exact position of your objects. You can also set this grid in line with the "magnetic" snap grid. +
+
+ +
+ Grid + +Snap to grid +
+ Specifies whether to move frames, drawing elements, and controls only between grid points. To change the status of the snap grip only for the current action, drag an object while holding down the Control key Ctrl key. -
+
-Visible grid -Specifies whether to display the grid. + +Visible grid + Specifies whether to display the grid. -It is also possible to toggle the visibility of the grid with the Grid - Visible Grid command in the context menu for the page. You can also select the Grid - Grid to Front submenu of this context menu to display the grid in front of objects. + It is also possible to toggle the visibility of the grid with the Grid - Visible Grid command in the context menu for the page. You can also select the Grid - Grid to Front submenu of this context menu to display the grid in front of objects. -It is also possible to toggle the visibility of the grid with the Grid - Visible Grid command in the context menu of the page. You can also select the Grid - Grid to Front submenu of this context menu to display the grid in front of objects. + It is also possible to toggle the visibility of the grid with the Grid - Visible Grid command in the context menu of the page. You can also select the Grid - Grid to Front submenu of this context menu to display the grid in front of objects. -
-Resolution -Horizontal -Defines the unit of measure for the spacing between grid points on the X-axis. -Vertical -Defines the grid points spacing in the desired unit of measurement on the Y-axis. -Subdivision -Horizontal -Specify the number of intermediate points between grid points on the X-axis.UFI: see #i39831# -Vertical -Specify the number of intermediate points between grid points on the Y-axis. -Synchronize axes -Specifies whether to change the current grid settings symmetrically. The resolution and subdivision for the X and Y axes remain the same. -There are additional commands on the context menu of a page: +
+ Resolution + +Horizontal + Defines the unit of measure for the spacing between grid points on the X-axis. + +Vertical + Defines the grid points spacing in the desired unit of measurement on the Y-axis. + Subdivision + +Horizontal + Specify the number of intermediate points between grid points on the X-axis.UFI: see #i39831# + +Vertical + Specify the number of intermediate points between grid points on the Y-axis. + +Synchronize axes + Specifies whether to change the current grid settings symmetrically. The resolution and subdivision for the X and Y axes remain the same. + There are additional commands on the context menu of a page: There are additional commands on the context menu of a page: -
+
-Grid to Front + +Grid to Front Grid to Front -Sets the visible grid in front of all objects. + Sets the visible grid in front of all objects. Sets the visible grid in front of all objects. -Sets the visible grid in front of all objects. + Sets the visible grid in front of all objects. -Snap Lines to Front + +Snap Lines to Front Snap Lines to Front -Sets the snap lines in front of all objects. + Sets the snap lines in front of all objects. Sets the snap lines in front of all objects. -Sets the snap lines in front of all objects. -
-Set the grid color on Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Appearance. -
- - + Sets the snap lines in front of all objects. +
+ Set the grid color on Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Appearance. +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070300.xhp index 1478f6666d..3878013072 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070300.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Grid -/text/shared/optionen/01070300.xhp - - - -
+ + Grid + /text/shared/optionen/01070300.xhp + + + +
snapping in presentations and drawings -points;reducing editing points when snapping (Impress/Draw) + points;reducing editing points when snapping (Impress/Draw) -Grid -Defines the grid settings for creating and moving objects. -
-
- -
- -If you have activated the snap grid but wish to move or create individual objects without snap positions, keep the Command -Ctrl key pressed to deactivate this function for as long as needed. - -Snap + +Grid + Defines the grid settings for creating and moving objects. +
+
+ +
+ + If you have activated the snap grid but wish to move or create individual objects without snap positions, keep the Shift key pressed to deactivate this function for as long as needed. + + Snap -To snap lines -Snaps the edge of a dragged object to the nearest snap line when you release the mouse. + +To snap lines + Snaps the edge of a dragged object to the nearest snap line when you release the mouse. -You can also define this setting by using the Snap to Guides + You can also define this setting by using the Snap to Guides Snap to Guides - -Snap to Guides icon, which is available in the Options bar in a presentation or drawing document. +Snap to Guides icon, which is available in the Options bar in a presentation or drawing document. -To the page margins -Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the nearest page margin. + +To the page margins + Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the nearest page margin. -The cursor or a contour line of the graphics object must be in the snap range. + The cursor or a contour line of the graphics object must be in the snap range. -In a presentation or drawing document, this function can also be accessed with the Snap to Page Margins + In a presentation or drawing document, this function can also be accessed with the Snap to Page Margins Snap to Page Margins - -Snap to Page Margins icon in the Options bar. +Snap to Page Margins icon in the Options bar. -To object frame -Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the border of the nearest graphic object. + +To object frame + Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the border of the nearest graphic object. -The cursor or a contour line of the graphics object must be in the snap range. + The cursor or a contour line of the graphics object must be in the snap range. -In a presentation or drawing document, this function can also be accessed with the Snap to Object Border + In a presentation or drawing document, this function can also be accessed with the Snap to Object Border Snap to Object Border - -Snap to Object Border icon in the Options bar. +Snap to Object Border icon in the Options bar. -To object points -Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the points of the nearest graphic object. + +To object points + Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the points of the nearest graphic object. -This only applies if the cursor or a contour line of the graphics object is in the snap range. + This only applies if the cursor or a contour line of the graphics object is in the snap range. -In a presentation or drawing document, this function can also be accessed with the Snap to Object Points + In a presentation or drawing document, this function can also be accessed with the Snap to Object Points Snap to Object Points - -Snap to Object Points icon in the Options bar. -Snap range -Defines the snap distance between the mouse pointer and the object contour. $[officename] Impress snaps to a snap point if the mouse pointer is nearer than the distance selected in the Snap range control. -Snap position -When creating or moving objects -Specifies that graphic objects are restricted vertically, horizontally or diagonally (45°) when creating or moving them. You can temporarily deactivate this setting by pressing the Shift key. -Extend edges -Specifies that a square is created based on the longer side of a rectangle when the Shift key is pressed before you release the mouse button. This also applies to an ellipse (a circle will be created based on the longest diameter of the ellipse). When the Extend edges box is not marked, a square or a circle will be created based on the shorter side or diameter. +Snap to Object Points icon in the Options bar. + +Snap range + Defines the snap distance between the mouse pointer and the object contour. $[officename] Impress snaps to a snap point if the mouse pointer is nearer than the distance selected in the Snap range control. + Snap position + +When creating or moving objects + Specifies that graphic objects are restricted vertically, horizontally or diagonally (45°) when creating or moving them. You can temporarily deactivate this setting by pressing the Shift key. + +Extend edges + Specifies that a square is created based on the longer side of a rectangle when the Shift key is pressed before you release the mouse button. This also applies to an ellipse (a circle will be created based on the longest diameter of the ellipse). When the Extend edges box is not marked, a square or a circle will be created based on the shorter side or diameter. -When rotating -Specifies that graphic objects can only be rotated within the rotation angle that you selected in the When rotating control. If you want to rotate an object outside the defined angle, press the Command -Ctrl key when rotating. Release the key when the desired rotation angle is reached. -Point reduction -Defines the angle for point reduction. When working with polygons, you might find it useful to reduce their editing points. - - + +When rotating + Specifies that graphic objects can only be rotated within the rotation angle that you selected in the When rotating control. If you want to rotate an object outside the defined angle, press the Shift key when rotating. Release the key when the desired rotation angle is reached. + +Point reduction + Defines the angle for point reduction. When working with polygons, you might find it useful to reduce their editing points. + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/improvement.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/improvement.xhp new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..286224a9ff --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/improvement.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ + + + + + + + + + Improvement Program + + + + +
+improvement program + online feedback options + options;improvement program + feedback;automatically + user feedback;automatically + +Improvement Program + The Improvement Program records some user interactions and sends them to the User Experience project. +
+
+ +
+ The Improvement Program was initiated by the User Experience project to improve the usability of %PRODUCTNAME. The User Experience project can be found at the OpenOffice.org web site: http://ux.openoffice.org/. + The second time you start your new %PRODUCTNAME software, you see a window that gives information about the Improvement Program. + At this time you can choose to accept or deny your participation. + + + If you accept, data recording starts immediately. When you start a new session of %PRODUCTNAME, the collected data will be sent. + + + If you deny to participate, no data will be sent and recording of data stops immediately. + + + At any time, you can enable or disable the recording of user interaction data and the sending of these data. Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Improvement Program. Click the Info icon to browse to a web page with more information. + +Click Yes, I am willing to participate … to enable the automatic feedback. + +Click No, I do not wish to participate to disable the automatic feedback. + Tracked data + The following data will be recorded and sent: + + + Clicks on toolbar buttons, including extension toolbars + + + Execution of menu commands, including extension menus + + + Clicks on context menu commands + + + Fonts applied by using the menu + + + Font sizes applied by using the menu + + + Buttons, like OK, Cancel, etc. + + + Document language and paragraph language applied by using the menu or status bar + + + Each recorded item also includes a time stamp and the module (Writer, Calc, Impress, …) where it has been called + + + The following data will not be recorded and sent: + + + User names and passwords + + + Any type of document content + + + Paths, filenames + + + User's source code + + + Show Data + +Click the button to show the currently collected data. This data will be sent next time, plus any data that gets collected until you end the current session. + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/makefile.mk b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/makefile.mk index 4226bd978d..9cb1349a02 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/makefile.mk +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/makefile.mk @@ -117,6 +117,7 @@ XHPFILES = \ 01160100.xhp \ 01160200.xhp \ 01160201.xhp \ + improvement.xhp \ java.xhp \ javaclasspath.xhp \ javaparameters.xhp \ diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000402.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000402.xhp index 832f04f200..a83c6933ee 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000402.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000402.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Edit Menu -/text/simpress/00/00000402.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -Edit Menu -
-Choose Edit - Duplicate - -Shift+F3 -
-Choose Edit - Cross-fading (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) + + Edit Menu + /text/simpress/00/00000402.xhp + + + + Edit Menu +
+ Choose Edit - Duplicate + + Shift+F3 +
+ Choose Edit - Cross-fading (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) -Choose Edit - Delete Slide + Choose Edit - Delete Slide -Choose Edit - Layer - Delete + Open the context menu of an inserted layer, then choose Delete Layer -Choose Edit - Fields + Choose Edit - Fields -Click the Glue Points icon on the Drawing Bar + Click the Glue Points icon on the Drawing Bar UFI: this is called from text\simpress\02\10030200.xhp to fix bug #i23785# - - + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02120000.xhp index d6a9bccdd9..4facd03491 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02120000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02120000.xhp @@ -72,10 +72,10 @@ Sets the position and rotation of a duplicate object with respect to the selected object. X axis -Enter the horizontal distance between the centers of the selected object and the duplicate object. Positive values shift the duplicate object to the right and negative values shift the duplicate object to the left. +Enter the horizontal distance between the centers of the selected object and the duplicate object. Positd object to the right and negatd object to the left. Y axis -Enter the vertical distance between the centers of the selected object and the duplicate object. Positive values shift the duplicate object up and negative values shift the duplicate object down. +Enter the vertical distance between the centers of the selected object and the duplicate object. Positive values shift the duplicate object down and negative values shift the duplicate object up. Angle Enter the angle (0 to 359 degrees) by which you want to rotate the duplicate object. Positive values rotate the duplicate object in a clockwise direction and negative values in a counterclockwise direction. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02140000.xhp index cc1dd59ddf..e609b8b787 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02140000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02140000.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Delete Layer -/text/simpress/01/02140000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Delete Layer + /text/simpress/01/02140000.xhp + + + layers; deleting -deleting; layers + deleting; layers - + -Delete Layer -Deletes the active layer. +Delete Layer + Deletes the active layer. -
- -
-This command is only available in %PRODUCTNAME Draw layer mode. - - +
+ +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05100000.xhp index c63298ca7f..369364655c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05100000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05100000.xhp @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ -Icon +Icon diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06050000.xhp index 52aa68f233..b7b84e9ffc 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06050000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06050000.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Animation -/text/simpress/01/06050000.xhp - - - -
+ + Animation + /text/simpress/01/06050000.xhp + + + +
-Animation -Creates a custom animation on the current slide. You can only use existing objects to create an animation. + +Animation + Creates a custom animation on the current slide. You can only use existing objects to create an animation. -
-
- -
-You can copy and paste animations into %PRODUCTNAME Writer. -Animation -Shows a preview of the objects in the animation. You can also press the Play button to view the animation. -Jumps to the first image in the animation sequence. - - - - -Icon + +
+ +
+ You can copy and paste animations into %PRODUCTNAME Writer. + Animation + Shows a preview of the objects in the animation. You can also press the Play button to view the animation. + +Jumps to the first image in the animation sequence. +
+ + + +Icon - - -First image - - -
-Moves back one image in the animation sequence. - - - - -Icon + + + First image + + +
+ + +Plays the animation backwards. + + + + +Icon - - -Backwards - - -
-Stops playing the animation. - - - - -Icon + + + Backwards + + +
+ + +Stops playing the animation. + + + + +Icon - - -Stop - - -
-Plays the animation. - - - - -Icon + + + Stop + + +
+ + +Plays the animation. + + + + +Icon - - -Play - - -
-Jumps to the last image in the animation sequence. - - - - -Icon + + + Play + + +
+ + +Jumps to the last image in the animation sequence. + + + + +Icon - - -Last image - - -
-Image Number -Indicates the position of the current image in the animation sequence. If you want to view another image, enter its number or click the up and down arrows. -Duration -Enter the number of seconds to display the current image. This option is only available if you select the Bitmap object option in the Animation group field. -Loop count -Sets the number of times that the animation is played. If you want the animation to play continuously, choose Max. -Image -Adds or removes objects from your animation. -Apply Object -Adds selected object(s) as a single image. - - - - -Icon + + + Last image + + +
+ + +Image Number + Indicates the position of the current image in the animation sequence. If you want to view another image, enter its number or click the up and down arrows. + +Duration + Enter the number of seconds to display the current image. This option is only available if you select the Bitmap object option in the Animation group field. + +Loop count + Sets the number of times that the animation is played. If you want the animation to play continuously, choose Max. + Image + Adds or removes objects from your animation. + +Apply Object + Adds selected object(s) as a single image. + + + + +Icon - - -Apply Object - - -
-Apply Objects Individually -Adds an image for each selected object. If you select a grouped object, an image is created for each object in the group. -You can also select an animation, such as an animated GIF, and click this icon to open it for editing. When you are finished editing the animation, click Create to insert a new animation into your slide. - - - - -Icon + + + Apply Object + + +
+ + +Apply Objects Individually + Adds an image for each selected object. If you select a grouped object, an image is created for each object in the group. + You can also select an animation, such as an animated GIF, and click this icon to open it for editing. When you are finished editing the animation, click Create to insert a new animation into your slide. + + + + +Icon - - -Apply Objects Individually - - -
-Delete Current Image -Deletes current image from the animation sequence. - - - - -Icon + + + Apply Objects Individually + + +
+ + +Delete Current Image + Deletes current image from the animation sequence. + + + + +Icon - - -Delete Current Image - - -
-Delete All Images -Deletes all of the images in the animation. - - - - -Icon + + + Delete Current Image + + +
+ + +Delete All Images + Deletes all of the images in the animation. + + + + +Icon - - -Delete All Images - - -
-Number -Total number of images in the animation. -Animation group -Sets object properties for your animation. -Group object -Assembles images into a single object so that they can be moved as a group. You can still edit individual objects by double-clicking the group in the slide. -Bitmap object -Combines images into a single image. -Alignment -Aligns the images in your animation.. -Create -Inserts the animation into the current slide. -
- -
- - + + + Delete All Images + + + + + Number + Total number of images in the animation. + Animation group + Sets object properties for your animation. + +Group object + Assembles images into a single object so that they can be moved as a group. You can still edit individual objects by double-clicking the group in the slide. + +Bitmap object + Combines images into a single image. + +Alignment + Aligns the images in your animation.. + +Create + Inserts the animation into the current slide. +
+ +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13090000.xhp index 501d5f4387..2cb3ce0eb8 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13090000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13090000.xhp @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/line_arrow_styles.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/line_arrow_styles.xhp index e790f2a74a..e9c70c32c9 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/line_arrow_styles.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/line_arrow_styles.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Loading Line and Arrow Styles -/text/simpress/guide/line_arrow_styles.xhp - - - + + Loading Line and Arrow Styles + /text/simpress/guide/line_arrow_styles.xhp + + + line styles;loading -lines;about line ends -arrows;loading arrow styles -styles;arrow and line styles -loading;arrow and line styles -mw changed "line ends;" to "lines;"Loading Line and Arrow Styles + lines;about line ends + arrows;loading arrow styles + styles;arrow and line styles + loading;arrow and line styles +mw changed "line ends;" to "lines;" +Loading Line and Arrow Styles -You can use styles to organize similar line and arrow types. $[officename] provides a few standard style files that you can load and use in your document. If you want, you can add or delete elements from a style file, or even create a custom style file. -To load a line styles file: - - -Choose Format - Line, and then click the Line Styles tab. - - -Click the Load Line Styles button. - - -Locate the file containing the line styles that you want to load, and then click OK. The file has the format [filename].sod. - - -To save a line styles file, click the Save Line Styles button, enter a filename, and then click OK. -To load an arrow styles file: - - -Choose Format - Line, and then click the Arrow Styles tab. - - -Click the Load Arrow Styles button. - - -Locate the file containing the line styles that you want to load, and then click OK. The file has the format [filename].sod. - - -To save an arrow styles file, click the Save Arrow Styles button, enter a filename, and then click OK. - -Format - Line - - - + You can use styles to organize similar line and arrow types. $[officename] provides a few standard style files that you can load and use in your document. If you want, you can add or delete elements from a style file, or even create a custom style file. + To load a line styles file: + + + Choose Format - Line, and then click the Line Styles tab. + + + Click the Load Line Styles button. + + + Locate the file containing the line styles that you want to load, and then click OK. The file has the format [filename].sod. + + + To save a line styles file, click the Save Line Styles button, enter a filename, and then click OK. + To load an arrow styles file: + + + Choose Format - Line, and then click the Arrow Styles tab. + + + Click the Load Arrow Styles button. + + + Locate the file containing the arrow styles that you want to load, and then click OK. The file has the format [filename].soe. + + + To save an arrow styles file, click the Save Arrow Styles button, enter a filename, and then click OK. + + Format - Line + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/00/00000004.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/00/00000004.xhp index 3fa4ecad64..a159fcdfd3 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/00/00000004.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/00/00000004.xhp @@ -159,12 +159,12 @@
Choose View - AutoUpdate Display -Choose View - Selection +Choose View - Formula Elements
Open the context menu in the Commands window - choose Unary/Binary Operators -Choose View - Selection - symbol in the Selection window: +Choose View - Formula Elements - symbol in the Formula Elements window: @@ -181,7 +181,7 @@
Open the context menu in the Commands window - choose Relations -Choose View - Selection - in the Selection window, click +Choose View - Formula Elements - in the Formula Elements window, click
@@ -198,7 +198,7 @@
Open the context menu in the Commands window - choose Operators -Choose View - Selection - in the Selection window, click +Choose View - Formula Elements - in the Formula Elements window, click
@@ -215,7 +215,7 @@
Open the context menu in the Commands window - choose Functions -Choose View - Selection - in the Selection window, click +Choose View - Formula Elements - in the Formula Elements window, click
@@ -232,7 +232,7 @@
Open the context menu in the Commands window - choose Brackets -Choose View - Selection - in the Selection window, click +Choose View - Formula Elements - in the Formula Elements window, click
@@ -249,7 +249,7 @@
Open the context menu in the Commands window - choose Attributes -Choose View - Selection - in the Selection window, click +Choose View - Formula Elements - in the Formula Elements window, click
@@ -266,7 +266,7 @@
Open the context menu in the Commands window - choose Formats -Choose View - Selection - in the Selection window, click +Choose View - Formula Elements - in the Formula Elements window, click
@@ -283,7 +283,7 @@
Open the context menu in the Commands window - choose Set Operations -Choose View - Selection - in the Selection window, click +Choose View - Formula Elements - in the Formula Elements window, click
@@ -337,7 +337,7 @@
Open the context menu in the Commands window - choose Others -Choose View - Selection - in the Selection window, click +Choose View - Formula Elements - in the Formula Elements window, click
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090000.xhp index 142e71bd35..7e09e0b41e 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090000.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Selection -/text/smath/01/03090000.xhp - - - -
+ + Formula Elements + /text/smath/01/03090000.xhp + + + +
selection options in formulas -formulas; selections + formulas; selections -Selection + +Formula Elements -This is a list of operators, functions, symbols and format options that can be inserted into the formula. -
-Some examples show you the range of operations. You can find more examples in the Samples - Formulas folder. -The selection window is divided into two parts. Clicking a symbol at the top of the window displays its subordinate symbols in the lower half of the window. -You can access the same functions in submenus through the context menu of the Commands window. -
- -
- - - - - - - - - - - - -
- -
- - + This is a list of operators, functions, symbols and format options that can be inserted into the formula. +
+ Some examples show you the range of operations. You can find more examples in the Samples - Formulas folder of the Templates and Documents window. + The selection window is divided into two parts. Clicking a symbol at the top of the window displays its subordinate symbols in the lower half of the window. + You can access the same functions in submenus through the context menu of the Commands window. +
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090100.xhp index a0ce865f5c..498642d9de 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090100.xhp @@ -73,12 +73,12 @@ dedr: fixed #i30769# Unary/Binary Operators -You can choose various unary and binary operators to build your $[officename] Math formula. Unary refers to operators that affect one placeholder. Binary refers to operators that connect two placeholders. The lower area of the Selection window displays the individual operators. The context menu of the Commands window also contains a list of these operators, as well as additional operators. If you need an operator that is not contained in the Selection window, use the context menu or type it directly in the Commands window. +You can choose various unary and binary operators to build your $[officename] Math formula. Unary refers to operators that affect one placeholder. Binary refers to operators that connect two placeholders. The lower area of the Formula Elements window displays the individual operators. The context menu of the Commands window also contains a list of these operators, as well as additional operators. If you need an operator that is not contained in the Formula Elements window, use the context menu or type it directly in the Commands window.
-The following is a complete list of the unary and binary operators. The symbol next to the operator indicates that it can be accessed through the Selection window (choose View - Selection) or through the context menu of the Commands window. +The following is a complete list of the unary and binary operators. The symbol next to the operator indicates that it can be accessed through the Formula Elements window (choose View - Formula Elements) or through the context menu of the Commands window. Unary and Binary Operators
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090200.xhp index 1ca7649450..1e04ae40b2 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090200.xhp @@ -80,12 +80,12 @@ Relations -You can choose among various relations to structure your $[officename] Math formula. The relation functions are displayed in the lower part of the Selection window. The list is also in the context menu of the Commands window. All relations that are not contained in the Selection window or in the context menu can be typed manually in the Commands window. +You can choose among various relations to structure your $[officename] Math formula. The relation functions are displayed in the lower part of the Formula Elements window. The list is also in the context menu of the Commands window. All relations that are not contained in the Formula Elements window or in the context menu can be typed manually in the Commands window.
-The following is a complete list of the relations. The symbol next to the name of the relation indicates that it can be accessed through the Selection window (choose View - Selection) or through the context menu of the Commands window. +The following is a complete list of the relations. The symbol next to the name of the relation indicates that it can be accessed through the Formula Elements window (choose View - Formula Elements) or through the context menu of the Commands window. Relations:
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090300.xhp index 2c595b75a8..5bdd5d24d3 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090300.xhp @@ -60,12 +60,12 @@ Operators -You can choose among various operators to structure your $[officename] Math formula. All available operators appear in the lower part of the Selection window. They are also listed in the context menu of the Commands window. All operators not contained in the Selection window or in the context menu must be typed manually in the Commands window. +You can choose among various operators to structure your $[officename] Math formula. All available operators appear in the lower part of the Formula Elements window. They are also listed in the context menu of the Commands window. All operators not contained in the Formula Elements window or in the context menu must be typed manually in the Commands window.
-The following is a list of the available operators. An icon next to the operator name indicates that it can be accessed through the Selection window (choose View - Selection) or through the context menu of the Commands window. +The following is a list of the available operators. An icon next to the operator name indicates that it can be accessed through the Formula Elements window (choose View - Formula Elements) or through the context menu of the Commands window. Operator Functions
@@ -242,7 +242,7 @@ Triple Curve Integral -Inserts a triple curve integral sign with one placeholder. You can also type lllint <?> directly in the Commands window window. +Inserts a triple curve integral sign with one placeholder. You can also type lllint <?> directly in the Commands window.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090400.xhp index 0f1a3f95a5..45e55ea1c5 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090400.xhp @@ -77,12 +77,12 @@ Functions -Choose a function in the lower part of the window. These functions are also listed in the context menu of the Commands window. Any functions not contained in the Selection window need to be typed manually in the Commands window. +Choose a function in the lower part of the window. These functions are also listed in the context menu of the Commands window. Any functions not contained in the Formula Elements window need to be typed manually in the Commands window.
-The following is a list of all functions that appear in the Selection window. The icon next to the function indicates that it can be accessed through the Selection window (menu View - Selection) or through the context menu of the Commands window. +The following is a list of all functions that appear in the Formula Elements window. The icon next to the function indicates that it can be accessed through the Formula Elements window (menu View - Formula Elements) or through the context menu of the Commands window. List of functions diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090500.xhp index 728fb74cdf..862a1649cc 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090500.xhp @@ -79,12 +79,12 @@ dedr: reviewed Brackets -You can choose among various bracket types to structure a $[officename] Math formula. Bracket types are displayed in the lower part of the Selection window. These brackets are also listed in the context menu of the Commands window. All brackets that are not contained in the Selection window or in the context menu can be typed manually in the Commands window. +You can choose among various bracket types to structure a $[officename] Math formula. Bracket types are displayed in the lower part of the Formula Elements window. These brackets are also listed in the context menu of the Commands window. All brackets that are not contained in the Formula Elements window or in the context menu can be typed manually in the Commands window.
-The following is a complete list of all available bracket types. The icon next to the bracket type indicates that it can be accessed through the Selection window (menu View - Selection) or through the context menu of the Commands window. +The following is a complete list of all available bracket types. The icon next to the bracket type indicates that it can be accessed through the Formula Elements window (menu View - Formula Elements) or through the context menu of the Commands window. Bracket types
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090600.xhp index 5c2e9bcef5..83df0eaa9d 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090600.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090600.xhp @@ -77,12 +77,12 @@ Attributes You can choose from various attributes for %PRODUCTNAME - Math formulas. Some attributes are displayed in the lower part of the Selection window. These attributes are also listed in the context menu of the Commands window. All attributes not contained in the Selection window or in the context menu must be typed manually in the Commands window. + Math formulas. Some attributes are displayed in the lower part of the Formula Elements window. These attributes are also listed in the context menu of the Commands window. All attributes not contained in the Formula Elements window or in the context menu must be typed manually in the Commands window.
- The following is a complete list of all attributes available in %PRODUCTNAME Math. The symbol next to the attribute indicates that it can be accessed through the Selection window (choose View - Selection) or through the context menu of the Commands window. + The following is a complete list of all attributes available in %PRODUCTNAME Math. The symbol next to the attribute indicates that it can be accessed through the Formula Elements window (choose View - Formula Elements) or through the context menu of the Commands window. In describing the following attribute functions, the letter "a" in the icon refers to the placeholder that you would like to assign to the respective attribute. You can substitute this character with any other character that you choose. Attribute Functions
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090700.xhp index 84d23e359e..22a46c8519 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090700.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090700.xhp @@ -70,12 +70,12 @@ mw added two index entries about formula alignement and made "formatting.." a two level entry Format -You can choose among various options for formatting a $[officename] Math formula. The format options are displayed in the lower half of the Selection window. These options are also listed in the context menu of the Commands window. +You can choose among various options for formatting a $[officename] Math formula. The format options are displayed in the lower half of the Formula Elements window. These options are also listed in the context menu of the Commands window.
-The following is a complete list of all available formatting options in $[officename] Math. The icon next to the formatting option indicates that it can be accessed through the Selection window (menu View - Selection) or through the context menu of the Commands window. +The following is a complete list of all available formatting options in $[officename] Math. The icon next to the formatting option indicates that it can be accessed through the Formula Elements window (menu View - Formula Elements) or through the context menu of the Commands window. The letter "a" refers to the placeholder in your formula which you would like to assign to the respective formatting. You can substitute this character for any other you like. Formatting options
@@ -276,7 +276,7 @@ For alignment, the alignl, alignc and alignr commands are especially effective, if you are -aligning numbers and denominators, for example {alignl a}over{b+c} +aligning numerators and denominators, for example {alignl a}over{b+c} diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090800.xhp index a7903602da..560e04fc63 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090800.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090800.xhp @@ -69,12 +69,12 @@ Set Operations -Assign different set operators to the characters in your $[officename] Math formula. The individual operators are shown in the lower section of the Selection window. Call the context menu in the Commands window to see an identical list of the individual functions. Any operators not found in the Selection window have to be entered directly in the Commands window. You can also directly insert other parts of the formula even if symbols already exist for them. +Assign different set operators to the characters in your $[officename] Math formula. The individual operators are shown in the lower section of the Formula Elements window. Call the context menu in the Commands window to see an identical list of the individual functions. Any operators not found in the Formula Elements window have to be entered directly in the Commands window. You can also directly insert other parts of the formula even if symbols already exist for them.
-After clicking the Set Operations icon in the Selection window additional icons will be shown in the lower part of this window. Simply click a symbol to incorporate the operator in the formula being edited in the Commands window. +After clicking the Set Operations icon in the Formula Elements window additional icons will be shown in the lower part of this window. Simply click a symbol to incorporate the operator in the formula being edited in the Commands window. The set operations in detail:
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091100.xhp index 7b5a808a83..b1d892f629 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091100.xhp @@ -50,13 +50,13 @@ Note: the quotation marks in the examples are used to emphasize text and do not belong to the content of the formulas and commands. When typing example formulas into the Commands window, note that spaces are often required for correct structure. Braces "{}" are used to group expressions together to form one new expression. For example, "sqrt {x * y}" is the square root of the entire product x*y, while "sqrt x * y" is the square root of x multiplied by y. Braces do not require an extra space. -Set brackets were previously inserted in the Selection window or directly in the Commands window as "left lbrace <?> right rbrace". Now, a left and a right set bracket can also be inserted using "lbrace" and "rbrace", without or without wildcards. +Set brackets were previously inserted in the Formula Elements window or directly in the Commands window as "left lbrace <?> right rbrace". Now, a left and a right set bracket can also be inserted using "lbrace" and "rbrace", with or without wildcards. There are a total of eight (8) different types of brackets available. The "ceil" and "floor" brackets are often used for rounding up or down the argument to the next integer: "lceil -3.7 rceil = -3" or "lfloor -3.7 rfloor = -4". Operator brackets, also known as Bra-kets (angle brackets with a vertical line in between), are common in Physics notation: "langle a mline b rangle" or "langle a mline b mline c over d mline e rangle." The height and positioning of the vertical lines always corresponds exactly to the enclosing brackets. All brackets may only be used in pairs. The brackets have some common characteristics: -All types of brackets have the same grouping function as described for "{}"- brackets. +All types of brackets have the same grouping function as described for "{}" brackets. All types of brackets, including those that are visible, permit empty group definition. The enclosed expression may therefore be empty. -Brackets do not adjust their size to the enclosed expression. For example, if you want "( a over b )" with a bracket size adjusted to a and b you must insert "left" and "right". Entering "left(a over b right)" produces appropriate sizing. If, however, the brackets themselves are part of the expression whose size is changed, they are included the size change: "size 3(a over b)" and "size 12(a over b)". The sizing of the bracket-to-bracket expression ratio does not change in any way. +Brackets do not adjust their size to the enclosed expression. For example, if you want "( a over b )" with a bracket size adjusted to a and b you must insert "left" and "right". Entering "left(a over b right)" produces appropriate sizing. If, however, the brackets themselves are part of the expression whose size is changed, they are included the size change: "size 3(a over b)" and "size 12(a over b)". The sizing of the bracket-to-expression ratio does not change in any way. Since "left" and "right" ensure unique assignment of the brackets, every single bracket can be used as an argument for these two commands, even placing right brackets on the left side, or left brackets on the right. Instead of a bracket you can use the "none" qualifier, which means that there is no bracket shown and that there is no space reserved for a bracket. Using this, you can create the following expressions: diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091500.xhp index e1bc03d17e..664a783c74 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091500.xhp @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ Formula Reference Tables -This reference section contains lists of many operators, functions, symbols and formatting features available in $[officename] Math. Many of the commands displayed can be inserted using the icons in the Selection window or the context menu of the Commands window. +This reference section contains lists of many operators, functions, symbols and formatting features available in $[officename] Math. Many of the commands displayed can be inserted using the icons in the Formula Elements window or the context menu of the Commands window. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091501.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091501.xhp index 09ff59bb2f..613edc0298 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091501.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091501.xhp @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ Typed command(s) -Symbol in Selection Window +Symbol in Formula Elements Window Meaning diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091502.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091502.xhp index b8cf2aadee..03e7ad17c0 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091502.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091502.xhp @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ Typed command(s) -Symbol in Selection Window +Symbol in Formula Elements Window Meaning diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091503.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091503.xhp index d1a083aac0..e5c0573c4e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091503.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091503.xhp @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ Typed command(s) -Symbol in Selection Window +Symbol in Formula Elements Window Meaning diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091504.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091504.xhp index b4e7a8bc5d..e363df1b01 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091504.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091504.xhp @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ Typed command(s) -Symbol in Selection Window +Symbol in Formula Elements Window Meaning diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091505.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091505.xhp index 5db9ab7a71..cee9116f4c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091505.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091505.xhp @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ Typed command(s) -Symbol in Selection Window +Symbol in Formula Elements Window Meaning diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091506.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091506.xhp index d32037711a..b80380a3e7 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091506.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091506.xhp @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ Typed command(s) -Symbol in Selection Window +Symbol in Formula Elements Window Meaning diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091507.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091507.xhp index 789c0e75ab..8ab1083302 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091507.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091507.xhp @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ Typed command(s) -Symbol in Selection Window +Symbol in Formula Elements Window Meaning diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091508.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091508.xhp index d08deac2b8..4d6c3669be 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091508.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091508.xhp @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ Typed command(s) -Symbol in Selection Window +Symbol in Formula Elements Window Meaning diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091509.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091509.xhp index 54c20ba817..3105bf72ca 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091509.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091509.xhp @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ Typed command(s) -Symbol in Selection Window +Symbol in Formula Elements Window Meaning diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/06010100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/06010100.xhp index 7ffdd61d95..e33a5bd9fa 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/06010100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/06010100.xhp @@ -67,8 +67,7 @@ To change the name of a symbol, select the old name in the Old symbol list box. Then enter the new name in the Symbol box. Check whether the desired character is in the preview window before you click the Modify button. Click OK. Symbol Set -The Symbol s -et list box contains the names of all existing symbol sets. You can modify a symbol set or create a new one. +The Symbol set list box contains the names of all existing symbol sets. You can modify a symbol set or create a new one. Creating a New Symbol Set To create a new symbol set, type a name for it in the Symbol set list box and add at least one symbol. Click OK to close the dialog. The new symbol set is now available under the new name. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/04/01020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/04/01020000.xhp index 3d96e40dd5..05519a6a38 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/04/01020000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/04/01020000.xhp @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ F9 Update -Navigation in the Selection Window +Navigation in the Formula Elements Window
Left or right arrow Move left or right to the next category or function. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/keyboard.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/keyboard.xhp index ee06980afa..b0e38312da 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/keyboard.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/keyboard.xhp @@ -72,13 +72,13 @@ The cursor waits in the Commands window and you can type the formula. -You can compose formulas using the Selection window. Open it with the menu View - Selection if it is not already open. +You can compose formulas using the Formula Elements window. Open it with the menu View - Formula Elements if it is not already open. -If the Selection window is open, use F6 to switch from the Commands window to the Selection window and back. +If the Formula Elements window is open, use F6 to switch from the Commands window to the Formula Elements window and back. -Selection window +Formula Elements window diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/limits.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/limits.xhp index 44e1ad67fe..abe4a223a0 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/limits.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/limits.xhp @@ -53,13 +53,13 @@ Choose Insert - Object - Formula. -You see the Math input window and the Selection window. If you don't see the Selection window, you can enable it in the View menu. +You see the Math input window and the Formula Elements window. If you don't see the Formula Elements window, you can enable it in the View menu. -In the upper part of the Selection window, click the Operators icon. +In the upper part of the Formula Elements window, click the Operators icon. -In the lower part of the Selection window, click the Sum icon. +In the lower part of the Formula Elements window, click the Sum icon. To enable lower and upper limits, click additionally the Upper and Lower Limits icon. @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ Now the formula is complete. Click into your text document outside the formula to leave the formula editor. -In the same way, you can enter an Integral formula with limits. When you click an icon from the Selection window, the assigned text command is inserted in the input window. If you know the text commands, you can enter the commands directly in the input window. +In the same way, you can enter an Integral formula with limits. When you click an icon from the Formula Elements window, the assigned text command is inserted in the input window. If you know the text commands, you can enter the commands directly in the input window. Choose Insert - Object - Formula. @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Click in the input window and enter the following line: int from{a} to{b} f(x)`dx -A small gap exists between f(x) and dx, which you can also enter using the Selection window: click the Format icon, then the Small Gap icon. +A small gap exists between f(x) and dx, which you can also enter using the Formula Elements window: click the Format icon, then the Small Gap icon. If you don't like the font of the letters f and x, choose Format - Fonts and select other fonts. Click the Default button to use the new fonts as default from now on. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0103.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0103.xhp index 37fb0e4988..84675b4a4a 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0103.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0103.xhp @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@
View -Sets the display scale and defines which elements you want to be visible. Most of the commands that you can enter into the Commands window can also be accessed through a mouse click if you have already opened the Selection window with View - Selection. +Sets the display scale and defines which elements you want to be visible. Most of the commands that you can enter into the Commands window can also be accessed through a mouse click if you have already opened the Formula Elements window with View - Formula Elements.
Zoom diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0503.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0503.xhp index 299ee91254..4031ab4794 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0503.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0503.xhp @@ -60,6 +60,6 @@ Individual Symbols You can create your own symbols and import characters from other fonts. You can add new symbols to the basic catalog of $[officename] Math symbols, or create your own special catalogs. Numerous special characters are also available. Formulas in Context -To make working with formulas easier, use the context menus, which can be called up with a right mouse click. This applies especially to the Commands window. This context menu contains all the commands that are found in the Selection window, and also operators, and so on, which can be inserted into your formula by mouse-click without having to key them into the Commands window. +To make working with formulas easier, use the context menus, which can be called up with a right mouse click. This applies especially to the Commands window. This context menu contains all the commands that are found in the Formula Elements window, and also operators, and so on, which can be inserted into your formula by mouse-click without having to key them into the Commands window. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000403.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000403.xhp index acc36495fa..10abde0897 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000403.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000403.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -View Menu -/text/swriter/00/00000403.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -View Menu -Choose View - Ruler + + View Menu + /text/swriter/00/00000403.xhp + + + + View Menu + Choose View - Ruler -Choose View - Text Boundaries + Choose View - Text Boundaries -
-Choose View - Field Shadings - -Command +
+ Choose View - Field Shadings + + Command Ctrl+F8 -
-
-Choose View - Field Names - -Command +
+
+ Choose View - Field Names + + Command Ctrl+F9 -
-
-Choose View - Nonprinting Characters - -Command +
+
+ Choose View - Nonprinting Characters + + Command Ctrl+F10 -On Standard bar, click -
-
- - - -Icon - - - -Nonprinting Characters - - -
- - - -
-Choose View - Web Layout - -On Tools bar, enable -
- - - - -Icon + On Standard bar, click +
+
+ + + +Icon - - -Web Layout - - -
+ + + Nonprinting Characters + + + -
-
-
-Choose View - Print Layout - -On Tools bar, disable -
- - - - -Icon + + +
+ Choose View - Web Layout + + On Tools bar, enable +
+
+ + + +Icon - - -Web Layout - - -
+ + + Web Layout + + + -
-
-Choose View - Hidden Paragraphs + + +
+ Choose View - Print Layoutremoved table with icon (was copy/paste error) +
+ Choose View - Hidden Paragraphs - - + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000404.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000404.xhp index cc12cb2da7..a696d2a756 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000404.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000404.xhp @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -282,7 +282,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -326,7 +326,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000405.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000405.xhp index 6e82565372..fb6c5f5266 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000405.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000405.xhp @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ - * $Revision: 1.9 $ + * $Revision: 1.8 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -32,6 +32,7 @@ * ************************************************************************ --> + @@ -62,45 +63,45 @@ Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu New/Modify (for Page Styles)
- Choose Format - Paragraph - Numbering tab - Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu Modify/New - Numbering tab (Paragraph Styles) + Choose Format - Paragraph - Outline & Numbering tab + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu Modify/New - Outline & Numbering tab (Paragraph Styles)
Choose Format - Sections - Options button -
-Choose Format - Page - Columns tab -Choose Format - Frame/Object - Columns tab -Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu Modify/New - Columns tab -Choose Insert - Frame - Columns tab -Choose Insert/Format - Section(s) - Columns tab -
-
-Choose Format - Page - Footnote tab -Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu Modify/New - Footnote tab -
-
-Choose Insert - Section - Footnotes/Endnotes tab -Choose Format - Sections - Options button Footnotes/Endnotes tab -
-
-Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu Modify/New (for Paragraph Styles) -
-
-Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu Modify/New (for Character Styles) -
-
-Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu Modify/New (for Frame Styles) -
-
-Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu Modify/New (for Numbering Styles) -
-Choose Format - AutoCorrect - While Typing +
+ Choose Format - Page - Columns tab + Choose Format - Frame/Object - Columns tab + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu Modify/New - Columns tab + Choose Insert - Frame - Columns tab + Choose Insert/Format - Section(s) - Columns tab +
+
+ Choose Format - Page - Footnote tab + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu Modify/New - Footnote tab +
+
+ Choose Insert - Section - Footnotes/Endnotes tab + Choose Format - Sections - Options button Footnotes/Endnotes tab +
+
+ Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu Modify/New (for Paragraph Styles) +
+
+ Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu Modify/New (for Character Styles) +
+
+ Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu Modify/New (for Frame Styles) +
+
+ Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu Modify/New (for Numbering Styles) +
+ Choose Format - AutoCorrect - While Typing -Choose Format - AutoCorrect + Choose Format - AutoCorrect -Choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply + Choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply -Choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply and Edit Changes + Choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply and Edit Changes Choose Table - AutoFormat (with cursor in a table) @@ -125,51 +126,51 @@ - - -
-Choose Format - Picture - Type tab -Choose Format - Frame/Object - Type tabUFI: removed some lines with Format-Object, see #i64150 -Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu Modify/New - Type tab -Choose Insert - Frame - Type tab -
-
-Choose Format - Picture - Wrap tab -Choose Format - Frame/Object - Wrap tab -Choose Insert - Frame - Wrap tab -Choose Format - Wrap - -
-Choose Format - Wrap - Edit Contour + + +
+ Choose Format - Picture - Type tab + Choose Format - Frame/Object - Type tabUFI: removed some lines with Format-Object, see #i64150 +Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu Modify/New - Type tab + Choose Insert - Frame - Type tab +
+
+ Choose Format - Picture - Wrap tab + Choose Format - Frame/Object - Wrap tab + Choose Insert - Frame - Wrap tab + Choose Format - Wrap + +
+ Choose Format - Wrap - Edit Contour -
-Choose Format - Picture - Hyperlink tab -Choose Format - Frame/Object - Hyperlink tab -Choose Insert - Frame - Hyperlink tab -
-
-Choose Format - Picture - Options tab -Choose Format - Frame/Object - Options tab -Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu Modify/New - Options tab -Choose Insert - Frame - Options tab -
-Choose Format - Picture - Picture tab +
+ Choose Format - Picture - Hyperlink tab + Choose Format - Frame/Object - Hyperlink tab + Choose Insert - Frame - Hyperlink tab +
+
+ Choose Format - Picture - Options tab + Choose Format - Frame/Object - Options tab + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - open context menu Modify/New - Options tab + Choose Insert - Frame - Options tab +
+ Choose Format - Picture - Picture tab -
-Choose Insert/Format - Picture - Macro tab -Choose Insert/Format - Frame/Object - Macro tab -Choose Edit - AutoText - AutoText (button) - Macro - -Choose Edit - ImageMap - open context menu - Macro - -Choose Insert - Hyperlink - Events icon (look for Help tip) -Choose Format - Character - Hyperlink tab - Events button -
-Choose Table - Table Properties +
+ Choose Insert/Format - Picture - Macro tab + Choose Insert/Format - Frame/Object - Macro tab + Choose Edit - AutoText - AutoText (button) - Macro + + Choose Edit - ImageMap - open context menu - Macro + + Choose Insert - Hyperlink - Events icon (look for Help tip) + Choose Format - Character - Hyperlink tab - Events button +
+ Choose Table - Table Properties Choose Table - Split Table - Choose Table - Merge Tables + Choose Table - Merge Table Choose Table - Table Properties - Table tab @@ -179,47 +180,47 @@ Right-click in a table, choose Cell -
-Choose Table - Merge Cells - -On the Table Bar, click -
- - - - -Icon +
+ Choose Table - Merge Cells + + On the Table Bar, click +
+
+ + + +Icon - - -Merge Cells - - -
+ + + Merge Cells + + + -
-
-
-Choose Table - Split Cells - -On the Table Bar, click -
- - - - -Icon + + +
+ Choose Table - Split Cells + + On the Table Bar, click +
+
+ + + +Icon - - -Split Cells - - -
+ + + Split Cells + + + -
-
-In the context menu of a cell, choose Cell - Protect + + + In the context menu of a cell, choose Cell - Protect
In the context menu of a cell, choose Cell - Unprotect @@ -230,16 +231,16 @@ In the context menu of a cell, choose Row - Height -
-Choose Table - Autofit - Optimal Row Height - -Open Optimize toolbar from Table Bar, click -
- - - - -Icon +
+ Choose Table - Autofit - Optimal Row Height + + Open Optimize toolbar from Table Bar, click +
+
+ + + +Icon @@ -248,40 +249,40 @@
-
-
-
-Choose Table - Autofit - Distribute Rows Equally - -Open Optimize toolbar from Table Bar, click -
- - - - -Icon + + +
+ Choose Table - Autofit - Distribute Rows Equally + + Open Optimize toolbar from Table Bar, click +
+
+ + + +Icon - - -Distribute Rows Equally - - -
+ + + Distribute Rows Equally + + + -
-
-Choose Table - Select - Row +
+ + Choose Table - Select - Row -
-Choose Table - Delete - Rows - -On Table Bar, click -
- - - - -Icon +
+ Choose Table - Delete - Rows + + On Table Bar, click +
+
+ + + +Icon @@ -294,19 +295,18 @@ In the context menu of a cell, choose Column - In the context menu of a cell, choose Column - - Width + In the context menu of a cell, choose Column - Width -
-Choose Table - Autofit - Optimal Column Width - -Open Optimize toolbar from Table Bar, click -
-
- - - -Icon +
+ Choose Table - Autofit - Optimal Column Width + + Open Optimize toolbar from Table Bar, click +
+
+ + + +Icon @@ -315,51 +315,51 @@
-
-
-
-Choose Table - Autofit - Distribute Columns Equally - -Open Optimize toolbar from Table Bar, click -
- - - - -Icon + + +
+ Choose Table - Autofit - Distribute Columns Equally + + Open Optimize toolbar from Table Bar, click +
+
+ + + +Icon - - -Space Columns Equally - - -
+ + + Space Columns Equally + + + -
-
-Choose Table - Select - Column + + + Choose Table - Select - Column -
-Choose Table - Insert - Columns - -Choose Table - Insert - Rows - -On Table Bar, click - - - - -Icon +
+ Choose Table - Insert - Columns + + Choose Table - Insert - Rows + + On Table Bar, click +
+ + + +Icon - - -Insert Column - - - - - -Icon + + + Insert Column + + + + + +Icon @@ -368,17 +368,17 @@
-
-
-Choose Table - Delete - Columns - -On Table Bar, click -
- - - - - + +
+ Choose Table - Delete - Columns + + On Table Bar, click +
+
+ + + +Icon @@ -387,17 +387,17 @@
-
-
-
-Choose Format - Frame/Object - -
- - - - - + + +
+ Choose Format - Frame/Object + +
+
+ + + +Icon @@ -406,14 +406,14 @@
-
-
-
- - - - -Icon + + +
+
+ + + +Icon diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000406.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000406.xhp index abceda496f..26e11aca9a 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000406.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000406.xhp @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02110000.xhp index f35b46f63b..6fc36f874f 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02110000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02110000.xhp @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -288,7 +288,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -320,7 +320,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02150000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02150000.xhp index a3a0564c53..f8dec4568e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02150000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02150000.xhp @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} +Icon diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp index 867458bf87..e3da657c79 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp @@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ When you click "Additional formats", the Number Format dialog opens, where you can define a custom format. -If you choose "Chapter number without separator" for a chapter field, the separators that are specified for chapter number in Tools - Chapter numbering are not displayed. +If you choose "Chapter number without separator" for a chapter field, the separators that are specified for chapter number in Tools - Outline numbering are not displayed. If you choose "chapter number" as the format for reference fields, only the number of the chapter heading containing the referenced object is displayed in the field. If the paragraph style for the chapter heading is not numbered, the field is left blank. The following number range formats are for paragraphs formatted with numbered or bulleted lists:
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp index 3cad566260..78e49d8174 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Defining Conditions -/text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: some code problems in database field conditions? -dedr: reviewed - - - + + Defining Conditions + /text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp + + + logical expressions -formulating conditions -conditions; in fields and sections -fields;defining conditions -sections;defining conditions -variables; in conditions -user data;in conditions -databases;in conditions -hiding; database fields + formulating conditions + conditions; in fields and sections + fields;defining conditions + sections;defining conditions + variables; in conditions + user data;in conditions + databases;in conditions + hiding; database fields -Defining Conditions +Defining Conditions -Conditions are logical expressions that you can use to control the display of fields and sections in your document. Although the following examples apply to fields, they also apply to sections. -You can define conditions for the following field types: - - -Conditional text: displays text A if the condition is true, or text B if the condition is false. - - -Hidden text: hides the contents of the field if the condition is true. - - -Hidden paragraph: hides the paragraph if the condition is true. - - -Any record and next record: controls the access to database records. - - -The simplest way to define a condition is to type the logical expression directly in a Condition box using the following values: -
- - -TRUE - - -The condition is always met. You can also enter any value not equal to 0 as the conditional text. - - - - -FALSE - - -The condition is not met. You can also enter the value 0. - - -
+ Conditions are logical expressions that you can use to control the display of fields and sections in your document. Although the following examples apply to fields, they also apply to sections. + You can define conditions for the following field types: + + + Conditional text: displays text A if the condition is true, or text B if the condition is false. + + + Hidden text: hides the contents of the field if the condition is true. + + + Hidden paragraph: hides the paragraph if the condition is true. + + + Any record and next record: controls the access to database records. + + + The simplest way to define a condition is to type the logical expression directly in a Condition box using the following values: + + + + TRUE + + + The condition is always met. You can also enter any value not equal to 0 as the conditional text. + + + + + FALSE + + + The condition is not met. You can also enter the value 0. + + +
-If you leave the Condition box empty, the condition is interpreted as not being met. -When you define a condition, use the same elements for defining a formula, namely comparative operators, mathematical and statistical functions, number formats, variables and constants. -You can use the following types of variables when you define a condition: - - -Predefined $[officename] variables that use statistics on document properties - - -Custom variables, that are a created with the "Set variable" field - - -Variables based on user data - - -Variables based on the contents of database fields - - -You cannot use internal variables, such as page and chapter numbers, in condition expression. -Conditions and Variables -The following examples use a variable called "x": - - - -x == 1 or x EQ 1 - - -The condition is true if "x" is equal to 1. - - - - -x != 1 or x NEQ 1 - - -The condition is true if "x" does not equal 1. - - - - -sinx == 0 - - -The condition is true if "x" is a multiple of pi. - - -
+ If you leave the Condition box empty, the condition is interpreted as not being met. + When you define a condition, use the same elements for defining a formula, namely comparative operators, mathematical and statistical functions, number formats, variables and constants. + You can use the following types of variables when you define a condition: + + + Predefined $[officename] variables that use statistics on document properties + + + Custom variables, that are a created with the "Set variable" field + + + Variables based on user data + + + Variables based on the contents of database fields + + + You cannot use internal variables, such as page and chapter numbers, in condition expression. + Conditions and Variables + The following examples use a variable called "x": + + + + x == 1 or x EQ 1 + + + The condition is true if "x" is equal to 1. + + + + + x != 1 or x NEQ 1 + + + The condition is true if "x" does not equal 1. + + + + + sinx == 0 + + + The condition is true if "x" is a multiple of pi. + + +
-To use comparative operators with strings, the operands must be bounded by double quotation marks: - - - -x == "ABC" or x EQ "ABC" - - -Checks if variable "x" contains (true) the "ABC" string, or not (false). - - - - -x == "" or x EQ "" -or -!x or NOT x - - -Checks if the variable "x" contains an empty string. - - -
+ To use comparative operators with strings, the operands must be bounded by double quotation marks: + + + + x == "ABC" or x EQ "ABC" + + + Checks if variable "x" contains (true) the "ABC" string, or not (false). + + + + + x == "" or x EQ "" + or + !x or NOT x + + + Checks if the variable "x" contains an empty string. + + +
-The "equal" comparative operator must be represented by two equal signs (==) in a condition. For example, if you define a variable "x" with the value of 1, you can enter the condition as x==1. -User Data -You can include user data when you define conditions. To change your user data, choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - User data. User data must be entered in the form of strings. You can query the user data with "==" (EQ), "!=" (NEQ), or "!"(NOT). -The following table lists user data variables and their meanings: - - - -Variable - - -Meaning - - - - -user_firstname - - -First name - - - - -user_lastname - - -Last name - - - - -user_initials - - -Initials - - - - -user_company - - -Company - - - - -user_street - - -Street - - - - -user_country - - -Country - - - - -user_zipcode - - -Zip code - - - - -user_city - - -City - - - - -user_title - - -Title - - - - -user_position - - -Position - - - - -user_tel_work - - -Business telephone number - - - - -user_tel_home - - -Home telephone number - - - - -user_fax - - -Fax number - - - - -user_email - - -E-mail address - - - - -user_state - - -State (not in all $[officename] versions) - - -
+ The "equal" comparative operator must be represented by two equal signs (==) in a condition. For example, if you define a variable "x" with the value of 1, you can enter the condition as x==1. + User Data + You can include user data when you define conditions. To change your user data, choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - User data. User data must be entered in the form of strings. You can query the user data with "==" (EQ), "!=" (NEQ), or "!"(NOT). + The following table lists user data variables and their meanings: + + + + Variable + + + Meaning + + + + + user_firstname + + + First name + + + + + user_lastname + + + Last name + + + + + user_initials + + + Initials + + + + + user_company + + + Company + + + + + user_street + + + Street + + + + + user_country + + + Country + + + + + user_zipcode + + + Zip code + + + + + user_city + + + City + + + + + user_title + + + Title + + + + + user_position + + + Position + + + + + user_tel_work + + + Business telephone number + + + + + user_tel_home + + + Home telephone number + + + + + user_fax + + + Fax number + + + + + user_email + + + E-mail address + + + + + user_state + + + State (not in all $[officename] versions) + + +
-For example, to hide a paragraph, text, or a section from a user with a specific initial, such as "LM", enter the condition: user_initials=="LM". -Conditions and Database Fields -You can define conditions for accessing databases, or database fields. For example, you can check the contents of a database field from a condition, or use database fields in logical expressions. The following table lists a few more examples of using databases in conditions: - - - -Example - - -Meaning - - - - -Database.Table.Company -Database.Table.Company NEQ "" -Database.Table.Company != "" - - -The condition is true if the COMPANY field is not empty. (In the first example, no operator is required.) - - - - -!Database.Table.Company -NOT Database.Table.Company -Database.Table.Company EQ "" -Database.Table.Company =="" - - -Returns TRUE if the COMPANY field is empty. (Exclamation sign represents a logical NOT.) - - - - -Database.Table.Company !="Sun Microsystems" -Database.Table.Company NEQ "Sun Microsystems" - - -Returns TRUE if the current entry in the COMPANY field is "Sun Microsystems". - - - - -Database.Table.Firstname AND Database.Table.Name - - -Returns TRUE if the record contains the first and the last name. - - -
+ For example, to hide a paragraph, text, or a section from a user with a specific initial, such as "LM", enter the condition: user_initials=="LM". + Conditions and Database Fields + You can define conditions for accessing databases, or database fields. For example, you can check the contents of a database field from a condition, or use database fields in logical expressions. The following table lists a few more examples of using databases in conditions: + + + + Example + + + Meaning + + + + + Database.Table.Company + Database.Table.Company NEQ "" + Database.Table.Company != "" + + + The condition is true if the COMPANY field is not empty. (In the first example, no operator is required.) + + + + + !Database.Table.Company + NOT Database.Table.Company + Database.Table.Company EQ "" + Database.Table.Company =="" + + + Returns TRUE if the COMPANY field is empty. (Exclamation sign represents a logical NOT.) + + + + + Database.Table.Company !="Sun Microsystems" + Database.Table.Company NEQ "Sun Microsystems" + + + Returns TRUE if the current entry in the COMPANY field is "Sun Microsystems". + + + + + Database.Table.Firstname AND Database.Table.Name + + + Returns TRUE if the record contains the first and the last name. + + +
-Note the difference between the boolean NOT "!" and the comparative operator not equal "!=" (NEQ). -When you refer to a database field in a condition, use the form Databasename.Tablename.Fieldname. If one of the names contains a character that is an operator, such as a minus sign (-), enclose the name in square brackets, for example, Databasename.[Table-name].Fieldname. Never use spaces inside field names.UFI: fixes bug #i25781# - but see #i25983#. Fixes also #i19571# -Example: Hiding an Empty Database Field -You may want to create a condition that hides an empty field, for example, if the COMPANY field is empty for some of the data records. -Select the Hidden Paragraph box, and type the following condition: Addressbook.Addresses.Company EQ "" -or type the following -NOT Addressbook.Addresses.Company -If the COMPANY database field is empty, the condition is true and the paragraph is hidden. -To display hidden paragraphs on the screen, you can choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and clear the Hidden paragraphs check box. -Examples of Conditions in Fields -The following examples use the Conditional text field, although they can be applied to any fields that can be linked to a condition. The syntax used for conditions is also used for the Hidden text, Hidden paragraph, Any record or Next record fields. -To display conditional text based on the number of pages: - - -Choose Insert - Fields - Other, and then click the Functions tab. - - -In the Type list, click "Conditional text". - - -In the Condition box, type "page == 1". - - -In the Then box, type "There is only one page". - - -In the Or box, type "There are several pages". - - -Click Insert, and then click Close. - - -To display conditional text based on a user-defined Variable - - -Choose Insert - Fields - Other, and then click the Variables tab. - - -In the Type list, click "Set Variable". - - -In the Name box, type "Profit". - - -In the Value box, type "5000". - - -Click Insert. - - -Click the Functions tab, and click "Conditional text" in the Type list. - - -In the Condition box, type "Profit < 5000". - - -In the Then box, type "Target is not met". - - -In the Or box, type "Target is met". - - -Click Insert. - - -To edit the contents of the "Profit" variable, double-click the variable field. -To display conditional text based on the contents of a database field: -The first part of this example inserts a space between the "First Name" and "Last Name" fields in a document, and the second part inserts text based on the contents of a field. This example requires that an address data source is registered with $[officename]. - - -Choose Insert - Fields - Other, and then click the Database tab. - - -In the Type list, click "Mail merge fields". - - -In the Database selection box, double-click an address book, click "First Name", and then click Insert. Repeat for "Last Name". - - -In the document, place the cursor between the two fields, press Space, and then return to the Fields dialog: - - -Click the Functions tab, and then click "Conditional text" in the Type list. - - -In the Condition box, type: "Addressbook.addresses.firstname". - - -In the Then box, type a space and leave the Or box blank. - - -You can now use a condition to insert text based on the contents of the First Name field. - - -In the Fields dialog, click the Functions tab. - - -In the Type box, click "Conditional text". - - -In the Condition box, type: Addressbook.addresses.firstname == "Michael" - - -In the Then box, type "Dear". - - -In the Or box, type "Hello". - - -Click Insert. - - - - + Note the difference between the boolean NOT "!" and the comparative operator not equal "!=" (NEQ). + When you refer to a database field in a condition, use the form Databasename.Tablename.Fieldname. If one of the names contains a character that is an operator, such as a minus sign (-), enclose the name in square brackets, for example, Databasename.[Table-name].Fieldname. Never use spaces inside field names.UFI: fixes bug #i25781# - but see #i25983#. Fixes also #i19571# + Example: Hiding an Empty Database Field + You may want to create a condition that hides an empty field, for example, if the COMPANY field is empty for some of the data records. + Select the Hidden Paragraph list entry, and type the following condition: Addressbook.Addresses.Company EQ "" + or type the following + NOT Addressbook.Addresses.Company + If the COMPANY database field is empty, the condition is true and the paragraph is hidden. + To display hidden paragraphs on the screen, you can choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and clear the Fields: Hidden paragraphs check box. + Examples of Conditions in Fields + The following examples use the Conditional text field, although they can be applied to any fields that can be linked to a condition. The syntax used for conditions is also used for the Hidden text, Hidden paragraph, Any record or Next record fields. + To display conditional text based on the number of pages: + + + Choose Insert - Fields - Other, and then click the Functions tab. + + + In the Type list, click "Conditional text". + + + In the Condition box, type "page == 1". + + + In the Then box, type "There is only one page". + + + In the Or box, type "There are several pages". + + + Click Insert, and then click Close. + + + To display conditional text based on a user-defined Variable + + + Choose Insert - Fields - Other, and then click the Variables tab. + + + In the Type list, click "Set Variable". + + + In the Name box, type "Profit". + + + In the Value box, type "5000". + + + Click Insert. + + + Click the Functions tab, and click "Conditional text" in the Type list. + + + In the Condition box, type "Profit < 5000". + + + In the Then box, type "Target is not met". + + + In the Or box, type "Target is met". + + + Click Insert. + + + To edit the contents of the "Profit" variable, double-click the variable field. + To display conditional text based on the contents of a database field: + The first part of this example inserts a space between the "First Name" and "Last Name" fields in a document, and the second part inserts text based on the contents of a field. This example requires that an address data source is registered with $[officename]. + + + Choose Insert - Fields - Other, and then click the Database tab. + + + In the Type list, click "Mail merge fields". + + + In the Database selection box, double-click an address book, click "First Name", and then click Insert. Repeat for "Last Name". + + + In the document, place the cursor between the two fields, press Space, and then return to the Fields dialog: + + + Click the Functions tab, and then click "Conditional text" in the Type list. + + + In the Condition box, type: "Addressbook.addresses.firstname". + + + In the Then box, type a space and leave the Or box blank. + + + You can now use a condition to insert text based on the contents of the First Name field. + + + In the Fields dialog, click the Functions tab. + + + In the Type box, click "Conditional text". + + + In the Condition box, type: Addressbook.addresses.firstname == "Michael" + + + In the Then box, type "Dear". + + + In the Else box, type "Hello". + + + Click Insert. + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120229.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120229.xhp index cc4328ec12..0f9b8c1c42 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120229.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120229.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Define Bibliography Entry -/text/swriter/01/04120229.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Define Bibliography Entry + /text/swriter/01/04120229.xhp + + + -Define Bibliography Entry -Change the content of a bibliography entry. -
- -
-Entry data -Enter a short name and select the appropriate source type. You can now enter data into the other fields belonging for the entry. +Define Bibliography Entry + Change the content of a bibliography entry. +
+ +
+ Entry data + Enter a short name and select the appropriate source type. You can now enter data into the other fields belonging for the entry. -Short name -Displays the short name for the bibliography entry. You can only enter a name here if you are creating a new bibliography entry. +Short name + Displays the short name for the bibliography entry. You can only enter a name here if you are creating a new bibliography entry. @@ -82,13 +80,10 @@ -This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography. +This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography. -Type -Select the source for the bibliography entry. -The entries in the bibliography database have the following names: -"Identifier"; "BibliographyType"; "Author"; "Title"; "Year"; "ISBN"; "Booktitle"; "Chapter"; "Edition"; "Editor"; "Howpublished"; "Institution"; "Journal"; "Month"; "Note"; "Annote"; "Number"; "Organizations"; "Pages"; "Publisher"; "Address"; "School"; "Series";"ReportType"; "Volume"; "URL"; "Custom1"; "Custom2"; "Custom3"; "Custom4"; "Custom5" - -Formatting bibliography entries - - +Type + Select the source for the bibliography entry.removed two paras + Formatting bibliography entries + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp index 33bba3a007..be00fd2c1a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp @@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ * * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * - * $RCSfile: 04200000.xhp,v $ - * $Revision: 1.7.4.1 $ + * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ + * $Revision: 1.8 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,47 +35,50 @@ - -Insert Script -/text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp - - - + + Insert Script + /text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp + + + -Insert Script -Inserts a script at the current cursor position in an HTML or text document. +Insert Script + Inserts a script at the current cursor position in an HTML or text document. -
- -
-An inserted script is indicated by a small green rectangle. If you do not see the rectangle, choose Tools - Options - HTML Document - View, and select the Notes check box. To edit a script, double-click the green rectangle. -If your document contains more than one script, the Edit Script dialog contains previous and next buttons to jump from script to script. +
+ +
+ An inserted script is indicated by a small green rectangle. If you do not see the rectangle, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - View, and select the Notes check box. To edit a script, double-click the green rectangle. + If your document contains more than one script, the Edit Script dialog contains previous and next buttons to jump from script to script. -Jump to Previous Script. - +Jump to Previous Script. + -Jump to Next Script. - -To specify if the script is printed at the end of the page or at the end of the document, choose File - Print - Options, and select the appropriate check box. -Contents +Jump to Next Script. + + To specify if the script is printed at the end of the page or at the end of the document, choose File - Print - Options, and select the appropriate check box. + Contents -Script Type -Enter the type of script that you want to insert. The script is identified in the HTML source code by the tag <SCRIPT LANGUAGE="JavaScript">. +Script Type + Enter the type of script that you want to insert. The script is identified in the HTML source code by the tag <SCRIPT LANGUAGE="JavaScript">. -URL -Adds a link to a script file. Click the URL radio button, and then enter the link in the box. You can also click the browse button (...), locate the file, and then click Insert. The linked script file is identified in the HTML source code by the following tags: -<SCRIPT LANGUAGE="JavaScript" SRC="url"> -/* ignore all text here */ -</SCRIPT> +URL + Adds a link to a script file. Click the URL radio button, and then enter the link in the box. You can also click the browse button (...), locate the file, and then click Insert. The linked script file is identified in the HTML source code by the following tags: + <SCRIPT LANGUAGE="JavaScript" SRC="url"> + /* ignore all text here */ + </SCRIPT> -... -Locate the script file that you want to link to, and then click Insert. +... + Locate the script file that you want to link to, and then click Insert. -Text -Enter the script code that you want to insert. - - +Text + Enter the script code that you want to insert. + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030800.xhp index bb5b34e37b..88cc1c36c3 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030800.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030800.xhp @@ -2,38 +2,33 @@ @@ -57,50 +52,45 @@
- To change the numbering options for paragraphs that use the same paragraph style, choose Format - Styles and Formatting, and then click the Paragraph Styles icon. Right-click the style in the list, choose Modify, and then click the Numbering tab. + To change the numbering options for paragraphs that use the same paragraph style, choose Format - Styles and Formatting, and then click the Paragraph Styles icon. Right-click the style in the list, choose Modify, and then click the Outline & Numbering tab. - To change the numbering options for selected paragraphs, choose Format -Paragraph, and then click the Numbering tab. + To change the numbering options for selected paragraphs, choose Format -Paragraph, and then click the Outline & Numbering tab. - id="par_idN1067A" l10n="NEW"Link paragraph -id="par_idN1067E" l10n="NEW"Select the outline level and numbering style that will be applied to the selected paragraphs. -id="par_idN10681" l10n="NEW"Outline level -id="par_idN10685" l10n="NEW"<AVIS hid=".">Select the outline level that you want to apply to the paragraph.</AVIS> + -Outline level - Assigns an outline level from 1 to 10 to the selected paragraphs or Paragraph Style. Select Body text to reset the outline level. - The paragraphs will be included in a table of contents if you enable the Outline checkbox. - If you already assigned an outline numbering to the paragraph or Paragraph Style, the Outline level list box is not available. +Outline level + Assigns an outline level from 1 to 10 to the selected paragraphs or Paragraph Style. Select Body text to reset the outline level.removed two old paras -Numbering Style Select the Numbering Style that you want to apply to the paragraph. These styles are also listed in the Styles and Formatting window if you click the Numbering Style icon. - Numbering + Numbering This section only appears when you edit the properties of the current paragraph by choosing Format - Paragraph. -Restart at this paragraph +Restart at this paragraph Restarts the numbering at the current paragraph. -Start with Select this check box, and then enter the number that you want to assign to the paragraph. -"Start with" spin button Enter the number that you want to assign to the paragraph. The following paragraphs are numbered consecutively from the number that you enter here. - Line numbering Specify the Line numbering options. To add line numbers to your document, choose Tools - Line Numbering. -Include this paragraph in line numbering Includes the current paragraph in the line numbering. -Restart at this paragraph Restarts the line numbering at the current paragraph, or at the number that you enter. -Start with Enter the number at which to restart the line numbering diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040500.xhp index 20550bb0ca..afe66a99ed 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040500.xhp @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Distributes the text in multi-column sections. The text flows into all columns to the same height. The height of the section adjusts automatically.Evenly distributes the text in multi-column sections. Width and spacing - If the Automatic width check box is selected, enter the width and spacing options for the columns. + If the Automatic width check box is not selected, enter the width and spacing options for the columns. (Column number) Displays the column number, as well as width and distance to the adjacent columns. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040600.xhp index c3410d17bf..ed87ac0702 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040600.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040600.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + + - -Footnote -/text/swriter/01/05040600.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -
+ + Footnote + /text/swriter/01/05040600.xhp + + + +
-Footnote -Specifies the layout options for footnotes, including the line that separates the footnote from the main body of document. -
-
- -
-This tab is not available in Print Layout view. - -Footnote area -Set the height of the footnote area. +Footnote + Specifies the layout options for footnotes, including the line that separates the footnote from the main body of document. +
+
+ +
removed a note +Footnote area + Set the height of the footnote area. -Not larger than page area -Automatically adjusts the height of the footnote area depending on the number of footnotes. +Not larger than page area + Automatically adjusts the height of the footnote area depending on the number of footnotes. -Maximum Footnote Height -Sets a maximum height for the footnote area. Select this check box, and then enter the height. +Maximum Footnote Height + Sets a maximum height for the footnote area. Select this check box, and then enter the height. -Maximum Footnote Height -Enter the maximum height for the footnote area. +Maximum Footnote Height + Enter the maximum height for the footnote area. -Distance from text -Enter the amount of space to leave between the bottom page margin and the first line of text in the footnote area. -Separator Line -Specifies the position and length of the separator line. +Distance from text + Enter the amount of space to leave between the bottom page margin and the first line of text in the footnote area. + Separator Line + Specifies the position and length of the separator line. -Position -Select the horizontal alignment for the line that separates the main text from the footnote area. +Position + Select the horizontal alignment for the line that separates the main text from the footnote area. -Length -Enter the length of the separator line as a percentage of the page width area. +Length + Enter the length of the separator line as a percentage of the page width area. -Weight -Select the formatting style for the separator line. If you do not want a separator line, choose "0.0 pt". +Weight + Select the formatting style for the separator line. If you do not want a separator line, choose "0.0 pt". -Spacing -Enter the amount of space to leave between the separator line and the first line of the footnote area. -To specify the spacing between two footnotes, choose Format - Paragraph, and then click the Indents and Spacing tab. - - - +Spacing + Enter the amount of space to leave between the separator line and the first line of the footnote area. + To specify the spacing between two footnotes, choose Format - Paragraph, and then click the Indents & Spacing tab. + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060700.xhp index 99b2aef534..a06a58cd00 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060700.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060700.xhp @@ -385,7 +385,7 @@ Assign -Assigns the selected to the selected event. +Assigns the selected macro to the selected event. Remove diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060800.xhp index 4671d5fa32..b665028d9e 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060800.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060800.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Hyperlink -/text/swriter/01/05060800.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - - +
+ +
+ Link to + Set the link properties. -URL -Enter the complete path to the file that you want to open, for example, http://www.sun.com, or file:///c|/Office/Document/Internet.sdw. +URL + Enter the complete path to the file that you want to open. -Browse -Locate the file that you want the hyperlink to open, and then click Open. The target file can be on your machine or on an FTP server in the Internet. +Browse + Locate the file that you want the hyperlink to open, and then click Open. The target file can be on your machine or on an FTP server in the Internet. -Name -Enter a name for the hyperlink. +Name + Enter a name for the hyperlink. -Frame -Specify the name of the frame where you want to open the targeted file. The predefined target frame names are described here. -Image Map -Select the type of ImageMap that you want to use. The ImageMap settings override the hyperlink settings that you enter on this page. +Frame + Specify the name of the frame where you want to open the targeted file. The predefined target frame names are described here. + Image Map + Select the type of ImageMap that you want to use. The ImageMap settings override the hyperlink settings that you enter on this page. -Server-side image map -Uses a server-side image map. +Server-side image map + Uses a server-side image map. -Client-side image map -Uses the image map that you created for the selected object. - -URL - - +Client-side image map + Uses the image map that you created for the selected object. + + URL + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05100400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05100400.xhp index 688cab60a5..081864e042 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05100400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05100400.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + + - -Unprotect -/text/swriter/01/05100400.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -
- + + Unprotect + /text/swriter/01/05100400.xhp + + + +
+ -Unprotect -Removes the cell protection for all of the cells in the current table. -
-
- -
-To remove the protection from several tables at once, select the tables, and then press -Command -Ctrl+Shift+T. To remove the protection from all of the tables in a document, click anywhere in the document, and then press -Command +Unprotect + Removes the cell protection for all selected cells in the current table. +
+
+ +
+ To remove the protection from several tables at once, select the tables, and then press Command +Ctrl+Shift+T. To remove the protection from all of the tables in a document, click anywhere in the document, and then press Command Ctrl+Shift+T. -You can also remove cell protection from a table in the Navigator. - - - + You can also remove cell protection from a table in the Navigator. + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110100.xhp index 0ab797c886..a2a90b069a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110100.xhp @@ -57,6 +57,6 @@ Fit to size Automatically adjusts the row height to match the contents of the cells. -You can also right-click in a cell, and then choose Format - Row - Optimal Height. +You can also right-click in a cell, and then choose Row - Optimal Height. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130004.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130004.xhp index b26edaa2b2..9ac48394a1 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130004.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130004.xhp @@ -53,7 +53,8 @@ - + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130100.xhp index 7f1c31c770..b14c635c2b 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130100.xhp @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ In Context, select the header entry and under Paragraph Styles select the style for the header in your business letter; for example, the default Paragraph Style "Header". You also can select your own style. -You can apply the Paragraph Style to the context by double-clicking the selected entry in the Paragraph Styles list box or by using Assign. +You can apply the Paragraph Style to the context by double-clicking the selected entry in the Paragraph Styles list box or by using Apply. Click OK to close the Paragraph Style dialog, and then format all paragraphs in your business letter, including the header, with the new "Business letter" conditional Paragraph Style. (When you click in the header, you may need to display All Styles or Custom Styles in the style list to use the new business letter style.) diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05140000.xhp index 45c7c0fd67..1b70870dc5 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05140000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05140000.xhp @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ - * $Revision: 1.10 $ + * $Revision: 1.8 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ To dock the Styles and Formatting window, drag its title bar to the left or to the right side of the workspace. To undock the window, double-click a free space on its toolbar. - How to apply a style: @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ You can assign shortcut keys to Styles on the Tools - Customize - Keyboard tab page. The Styles and Formatting toolbar contains icons for formatting your documents: - Style Category @@ -189,10 +189,8 @@ - Style List / Style Groups / Context Menu: New / Modify / Delete - The commands offered in the Styles and Formatting window are the same as those found in the Style Catalog dialog.UFI: Style Catalog may be removed, see Format Menu spec - More information about styles. + Applied Styles diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05200000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05200000.xhp index b0c47b616b..b8eeaa0596 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05200000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05200000.xhp @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ -Merge Tables +Merge Table Combines two consecutive tables into a single table. The tables must be directly next to each other and not separated by an empty paragraph.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06060000.xhp index 11d08fef57..5404c2286c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06060000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06060000.xhp @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ To highlight the screen display of outline numbers, choose View - Field Shadings. - + Format Saves or loads an outline number format. A saved outline number format is available to all text documents. The Format button is only available for outline numbering. For numbered or bulleted list styles, modify the Numbering Styles of the paragraphs. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06100000.xhp index aebfc227f0..b7ce1cf926 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06100000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06100000.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Sort -/text/swriter/01/06100000.xhp - - - + + Sort + /text/swriter/01/06100000.xhp + + + tables;sorting rows -sorting;paragraphs/table rows -text; sorting paragraphs -lines of text; sorting paragraphs -sorting;paragraphs in special languages -Asian languages;sorting paragraphs/table rows + sorting;paragraphs/table rows + text; sorting paragraphs + lines of text; sorting paragraphs + sorting;paragraphs in special languages + Asian languages;sorting paragraphs/table rows -Sort -Sorts the selected paragraphs or table rows alphabetically or numerically. You can define up to three sort keys as well as combine alphanumeric and numeric sort keys. + +Sort + Sorts the selected paragraphs or table rows alphabetically or numerically. You can define up to three sort keys as well as combine alphanumeric and numeric sort keys. -
- -
-Sort criteria +
+ +
+ Sort criteria -Keys 1 to 3 -Specifies additional sorting criteria. You can also combine sort keys. + +Keys 1 to 3 + Specifies additional sorting criteria. You can also combine sort keys. -Column 1 to 3 -Enter the number of the table column that you want to use as a basis for sorting. The valid number range is 1 to 99. -To sort paragraphs, select the Paragraph option in the Separator area. + +Column 1 to 3 + Enter the number of the table column that you want to use as a basis for sorting.removed a para -Key type 1 to 3 -Select the sorting option that you want to use. -Order + +Key type 1 to 3 + Select the sorting option that you want to use. + Order + Ascending -Sorts in ascending order, (for example, 1, 2, 3 or a, b, c). + +Sorts in ascending order, (for example, 1, 2, 3 or a, b, c). -Descending -Sorts in descending order (for example, 9, 8, 7 or z, y, x). -Direction -Columns -Sorts the columns in the table according to the current sort options. -Rows -Sorts the rows in the table or the paragraphs in the selection according to the current sort options. -Separator -Paragraphs are separated by nonprinting paragraph marks. You can also specify that tabs or a character act as separators when you sort paragraphs. -Tabs -If the selected paragraphs correspond to a list separated by tabs, select this option. + +Descending + Sorts in descending order (for example, 9, 8, 7 or z, y, x). + Direction + +Columns + Sorts the columns in the table according to the current sort options. + +Rows + Sorts the rows in the table or the paragraphs in the selection according to the current sort options. + Separator + Paragraphs are separated by nonprinting paragraph marks. You can also specify that tabs or a character act as separators when you sort paragraphs. + +Tabs + If the selected paragraphs correspond to a list separated by tabs, select this option. -Character -Enter the character that you want to use as a separator in the selected area. By using the separator, $[officename] can determine the position of the sorting key in the selected paragraph. -... -Opens the Special Characters dialog, where you can select the character that you want to use as a separator. -Language -Select the language that defines the sorting rules. Some languages sort special characters differently than other languages. -Match case -Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase letters when you sort a table. For Asian languages special handling applies. -For Asian languages, select Match case to apply multi-level collation. In the multi-level collation, the primitive forms of the entries are first compared with the cases of the forms and diacritics ignored. If the forms are the same, the diacritics of the forms are compared. If the forms are still the same, the cases, character widths, and Japanese Kana differences of the forms are compared.UFI: see #112590# and #112507# - - + +Character + Enter the character that you want to use as a separator in the selected area. By using the separator, $[officename] can determine the position of the sorting key in the selected paragraph. + +... + Opens the Special Characters dialog, where you can select the character that you want to use as a separator. + +Language + Select the language that defines the sorting rules. Some languages sort special characters differently than other languages. + +Match case + Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase letters when you sort a table. For Asian languages special handling applies. + For Asian languages, select Match case to apply multi-level collation. In the multi-level collation, the primitive forms of the entries are first compared with the cases of the forms and diacritics ignored. If the forms are the same, the diacritics of the forms are compared. If the forms are still the same, the cases, character widths, and Japanese Kana differences of the forms are compared.UFI: see #112590# and #112507# + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/anchor_object.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/anchor_object.xhp index 176f6b18fc..c3a15aa1c8 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/anchor_object.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/anchor_object.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Positioning Objects -/text/swriter/guide/anchor_object.xhp - - - + + Positioning Objects + /text/swriter/guide/anchor_object.xhp + + + objects;anchoring options -positioning;objects (guide) -anchors;options -frames;anchoring options -pictures;anchoring options -centering;images on HTML pages + positioning;objects (guide) + anchors;options + frames;anchoring options + pictures;anchoring options + centering;images on HTML pages -Positioning Objects +Positioning Objects -You can use anchors to position an object, graphic, or frame in a document. An anchored item remains in place, or moves when you modify the document. The following anchoring options are available: - - - -Anchoring - - -Effect - - - - -As character - - -Anchors the selected item as a character in the current text. If the height of the selected item is greater than the current font size, the height of the line containing the item is increased. -To center an image on an HTML page, insert the image, anchor it "as character", then center the paragraph. - - - - -To character - - -Anchors the selected item to a character. - - - - -To paragraph - - -Anchors the selected item to the current paragraph. - - - - -To page - - -Anchors the selected item to the current page. - - - - -To frame - - -Anchors the selected item to the surrounding frame. - - -
-When you insert an object, graphic, or frame, an anchor icon appears where the item is anchored. You can position an anchored item by dragging the item to another location. To change the anchoring options of an item, right-click the item, and then choose an option from the Anchor submenu. -
- -
- - + You can use anchors to position an object, graphic, or frame in a document. An anchored item remains in place, or moves when you modify the document. The following anchoring options are available: + + + + Anchoring + + + Effect + + + + + As character + + + Anchors the selected item as a character in the current text. If the height of the selected item is greater than the current font size, the height of the line containing the item is increased. + To center an image on an HTML page, insert the image, anchor it "as character", then center the paragraph. + + + + + To character + + + Anchors the selected item to a character. + + + + + To paragraph + + + Anchors the selected item to the current paragraph. + + + + + To page + + + Anchors the selected item to the current page. + + + + + To frame + + + Anchors the selected item to the surrounding frame. + + +
+ + When you insert an object, graphic, or frame, an anchor icon appears where the item is anchored. You can position an anchored item by dragging the item to another location. To change the anchoring options of an item, right-click the item, and then choose an option from the Anchor + submenu. +
+ +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/arrange_chapters.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/arrange_chapters.xhp index 93081e09bf..a50f11ca58 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/arrange_chapters.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/arrange_chapters.xhp @@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ * * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * - * $RCSfile: arrange_chapters.xhp,v $ - * $Revision: 1.6.4.1 $ + * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ + * $Revision: 1.10 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,22 +35,23 @@ - -Rearranging a Document by Using the Navigator -/text/swriter/guide/arrange_chapters.xhp - - - + + Rearranging a Document by Using the Navigator + /text/swriter/guide/arrange_chapters.xhp + + + headings;rearranging -rearranging headings -moving;headings -demoting heading levels -promoting heading levels -Navigator;heading levels and chapters -arranging;headings -outlines;arranging chapters + rearranging headings + moving;headings + demoting heading levels + promoting heading levels + Navigator;heading levels and chapters + arranging;headings + outlines;arranging chapters mw added "outlines;..." entry -Arranging Chapters in the Navigator +Arranging Chapters in the Navigator You can move headings and subordinate text up and down in a document text by using the Navigator. You can also promote and demote heading levels. To use this feature, format the headings in your document with one of the predefined heading paragraph styles. To use a custom paragraph style for a heading, choose Tools - Outline Numbering, select the style in the Paragraph Style box, and then double-click a number in the Levels list. To quickly move the text cursor to a heading in the document, double-click the heading in the Navigator list. @@ -102,9 +103,9 @@ Click the Heading Levels Shown icon Icon , and then select a number from the list. -
- - -
- - +
+ + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp index abb596dba7..cf49dee4d7 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ - * $Revision: 1.8 $ + * $Revision: 1.10 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,50 +35,51 @@ - -Creating Numbered or Bulleted Lists as You Type -/text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp - - - + + Creating Numbered or Bulleted Lists as You Type + /text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp + + + numbering; lists, while typing -bullet lists;creating while typing -lists;automatic numbering -numbers;lists -automatic numbering; AutoCorrect function -bullets; using automatically -automatic bullets -paragraphs; automatic numbering -MW deleted "applying;" -Creating Numbered or Bulleted Lists as You Type + bullet lists;creating while typing + lists;automatic numbering + numbers;lists + automatic bullets/numbers; AutoCorrect function + bullets; using automatically + paragraphs; automatic numbering +MW deleted "applying;"mw deleted "automatic bullets" and changed "automatic numbering;" +Creating Numbered or Bulleted Lists as You Type -$[officename] can automatically apply numbering or bullets as you type. -To Enable Automatic Numbering and Bulleting - - -Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Options, click the Options tab, and then select Apply Numbering - Symbol. - - -Choose Format - AutoCorrect, and ensure that While Typing is selected. - - -The automatic numbering option is only applied to paragraphs that are formatted with the "Default", "Text body", or "Text body indent" paragraph style. -To Create a Numbered or Bulleted List While You Type - - -Type 1., i., or I. to start a numbered list. Type * or - to start a bulleted list. You can also type a right parenthesis after the number instead of a period , for example, 1) or i). - - -Enter a space, type your text, and then press Enter. The new paragraph automatically receives the next number or bullet. - - -Press Enter again to finish the list. - - -You can start a numbered list with any number. - - -Format - Bullets and Numbering - - + $[officename] can automatically apply numbering or bullets as you type. + To Enable Automatic Numbering and Bulleting + + + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect Options, click the Options tab, and then select “Apply numbering – symbol”. + + + Choose Format - AutoCorrect, and ensure that While Typing is selected. + + + The automatic numbering option is only applied to paragraphs that are formatted with the "Default", "Text body", or "Text body indent" paragraph style. + To Create a Numbered or Bulleted List While You Type + + + Type 1., i., or I. to start a numbered list. Type * or - to start a bulleted list. You can also type a right parenthesis after the number instead of a period , for example, 1) or i). + + + Enter a space, type your text, and then press Enter. The new paragraph automatically receives the next number or bullet. + + + Press Enter again to finish the list. + + + You can start a numbered list with any number. + + + Format - Bullets and Numbering + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp index 2301a9431c..fcc194e0ac 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ - * $Revision: 1.8 $ + * $Revision: 1.10 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,97 +35,97 @@ - -Turning Off AutoCorrect -/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp - - - + + Turning Off AutoCorrect + /text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp + + + turning off automatic correction -text;turning off automatic correction -uppercase;changing to lowercase -capital letters;changing to small letters after periods -quotation marks;changing automatically -words;automatic replacement on/off -lines;automatic drawing on/off -underlining;quick -borders; automatic drawing on/off -automatic changes on/off -changes;automatic -AutoCorrect function;turning off + text;turning off automatic correction + uppercase;changing to lowercase + capital letters;changing to small letters after periods + quotation marks;changing automatically + words;automatic replacement on/off + lines;automatic drawing on/off + underlining;quick + borders; automatic drawing on/off + automatic changes on/off + changes;automatic + AutoCorrect function;turning off - -Turning Off AutoCorrect + + Turning Off AutoCorrect -By default, $[officename] automatically corrects many common typing errors and applies formatting while you type. - - -To quickly undo an automatic correction or completion, press Command + By default, $[officename] automatically corrects many common typing errors and applies formatting while you type. + + + To quickly undo an automatic correction or completion, press Command Ctrl+Z. - - -To turn off most AutoCorrect features, remove the check mark from the menu Format - AutoCorrect - While Typing. - - -To remove a word from the AutoCorrect list: - - -Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Options. - - -Click the Replace tab. - - -In the AutoCorrect list, select the word pair that you want to remove. - - -Click Delete. - - -To stop replacing quotation marks: - - -Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Options. - - -Click the Custom Quotes tab - - -Clear the Replace check box(es). - - -To stop capitalizing the first letter of a sentence: - - -Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Options. - - -Click the Options tab. - - -Clear the Capitalize first letter of every sentence check box. - - -To stop drawing a line when you type three identical characters: -$[officename] automatically draws a line when you type three of the following characters and press Enter: - _ = * ~ # - - -Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Options. - - -Click the Options tab. - - -Clear the Apply border check box. - - - - - - - - + + + To turn off most AutoCorrect features, remove the check mark from the menu Format - AutoCorrect - While Typing. + + + To Remove a Word from the AutoCorrect List + + + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect Options. + + + Click the Replace tab. + + + In the AutoCorrect list, select the word pair that you want to remove. + + + Click Delete. + + + To Stop Replacing Quotation Marks + + + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect Options. + + + Click the Custom Quotes tab + + + Clear the “Replace” check box(es). + + + To Stop Capitalizing the First Letter of a Sentence + + + Choose Tools – AutoCorrect Options. + + + Click the Options tab. + + + Clear the “Capitalize first letter of every sentence” check box. + + + To Stop Drawing a Line When You Type Three Identical Characters + $[officename] automatically draws a line when you type three of the following characters and press Enter: - _ = * ~ # + + + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect Options. + + + Click the Options tab. + + + Clear the “Apply border” check box. + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp index 5f381dc7f8..ad87e71b06 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ - * $Revision: 1.8 $ + * $Revision: 1.10 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,55 +35,49 @@ - -Automatically Check Spelling -/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp - - - + + Automatically Check Spelling + /text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp + + + spellcheck;AutoSpellcheck on/off -automatic spellcheck -checking spelling;while typing -words;disabling spellcheck + automatic spellcheck + checking spelling;while typing + words;disabling spellcheck MW deleted "text;" -Automatically Check Spelling +Automatically Check Spelling -You can have $[officename] automatically check spelling while you type and underline possible misspelt words with a red wavy line. -To check spelling automatically while you type: - - -Activate the AutoSpellcheck icon on the Standard bar. - - -Right-click a word with a red wavy underline, and then choose a suggested replacement word from the list, or from the AutoCorrect submenu. - - - - -If you choose a word from the AutoCorrect submenu, the underlined word and the replacement word are automatically added to the AutoCorrect list for the current language. To view the AutoCorrect list, choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Options, and then click the Replace tab. - - - - -You can also add the underlined word to your custom dictionary by choosing Add. - - -To exclude words from the spellcheck: - - -Select the words that you want to exclude. - - -Click the Language control on the Status bar to open a menu. - - -Choose None (Do not check spelling). - - - -Creating a new dictionary. - - - - + You can have $[officename] automatically check spelling while you type and underline possible misspelt words with a red wavy line. + To Check Spelling Automatically While You Type + + + Activate the AutoSpellcheck icon on the Standard bar. + + + Right-click a word with a red wavy underline, and then choose a suggested replacement word from the list, or from the AutoCorrect submenu. + + + If you choose a word from the AutoCorrect submenu, the underlined word and the replacement word are automatically added to the AutoCorrect list for the current language. To view the AutoCorrect list, choose Tools – AutoCorrect Options, and then click the Replace tab. + You can also add the underlined word to your custom dictionary by choosing Add. + To Exclude Words From the Spellcheck + + + Select the words that you want to exclude. + + + Click the Language control on the Status bar to open a menu. + + + Choose “None (Do not check spelling)”. + + + + Creating a new dictionary. + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp index 1cc56d54da..d4aae67c09 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ - * $Revision: 1.8 $ + * $Revision: 1.10 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,41 +35,34 @@ - -Adding Exceptions to the AutoCorrect List -/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp - - - + + Adding Exceptions to the AutoCorrect List + /text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp + + + AutoCorrect function; adding exceptions -exceptions; AutoCorrect function -abbreviations -capital letters;avoiding after specific abbreviations + exceptions; AutoCorrect function + abbreviations + capital letters;avoiding after specific abbreviations MW added "capital letters;..." -Adding Exceptions to the AutoCorrect List +Adding Exceptions to the AutoCorrect List -You can prevent AutoCorrect from correcting specific abbreviations or words that have mixed capital letters and lowercase letters. -To quickly undo an AutoCorrect replacement, press Command + You can prevent AutoCorrect from correcting specific abbreviations or words that have mixed capital letters and lowercase letters. + + + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect Options, and then click the Exceptions tab. + + + Do one of the following: + Type the abbreviation followed by a period in the Abbreviations (no subsequent capital) box and click New. + Type the word in the Words with TWo INitial CApitals box and click New. + + + To quickly undo an AutoCorrect replacement, press Command Ctrl+Z. This also adds the word or abbreviation that you typed to the AutoCorrect exceptions list. -To Add an Exception to the AutoCorrect Exceptions List - - -Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Options, and then click the Exceptions tab. - - -Do one of the following: - - - - -Type the abbreviation followed by a period in the Abbreviations (no subsequent capital) box and click New. - - -Type the word in the Words with TWo INitial CApitals box and click New. - - - - - - + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp index db7657816f..bc5aded4aa 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Using AutoText -/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: Deleted screenshot - - - + + Using AutoText + /text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp + + + AutoText -networks and AutoText directories -lists;AutoText shortcuts -printing;AutoText shortcuts -inserting;text blocks -text blocks -blocks of text + networks and AutoText directories + lists;AutoText shortcuts + printing;AutoText shortcuts + inserting;text blocks + text blocks + blocks of text mw deleted "creating;" -Using AutoText +Using AutoText -In $[officename] Writer, you can store text - also containing graphics, tables, and fields - as AutoText, so that you can quickly insert the text later on. If you want, you can also store formatted text. -Creating an AutoText Entry - - -Select the text, text with graphics, table, or field that you want to save as an AutoText entry. A graphic can only be stored if it is anchored as a character and is preceded and followed by at least one text character. - - -Choose Edit - AutoText. - - -Select the category where you want to store the AutoText. - - -Type a name that is longer than four characters. This allows you to use the Display remainder of name as suggestion while typing AutoText option. If you want, you can modify the proposed shortcut. - - -Click the AutoText button, and then choose New. - - -Click the Close button. - - -Inserting an AutoText Entry - - -Click in your document where you want to insert an AutoText entry. - - -Choose Edit - AutoText. - - -Select the AutoText that you want to insert, and then click Insert. - - -You can also type the shortcut for an AutoText entry, and then press F3, or click the arrow next to the AutoText icon on the Insert bar, and then choose an AutoText entry. -To quickly enter a %PRODUCTNAME Math formula, type "FN", and then press F3. If you insert more than one formula, the formulae are sequentially numbered. To insert dummy text, type "DT", and then press F3. -To Print a List of AutoText Entries - - -Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic. - - -In the Macro from list, double-click "%PRODUCTNAME Macros - Gimmicks". - - -Select "AutoText" and then click Run. A list of the current AutoText entries is generated in a separate text document. - - -Choose File - Print. - - -Using AutoText in Network Installations -You can store AutoText entries in different directories on a network. -For example, you can store "read-only" AutoText entries for your company on a central server, and user-defined AutoText entries in a local directory. -The paths for the AutoText directories can be edited in the configuration. -Two directories are listed here. The first entry is on the server installation and the second entry is in the user directory. If there are two AutoText entries with the same name in both directories, the entry from the user directory is used. -
-Edit - AutoText -Word Completion -
- - + In $[officename] Writer, you can store text - also containing graphics, tables, and fields - as AutoText, so that you can quickly insert the text later on. If you want, you can also store formatted text. + To To Create an AutoText Entry + + + Select the text, text with graphics, table, or field that you want to save as an AutoText entry. A graphic can only be stored if it is anchored as a character and is preceded and followed by at least one text character. + + + Choose + Edit - AutoText. + + + Select the category where you want to store the AutoText. + + + Type a name that is longer than four characters. This allows you to use the Display remainder of name as suggestion while typing AutoText option. If you want, you can modify the proposed shortcut. + + + Click the AutoText button, and then choose New. + + + Click the Close button. + + + To Insert an AutoText Entry + + + Click in your document where you want to insert an AutoText entry. + + + Choose Edit - AutoText. + + + Select the AutoText that you want to insert, and then click + Insert. + + + You can also type the shortcut for an AutoText entry, and then press F3, or click the arrow next to the AutoText + icon on the Insert bar, and then choose an AutoText entry. + To quickly enter a %PRODUCTNAME Math formula, type fn, and then press F3. If you insert more than one formula, the formulae are sequentially numbered. To insert dummy text, type dt, and then press F3. + To Print a List of AutoText Entries + + + Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic. + + + In the Macro from list, double-click "%PRODUCTNAME Macros - Gimmicks". + + + Select "AutoText" and then click Run. A list of the current AutoText entries is generated in a separate text document. + + + Choose File - Print. + + + Using AutoText in Network Installations + You can store AutoText entries in different directories on a network. + For example, you can store "read-only" AutoText entries for your company on a central server, and user-defined AutoText entries in a local directory. + The paths for the AutoText directories can be edited in the configuration. + Two directories are listed here. The first entry is on the server installation and the second entry is in the user directory. If there are two AutoText entries with the same name in both directories, the entry from the user directory is used. +
+ Edit - AutoText + Word Completion +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/background.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/background.xhp index 2903fa5d88..76ec5ec3c7 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/background.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/background.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Defining Background Colors or Background Graphics -/text/swriter/guide/background.xhp - - - - - - + + Defining Background Colors or Background Graphics + /text/swriter/guide/background.xhp + + + backgrounds;text objects -words;backgrounds -paragraphs; backgrounds -text; backgrounds -tables; backgrounds -cells; backgrounds - - MW transferred 4 index entries from shared/guide/background.xhp and added 3 new entries - Defining Background Colors or Background Graphics - - MW built this file from splitting shared/guide/background.xhp - You can define a background color or use a graphic as a background for various objects in $[officename] Writer. - Applying a Background To Text Characters - - - Select the characters. - - - Choose Format - Character. - - - Click the Background tab, select the background color. - - - Applying a Background To a Paragraph - - - Place the cursor in the paragraph or select several paragraphs. - - - Choose Format - Paragraph. - - - On the Background tab page, select the background color or a background graphic. - - - Applying a Background To All or Part of a Text Table - - - Place the cursor in the table in your text document. - - - Choose Table - Table Properties. - - - On the Background tab page, select the background color or a background graphic. - In the For box, choose whether the color or graphic should apply to the current cell, the current row or the whole table. If you select several cells or rows before opening the dialog, the change applies to the selection. - - - Applying a Background to Parts of a Text Table Using an Icon - - - To apply a background color to cells, select the cells and click the color on the Background Color toolbar. - - - To apply a background color to a text paragraph within a cell, place the cursor into the text paragraph, then click the color on the Background Color toolbar. - - -
- - + words;backgrounds + paragraphs; backgrounds + text; backgrounds + tables; backgrounds + cells; backgrounds +MW transferred 4 index entries from shared/guide/background.xhp and added 3 new entries +Defining Background Colors or Background Graphics +MW built this file from splitting shared/guide/background.xhp +You can define a background color or use a graphic as a background for various objects in $[officename] Writer. + To Apply a Background To Text Characters + + + Select the characters. + + + Choose Format - Character. + + + Click the Background tab, select the background color. + + + To Apply a Background To a Paragraph + + + Place the cursor in the paragraph or select several paragraphs. + + + Choose Format - Paragraph. + + + On the Background tab page, select the background color or a background graphic. + + + To Apply a Background To All or Part of a Table + + + Place the cursor in the table in your text document. + + + Choose Table - Table Properties. + + + On the Background tab page, select the background color or a background graphic. + + + In the For box, choose whether the color or graphic should apply to the current cell, the current row or the whole table. If you select several cells or rows before opening the dialog, the change applies to the selection. + + + You may also use an icon to apply a background to table parts. + + + To apply a background color to cells, select the cells and click the color on the Background Color toolbar. + + + To apply a background color to a text paragraph within a cell, place the cursor into the text paragraph, then click the color on the Background Color + toolbar. + + +
- - - - + - - Highlighting icon - Background tab page - Watermarks - Page Backgrounds as Page Styles - -
- - +Highlighting icon + Background tab page + Watermarks + Page Backgrounds as Page Styles +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_object.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_object.xhp index e47d6f9752..eaf714494c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_object.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_object.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Defining Borders for Objects -/text/swriter/guide/border_object.xhp - - - + + Defining Borders for Objects + /text/swriter/guide/border_object.xhp + + + objects; defining borders -borders; for objects -frames; around objects -charts;borders -pictures;borders -OLE objects;borders -defining;object borders -MW deleted "adding;"Defining Borders for Objects + borders; for objects + frames; around objects + charts;borders + pictures;borders + OLE objects;borders + defining;object borders +MW deleted "adding;" +Defining Borders for Objects -In Writer, you can define borders around OLE objects, plug-ins, diagrams/charts, graphics and frames. The name of the menu to be used depends on the object selected. -Setting a Predefined Border Style - - -Select the object for which you want to define a border. - - -Click the Borders icon on the OLE-Object toolbar or Frame toolbar to open the Borders window. - - -Click one of the predefined border styles. This replaces the current border style of the object with the selected style. - - -Setting a Customized Border Style - - -Select the table cells that you want to modify. - - -Choose Format - (object name) - Borders. -Replace (object name) with the actual name of the object type you selected. - - -In the User-defined area select the edge(s) that you want to appear in a common layout. Click on an edge in the preview to toggle the selection of an edge. - - -Select a line style and color for the selected border style in the Line area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style. - - -Repeat the last two steps for every border edge. - - -Select the distance between the border lines and the page contents in the Spacing to Contents area. - - -Click OK to apply the changes. - - -
- - - -
- - + In Writer, you can define borders around OLE objects, plug-ins, diagrams/charts, graphics and frames. The name of the menu to be used depends on the object selected. + To Set a Predefined Border Style + + + Select the object for which you want to define a border. + + + Click the Borders icon on the OLE-Object toolbar or Frame toolbar to open the Borders window. + + + Click one of the predefined border styles. This replaces the current border style of the object with the selected style. + + + To Set a Customized Border Style + + + Select the table cells that you want to modify. + + + Choose Format - (object name) – Borders.
Replace (object name) with the actual name of the object type you selected. + + + In the User-defined area select the edge(s) that you want to appear in a common layout. Click on an edge in the preview to toggle the selection of an edge. + + + Select a line style and color for the selected border style in the Line area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style. + + + Repeat the last two steps for every border edge. + + + Select the distance between the border lines and the page contents in the Spacing to Contents area. + + + Click OK to apply the changes. + + +
+ + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp index 2cf28cf1ad..8cc62c0e03 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Defining Borders for Pages -/text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp - - - - - - + + Defining Borders for Pages + /text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp + + + pages;defining borders -borders; for pages -frames; around pages -defining;page borders - - MW deleted "adding;" - Defining Borders for Pages + borders; for pages + frames; around pages + defining;page borders +MW deleted "adding;" +Defining Borders for Pages - In Writer, you can define borders for page styles, not individual pages. All changes made to borders apply to all pages that use the same page style. Note that page style changes cannot be undone by the Undo function in $[officename]. - Setting a Predefined Border Style - - - Choose Format - Page - Borders. - - - Select one of the default border styles in the Default area. - - - Select a line style and color for the selected border style in the Line area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style. - - - Select the distance between the border lines and the page contents in the Spacing to contents area. - - - Click OK to apply the changes. - - - Setting a Customized Border Style - - - Choose Format - Page - Borders. - - - In the User-defined area select the edge(s) that you want to appear in a common layout. Click on an edge in the preview to toggle the selection of an edge. - - - Select a line style and color for the selected border style in the Line area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style. - - - Repeat the last two steps for every border edge. - - - Select the distance between the border lines and the page contents in the Spacing to contents area. - - - Click OK to apply the changes. - - -
- - - - - - -
- - + In Writer, you define borders for page styles, not individual pages. All changes made to borders apply to all pages that use the same page style. Note that page style changes cannot be undone by the Undo function in $[officename]. + To Set a Predefined Border Style + + + Choose Format - Page - Borders. + + + Select one of the default border styles in the Default area. + + + Select a line style and color for the selected border style in the Line area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style. + + + Select the distance between the border lines and the page contents in the Spacing to contents area. + + + Click OK to apply the changes. + + + To Set a Customized Border Style + + + Choose Format - Page - Borders. + + + In the User-defined area select the edge(s) that you want to appear in a common layout. Click on an edge in the preview to toggle the selection of an edge. + + + Select a line style and color for the selected border style in the Line area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style. + + + Repeat the last two steps for every border edge. + + + Select the distance between the border lines and the page contents in the Spacing to contents area. + + + Click OK to apply the changes. + + +
+ + + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/borders.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/borders.xhp index fffc320439..5bfb7d60d7 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/borders.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/borders.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -User Defined Borders in Text Documents -text/swriter/guide/borders.xhp - - -Writer borders - - - - + + User Defined Borders in Text Documents + text/swriter/guide/borders.xhp + + + borders;for text tables -cells;borders in text tables -defining;table borders in Writer -frames;around text tables -tables;defining borders + cells;borders in text tables + defining;table borders in Writer + frames;around text tables + tables;defining borders MW changed "text tables;" to "tables;" -User Defined Borders in Text Documents +User Defined Borders in Text Documents -You can apply a variety of different cell borders to selected cells in a Writer table and to the whole table. Other objects in text documents can have user defined borders, too. For example, you can assign borders to page styles, to frames, and to inserted pictures or charts. - - -Select the cell or a block of cells in a Writer table. - - -Choose Table - Table properties. - - -In the dialog, click the Borders tab. - - -Choose the border options you want to apply and click OK. - - -The options in the Line arrangement area can be used to apply multiple border styles. -Selection of cells -Depending on the selection of cells, the area looks different. - - - -Selection - - -Line arrangement area - - - - -One cell selected in a table of more that one cell size, or cursor inside a table with no cell selected - - - -one cell border + You can apply a variety of different cell borders to selected cells in a Writer table and to the whole table. Other objects in text documents can have user defined borders, too. For example, you can assign borders to page styles, to frames, and to inserted pictures or charts. + + + Select the cell or a block of cells in a Writer table. + + + Choose Table - Table properties. + + + In the dialog, click the Borders tab. + + + Choose the border options you want to apply and click OK. + + + The options in the Line arrangement area can be used to apply multiple border styles. + Selection of cells + Depending on the selection of cells, the area looks different. +
+ + + Selection + + + Line arrangement area + + + + + One cell selected in a table of more that one cell size, or cursor inside a table with no cell selected + + + +one cell border - - - - -A one cell table, the cell is selected - - - -one selected cell border + + + + + A one cell table, the cell is selected + + + +one selected cell border - - - - -Cells in a column selected - - - -column selected border + + + + + Cells in a column selected + + + +column selected border - - - - -Cells in a row selected - - - -row selected border + + + + + Cells in a row selected + + + +row selected border - - - - -A whole table of 2x2 or more cells selected - - - -block selected border + + + + + A whole table of 2x2 or more cells selected + + + +block selected border - - -
+ + + -Default settings -Click one of the Default icons to set or reset multiple borders. - - -The thin gray lines inside an icon show the borders that will be reset or cleared. - - -The dark lines inside an icon show the lines that will be set using the selected line style and color. - - -The thick gray lines inside an icon show the lines that will not be changed. - - -Examples -Select a block of about 8x8 cells, then choose Format - Cells - Borders. - -default icons for borders + Default settings + Click one of the Default icons to set or reset multiple borders. + + + The thin gray lines inside an icon show the borders that will be reset or cleared. + + + The dark lines inside an icon show the lines that will be set using the selected line style and color. + + + The thick gray lines inside an icon show the lines that will not be changed. + + + Examples + Select a block of about 8x8 cells, then choose Format - Cells - Borders. + +default icons for borders - - -Click the left icon to clear all lines. This removes all outer borders and all inner lines. - - -Click the second icon from the left to set an outer border and to remove all other lines. - - -Click the rightmost icon to set an outer border. The inner lines are not changed. - - -Now you can continue to see which lines the other icons will set or remove. -User defined settings -In the User defined area, you can click to set or remove individual lines. The preview shows lines in three different states. - - -Repeatedly click an edge or a corner to switch through the three different states. - - - - - -Line types - - -Image - - -Meaning - - - - -A black line - - - -solid line for border + + + Click the left icon to clear all lines. This removes all outer borders and all inner lines. + + + Click the second icon from the left to set an outer border and to remove all other lines. + + + Click the rightmost icon to set an outer border. The inner lines are not changed. + + + Now you can continue to see which lines the other icons will set or remove. + User defined settings + In the User defined area, you can click to set or remove individual lines. The preview shows lines in three different states. + Repeatedly click an edge or a corner to switch through the three different states. +
+ + + Line types + + + Image + + + Meaning + + + + + A black line + + + +solid line for border - - -A black line sets the corresponding line of the selected cells. The line is shown as a dotted line when you choose the 0.05 pt line style. Double lines are shown when you select a double line style. - - - - -A gray line - - - -gray line for border + + + A black line sets the corresponding line of the selected cells. The line is shown as a dotted line when you choose the 0.05 pt line style. Double lines are shown when you select a double line style. + + + + + A gray line + + + +gray line for border - - -A gray line is shown when the corresponding line of the selected cells will not be changed. No line will be set or removed at this position. - - - - -A white line - - - -white line for border + + + A gray line is shown when the corresponding line of the selected cells will not be changed. No line will be set or removed at this position. + + + + + A white line + + + +white line for border - - -A white line is shown when the corresponding line of the selected cells will be removed. - - -
+ + + A white line is shown when the corresponding line of the selected cells will be removed. + + + -Examples - - -Select a single cell in a Writer table, then choose Table - Table properties - Borders. - - -Select a thick line style. - - -To set a lower border, click the lower edge repeatedly until you see a thick line. - - - -setting thick lower border + Examples + + + Select a single cell in a Writer table, then choose Table - Table properties - Borders. + + + Select a thick line style. + + + To set a lower border, click the lower edge repeatedly until you see a thick line. + + + +setting thick lower border -All cells in a Writer table have at least a left and a lower line by default. Most cells on the table perimeter have more lines applied by default. -All lines that are shown in white in the preview will be removed from the cell. + All cells in a Writer table have at least a left and a lower line by default. Most cells on the table perimeter have more lines applied by default. + All lines that are shown in white in the preview will be removed from the cell. - - - - - + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp index a4fadde04f..b073827dd5 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Calculating in Text Documents -/text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Calculating in Text Documents + /text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp + + + calculating; in text -formulas; calculating in text -references;in Writer tables + formulas; calculating in text + references;in Writer tables mw deleted "formula bar in text" -Calculating in Text Documents +Calculating in Text Documents -You can insert a calculation directly into a text document or into a text table. - - -Click in the document where you want to insert the calculation, and then press F2. If you are in a table cell, type an equals sign =. - - -Type the calculation that you want to insert, for example, "=10000/12", and then press Enter. - - -You can also click the Formula icon on the Formula Bar, and then choose a function for your formula. -To reference cells in a Writer text table, enclose the cell address or the cell range in angle brackets. For example, to reference cell A1 from another cell, enter =<A1> into the cell. - - - - - - - - + You can insert a calculation directly into a text document or into a text table. + + + Click in the document where you want to insert the calculation, and then press F2. If you are in a table cell, type an equals sign =. + + + Type the calculation that you want to insert, for example, =10000/12, and then press Enter. + + + You can also click the Formula + icon on the Formula Bar, and then choose a function for your formula. + To reference cells in a Writer text table, enclose the cell address or the cell range in angle brackets. For example, to reference cell A1 from another cell, enter =<A1> into the cell. + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp index 4a8c76c3b8..f0f49ed9a0 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Calculating and Pasting the Result of a Formula in a Text Document -/text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Calculating and Pasting the Result of a Formula in a Text Document + /text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp + + + pasting;results of formulas -clipboard;calculating in text -formulas;pasting results in text documents + clipboard;calculating in text + formulas;pasting results in text documents - Calculating and Pasting the Result of a Formula in a Text Document + Calculating and Pasting the Result of a Formula in a Text Document -If your text already contains a formula, for example "12+24*2", $[officename] can calculate, and then paste the result of the formula in your document, without using the Formula Bar. - - -Select the formula in the text. The formula can only contain numbers and operators and cannot contain spaces. - - -Choose Tools - Calculate, or press Command + If your text already contains a formula, for example "12+24*2", $[officename] can calculate, and then paste the result of the formula in your document, without using the Formula Bar. + + + Select the formula in the text. The formula can only contain numbers and operators and cannot contain spaces. + + + Choose Tools - Calculate, or press Command Ctrl+Plus Sign (+). - - -Place the cursor where you want to insert the result of the formula, and then choose Edit - Paste, or press Command -Ctrl+V. - - - - -If the formula is selected, it is replaced by the result. - - - - - - - - - - + + + Place the cursor where you want to insert the result of the formula, and then choose Edit - Paste, or press Command +Ctrl+V.
The selected formula is replaced by the result. + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp index a51b2a29b2..fbf0531e6e 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Calculating Cell Totals in Tables -/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Calculating Cell Totals in Tables + /text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp + + + calculating;sums in text tables -totals in text tables -tables;calculating sums -cells;calculating sums -table cells;calculating sums -sums of table cell series + totals in text tables + tables;calculating sums + cells;calculating sums + table cells;calculating sums + sums of table cell series mw deleted "text tables;" -Calculating the sum of a series of table cells +Calculating the Sum of a Series of Table Cells - - -Choose Insert - Table, and insert a table with one column and more than one row into a text document. - - -Type a number in each cell of the column, but leave the last cell in the column empty. - - -Place the cursor in the last cell of the column, and then click the Sum icon on the Table Bar.
The Formula Bar appears with the entry "=sum". - - -Click in the first cell of the series you want to sum up, drag to the final cell, and then release.
$[officename] inserts a formula for calculating the sum of the values in the current column. - - -Press Enter, or click Apply in the Formula bar.
The sum of the values in the current column is entered in the cell. - - -If you enter a different number anywhere in the column, the sum is updated as soon as you click in the last column cell. -Similarly, you can also quickly calculate the sum of a row of numbers. - - - - - - - - + + + Choose Insert - Table, and insert a table with one column and more than one row into a text document. + + + Type a number in each cell of the column, but leave the last cell in the column empty. + + + Place the cursor in the last cell of the column, and then click the Sum icon on the Table Bar.
The + Formula Bar appears with the entry "=sum". + + + Click in the first cell of the series you want to sum up, drag to the final cell, and then release.
$[officename] inserts a formula for calculating the sum of the values in the current column. + + + Press Enter, or click Apply in the Formula bar.
The sum of the values in the current column is entered in the cell. + + + If you enter a different number anywhere in the column, the sum is updated as soon as you click in the last column cell. + Similarly, you can also quickly calculate the sum of a row of numbers. + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp index 09df09cbf5..c3a6e0b33c 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Calculating Complex Formulas in Text Documents -/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -calculating;complex formulas in text -formulas; complex formulas in text -calculating;mean values - -Calculating Complex Formulas in Text Documents + + Calculating Complex Formulas in Text Documents + /text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp + + + +formulas; complex formulas in text + calculating;formulas/mean values +mw reduced "calculating;" entries to one entry +Calculating Complex Formulas in Text Documents -You can use predefined functions in a formula, and then insert the result of the calculation into a text document. -For example, to calculate the mean value of three numbers, do the following: - - -Click in the document where you want to insert the formula, and then press F2. - - -Click the Formula icon, and choose "Mean" from the Statistical Functions list. - - -Type the three numbers, separated by vertical slashes (|). - - -Press Enter. The result is inserted as a field into the document. - - -To edit the formula, double-click the field in the document. - - - - - - - - - + You can use predefined functions in a formula, and then insert the result of the calculation into a text document. + For example, to calculate the mean value of three numbers, do the following: + + + Click in the document where you want to insert the formula, and then press F2. + + + Click the Formula + icon, and choose "Mean" from the Statistical Functions list. + + + Type the three numbers, separated by vertical slashes (|). + + + Press Enter. The result is inserted as a field into the document. + + + To edit the formula, double-click the field in the document. + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp index b325e85e8a..1f07d04bd4 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Displaying the Result of a Table Calculation in a Different Table -/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: fixed #i30737# -dedr: reviewed - - - + + Displaying the Result of a Table Calculation in a Different Table + /text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp + + + calculating;in text tables -tables; performing calculations in + tables; performing calculations in MW reduced "text tables;" to "tables;" -Displaying the Result of a Table Calculation in a Different Table +Displaying the Result of a Table Calculation in a Different Table -You can perform a calculation on cells in one table and display the result in a different table. - - -Open a text document, insert a table with multiple columns and rows, and then insert another table consisting of one cell. - - -Enter numbers into some of the cells of the large table. - - -Place the cursor in the table with the single cell, and then press F2. - - -In the Formula Bar, enter the function that you want to perform, for example, "=SUM". - - -Click in a cell in the larger table that contains a number, press the plus sign (+), and then click in a different cell containing a number. - - -Press Enter. - - -If you want, you can format the table to behave as normal text. Insert the table into a frame, and then anchor the frame as a character. The frame remains anchored to the adjacent text when you insert or delete text. - - - - - - - - - + You can perform a calculation on cells in one table and display the result in a different table. + + + Open a text document, insert a table with multiple columns and rows, and then insert another table consisting of one cell. + + + Enter numbers into some of the cells of the large table. + + + Place the cursor in the table with the single cell, and then press F2. + + + In the Formula Bar, enter the function that you want to perform, for example, =SUM. + + + Click in a cell in the larger table that contains a number, press the plus sign (+), and then click in a different cell containing a number. + + + Press Enter. + + + If you want, you can format the table to behave as normal text. Insert the table into a frame, and then anchor the frame as a character. The frame remains anchored to the adjacent text when you insert or delete text. + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp index b271638863..e3fb1fbe77 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Calculating Across Tables -/text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Calculating Across Tables + /text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp + + + calculating; across multiple text tables -tables;calculating across + tables;calculating across mw changed "text tables;" to "tables;" -Calculating Across Tables +Calculating Across Tables -You can perform calculations that span across more than one table in a text document. - - -Open a text document, insert two tables, and type numbers in a few cells in both tables. - - -Place your cursor in an empty cell in one of the tables. - - -Press F2. - - -In the Formula Bar, enter the function that you want to perform, for example, "=SUM". - - -Click in a cell containing a number, press the plus sign (+), and then click in a different cell containing a number. - - -Press Enter. - - - - - - - - - - + You can perform calculations that span across more than one table in a text document. + + + Open a text document, insert two tables, and type numbers in a few cells in both tables. + + + Place your cursor in an empty cell in one of the tables. + + + Press F2. + + + In the Formula Bar, enter the function that you want to perform, for example, =SUM. + + + Click in a cell containing a number, press the plus sign (+), and then click in a different cell containing a number. + + + Press Enter. + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp index 1e15da0ea0..73d2ef1cc1 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Using Captions -/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp - - - - - - + + Using Captions + /text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp + + + inserting; captions -captions; inserting and editing -editing;captions -objects; captioning -tables; labeling -frames; labeling -charts; labeling -text frames; labeling -draw objects; inserting captions -legends, see also captions - - mw deleted "adding;" - - Using Captions + captions; inserting and editing + editing;captions + objects; captioning + tables; labeling + frames; labeling + charts; labeling + text frames; labeling + draw objects; inserting captions + legends, see also captions +mw deleted "adding;" + + Using Captions - In text documents, you can add continuously numbered captions to graphics, tables, frames, and drawing objects. - You can edit the text and the number ranges for different types of captions. - When you add a caption to a picture or to an object, the object and the caption text are placed together in a new frame. When you add a caption to a table, the caption text is inserted as a paragraph next to the table. When you add a caption to a frame, the caption text is added to the text inside the frame, either before or after the existing text. - To move both the object and the caption, drag the frame that contains these items. To update the caption numbering after you move the frame, press F9. - Defining Captions - - - Select the item that you want to add a caption to. - - - Choose Insert - Caption. - - - Select the options that you want, and then click OK. If you want, you can also enter different text in the Category box, for example "Figure". - - - You can edit caption text directly in the document. - A caption is formatted with the paragraph style that matches the name of the caption Category. For example, if you insert a "Table" caption, the "Table" paragraph style is applied to the caption text. - $[officename] can automatically add a caption when you insert an object, graphic, frame, or table. Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption. - - - - - - - - - - + In text documents, you can add continuously numbered captions to graphics, tables, frames, and drawing objects. + You can edit the text and the number ranges for different types of captions. + When you add a caption to a picture or to an object, the object and the caption text are placed together in a new frame. When you add a caption to a table, the caption text is inserted as a paragraph next to the table. When you add a caption to a frame, the caption text is added to the text inside the frame, either before or after the existing text. + To move both the object and the caption, drag the frame that contains these items. To update the caption numbering after you move the frame, press F9. + To define a caption proceed as follows: + + + Select the item that you want to add a caption to. + + + Choose Insert - Caption. + + + Select the options that you want, and then click OK. If you want, you can also enter different text in the Category + box, for example Figure. + + + You can edit caption text directly in the document. + A caption is formatted with the paragraph style that matches the name of the caption category. For example, if you insert a "Table" caption, the "Table" paragraph style is applied to the caption text. + $[officename] can automatically add a caption when you insert an object, graphic, frame, or table. Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption. + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp index dd083fb563..f394db1d2e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Adding Chapter Numbers to Captions -/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp - - - - - - + + Adding Chapter Numbers to Captions + /text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp + + + captions; adding chapter numbers -objects; captioning automatically -numbering; captions -automatic numbering;of objects -chapter numbers in captions -inserting;chapter numbers in captions - - MW changed "adding;" to "inserting;" - Adding Chapter Numbers to Captions + objects; captioning automatically + numbering; captions + automatic numbering;of objects + chapter numbers in captions + inserting;chapter numbers in captions +MW changed "adding;" to "inserting;" +Adding Chapter Numbers to Captions - You can include chapter numbers in captions. - Ensure that the text in your document is organized by chapters, and that the chapter titles and, if you want, the section titles, use one of the predefined heading paragraph styles. You must also assign a numbering option to the heading paragraph styles. - - - Select the item that you want to add a caption to. - - - Choose Insert - Caption. - - - Select a caption title from the Category box, and select a numbering style in the Numbering box. You also can enter a caption text in this dialog. If you want, enter text in the Caption box. - - - Click Options. - - - In the Level box, select the number of heading levels to include in the chapter number. - - - Type the character that you want to separate the chapter number(s) from the caption number in the Separator box, and then click OK. - - - In the Caption dialog, click OK. - - - $[officename] can automatically add a caption when you insert an object, graphic, or table. Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption. -
- - - AutoCaption dialog - Chapter numbering - -
- - + You can include chapter numbers in captions. + Ensure that the text in your document is organized by chapters, and that the chapter titles and, if you want, the section titles, use one of the predefined heading paragraph styles. You must also assign a numbering option to the heading paragraph styles. + + + Select the item that you want to add a caption to. + + + Choose Insert - Caption. + + + Select a caption title from the Category + box, and select a numbering style in the Numbering + box.
You also can enter a caption text in this dialog. If you want, enter text in the Caption + box. + + + Click Options. + + + In the Level + box, select the number of heading levels to include in the chapter number. + + + Type the character that you want to separate the chapter number(s) from the caption number in the + Separator box, and then click OK. + + + In the Caption dialog, click OK. + + + $[officename] can automatically add a caption when you insert an object, graphic, or table. Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption. +
+ + AutoCaption dialog + Chapter numbering +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp index 202675cfce..a0e73b7f4d 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Creating a Page Style Based on the Current Page -/text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: Screenshot deleted - - - + + Creating a Page Style Based on the Current Page + /text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp + + + headers; inserting -footers; inserting -page styles; changing from selection -new page styles from selection + footers; inserting + page styles; changing from selection + new page styles from selection mw deleted "creating;" -Creating a Page Style Based on the Current Page +Creating a Page Style Based on the Current Page -You can design a page layout and then create a page style based on it. -For example, you can create a page style that displays a particular header, and another page style that displays a different header. - - -Open a new text document, choose Format - Styles and Formatting, and then click the Page Styles icon. - - -Click the New Style from Selection icon and select New Styles from Selection from the submenu. - - -Type a name for the page in the Style name box, and then click OK. - - -Double-click the name in the list to apply the style to the current page. - - -Choose Insert - Header, and choose the new page style from the list. - - -Type the text that you want in the header. Position the cursor into the main text area outside of the header. - - -Choose Insert - Manual Break. - - -In the Type area, select Page break and then select 'Default' from the Style box. - - -Repeat steps 2-6 to create a second custom Page Style with a different header. - - - - - - - - - - + You can design a page layout and then create a page style based on it. + For example, you can create a page style that displays a particular header, and another page style that displays a different header. + + + Open a new text document, choose Format - Styles and Formatting, and then click the Page Styles icon. + + + Click the New Style from Selection icon and select New Styles from Selection from the submenu. + + + Type a name for the page in the Style name + box, and then click OK. + + + Double-click the name in the list to apply the style to the current page. + + + Choose Insert - Header, and choose the new page style from the list. + + + Type the text that you want in the header. Position the cursor into the main text area outside of the header. + + + Choose Insert - Manual Break. + + + In the Type + area, select Page break and then select “Default” from the Style + box. + + + Repeat steps 2-6 to create a second custom page style with a different header. + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp index 4f66d399b9..aae7059d74 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Outline Numbering -/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp - - - + + Outline Numbering + /text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp + + + outlines;numbering -deleting;heading numbers -chapter numbering -headings; numbering -numbering;headings -headings; own paragraph styles -MW changed "removing;..." to "deleting;..." and made "outline numbering" a two level entryOutline Numbering + deleting;heading numbers + chapter numbering + headings; numbering/paragraph styles + numbering;headings +MW changed "removing;..." to "deleting;..." and made "outline numbering" a two level entrymw reduced two "headings;" bookmarks to one entry +Outline Numbering -You can modify the heading hierarchy or assign a level in the hierarchy to a custom paragraph style. You can also add chapter and section numbering to heading paragraph styles. By default, the "Heading 1" paragraph style is at the top of the outline hierarchy. -To add automatic numbering to a heading style: - - -Choose Tools - Outline Numbering, and then click the Numbering tab. - - -In the Paragraph Style box, select the heading style that you want to add chapter numbers to. - - -In the Numbers box, select the numbering style that you want to use, and then click OK. - - -To remove automatic outline numbering from a heading paragraph: - - -Click at the beginning of the text in the heading paragraph, after the number. - - -Press the Backspace key to delete the number. - - -To use a custom paragraph style as a heading: - - -Choose Tools - Outline Numbering, and then click the Numbering tab. - - -Select the custom style in the Paragraph Style box. - - -Click the heading level that you want to assign to the custom paragraph style in the Level list. - - -Click OK. - - - - -mw inserted new link under "Related topics" and deleted "To rearrange the headings in a text document" - + You can modify the heading hierarchy or assign a level in the hierarchy to a custom paragraph style. You can also add chapter and section numbering to heading paragraph styles. By default, the "Heading 1" paragraph style is at the top of the outline hierarchy. + To Add Automatic Numbering to a Heading Style + + + Choose Tools - Outline Numbering, and then click the Numbering + tab. + + + In the Paragraph Style + box, select the heading style that you want to add chapter numbers to. + + + In the + Numbers box, select the numbering style that you want to use, and then click + OK. + + + To Remove Automatic Outline Numbering From a Heading Paragraph + + + Click at the beginning of the text in the heading paragraph, after the number. + + + Press the Backspace key to delete the number. + + + To Use a Custom Paragraph Style as a Heading + + + Choose Tools - Outline Numbering, and then click the Numbering + tab. + + + Select the custom style in the Paragraph Style box. + + + Click the heading level that you want to assign to the custom paragraph style in the + Level list. + + + Click OK. + + + + + mw inserted new link under "Related topics" and deleted "To rearrange the headings in a text document" + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp index 3a747f6904..dec3f49b46 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Conditional Text -/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Conditional Text + /text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp + + + matching conditional text in fields -if-then queries as fields -conditional text; setting up -text; conditional text -defining;conditions + if-then queries as fields + conditional text; setting up + text; conditional text + defining;conditions -Conditional Text +Conditional Text -You can set up fields in your document that display text when a condition that you define is met. For example, you can define the conditional text that is displayed in a series of reminder letters. -Setting up conditional text in this example is a two-part process. First you create a variable, and then you create the condition. -To define a conditional variable: -The first part of the example is to define a variable for the condition statement. - - -Choose Insert - -Fields - Other, and then click the Variables tab. - - -Click "Set variable" in the Type list. - - -Type a name for the variable in the Name box, for example "Reminder". - - -Click "Text" in the Format list. - - -Enter "1" in the Value box, and then click Insert. -The Format list displays a "General" format after you click Insert. - - -To define a condition and the conditional text -The second part of the example is to define the condition that must be met, and to insert a placeholder for displaying the conditional text in your document. - - -Place the cursor where you want to insert the conditional text in your text. - - -Choose Insert - -Fields - Other, and then click the Functions tab. - - -Click "Conditional text" in the Type list. - - -Type Reminder EQ "3" in the Condition box. In other words, the conditional text will be displayed when the variable in the field that you defined in the first part of this example is equal to three. - - -The quotation marks enclosing the "3" indicate that the variable that you defined in the first part of this example is a text string. - - -Type the text that you want to display when the condition is met in the Then box. There is almost no limit to the length of the text that you can enter. You can paste a paragraph into this box. - - -Click Insert, and then click Close. - - -To display the conditional text: -In this example, the conditional text is displayed when the value of the conditional variable is equal to 3. - - -Place your cursor in front of the field that you defined in the first part of this example, and then choose Edit - Fields. - - -Replace the number in the Value box with 3, and then click Close. - - -If the field does not automatically update, press F9. - - -
- - - -List of conditional operators -
- - + You can set up fields in your document that display text when a condition that you define is met. For example, you can define the conditional text that is displayed in a series of reminder letters. + Setting up conditional text in this example is a two-part process. First you create a variable, and then you create the condition. + To Define a Conditional Variable + The first part of the example is to define a variable for the condition statement. + + + Choose Insert - Fields - Other, and then click the Variables tab. + + + Click "Set variable" in the Type + list. + + + Type a name for the variable in the Name box, for example Reminder. + + + Click "Text" in the + Format list. + + + Enter 1 in the Value box, and then click Insert.
The Format list now displays a "General" format. + + + To Define a Condition and the Conditional Text + The second part of the example is to define the condition that must be met, and to insert a placeholder for displaying the conditional text in your document. + + + Place the cursor where you want to insert the conditional text in your text. + + + Choose Insert - Fields - Other, and then click the Functions tab. + + + Click "Conditional text" in the Type + list. + + + Type Reminder EQ "3" in the Condition + box. In other words, the conditional text will be displayed when the variable in the field that you defined in the first part of this example is equal to three. + The quotation marks enclosing the "3" indicate that the variable that you defined in the first part of this example is a text string. + + + + + Type the text that you want to display when the condition is met in the Then box. There is almost no limit to the length of the text that you can enter. You can paste a paragraph into this box. + + + Click Insert, and then click Close. + + + To Display the Conditional Text + In this example, the conditional text is displayed when the value of the conditional variable is equal to 3. + + + Place your cursor in front of the field that you defined in the first part of this example, and then choose Edit - Fields. + + + Replace the number in the Value + box with 3, and then click + Close. + + + If the field does not automatically update, press F9. + + +
+ + + + List of conditional operators +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp index c8f2907c0b..394121272b 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Conditional Text for Page Counts -/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Conditional Text for Page Counts + /text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp + + + page counts -conditional text;page counts + conditional text;page counts -Conditional Text for Page Counts +Conditional Text for Page Counts -You can create a conditional text field that displays the word "pages" instead of "page" in conjunction with a page count field if your document contains more than one page. - - -Place the cursor in your document where you want to insert the page count. - - -Choose Insert - Field - Page Count, and then enter a space. - - -Choose Insert - Field - Other, and then click the Functions tab. - - -Click "Conditional text" in the Type list. - - -Type "Page > 1" in the Condition box. - - -Type "Pages" in the Then box. - - -Type "Page" in the Otherwise box. - - -Click Insert, and then click Close. - - - - - - - - + You can create a conditional text field that displays the word "pages" instead of "page" in conjunction with a page count field if your document contains more than one page. + + + Place the cursor in your document where you want to insert the page count. + + + Choose Insert - Fields - Page Count, and then enter a space. + + + Choose Insert - Fields - Other, and then click the Functions tab. + + + Click "Conditional text" in the Type + list. + + + Type Page > 1 in the Condition box. + + + Type Pages in the Then box. + + + Type Page in the Else box. + + + Click Insert, and then click Close. + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp index eaffb4defa..e7148912da 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Removing Words From a User-Defined Dictionary -/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Removing Words From a User-Defined Dictionary + /text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp + + + user-defined dictionaries; removing words from -custom dictionaries; removing words from -deleting;words in user-defined dictionaries + custom dictionaries; removing words from + deleting;words in user-defined dictionaries MW changed "removing;..." to "deleting;..." -Removing Words From a User-Defined Dictionary +Removing Words From a User-Defined Dictionary - - -Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids. - - -Select the user-defined dictionary that you want to edit in the User-defined list, and then click Edit. - - -Select the word that you want to delete in the Word list, and then click Delete. - - - - - - + + + Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids. + + + Select the user-defined dictionary that you want to edit in the User-defined + list, and then click Edit. + + + Select the word that you want to delete in the Word list, and then click Delete. + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/dragdroptext.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/dragdroptext.xhp index 3c1b51883c..7d1a776354 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/dragdroptext.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/dragdroptext.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Moving and Copying Text in Documents -/text/swriter/guide/dragdroptext.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -text sections; moving and copying -sections;moving and copying -moving; text sections -copying; text sections -pasting;cut/copied text sections -mouse;moving and copying text -mw added "pasting;" -Moving and Copying Text in Documents + + Moving and Copying Text in Documents + /text/swriter/guide/dragdroptext.xhp + + + +sections;moving and copying + moving; text sections + copying; text sections + pasting;cut/copied text sections + mouse;moving and copying text +mw deleted "text sections;" +Moving and Copying Text in Documents - - -Select the text that you want to move or copy. - - -Do one of the following: - - - - -To move the selected text, drag the text to a different location in the document and release. While you drag, the mouse pointer changes to include a gray box. - -Mouse cursor moving data + + + Select the text that you want to move or copy. + + + Do one of the following: + To move the selected text, drag the text to a different location in the document and release. While you drag, the mouse pointer changes to include a gray box.
+Mouse cursor moving data - - -To copy the selected text, hold down Command -Ctrl while you drag. The mouse pointer changes to include a plus sign (+). - -Mouse cursor copying data + To copy the selected text, hold down Command +Ctrl while you drag. The mouse pointer changes to include a plus sign (+).
+Mouse cursor copying data - - -
- - - - - -
- - + + +
+ + + + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp index 6608cdf0df..9d30a9a299 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Alternating Page Styles on Odd and Even Pages -/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Alternating Page Styles on Odd and Even Pages + /text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp + + + page styles; left and right pages -blank pages with alternating page styles -empty page with alternating page styles -pages; left and right pages -formatting; even/odd pages -title pages; page styles -First Page page style -Left Page page style -right pages -even/odd pages;formatting + blank pages with alternating page styles + empty page with alternating page styles + pages; left and right pages + formatting; even/odd pages + title pages; page styles + First Page page style + Left Page page style + right pages + even/odd pages;formatting MW made "empty pages;..." and "blank pages;.." to one level entries. -Alternating Page Styles on Odd and Even Pages +Alternating Page Styles on Odd and Even Pages - - - - -Icon +
+ + + +Icon - - -$[officename] can automatically apply alternating page styles on even (left) and odd pages (right) in your document. For example, you can use page styles to display different headers and footers on even and odd pages. The current page style is displayed in the Status Bar at the bottom of the workplace. - - -
+ + + $[officename] can automatically apply alternating page styles on even (left) and odd pages (right) in your document. For example, you can use page styles to display different headers and footers on even and odd pages. The current page style is displayed in the Status Bar at the bottom of the workplace. + + + - - -Choose Format - Styles and Formatting, and then click the Page Styles icon. - - -In the list of page styles, right-click "Left Page" and choose Modify. - - -Click the Organizer tab. - - -Select "Right Page" in the Next Style box, and then click OK. - - -In the list of page styles, right-click "Right Page" and choose Modify. - - -Select "Left Page" in the Next Style box, and then click OK. - - -Go to the first page in your document, and double-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles in the Styles and Formatting window. - - - - -To add a header to one of the page styles, choose Insert - Header, and choose the page style that you want to add the header to. In the header frame, type the text that you want to use as the header. - - -To add a footer to one of the page styles, choose Insert - Footer, and choose the page style that you want to add the footer to. In the footer frame, type the text that you want to use as a footer. - - -If you do not want to have a header or a footer on the title page of your document, apply the "First Page" style to the title page. -Suppressing printout of empty pages -If two even or two odd pages directly follow each other in your document, Writer will insert an empty page by default. You can suppress those automatically generated empty pages from printing and from exporting to PDF. - - -Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print. - - -Remove the check mark from Print automatically inserted blank pages. - - -
- - -Insert Break dialog -
- - + To Set Up Alternating Page Styles + + + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting, and then click the Page Styles + icon. + + + In the list of page styles, right-click "Left Page" and choose Modify. + + + Click the Organizer tab. + + + Select "Right Page" in the Next Style box, and then click OK. + + + In the list of page styles, right-click "Right Page" and choose Modify. + + + Select "Left Page" in the Next Style box, and then click OK. + + + Go to the first page in your document, and double-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles in the Styles and Formatting window. + + + To add a header to one of the page styles, choose + Insert - Header, and choose the page style that you want to add the header to. In the header frame, type the text that you want to use as the header. + To add a footer to one of the page styles, choose + Insert - Footer, and choose the page style that you want to add the footer to. In the footer frame, type the text that you want to use as a footer. + If you do not want to have a header or a footer on the title page of your document, apply the "First Page" style to the title page. + To Suppress the Printout of Empty Pages + If two even or two odd pages directly follow each other in your document, Writer will insert an empty page by default. You can suppress those automatically generated empty pages from printing and from exporting to PDF. + + + Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print. + + + Remove the check mark from Print automatically inserted blank pages. + + +
+ + + Insert Break dialog +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/field_convert.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/field_convert.xhp index c1d8ec0c61..a412feb673 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/field_convert.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/field_convert.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Converting a Field into Text -/text/swriter/guide/field_convert.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Converting a Field into Text + /text/swriter/guide/field_convert.xhp + + + fields; converting into text -converting;fields, into text -replacing;fields, by text -changing;fields, into text + converting;fields, into text + replacing;fields, by text + changing;fields, into text -Converting a Field into Text +Converting a Field into Text -You can change a field to regular text, so that it is no longer updated. After you change a field to text, you cannot change the text back into a field. - - -Select the field and choose Edit - Cut. - - -Choose Edit - Paste Special. - - -Click "Unformatted text" in the Selection list, and then click OK. - - - - -Paste Special - - + You can change a field to regular text, so that it is no longer updated. After you change a field to text, you cannot change the text back into a field. + + + Select the field and choose Edit - Cut. + + + Choose Edit - Paste Special. + + + Click "Unformatted text" in the + Selection list, and then click + OK. + + + + + Paste Special + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp index 2c6a765336..59cd127aa3 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -About Fields -/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + About Fields + /text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp + + + fields;updating/viewing -updating;fields -Help tips;fields -properties;fields -disabling;field highlighting -changing;field shadings -viewing;fields + updating;fields + Help tips;fields + properties;fields + disabling;field highlighting + changing;field shadings + viewing;fields mw changed "fields;..." -About Fields +About Fields -Fields are used for data that changes in a document, such as the current date or the total number of pages in a document. -Viewing Fields -Fields consist of a field name and the field content. To switch the field display between the field name or the field content, choose View - Field Names. -To display or hide field highlighting in a document, choose View - Field Shadings. To permanently disable this feature, choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Appearance, and clear the check box in front of Field shadings. -To change the color of field shadings, choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Appearance, locate the Field shadings option, and then select a different color in the Color setting box. -Field Properties -Most field types in a document, including database fields, store and display variable values. -The following field types execute an action when you click the field: - - - -Field Type - - -Property - - - - -Placeholder - - -Opens a dialog to insert the object for which the placeholder was set. - - - - -Insert Reference - - -Moves the mouse pointer to the reference. - - - - -Run macro - - -Runs a macro. - - - - -Input Field - - -Opens a dialog to edit the contents of the field. - - -
+ Fields are used for data that changes in a document, such as the current date or the total number of pages in a document. + Viewing Fields + Fields consist of a field name and the field content. To switch the field display between the field name or the field content, choose View - Field Names. + To display or hide field highlighting in a document, choose View - Field Shadings. To permanently disable this feature, choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Appearance, and clear the check box in front of Field shadings. + To change the color of field shadings, choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Appearance, locate the Field shadings option, and then select a different color in the Color setting + box. + Field Properties + Most field types in a document, including database fields, store and display variable values. + The following field types execute an action when you click the field: + + + + Field Type + + + Property + + + + + Placeholder + + + Opens a dialog to insert the object for which the placeholder was set. + + + + + Insert Reference + + + Moves the mouse pointer to the reference. + + + + + Run macro + + + Runs a macro. + + + + + Input Field + + + Opens a dialog to edit the contents of the field. + + +
-Placeholder, hidden text, insert reference, variable, database, and user-defined fields display a help tip when you rest the mouse pointer over the field in a document. To enable this feature, ensure that the Extended Tips option is selected in the Help menu. -Updating Fields -To update all of the fields in a document, press F9, or choose Edit - Select All, and then press F9. -To update a field that was inserted from a database, select the field, and then press F9. - - - - - - - - - + Placeholder, hidden text, insert reference, variable, database, and user-defined fields display a help tip when you rest the mouse pointer over the field in a document. To enable this feature, ensure that the Extended Tipsoption (What's This?) is selected in the Help menu. + Updating Fields + To update all of the fields in a document, press F9, or choose Edit - Select All, and then press F9. + To update a field that was inserted from a database, select the field, and then press F9. + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp index fa77ce2c4d..69df26b4a2 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Inserting a Fixed or Variable Date Field -/text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Inserting a Fixed or Variable Date Field + /text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp + + + inserting;date fields -dates;inserting -date fields;fixed/variable -fixed dates -variable dates + dates;inserting + date fields;fixed/variable + fixed dates + variable dates -Inserting a Fixed or Variable Date Field +Inserting a Fixed or Variable Date Field -You can insert the current date as a field that updates each time you open the document, or as a field that does not update. - - -Choose Insert - Fields - Other and click the Document tab. - - -Click 'Date' in the Type list and do one of the following: - - - - -To insert the date as a field that updates each time you open the document, click 'Date' in the Select list. - - - - -To insert the date as a field that does not update, click 'Date (fixed)' in the Select list. - - - - - - - - + You can insert the current date as a field that updates each time you open the document, or as a field that does not update. + + + Choose Insert - Fields - Other and click the Document tab. + + + Click “Date” in the Type + list and do one of the following: + To insert the date as a field that updates each time you open the document, click ”Date” in the Select + list. + To insert the date as a field that does not update, click “Date (fixed)” in the Select + list. + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp index e1f2fc811c..8c19afc6cb 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Adding Input Fields -/text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp - - - - - - + + Adding Input Fields + /text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp + + + text; input fields -fields; input fields in text -input fields in text -inserting;input fields - - MW deleted "adding;" - Adding Input Fields + fields; input fields in text + input fields in text + inserting;input fields +MW deleted "adding;" +Adding Input Fields - An input field is a variable that you can click in a document to open a dialog where you can edit the variable. - - - Choose Insert - Fields - Other and click the Functions tab. - - - Click Input field in the Type list. - - - Click Insert and type the text for the variable. - - - Click OK. - - - To quickly open all input fields in a document for editing, press Ctrl+Shift+F9. - - - - + An input field is a variable that you can click in a document to open a dialog where you can edit the variable. + + + Choose Insert - Fields - Other + and click the Functions tab. + + + Click “Input field”in the Type list. + + + Click Insert + and type the text for the variable. + + + Click OK. + + + To quickly open all input fields in a document for editing, press Ctrl+Shift+F9. + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp index a4ad8be6ed..f846f8803c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Querying User Data in Fields or Conditions -/text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Querying User Data in Fields or Conditions + /text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp + + + fields; user data -user data; querying -conditions; user data fields -hiding;text, from specific users -text; hiding from specific users, with conditions -user variables in conditions/fields + user data; querying + conditions; user data fields + hiding;text, from specific users + text; hiding from specific users, with conditions + user variables in conditions/fields -Querying User Data in Fields or Conditions +Querying User Data in Fields or Conditions -You can access and compare some user data from conditions or fields. For example, you can compare user data with the following operators: - - - -Operator - - -Meaning - - - - -== or EQ - - -equals - - - - -!= or NEQ - - -is not equal to - - -
+ You can access and compare some user data from conditions or fields. For example, you can compare user data with the following operators: + + + + Operator + + + Meaning + + + + + == or EQ + + + equals + + + + + != or NEQ + + + is not equal to + + +
-If you want, you can use a condition to hide specific text in your document from a specific user. - - -Select the text in the document that you want to hide. - - -Choose Insert - Section. - - -In the Hide area, select the Hide check box. - - -In the With Condition box, type user_lastname == "Doe", where "Doe" is the last name of the user that you want to hide the text from. - - -Click Insert and then save the document. - - -The name of the hidden section can still be seen in the Navigator. -The following table is a list of the user variables that you can access when defining a condition or a field: - - - -User variables - - -Meaning - - - - -user_firstname - - -First name - - - - -user_lastname - - -Last name - - - - -user_initials - - -Initials - - - - -user_company - - -Company - - - - -user_street - - -Street - - - - -user_country - - -Country - - - - -user_zipcode - - -Zip Code - - - - -user_city - - -City - - - - -user_title - - -Title - - - - -user_position - - -Position - - - - -user_tel_work - - -Business telephone number - - - - -user_tel_home - - -Home telephone number - - - - -user_fax - - -Fax number - - - - -user_email - - -E-mail address - - - - -user_state - - -State - - -
+ If you want, you can use a condition to hide specific text in your document from a specific user. + + + Select the text in the document that you want to hide. + + + Choose Insert - Section. + + + In the Hide + area, select the Hide check box. + + + In the With Condition box, type user_lastname == "Doe", where "Doe" is the last name of the user that you want to hide the text from. + + + Click Insert and then save the document. + + + The name of the hidden section can still be seen in the Navigator. + The following table is a list of the user variables that you can access when defining a condition or a field: + + + + User variables + + + Meaning + + + + + user_firstname + + + First name + + + + + user_lastname + + + Last name + + + + + user_initials + + + Initials + + + + + user_company + + + Company + + + + + user_street + + + Street + + + + + user_country + + + Country + + + + + user_zipcode + + + Zip Code + + + + + user_city + + + City + + + + + user_title + + + Title + + + + + user_position + + + Position + + + + + user_tel_work + + + Business telephone number + + + + + user_tel_home + + + Home telephone number + + + + + user_fax + + + Fax number + + + + + user_email + + + E-mail address + + + + + user_state + + + State + + +
-
- - - -List of operators -
- - +
+ + + + List of operators +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/finding.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/finding.xhp index 58bfc3e544..e4e8c6f735 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/finding.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/finding.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Finding and Replacing in Writer -text/swriter/guide/finding.xhp - - - -
+ + Finding and Replacing in Writer + text/swriter/guide/finding.xhp + + + +
finding; text/text formats/styles/objects -replacing; text and text formats -styles;finding -searching, see also finding -text formats; finding -formats; finding and replacing -searching; formats -objects;finding by Navigator -Asian languages;search options -3. mw added 2 index entries and changed "finding;"2. mw copied 6 index entries from shared/01/02100300.xhp. Then made one entry of two "finding;" entries, one entry of two "replacing;" entries and one entry of two "formats;" entries1. mw copied 5 entries from shared/01/02100000.xhp and then made one entry of two "finding;" entries.Finding and Replacing in Writer + replacing; text and text formats + styles;finding + searching, see also finding + text formats; finding + formats; finding and replacing + searching; formats + objects;finding by Navigator + Asian languages;search options +3. mw added 2 index entries and changed "finding;"2. mw copied 6 index entries from shared/01/02100300.xhp. Then made one entry of two "finding;" entries, one entry of two "replacing;" entries and one entry of two "formats;" entries1. mw copied 5 entries from shared/01/02100000.xhp and then made one entry of two "finding;" entries. +Finding and Replacing in Writer -In text documents you can find words, formatting, styles, and more. You can navigate from one result to the next, or you can highlight all results at once, then apply another format or replace the words by other text. -
-The Find & Replace dialog -To find text within the whole document, open the Find & Replace dialog without any active text selection. If you want to search only a part of your document, first select that part of text, then open the Find & Replace dialog. -Finding text - - -Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog. - - -Enter the text to find in the Search for text box. - - -Either click Find or Find All. - - -When you click Find, Writer will show you the next text that is equal to your entry. You can watch and edit the text, then click Find again to advance to the next found text. - - -If you closed the dialog, you can press a key combination (Ctrl+Shift+F) to find the next text without opening the dialog. - - -Alternatively, you can use the icons at the lower right of the document to navigate to the next text or to any other object in the document. - - -When you click Find All, Writer selects all text that is equal to your entry. Now you can for example set all found text to bold, or apply a Character Style to all at once. -Replacing text -Unlike searching text, replacing text cannot be restricted to the current selection only. - - -Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog. - - -Enter the text to search in the Search for text box. - - -Enter the text to replace the found text in the Replace with text box. - - -Either click Replace or Replace All. - - -When you click Replace, Writer will search the whole document for the text in the Search for box, starting at the current cursor position. When text is found, Writer highlights the text and waits for your response. Click Replace to replace the highlighted text in the document with the text in the Replace with text box. Click Find to advance to the next found text without replacing the current selection. -When you click Replace All, Writer replaces all text that matches your entry. -Finding styles -You want to find all text in your document to which a certain Paragraph Style is assigned, for example the "Heading 2" style. - - -Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog. - - -Click More Options to expand the dialog. - - -Check Search for Styles. -The Search for text box now is a list box, where you can select any of the Paragraph Styles that are applied in the current document. - - -Select the style to search for, then click Find or Find All. - - -Finding formats -You want to find all text in your document to which a certain direct character formatting is assigned. -Finding formats only finds direct character attributes, it does not find attributes applied as part of a style. - - -Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog. - - -Click More Options to expand the dialog. - - -Click the Format button. - - - - -Click Find or Find All. - - -More options -The similarity search can find text that is almost the same as your search text. You can set the number of characters that are allowed to differ. - - -Check the Similarity search option and optionally click the ... button to change the settings. (Setting all three numbers to 1 works fine for English text.) - - -When you have enabled Asian language support under Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages, the Find & Replace dialog offers options to search Asian text. -The Navigator - - -Choose Edit - Navigator to open the Navigator window. - - -The Navigator is the main tool for finding and selecting objects. You can also use the Navigator to move and arrange chapters, providing an outline view to your document. -Use the Navigator for inserting objects, links and references within the same document or from other open documents. See the Navigator guide for more information. - - -Click the icon with the blue circle at the bottom right part of your document to open the small Navigation window. - - -Use the small Navigation window to quickly jump to the next object or find the next text in your document. -
- - - - - - -
- - + In text documents you can find words, formatting, styles, and more. You can navigate from one result to the next, or you can highlight all results at once, then apply another format or replace the words by other text. +
+ The Find & Replace dialog + To find text within the whole document, open the Find & Replace dialog without any active text selection. If you want to search only a part of your document, first select that part of text, then open the Find & Replace dialog. + To Find Text + + + Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog. + + + Enter the text to find in the Search for text box. + + + Either click Find or Find All. + + + When you click Find, Writer will show you the next text that is equal to your entry. You can watch and edit the text, then click Find again to advance to the next found text. + If you closed the dialog, you can press a key combination (Ctrl+Shift+F) to find the next text without opening the dialog. + Alternatively, you can use the icons at the lower right of the document to navigate to the next text or to any other object in the document. + When you click Find All, Writer selects all text that is equal to your entry. Now you can for example set all found text to bold, or apply a character style to all at once. + To Replace Text + Unlike searching text, replacing text cannot be restricted to the current selection only. + + + Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog. + + + Enter the text to search in the Search for text box. + + + Enter the text to replace the found text in the Replace with text box. + + + Either click Replace or Replace All. + + + When you click Replace, Writer will search the whole document for the text in the Search for box, starting at the current cursor position. When text is found, Writer highlights the text and waits for your response. Click Replace to replace the highlighted text in the document with the text in the Replace with text box. Click Find to advance to the next found text without replacing the current selection. + When you click Replace All, Writer replaces all text that matches your entry. + To Find Styles + You want to find all text in your document to which a certain Paragraph Style is assigned, for example the "Heading 2" style. + + + Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog. + + + Click More Options to expand the dialog. + + + Check Search for Styles.
The Search for text box now is a list box, where you can select any of the Paragraph Styles that are applied in the current document. + + + Select the style to search for, then click Find or Find All. + + + To Find Formats + You want to find all text in your document to which a certain direct character formatting is assigned. + Finding formats only finds direct character attributes, it does not find attributes applied as part of a style. + + + Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog. + + + Click More Options to expand the dialog. + + + Click the Format button. + + + + + Click Find or Find All. + + + More options + The similarity search can find text that is almost the same as your search text. You can set the number of characters that are allowed to differ. + Check the Similarity search option and optionally click the ... button to change the settings. (Setting all three numbers to 1 works fine for English text.) + When you have enabled Asian language support under Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages, the Find & Replace dialog offers options to search Asian text. + The Navigator + The Navigator is the main tool for finding and selecting objects. You can also use the Navigator to move and arrange chapters, providing an outline view to your document. + Choose Edit - Navigator to open the Navigator window. + Use the Navigator for inserting objects, links and references within the same document or from other open documents. See the Navigator guide for more information. + Click the icon with the blue circle at the bottom right part of your document to open the small Navigation window. + Use the small Navigation window to quickly jump to the next object or find the next text in your document. +
+ + + + + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp index 6a3f21b58e..a4e8444107 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Inserting Page Numbers of Continuation Pages -/text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp - - - + + Inserting Page Numbers of Continuation Pages + /text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp + + + pages; continuation pages -next page number in footers -continuation pages -page numbers; continuation pages + next page number in footers + continuation pages + page numbers; continuation pages -Inserting Page Numbers of Continuation Pages +Inserting Page Numbers of Continuation Pages -You can easily insert the page number of the next page in a footer by using a field. -The page number is only displayed if the following page exists. - - -Choose Insert - Footer and select the page style that you want to add the footer to. - - -Place the cursor in the footer and choose Insert - Fields - Other. - - -In the Fields dialog, click the Document tab. - - -Click 'Page' in the Type list and 'Next page' in the Select list. - - -Click a numbering style in the Format list. -If you select 'Text' in the Format list, only the text that you enter in the Value box is displayed in the field. - - -Click Insert to insert the field with the page number. - - - - - - + You can easily insert the page number of the next page in a footer by using a field. + The page number is only displayed if the following page exists. + + + Choose Insert - Footer and select the page style that you want to add the footer to. + + + Place the cursor in the footer and choose Insert - Fields - Other. + + + In the Fields dialog, click the Document tab. + + + Click 'Page' in the Type list and 'Next page' in the Select list. + + + Click a numbering style in the Format + list. + If you select 'Text' in the Format list, only the text that you enter in the Value box is displayed in the field. + + + Click Insert to insert the field with the page number. + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp index 1208e21487..47d80b2364 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Inserting Page Numbers in Footers -/text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Inserting Page Numbers in Footers + /text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp + + + footers; with page numbers -pages; numbers and count of -page numbers; footers -numbering;pages + pages; numbers and count of + page numbers; footers + numbering;pages -Inserting Page Numbers in Footers +Inserting Page Numbers in Footers - - -Choose Insert - Footer and select the page style that you want to add the footer to. - - -Choose Insert - Fields - Page Number. - - -If you want, you can align the Page Number field as you would text. -You can also add a page count to the footer, for example, in the form "Page 9 of 12": - - -Click in front of the Page Number field and type "Page ", click after the field, enter a space and then type "of ". - - -Choose Insert - Fields - Page Count. - - - - - - - - - - + You can easily insert a page number field in the footer of your document. You can also add a page count to the footer, for example, in the form "Page 9 of 12" + To Insert a Page Number + + + Choose Insert - Footer and select the page style that you want to add the footer to. + + + Choose Insert - Fields - Page Number. + + + If you want, you can align the page number field as you would text. + To Additionally Add a Page Count + + + Click in front of the page number field, type Page and enter a space; click after the field, enter a space and then type of and enter another space. + + + Choose Insert - Fields - Page Count. + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp index 1e1b9c6e47..8eabbfd362 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ - * $Revision: 1.8 $ + * $Revision: 1.10 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,100 +35,94 @@ - -Inserting and Editing Footnotes or Endnotes -/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp - - - + + Inserting and Editing Footnotes or Endnotes + /text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp + + + endnotes;inserting and editing -inserting;footnotes/endnotes -deleting;footnotes -editing;footnotes/endnotes -organizing;footnotes -footnotes; inserting and editing + inserting;footnotes/endnotes + deleting;footnotes + editing;footnotes/endnotes + organizing;footnotes + footnotes; inserting and editing MW deleted "removing;.." -Inserting and Editing Footnotes or Endnotes +Inserting and Editing Footnotes or Endnotes -Footnotes reference more information about a topic at the bottom of a page and endnotes reference information at the end of the document. $[officename] automatically numbers the footnotes and endnotes. -To insert a footnote or endnote: - - -Click in your document where you want to place the anchor of the note. - - -Choose Insert - Footnote/Endnote. - - -In the Numbering area, select the format that you want to use. If you select Character, click the browse button (...) and select the character that you want to use for the footnote. - - -In the Type area, select Footnote or Endnote. - - -Click OK. - - -Type the note. - - - - - - -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} + Footnotes reference more information about a topic at the bottom of a page and endnotes reference information at the end of the document. $[officename] automatically numbers the footnotes and endnotes. + To Insert a Footnote or Endnote + + + Click in your document where you want to place the anchor of the note. + + + Choose Insert - Footnote/Endnote. + + + In the Numbering + area, select the format that you want to use. If you select Character, click the browse button (...) and select the character that you want to use for the footnote. + + + In the Type + area, select Footnote + or Endnote. + + + Click OK. + + + Type the note. + + +
+ + + +Icon - - -You can also insert footnotes by clicking the Insert Footnote Directly icon on the Insert toolbar. - - -
+ + + You can also insert footnotes by clicking the Insert Footnote Directly icon on the Insert toolbar. + + + -Editing Footnotes or Endnotes - - -To edit the text of a footnote or endnote, click in the note, or click the anchor for the note in the text. - - - - - - -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} - - - -The mouse pointer changes to a hand when you rest it over a footnote or endnote anchor in your document. - - -
- - - -To change the format of a footnote, click in the footnote, press F11 to open the Styles and Formatting window, right-click "Footnote" in the list, and then choose Modify. - - - - -To jump from the footnote or endnote text to the note anchor in the text, press PageUp. - - -To edit the numbering properties of a footnote or endnote anchor, click in front of the anchor, and choose Edit - Footnote/Endnote. - - -To change the formatting that $[officename] applies to footnotes and endnotes, choose Tools - Footnotes/Endnotes. - - -To edit the properties of the text area for footnotes or endnotes, choose Format - Page, and then click the Footnote tab. - - - - -To remove a footnote, delete the footnote anchor in the text. - - - - - - + To Edit a Footnote or Endnote + + + The mouse pointer changes to a hand when you rest it over a footnote or endnote anchor in your document. + + + + + To edit the text of a footnote or endnote, click in the note, or click the anchor for the note in the text. + + + To change the format of a footnote, click in the footnote, press F11 to open the Styles and Formatting window, right-click "Footnote" in the list, and then choose Modify. + + + To jump from the footnote or endnote text to the note anchor in the text, press PageUp. + + + + + To edit the numbering properties of a footnote or endnote anchor, click in front of the anchor, and choose Edit - Footnote/Endnote. + + + To change the formatting that $[officename] applies to footnotes and endnotes, choose Tools - Footnotes/Endnotes. + + + To edit the properties of the text area for footnotes or endnotes, choose Format - Page, and then click the Footnote tab. + + + To remove a footnote, delete the footnote anchor in the text. + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp index 985efbf1a1..7f55f912f4 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Spacing Between Footnotes -/text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Spacing Between Footnotes + /text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp + + + spacing; endnotes/footnotes -endnotes; spacing -footnotes; spacing -borders;for footnotes/endnotes -lines;footnotes/endnotes + endnotes; spacing + footnotes; spacing + borders;for footnotes/endnotes + lines;footnotes/endnotes -Spacing Between Footnotes +Spacing Between Footnotes -If you want to increase the spacing between footnote or endnote texts, you can add a top and bottom border to the corresponding paragraph style. - - -Click in a footnote or endnote. - - -Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. - - -Right-click the Paragraph Style that you want to modify, for example, "Footnote", and choose Modify. - - -Click the Borders tab. - - -In the Default area, click the Set Top and Bottom Borders Only icon. - - -In the Line area, click a line in the Style list. - - -Select "White" in the Color box. If the background of the page is not white, select the color that best matches the background color. - - -In the Spacing to contents area, clear the Synchronize check box. - - -Enter a value in the Top and Bottom boxes. - - -Click OK. - - - - -Format - Paragraph - Borders - - + If you want to increase the spacing between footnote or endnote texts, you can add a top and bottom border to the corresponding paragraph style. + + + Click in a footnote or endnote. + + + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. + + + Right-click the Paragraph Style that you want to modify, for example, "Footnote", and choose Modify. + + + Click the Borders tab. + + + In the Default + area, click the Set Top and Bottom Borders Only icon. + + + In the Line area, click a line in the Style + list. + + + Select "White" in the Color + box. If the background of the page is not white, select the color that best matches the background color. + + + In the Spacing to contents area, clear the Synchronize check box. + + + Enter a value in the Top + and Bottom + boxes. + + + Click OK. + + + + + Format - Paragraph - Borders + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/form_letters_main.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/form_letters_main.xhp index bc284243dc..40202adca5 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/form_letters_main.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/form_letters_main.xhp @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ - * $Revision: 1.10 $ + * $Revision: 1.8 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ To create a form letter, you need a text document that contains fields for address data, and an address database. Then you combine or merge the address data and the text document to either print the letters or send them by e-mail. If the document is in HTML format, any embedded or linked images will not be sent with the e-mail. The Mail Merge Wizard helps you to create form letters. - To create a form letter + To create a form letter Choose Tools - Mail Merge Wizard. @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ Select Start from a template, and click the Browse button. - You see the Templates dialog. + You see the New dialog. Select Business Correspondence in the left list, and then Modern letter in the right list. Click OK to close the Templates dialog, and click Next in the wizard.removed the next two paras diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp index 94dab774e1..66136de433 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Master Documents and Subdocuments -/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp - - - + + Master Documents and Subdocuments + /text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp + + + master documents;properties -subdocuments;properties -central documents -subsidiary documents -documents; master documents and subdocuments -styles;master documents -Mw made "master documents" and "subdocuments" a two level entry, deleted "references;" and "bookmarks;" and added a new entry and shifted "Navigator;" and "indexes;" to the file globaldoc_howtos.xhpMaster Documents and Subdocuments -MW: This file was split into globaldoc.xhp (concepts) and globaldoc_howtos.xhp (procedures)A master document lets you manage large documents, such as a book with many chapters. The master document can be seen as a container for individual %PRODUCTNAME Writer files. The individual files are called subdocuments. -Characteristics of Master Documents - - -When you print a master document, the contents of all subdocuments, indexes, and any text that you entered are printed. - - -You can create a table of contents and index in the master document for all of the subdocuments. - - -Styles that are used in subdocuments, such as new paragraph styles, are automatically imported into the master document. - - -When viewing the master document, styles that are already present in the master document take precedence over styles with the same name that are imported from subdocuments. - - -Subdocuments never get changed by changes made to the master document. - - -When you add a document to a master document or create a new subdocument, a link is created in the master document. You cannot edit the content of a subdocument directly in the master document, but you can use the Navigator to open any subdocument for edit. -Example of using styles -A master document master.odm consists of some text and links to the subdocuments sub1.odt and sub2.odt. In each subdocument a new paragraph style with the same name Style1 is defined and used, and the subdocuments are saved. -When you save the master document, the styles from the subdocuments are imported into the master document. First, the new style Style1 from the sub1.odt is imported. Next, the new styles from sub2.odt will be imported, but as Style1 now already is present in the master document, this style from sub2.odt will not be imported. -In the master document you now see the new style Style1 from the first subdocument. All Style1 paragraphs in the master document will be shown using the Style1 attributes from the first subdocument. However, the second subdocument by itself will not be changed. You see the Style1 paragraphs from the second subdocument with different attributes, depending whether you open the sub2.odt document by itself or as part of the master document. -To avoid confusion, use the same document template for the master document and its subdocuments. This happens automatically when you create the master document and its subdocuments from an existing document with headings, using the command File - Send - Create Master Document. -
- - -Navigator in master mode -
- - + subdocuments;properties + central documents + subsidiary documents + documents; master documents and subdocuments + styles;master documents +Mw made "master documents" and "subdocuments" a two level entry, deleted "references;" and "bookmarks;" and added a new entry and shifted "Navigator;" and "indexes;" to the file globaldoc_howtos.xhp +Master Documents and Subdocuments +MW: This file was split into globaldoc.xhp (concepts) and globaldoc_howtos.xhp (procedures) +A master document lets you manage large documents, such as a book with many chapters. The master document can be seen as a container for individual %PRODUCTNAME Writer files. The individual files are called subdocuments. + Characteristics of Master Documents + + + When you print a master document, the contents of all subdocuments, indexes, and any text that you entered are printed. + + + You can create a table of contents and index in the master document for all of the subdocuments. + + + Styles that are used in subdocuments, such as new paragraph styles, are automatically imported into the master document. + + + When viewing the master document, styles that are already present in the master document take precedence over styles with the same name that are imported from subdocuments. + + + Subdocuments never get changed by changes made to the master document. + + + When you add a document to a master document or create a new subdocument, a link is created in the master document. You cannot edit the content of a subdocument directly in the master document, but you can use the Navigator to open any subdocument for edit. + Example of Using Styles + A master document master.odm consists of some text and links to the subdocuments sub1.odt and sub2.odt. In each subdocument a new paragraph style with the same name Style1 is defined and used, and the subdocuments are saved. + When you save the master document, the styles from the subdocuments are imported into the master document. First, the new style Style1 from the sub1.odt is imported. Next, the new styles from sub2.odt will be imported, but as Style1 now already is present in the master document, this style from sub2.odt will not be imported. + In the master document you now see the new style Style1 from the first subdocument. All Style1 paragraphs in the master document will be shown using the Style1 attributes from the first subdocument. However, the second subdocument by itself will not be changed. You see the Style1 paragraphs from the second subdocument with different attributes, depending whether you open the sub2.odt document by itself or as part of the master document. + To avoid confusion, use the same document template for the master document and its subdocuments. This happens automatically when you create the master document and its subdocuments from an existing document with headings, using the command File - Send - Create Master Document. +
+ + + Navigator in master mode +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp index 4def29c46f..2e79a424c5 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Working with Master Documents and Subdocuments -/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp - - - + + Working with Master Documents and Subdocuments + /text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp + + + Navigator;master documents -master documents;creating/editing/exporting -subdocuments;starting on new pages -subdocuments;removing from master documents -removing;subdocuments -indexes; master documents -MW created 4 new index entries. 2 index entries were taken from globaldoc.xhp.Working with Master Documents and Subdocuments -MW: this is a new guide created from splitting globaldoc.xhpA master document lets you manage large documents, such as a book with many chapters. The master document can be seen as a container for individual %PRODUCTNAME Writer files. The individual files are called subdocuments. -To Create a Master Document: - - -Do one of the following: - - - - -Choose File - New - Master Document. - - - - -Open an existing document and choose File - Send - Create Master Document. - - - - -If you are creating a new master document, the first entry in the Navigator should be a Text entry. Type an introduction or enter some text. This ensures that after you edit an existing style in the master document, you see the changed style when viewing the subdocuments. - - -In the Navigator for master documents (should open automatically, else press F5 to open), click and hold the Insert icon, and do one of the following: - - - - -To insert an existing file as a subdocument, choose File, locate the file that you want to include, and then click OK. - - - - -To create a new subdocument, choose New Document, type a name for the file, and then click Save. - - -To insert some text between subdocuments, choose Text. Then type the text. You cannot insert text next to an existing text entry in the Navigator.i81372 - - - - -Choose File - Save. - - -To Edit a Master Document: -Use the Navigator for rearranging and editing the subdocuments in a master document. - - -To open a subdocument for editing, double-click the name of the subdocument in the Navigator. - - - - -To remove a subdocument from the master document, right-click the subdocument in the Navigator list and choose Delete. The subdocument file is not deleted, only the entry in the Navigator is removed. - - - - -To add text to a master document, right-click an item in the Navigator list, and then choose Insert - Text. A text section is inserted before the selected item in the master document where you can type the text that you want. You cannot insert text next to an existing text entry in the Navigator.i81372 - - - - -To reorder the subdocuments in a master document, drag a subdocument to a new location in the Navigator list. You can also select a subdocument in the list, and click the Move down or Move up icon. - - - - -To add an index, such as a table of contents, right-click in the Navigator list, and then choose Insert - Index. - - - - - - -Icon + master documents;creating/editing/exporting + subdocuments;creating/editing/removing + removing;subdocuments + indexes; master documents +MW created 4 new index entries. 2 index entries were taken from globaldoc.xhp.MW made one index entry out of 2 "subdocuments;" entries +Working with Master Documents and Subdocuments +MW: this is a new guide created from splitting globaldoc.xhp +A master document lets you manage large documents, such as a book with many chapters. The master document can be seen as a container for individual %PRODUCTNAME Writer files. The individual files are called subdocuments. + To Create a Master Document + + + Do one of the following: + + + + + + + If you are creating a new master document, the first entry in the Navigator should be a Text + entry. Type an introduction or enter some text. This ensures that after having edited an existing style in the master document, you see the changed style when viewing the subdocuments. + + + In the Navigator for master documents (should open automatically, else press F5 to open), click and hold the Insert + icon, and do one of the following: + + + + + + + Choose File - Save. + + + To Edit a Master Document + Use the Navigator for rearranging and editing the subdocuments in a master document. + + + To open a subdocument for editing, double-click the name of the subdocument in the Navigator. + + + + + To remove a subdocument from the master document, right-click the subdocument in the Navigator list and choose Delete. The subdocument file is not deleted, only the entry in the Navigator is removed. + + + + + To add text to a master document, right-click an item in the Navigator list, and then choose Insert - Text. A text section is inserted before the selected item in the master document where you can type the text that you want. You cannot insert text next to an existing text entry in the Navigator.i81372 + + + + + To reorder the subdocuments in a master document, drag a subdocument to a new location in the Navigator list. You can also select a subdocument in the list, and click the Move down or Move up + icon. + + + + + To add an index, such as a table of contents, right-click in the Navigator list, and then choose Insert - Index. + + +
+ + + +Icon - - -To update an index in a master document, select the index in the Navigator, and then click the Update icon. - - -
-When you insert an object like a frame or a picture into a master document, do not anchor the object "to page". Instead, set the anchor "to paragraph" on the Format - (Object type) - Type tab page, and then set the object's position relative to "Entire Page" in the Horizontal and Vertical list boxes. -To Start Each Subdocument on a New Page: - - -Ensure that each subdocument starts with a heading that uses the same paragraph style, for example "Heading 1". - - -In the master document, choose Format - Styles and Formatting, and click the Paragraph Styles icon. - - -Right-click "Heading 1" and choose Modify. - - -Click the Text Flow tab. - - -In the Breaks area, select Insert, and then select Page in the Type box. - - -If you want each subdocument to start on an odd page, select With Page Style, and select "Right page" in the box. - - -Click OK. - - -To Export a Master Document as a %PRODUCTNAME Text Document: - - -Choose File - Export. - - -In the File format list, select a text document file format and click Export. - - -The subdocuments will be exported as sections. Use Format - Sections to unprotect and remove sections, if you prefer a plain text document without sections. -
- -Navigator in master mode -
- - + + + To update an index in a master document, select the index in the Navigator, and then click the Update icon. + + + + + When you insert an object like a frame or a picture into a master document, do not anchor the object "to page". Instead, set the anchor "to paragraph" on the Format - (Object type) - Type tab page, and then set the object's position relative to "Entire Page" in the Horizontal and Vertical list boxes. + To Start Each Subdocument on a New Page + + + Ensure that each subdocument starts with a heading that uses the same paragraph style, for example "Heading 1". + + + In the master document, choose Format - Styles and Formatting, and click the Paragraph Styles icon. + + + Right-click "Heading 1" and choose Modify. + + + Click the Text Flow + tab. + + + In the Breaks + area, select Insert, and then select “Page”in the Type + box. + + + If you want each subdocument to start on an odd page, select With Page Style, and select "Right page" in the box. + + + Click OK. + + + To Export a Master Document as a %PRODUCTNAME Text Document + + + Choose File - Export. + + + In the File format list, select a text document file format and click Export. + + + The subdocuments will be exported as sections. Use Format - Sections to unprotect and remove sections, if you prefer a plain text document without sections. +
+ + Navigator in master mode +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp index 1c2cae78e2..e5e60aa0e7 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -About Headers and Footers -/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + About Headers and Footers + /text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp + + + headers;about -footers;about -HTML documents; headers and footers + footers;about + HTML documents; headers and footers -About Headers and Footers +About Headers and Footers -Headers and footers are areas in the top and the bottom page margins, where you can add text or graphics. Headers and footers are added to the current page style. Any page that uses the same style automatically receives the header or footer that you add. You can insert Fields, such as page numbers and chapter headings, in headers and footers in a text document. - - -To add a header to a page, choose Insert - Header, and then select the page style for the current page from the submenu. - - -To add a footer to a page, choose Insert - Footer, and then select the page style for the current page from the submenu. - - -The page style for the current page is displayed in the Status Bar. - - -You can also choose Format - Page, click the Header or Footer tab, and then select Header on or Footer on. Clear the Same content left/right check box if you want to define different headers and footers for even and odd pages. - - - - -To use different headers or footers in your document, you must add them to different Page Styles, and then apply the styles to the pages where you want the headers or footer to appear. - - -Headers and Footers in HTML Documents -Some of the header and footer options are also available for HTML documents. Headers and footers are not supported by HTML and instead are exported with special tags, so that they can be viewed in a browser. Headers and footers are only exported in HTML documents if they are enabled in Web Layout mode. When you reopen the document in $[officename], the headers and footers are displayed correctly, including any fields that you inserted. -
- - - - -Page Styles -
- - + Headers and footers are areas in the top and the bottom page margins, where you can add text or graphics. Headers and footers are added to the current page style. Any page that uses the same style automatically receives the header or footer that you add. You can insert Fields, such as page numbers and chapter headings, in headers and footers in a text document. + The page style for the current page is displayed in the Status Bar. + + + To add a header to a page, choose Insert - Header, and then select the page style for the current page from the submenu. + + + To add a footer to a page, choose Insert - Footer, and then select the page style for the current page from the submenu. + + + + + You can also choose Format - Page, click the Header or Footer + tab, and then select Header on + or Footer on. Clear the Same content left/right check box if you want to define different headers and footers for even and odd pages. + + + + + To use different headers or footers in your document, you must add them to different Page Styles, and then apply the styles to the pages where you want the headers or footer to appear. + + + Headers and Footers in HTML Documents + Some of the header and footer options are also available for HTML documents. Headers and footers are not supported by HTML and instead are exported with special tags, so that they can be viewed in a browser. Headers and footers are only exported in HTML documents if they are enabled in Web Layout mode. When you reopen the document in $[officename], the headers and footers are displayed correctly, including any fields that you inserted. +
+ + + + + Page Styles +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp index de4cf45256..9e4149abb7 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Defining Different Headers and Footers -/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Defining Different Headers and Footers + /text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp + + + headers;defining for left and right pages -footers;defining for left and right pages -page styles; changing -defining; headers/footers -mirrored page layout + footers;defining for left and right pages + page styles; changing + defining; headers/footers + mirrored page layout -Defining Different Headers and Footers +Defining Different Headers and Footers -You can use different headers and footers on different pages in your document, so long as the pages use different page styles. $[officename] provides several predefined page styles, such as First page, Left page and Right page, or you can create a custom page style. -You can also use the mirrored page layout if you want to add a header to a page style that has different inner and outer page margins. To apply this option to a page style, choose Format - Page, click the Page tab, and in the Layout settings area, choose Mirrored in the Page layout box. -For example, you can use page styles to define different headers for even and odd pages in a document. - - -Open a new text document. - - -Choose Format - Styles and Formatting and click the Page Styles icon in the Styles and Formatting window. - - -Right-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles and choose Modify. - - -In the Page Styles dialog, click the Header tab. - - -Select Header on and click the Organizer tab. - - -In the Next Style box, select "Left Page". - - -Click OK. - - -In the Styles and Formatting window, right-click "Left Page" in the list of page styles and choose Modify. - - -In the Page Styles dialog, click the Header tab. - - -Select Header on and click the Organizer tab. - - -In the Next Style box, select "Right Page". - - -Click OK. - - -Double-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles to apply the style to the current page. - - -Enter text or graphics in the header for the Left Page style. After the next page is added to your document, enter text or graphics in the header for the Right Page style. - - - - - - - - - + You can use different headers and footers on different pages in your document, so long as the pages use different page styles. $[officename] provides several predefined page styles, such as First page, Left page and Right page, or you can create a custom page style. + You can also use the mirrored page layout if you want to add a header to a page style that has different inner and outer page margins. To apply this option to a page style, choose Format - Page, click the + Page tab, and in the + Layout settings area, choose “Mirrored” in the + Page layout box. + For example, you can use page styles to define different headers for even and odd pages in a document. + + + Open a new text document. + + + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting and click the Page Styles icon in the Styles and Formatting window. + + + Right-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles and choose Modify. + + + In the Page Styles dialog, click the Header + tab. + + + Select + Header on and click the Organizer tab. + + + In the Next Style + box, select "Left Page". + + + Click OK. + + + In the Styles and Formatting window, right-click "Left Page" in the list of page styles and choose Modify. + + + In the Page Styles dialog, click the Header + tab. + + + Select + Header on and click the Organizer tab. + + + In the Next Style + box, select "Right Page". + + + Click OK. + + + Double-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles to apply the style to the current page. + + + Enter text or graphics in the header for the Left Page style. After the next page is added to your document, enter text or graphics in the header for the Right Page style. + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp index 219de3dd30..9e59443b21 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Inserting a Chapter Name and Number in a Header or a Footer -/text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Inserting a Chapter Name and Number in a Header or a Footer + /text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp + + + running titles in headers -floating titles in headers -headers; chapter information -chapter names in headers -names; chapter names in headers + floating titles in headers + headers; chapter information + chapter names in headers + names; chapter names in headers -Inserting a Chapter Name and Number in a Header or a Footer +Inserting a Chapter Name and Number in a Header or a Footer -Before you can insert chapter information into a header or footer, you must first set the outline numbering options for the paragraph style that you want to use for chapter titles. -To create a paragraph style for chapter titles: - - -Choose Tools - Outline Numbering. - - -In the Style box, select the paragraph style that you want to use for chapter titles, for example, "Heading 1". - - -Select the numbering style for the chapter titles in the Number box, for example, "1,2,3...". - - -Type "Chapter" followed by a space in the Before box. - - -Enter a space in the After box. - - -Click OK. - - -To insert the chapter name and number in a header or a footer: - - -Apply the paragraph style that you defined for chapter titles to the chapter headings in your document. - - -Choose Insert - Header or Insert - Footer, and then select the page style for the current page from the submenu. - - -Click in the header or footer. - - -Choose Insert - Fields - Other and click the Document tab. - - - - -Click "Chapter" in the Type list and "Chapter number and name" in the Format list. - - -Click Insert and then click Close. - - -The header on every page that uses the current page style automatically displays the chapter name and number. - - - - - - - + Before you can insert chapter information into a header or footer, you must first set the outline numbering options for the paragraph style that you want to use for chapter titles. + To Create a Paragraph Style for Chapter Titles + + + Choose Tools - Outline Numbering. + + + In the Style + box, select the paragraph style that you want to use for chapter titles, for example, "Heading 1". + + + Select the numbering style for the chapter titles in the Number + box, for example, "1,2,3...". + + + Type "Chapter" followed by a space in the Before + box. + + + Enter a space in the After + box. + + + Click OK. + + + To Insert the Chapter Name and Number in a Header or a Footer + + + Apply the paragraph style that you defined for chapter titles to the chapter headings in your document. + + + Choose Insert - Header + or Insert - Footer, and then select the page style for the current page from the submenu. + + + Click in the header or footer. + + + Choose Insert - Fields - Other and click the + Document tab. + + + + + Click "Chapter" in the Type + list and "Chapter number and name" in the Format + list. + + + Click Insert and then click Close. + + + The header on every page that uses the current page style automatically displays the chapter name and number. + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp index b631c1107e..c8869ea6f3 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Formatting Headers or Footers -/text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -inserting; lines under headers -lines; under headers/above footers -headers;formatting -footers;formatting -shadows;headers/footers -borders;for headers/footers - -Formatting Headers or Footers + + Formatting Headers or Footers + /text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp + + + +inserting;lines under headers/above footers + lines; under headers/above footers + headers;formatting + footers;formatting + shadows;headers/footers + borders;for headers/footers +MW changed "inserting;" +Formatting Headers or Footers -You can apply direct formatting to the text in a header or footer. You can also adjust the spacing of the text relative to the header or footer frame or apply a border to the header or footer. - - -Choose Format - Page and select the Header or Footer tab. - - -Set the spacing options that you want to use. - - -To add a border or a shadow to the header or the footer, click More. The Border/Background dialog opens. - - - - -To add a separator line between the header or the footer and the content of the page, click the bottom edge of the square in the Line arrangement area. Click a line style in the Style box. - - - - -To adjust the spacing between the content of the header or footer and the line, clear the Synchronize box, and then enter a value in the Bottom box. - - - - - - - - - + You can apply direct formatting to the text in a header or footer. You can also adjust the spacing of the text relative to the header or footer frame or apply a border to the header or footer. + + + Choose Format - Page + and select the Header + or Footer + tab. + + + Set the spacing options that you want to use. + + + To add a border or a shadow to the header or the footer, click More. The Border/Background + dialog opens. + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp index 8f262371a0..f2bf985956 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Hiding Text -/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp - - - - - - + + Hiding Text + /text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp + + + text; hiding -sections;hiding -paragraphs;hiding -hiding;text, with conditions - - mw deleted "comparisons;" and copied two entries to hidden_text_display.xhp and 2 entries to nonprintable_text.xhp - Hiding Text + sections;hiding + paragraphs;hiding + hiding;text, with conditions + variables;for hiding text +mw deleted "comparisons;" and copied two entries to hidden_text_display.xhp and 2 entries to nonprintable_text.xhpMW added "variables;" +Hiding Text - You can use fields and sections to hide or display text in your document if a condition is met. - Before you can hide text, you must first create a variable to use in the condition for hiding the text. - - - Click in your document and choose Insert - Fields - Other. - - - Click the Variables tab and click "Set Variable" in the Type list. - - - Click "General" in the Format list. - - - Type a name for the variable in the Name box, for example, "Hide". - - - Enter a value for the variable in the Value box, for example, "1". - - - To hide the variable in your document, select Invisible. - - - Click OK. - - - To hide text: - - - Click in the document where you want to add the text. - - - Choose Insert - Fields - Other and click the Functions tab. - - - Click "Hidden Text" in the Type list. - - - Enter a statement in the Condition box. For example, using the variable you previously defined, enter "Hide==1". - - - Type the text that you want to hide in the Hidden text box. - - - Click OK. - - - To hide a paragraph: - - - Click in the paragraph where you want to add the text. - - - Choose Insert - Fields - Other and click the Functions tab. - - - Click "Hidden Paragraph" in the Type list. - - - Enter a statement in the Condition box. For example, using the variable you previously defined, enter "Hide==1". - - - Click OK. - - - You must enable this feature by removing the check mark from menu View - Hidden Paragraphs. When the check mark is set, you cannot hide any paragraph. - To hide a section: - - - Select the text that you want to hide in your document. - - - Choose Insert - Section. - - - In the Hide area, select Hide, and then enter an expression in the Condition box. For example, using the variable you previously defined, enter "Hide==1". - - - Click OK. - - -
- - - - Displaying Hidden Text - Creating Non-printing Text - Insert - Fields - Other - Insert - Section - List of Operators - -
- - + You can use fields and sections to hide or display text in your document if a condition is met. + Before you can hide text, you must first create a variable to use in the condition for hiding the text. + To Create a Variable + + + Click in your document and choose Insert - Fields - Other. + + + Click the Variables tab and click "Set Variable" in the Type list. + + + Click "General" in the Format list. + + + Type a name for the variable in the Name box, for example, Hide. + + + Enter a value for the variable in the Value box, for example, 1. + + + To hide the variable in your document, select Invisible. + + + Click Insert and Close. + + + To Hide Text + + + Click in the document where you want to add the text. + + + Choose Insert - Fields - Other and click the Functions tab. + + + Click "Hidden Text" in the Type list. + + + Enter a statement in the Condition box. For example, using the variable you previously defined, enter Hide==1. + + + Type the text that you want to hide in the Hidden text box. + + + Click Insert and Close. + + + To Hide a Paragraph + + + Click in the paragraph where you want to add the text. + + + Choose Insert - Fields - Other and click the Functions tab. + + + Click "Hidden Paragraph" in the Type list. + + + Enter a statement in the Condition box. For example, using the variable you previously defined, enter Hide==1. + + + Click Insert and Close. + + + You must enable this feature by removing the check mark from menu View - Hidden Paragraphs. When the check mark is set, you cannot hide any paragraph. + To Hide a Section + + + Select the text that you want to hide in your document. + + + Choose Insert - Section. + + + In the Hide area, select Hide, and then enter an expression in the Condition box. For example, using the variable you previously defined, enter Hide==1. + + + Click Insert. + + +
+ + + Displaying Hidden Text + Creating Non-printing Text + Insert - Fields - Other + Insert - Section + List of Operators +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text_display.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text_display.xhp index e49165ff8c..e8ab3ff3a4 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text_display.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text_display.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Displaying Hidden Text -/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text_display.xhp - - - + + Displaying Hidden Text + /text/swriter/guide/hidden_text_display.xhp + + + hidden text; displaying -displaying;hidden text -MW copied two entries from hidden_text.xhpDisplaying Hidden Text -MW created this guide from splitting hidden_text.xhpIf you have a text that was hidden by defining a condition with a variable, you have several options to display the hidden text. Do one of the following: - - -Enable the check mark at View - Hidden Paragraphs. - - - - -Double-click in front of the variable that you used to define the condition for hiding the text, and enter a different value for the variable. - - -Double-click in front of the hidden text field or the hidden paragraph field, and change the condition statement. - - -
-Hiding Text - -List of Operators -
- - + displaying;hidden text +MW copied two entries from hidden_text.xhp +Displaying Hidden Text +MW created this guide from splitting hidden_text.xhp +If you have a text that was hidden by defining a condition with a variable, you have several options to display the hidden text. Do one of the following: + + + Enable the check mark at View - Hidden Paragraphs. + + + + + Double-click in front of the variable that you used to define the condition for hiding the text, and enter a different value for the variable. + + + Double-click in front of the hidden text field or the hidden paragraph field, and change the condition statement. + + +
+ Hiding Text + + List of Operators +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp index 0f0ac3bb4e..e69e08ad40 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Inserting Hyperlinks With the Navigator -/text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp - - - + + Inserting Hyperlinks With the Navigator + /text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp + + + hyperlinks; inserting from Navigator -inserting; hyperlinks from Navigator -cross-references; inserting with Navigator -Navigator;inserting hyperlinks -mw deleted "adding;"Inserting Hyperlinks With the Navigator + inserting; hyperlinks from Navigator + cross-references; inserting with Navigator + Navigator;inserting hyperlinks +mw deleted "adding;" +Inserting Hyperlinks With the Navigator -You can insert a cross-reference as a hyperlink in your document using the Navigator. You can even cross-reference items from other %PRODUCTNAME documents. If you click the hyperlink when the document is opened in %PRODUCTNAME, you are taken to the cross-referenced item. - - -Open the document(s) containing the items you want to cross-reference. - - -On the Standard bar, click the Navigator icon. - - -Click the arrow next to the Drag Mode icon, and ensure that Insert as Hyperlink is selected. - - -In the list at the bottom of the Navigator, select the document containing the item that you want to cross-reference. - - -In the Navigator list, click the plus sign next to the item that you want to insert as a hyperlink. - - -Drag the item to where you want to insert the hyperlink in the document. - - -The name of the item is inserted in the document as an underlined hyperlink. - - - - - + You can insert a cross-reference as a hyperlink in your document using the Navigator. You can even cross-reference items from other %PRODUCTNAME documents. If you click the hyperlink when the document is opened in %PRODUCTNAME, you are taken to the cross-referenced item. + + + Open the document(s) containing the items you want to cross-reference. + + + On the Standard bar, click the Navigator icon. + + + Click the arrow next to the Drag Mode icon, and ensure that Insert as Hyperlink + is selected. + + + In the list at the bottom of the Navigator, select the document containing the item that you want to cross-reference. + + + In the Navigator list, click the plus sign next to the item that you want to insert as a hyperlink. + + + Drag the item to where you want to insert the hyperlink in the document. + + + The name of the item is inserted in the document as an underlined hyperlink. + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hyphen_prevent.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hyphen_prevent.xhp index 45f12e43b2..c2c1d59a0f 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hyphen_prevent.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hyphen_prevent.xhp @@ -83,4 +83,4 @@ Text Flow - \ No newline at end of file + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp index feea737185..3f3ff05b47 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Indenting Paragraphs -/text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp - - - + + Indenting Paragraphs + /text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp + + + formatting; indenting paragraphs -indents;in text -paragraphs; indents -hanging indents in paragraphs -right indents in paragraphs -lines of text; indents -changing;indents -mw made indents a two level entry, changed "paragraphs;" and copied "changing;indents" from writer guide "ruler.xhp"Indenting Paragraphs -see i66307To change the measurement units, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General, and then select a new measurement unit in the Settings area. -You can change the indents for the current paragraph, or for all selected paragraphs, or for a Paragraph Style. -You can also set indents using the ruler. To display the ruler, choose View - Ruler. - - -Choose Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing to change the indents for the current paragraph or for all selected paragraphs. You can also set indents using the ruler. - - -Right-click a paragraph and choose Edit Paragraph Style - Indents & Spacing to change the indents for all paragraphs that have the same Paragraph Style. - - -Indents are calculated with respect to the left and right page margins. If you want the paragraph to extend into the page margin, enter a negative number. -The indents are different regarding the writing direction. For example, look at the "Before text" indent value in left-to-right languages. The left edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the left page margin. In right-to-left languages, the right edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the right page margin. -For a hanging indent, enter a positive value for "Before text" and a negative value for "First line". - -Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing - - - - + indents;in text + paragraphs; indents + hanging indents in paragraphs + right indents in paragraphs + lines of text; indents + changing;indents +mw made indents a two level entry, changed "paragraphs;" and copied "changing;indents" from writer guide "ruler.xhp" +Indenting Paragraphs +see i66307 +To change the measurement units, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General, and then select a new measurement unit in the Settings area. + You can change the indents for the current paragraph, or for all selected paragraphs, or for a Paragraph Style. + You can also set indents using the ruler. To display the ruler, choose View - Ruler. + + + Choose Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing to change the indents for the current paragraph or for all selected paragraphs. You can also set indents using the ruler. + + + Right-click a paragraph and choose Edit Paragraph Style - Indents & Spacing to change the indents for all paragraphs that have the same Paragraph Style. + + + Indents are calculated with respect to the left and right page margins. If you want the paragraph to extend into the page margin, enter a negative number. + The indents are different regarding the writing direction. For example, look at the Before text indent value in left-to-right languages. The left edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the left page margin. In right-to-left languages, the right edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the right page margin. + For a hanging indent, enter a positive value for Before text and a negative value for First line. + + Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp index 272f8b9aa0..413b32626b 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Editing or Deleting Index and Table Entries -/text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Editing or Deleting Index and Table Entries + /text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp + + + indexes; editing or deleting entries -tables of contents; editing or deleting entries -deleting;entries of indexes/tables of contents -editing;table/index entries + tables of contents; editing or deleting entries + deleting;entries of indexes/tables of contents + editing;table/index entries -Editing or Deleting Index and Table Entries +Editing or Deleting Index and Table Entries -Index entries are inserted as fields into your document. To view fields in your document, choose View and ensure that Field Shadings is selected. - - -Place the cursor immediately in front of the index entry in your document. - - -Choose Edit - Index Entry, and do one of the following: - - - - -To change the entry, enter different text in the Entry box. - - -To remove the entry, click Delete. - - -To cycle through the index entries in your document, click the next or the previous arrows in the Edit Index Entry dialog. - - - - - - - - - - - + Index entries are inserted as fields into your document. To view fields in your document, choose View + and ensure that Field Shadings + is selected. + + + Place the cursor immediately in front of the index entry in your document. + + + Choose Edit - Index Entry, and do one of the following: + + + + To cycle through the index entries in your document, click the next or the previous arrows in the Edit Index Entry dialog. + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp index aaf7fdaa70..28779bfc79 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Updating, Editing and Deleting Indexes and Tables of Contents -/text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Updating, Editing and Deleting Indexes and Tables of Contents + /text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp + + + indexes; editing/updating/deleting -tables of contents; editing and deleting -updating;indexes/tables of contents -editing;indexes/tables of contents -deleting;indexes/tables of contents + tables of contents; editing and deleting + updating;indexes/tables of contents + editing;indexes/tables of contents + deleting;indexes/tables of contents -Updating, Editing and Deleting Indexes and Tables of Contents +Updating, Editing and Deleting Indexes and Tables of Contents - - -Place the cursor in the index or table of contents. -If you cannot place your cursor in the index or table of contents, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and then select Enable in the Cursor in protected areas. - - -Right-click and choose an editing option from the menu. - - -You can also make changes directly to an index or table of contents. Right-click in the index or table of contents, choose Edit Index/Table, click Index/Table tab, and then clear the Protected from manual changes check box. - - - - - - - - - - - + + + Place the cursor in the index or table of contents. + If you cannot place your cursor in the index or table of contents, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and then select + Enable in the + Cursor in protected areas section. + + + Right-click and choose an editing option from the menu. + + + You can also make changes directly to an index or table of contents. Right-click in the index or table of contents, choose Edit Index/Table, click Index/Table tab, and then clear the Protected from manual changes check box. + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp index ff4c8076ef..b8046ea518 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Defining Index or Table of Contents Entries -/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp - - - + + Defining Index or Table of Contents Entries + /text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp + + + indexes; defining entries in -tables of contents; defining entries in -entries; defining in indexes/tables of contents + tables of contents; defining entries in + entries; defining in indexes/tables of contents -Defining Index or Table of Contents Entries +Defining Index or Table of Contents Entries -Defining Index Entries - - -Click in a word, or select the words in your document that you want to use as an index entry. - - -Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Entry, and do one of the following: - - - - -To change the text that appears in the index, type the text that you want in the Entry box. The text that you type here does not replace the selected text in the document. - - -To add an index mark to similar words in your document, select Apply to all similar texts. - - -To add the entries to a custom index, click the New User-defined Index icon, enter the name of the index, and then click OK. - - -Defining Table of Contents Entries -The best way to generate a table of contents is to apply the predefined heading paragraph styles, such as "Heading 1", to the paragraphs that you want to include in your table of contents. -To use a custom paragraph style as a table of contents entry: - - -Choose Tools - Outline Numbering and click the Numbering tab. - - -Select the paragraph style that you want to include in your table of contents in the Paragraph Style box. - - -In the Level list, click the hierarchical level that you want to apply the paragraph style to. - - -Click OK. You can now apply the style to headings in your document and include them in your table of contents. - - - - - - - - - - - - - + To Define Index Entries + + + Click in a word, or select the words in your document that you want to use as an index entry. + + + Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Entry, and do one of the following: + + + + To Define Table of Contents Entries + The best way to generate a table of contents is to apply the predefined heading paragraph styles, such as "Heading 1", to the paragraphs that you want to include in your table of contents. + To Use a Custom Paragraph Style as a Table of Contents Entry + + + Choose Tools - Outline Numbering and click the Numbering tab. + + + Select the paragraph style that you want to include in your table of contents in the Paragraph Style box. + + + In the Level list, click the hierarchical level that you want to apply the paragraph style to. + + + Click OK. You can now apply the style to headings in your document and include them in your table of contents. + + + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp index 0cc0a25857..fbe9a372c3 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Formatting an Index or a Table of Contents -/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Formatting an Index or a Table of Contents + /text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp + + + indexes; formatting -editing; index format -tables of contents; formatting -entries; in tables of contents, as hyperlinks -tables of contents; hyperlinks as entries -hyperlinks; in tables of contents and indexes -formatting;indexes and tables of contents + editing; index format + tables of contents; formatting + entries; in tables of contents, as hyperlinks + tables of contents; hyperlinks as entries + hyperlinks; in tables of contents and indexes + formatting;indexes and tables of contents -Formatting an Index or a Table of Contents +Formatting an Index or a Table of Contents -You can apply different paragraph styles, assign hyperlinks to entries, change the layout of indexes, and change the background color of indexes in the Insert Index dialog. -To apply a different paragraph style to an index level: - - -Right-click in the index or table of contents, and then choose Edit Index/Table. - - -Click the Styles tab. - - -Click an index level in the Levels list. - - -Click the style that you want to apply in the Paragraph Style list. - - -Click the assign button <. - - -Click OK. - - -To assign hyperlinks to entries in a table of contents: -You can assign a cross-reference as a hyperlink to entries in a table of contents. - - -Right-click in the table of contents, and then choose Edit Index/Table. - - -Click the Entries tab. - - -Click the heading level that you want to assign hyperlinks to in the Level list. - - -In the Structure area, click in the box in front of E#, and then click Hyperlink. - - -Click in the box behind the E, and then click Hyperlink. - - -Repeat for each heading level that you want to create hyperlinks for, or click the All levels button to apply the formatting to all levels. - - - - - - - - - - - - - + You can apply different paragraph styles, assign hyperlinks to entries, change the layout of indexes, and change the background color of indexes in the Insert Index dialog. + To Apply a Different Paragraph Style to an Index Level + + + Right-click in the index or table of contents, and then choose Edit Index/Table. + + + Click the Styles tab. + + + Click an index level in the Levels list. + + + Click the style that you want to apply in the Paragraph Style list. + + + Click the assign button <. + + + Click OK. + + + To Assign Hyperlinks to Entries in a Table of Contents + You can assign a cross-reference as a hyperlink to entries in a table of contents. + + + Right-click in the table of contents, and then choose Edit Index/Table. + + + Click the Entries tab. + + + In the Level list click the heading level that you want to assign hyperlinks to. + + + In the Structure area, click in the box in front of E#, and then click Hyperlink. + + + Click in the box behind the E, and then click Hyperlink. + + + Repeat for each heading level that you want to create hyperlinks for, or click the All button to apply the formatting to all levels. + + + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp index eb6b887fbf..bd840257cc 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Creating Alphabetical Indexes -/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Creating Alphabetical Indexes + /text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp + + + concordance files;indexes -indexes; alphabetical indexes -alphabetical indexes + indexes; alphabetical indexes + alphabetical indexes -Creating Alphabetical Indexes +Creating Alphabetical Indexes - - -Click in your document where you want to insert the index. - - -Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables. - - -On the Index/Table tab, select "Alphabetical Index" in the Type box. - - -If you want to use a concordance file, select Concordance file in the Options area, click the File, and then locate an existing file or create a new concordance file. - - -Set the formatting options for the index, either on the current tab, or on any of the other tabs of this dialog. For example, if you want to use single letter headings in your index, click the Entries tab, and then select Alphabetical delimiter. To change the formatting of levels in the index, click the Styles tab. - - -Click OK. - - -To update the index, right-click in the index, and then choose Update Index/Table. - - - -Creating a concordance file - - - - - - - - - - + + + Click in your document where you want to insert the index. + + + Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables. + + + On the Index/Table tab, select "Alphabetical Index" in the Type box. + + + If you want to use a concordance file, select Concordance file in the Options + area, click the File button, and then locate an existing file or create a new concordance file. + + + Set the formatting options for the index, either on the current tab, or on any of the other tabs of this dialog. For example, if you want to use single letter headings in your index, click the Entries tab, and then select Alphabetical delimiter. To change the formatting of levels in the index, click the Styles tab. + + + Click OK. + + + To update the index, right-click in the index, and then choose Update Index/Table. + + + + Creating a concordance file + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp index 3b0d3ac492..c4f0be7120 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Creating a Bibliography -/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp - - - + + Creating a Bibliography + /text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp + + + indexes;creating bibliographies -databases;creating bibliographies -bibliographies -entries;bibliographies -storing bibliographic information + databases;creating bibliographies + bibliographies + entries;bibliographies + storing bibliographic information -Creating a Bibliography +Creating a Bibliography -A bibliography is a list of works that you reference in a document. -Storing Bibliographic Information -$[officename] stores bibliographic information in a bibliography database, or in an individual document. -To store information in the bibliography database: - - -Choose Tools - Bibliography Database - - -Choose Insert - Record. - - -Type a name for the bibliography entry in the Short name box, and then add additional information to the record in the remaining boxes. - - -Close the Bibliography Database window. - - -To store bibliographic information in an individual document: - - -Click in your document where you want to add the bibliography entry. - - -Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Bibliography Entry. - - -Select From document content and click New. - - -Type a name for the bibliography entry in the Short name box. - - -Select the publication source for the record in the Type box, and then add additional information in the remaining boxes. - - -Click OK. - - -In the Insert Bibliography Entry dialog, click Insert, and then Close. - - - -Inserting Bibliography Entries From the Bibliography Database - - -Click in your document where you want to add the bibliography entry. - - -Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Bibliography Entry. - - - - -Select From bibliography database. - - -Select the name of the bibliography entry that you want to insert in the Short name box. - - -Click Insert and then click Close. - - -
-Bibliography Database - - - - - - - - -Some external tools exist that can interact with %PRODUCTNAME. One example is called Bibus. -
- - + A bibliography is a list of works that you reference in a document. + Storing Bibliographic Information + $[officename] stores bibliographic information in a bibliography database, or in an individual document. + To Store Information in the Bibliography Database + + + Choose Tools - Bibliography Database + + + Choose Insert - Record. + + + Type a name for the bibliography entry in the Short name + box, and then add additional information to the record in the remaining boxes. + + + Close the + Bibliography Database window. + + + To Store Bibliographic Information in an Individual Document + + + Click in your document where you want to add the bibliography entry. + + + Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Bibliography Entry. + + + Select From document content and click New. + + + Type a name for the bibliography entry in the Short name + box. + + + Select the publication source for the record in the Type + box, and then add additional information in the remaining boxes. + + + Click OK. + + + In the Insert Bibliography Entry + dialog, click Insert, and then Close. + + + + Inserting Bibliography Entries From the Bibliography Database + + + Click in your document where you want to add the bibliography entry. + + + Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Bibliography Entry. + + + + + Select From bibliography database. + + + Select the name of the bibliography entry that you want to insert in the Short name + box. + + + Click Insert and then click Close. + + +
+ Bibliography Database + + + + + + + + + Some external tools exist that can interact with %PRODUCTNAME. One example is called Bibus. +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp index 8b635314a0..7dabd5f62f 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Indexes Covering Several Documents -/text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp - - - + + Indexes Covering Several Documents + /text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp + + + indexes;multiple documents -multiple documents;indexes -merging;indexes - -Indexes Covering Several Documents + multiple documents;indexes + merging;indexes + master documents;indexes +MW inserted "master documents;" +Indexes Covering Several Documents -There are several ways to create an index that spans several documents: - - -Create an index in each individual document, copy and paste the indexes into a single document, and then edit them. - - -Select each index, choose Insert - Section, and then enter a name for the index. In a separate document, choose Insert - Section, select Link, click the browse button (...), and then locate and insert a named index section. - - -Create a master document, add as subdocuments the files that you want to include in the index, and then choose Insert - Index and Tables - Indexes and Tables. - - - - - - - - - - - - - + There are several ways to create an index that spans several documents: + + + Create an index in each individual document, copy and paste the indexes into a single document, and then edit them. + + + Select each index, choose Insert - Section, and then enter a name for the index. In a separate document, choose + Insert - Section, select Link, click the browse button (...), and then locate and insert a named index section. + + + Create a master document, add as subdocuments the files that you want to include in the index, and then choose Insert - Index and Tables - Indexes and Tables. + + + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp index 07a0ab6350..a9017bb9c8 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Creating a Table of Contents -/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Creating a Table of Contents + /text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp + + + tables of contents; creating and updating -updating; tables of contents + updating; tables of contents mw deleted "creating;" -Creating a Table of Contents +Creating a Table of Contents -
-The best way to generate a table of contents is to apply the predefined heading paragraph styles, such as "Heading 1", to the paragraphs that you want to include in your table of contents. After you apply these styles, you can then create a table of contents. - - -Click in your document where you want to create the table of contents. - - -Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables, and then click the Index/Table tab. - - -Select "Table of Contents" in the Type box. - - -Select any options that you want. - - -Click OK. - - -If you want to use a different paragraph style as a table of contents entry, select the Additional Styles check box in the Create from area, and then click the (...) button next to the check box. In the Assign Styles dialog, click the style in the list, and then click the >> or the << button to define the outline level for the paragraph style. -
-Updating a Table of Contents -Do one of the following: - - -Right-click in the table of contents and choose Update Index/Table. - - -Choose Tools - Update - All Indexes and Tables. - - - - - - - - - - - - - +
+ The best way to generate a table of contents is to apply the predefined heading paragraph styles, such as "Heading 1", to the paragraphs that you want to include in your table of contents. After you apply these styles, you can then create a table of contents. + To Insert a Table of Contents + + + Click in your document where you want to create the table of contents. + + + Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables, and then click the Index/Table tab. + + + Select "Table of Contents" in the Type box. + + + Select any options that you want. + + + Click OK. + + + If you want to use a different paragraph style as a table of contents entry, select the Additional Styles + check box in the Create from area, and then click the (...) button next to the check box. In the Assign Styles dialog, click the style in the list, and then click the >> + or the << + button to define the outline level for the paragraph style. +
+ To Update a Table of Contents + Do one of the following: + + + Right-click in the table of contents and choose Update Index/Table. + + + Choose Tools - Update - All Indexes and Tables. + + + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp index 57c7468b85..acdb8541aa 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -User-Defined Indexes -/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + User-Defined Indexes + /text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp + + + indexes; creating user-defined indexes -user-defined indexes + user-defined indexes -User-Defined Indexes +User-Defined Indexes -You can create as many user-defined indexes as you want. -Creating a User-Defined Index - - -Select a word or words that you want to add to a user-defined index. - - -Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Entry. - - -Click the New User-defined Index button next to the Index box. - - -Type a name for the index in the Name box and click OK. - - -Click Insert to add the selected word(s) to the new index. - - -Click Close. - - -Inserting a User-Defined Index - - -Click in the document where you want to insert the index. - - -Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables. - - -On the Index/Table tab, select the name of the user-defined index that you created in the Type box. - - - - -Select any options that you want. - - -Click OK. - - -If you want to use a different paragraph style as a table of contents entry, select Styles, and then click the (...) button next to the box. Click the style in the list, and then click the >> or the << button to define the outline level for the paragraph style. - - - - - - - - - - - + You can create as many user-defined indexes as you want. + To Create a User-Defined Index + + + Select a word or words that you want to add to a user-defined index. + + + Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Entry. + + + Click the New User-defined Index button next to the Index + box. + + + Type a name for the index in the Name + box and click OK. + + + Click + Insert to add the selected word(s) to the new index. + + + Click + Close. + + + To Insert a User-Defined Index + + + Click in the document where you want to insert the index. + + + Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables. + + + On the Index/Table tab, select the name of the user-defined index that you created in the Type + box. + + + + + Select any options that you want. + + + Click OK. + + + If you want to use a different paragraph style as a table of contents entry, select Styles, and then click the (...) button next to the box. Click the style in the list, and then click the >> + or the << + button to define the outline level for the paragraph style. + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp index 68d82ec9c2..20a9b5ed91 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Inserting a Graphic From a File -/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Inserting a Graphic From a File + /text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp + + + pictures; inserting by dialog -inserting; pictures, by dialog + inserting; pictures, by dialog -Inserting a Graphic From a File +Inserting a Graphic From a File - - -Click in the document where you want to insert the graphic. - - -Choose Insert - Picture - From File. - - -Locate the graphic file that you want to insert, and then click Open. - - -By default, the inserted graphic is centered above the paragraph that you clicked in. - - - - - - - - + + + Click in the document where you want to insert the graphic. + + + Choose Insert - Picture - From File. + + + Locate the graphic file that you want to insert, and then click Open. + + + By default, the inserted graphic is centered above the paragraph that you clicked in. + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromchart.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromchart.xhp index 29808aca23..4db5dd4711 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromchart.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromchart.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Inserting a Calc Chart into a Text Document -/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromchart.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Inserting a Calc Chart into a Text Document + /text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromchart.xhp + + + charts;copying from Calc into Writer -copying; charts from $[officename] Calc -text documents;inserting Calc charts + copying; charts from $[officename] Calc + text documents;inserting Calc charts -Inserting a Calc Chart into a Text Document +Inserting a Calc Chart into a Text Document -You can insert a copy of a chart that is not updated when you modify the chart data in the spreadsheet. -To insert a copy of a Calc chart in a text document - - -Open the text document that you want to copy the chart to. - - -Open the spreadsheet containing the chart that you want to copy. - - -In the spreadsheet, click the chart. Eight handles appear. - - -Drag the chart from the spreadsheet to the text document. - - -You can resize and move the chart in the text document as you would any object. To edit the chart data, double-click the chart. - - - - - - - - - + You can insert a copy of a chart that is not updated when you modify the chart data in the spreadsheet. + + + Open the text document that you want to copy the chart to. + + + Open the spreadsheet containing the chart that you want to copy. + + + In the spreadsheet, click the chart. Eight handles appear. + + + Drag the chart from the spreadsheet to the text document. + + + You can resize and move the chart in the text document as you would any object. To edit the chart data, double-click the chart. + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp index b512922d37..b4d3dda2c9 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Inserting a Scanned Image -/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp - - - + + Inserting a Scanned Image + /text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp + + + inserting;scanned images -pictures; scanning -scanning pictures + pictures; scanning + scanning pictures -Inserting a Scanned Image +Inserting a Scanned Image -To insert a scanned image, the scanner must be connected to your system and the scanner software drivers must be installed. -The scanner must support the TWAIN standard. -The scanner must support the SANE standard. + To insert a scanned image, the scanner must be connected to your system and the scanner software drivers must be installed. + The scanner must support the TWAIN standard. +The scanner must support the SANE standard. - - -Click in the document where you want to insert the scanned image. - - -Choose Insert - Picture - Scan, and choose the scanning source from the submenu. - - -Follow the scanning instructions. - - - - - - - - - - - + + + Click in the document where you want to insert the scanned image. + + + Choose Insert - Picture - Scan, and choose the scanning source from the submenu. + + + Follow the scanning instructions. + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_line.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_line.xhp index 7986dce01e..ffde455eaa 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_line.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_line.xhp @@ -98,4 +98,4 @@ Gallery - \ No newline at end of file + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp index 5f7a053500..764b43eaea 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Combining Numbered Lists -/text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Combining Numbered Lists + /text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp + + + numbering; combining -merging;numbered lists -joining;numbered lists -lists;combining numbered lists -paragraphs;numbering non-consecutive + merging;numbered lists + joining;numbered lists + lists;combining numbered lists + paragraphs;numbering non-consecutive -Combining Numbered Lists +Combining Numbered Lists -You can combine numbered lists into a single consecutively numbered list. -To combine consecutive numbered lists: - - -Select all of the paragraphs in the lists. - - -On the Formatting Bar, click the Numbering On/Off icon twice. - - -To create a numbered list from non-consecutive paragraphs: - - -Hold down Ctrl and drag a selection in the first numbered paragraph. You only have to select one character. - - -Continue to hold down Ctrl, and drag a selection in each numbered paragraph of the lists you want to combine. - - -On the Formatting Bar, click the Numbering On/Off icon twice. - - - - - - - - - - - + You can combine numbered lists into a single consecutively numbered list. + To Combine Consecutive Numbered Lists + + + Select all of the paragraphs in the lists. + + + On the Formatting Bar, click the Numbering On/Off + icon twice. + + + To Create a Numbered List From Non-consecutive Paragraphs: + + + Hold down Ctrl and drag a selection in the first numbered paragraph. You only have to select one character. + + + Continue to hold down Ctrl, and drag a selection in each numbered paragraph of the lists you want to combine. + + + On the Formatting Bar, click the Numbering On/Off + icon twice. + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/jump2statusbar.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/jump2statusbar.xhp index 4f1f210ba0..5c8cead4fc 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/jump2statusbar.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/jump2statusbar.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Going to Specific Bookmark -/text/swriter/guide/jump2statusbar.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Going to Specific Bookmark + /text/swriter/guide/jump2statusbar.xhp + + + bookmarks; positioning cursor -jumping;to bookmarks + jumping;to bookmarks -Going to Specific Bookmark +Going to Specific Bookmark -To go to a specific bookmark in your document, hold down Ctrl and click -right-click in the Page field on the Status Bar, and then choose the bookmark. - -Insert Bookmark - - + To go to a specific bookmark in your document, hold down Ctrl and click +right-click in the Page field on the Status Bar, and then choose the bookmark. + + Insert Bookmark + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp index 79fa73fe6a..49fccef514 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Using Shortcut Keys ($[officename] Writer Accessibility) -/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Using Shortcut Keys ($[officename] Writer Accessibility) + /text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp + + + keyboard; accessibility $[officename] Writer -accessibility; $[officename] Writer + accessibility; $[officename] Writer -Using Shortcut Keys ($[officename] Writer Accessibility) +Using Shortcut Keys ($[officename] Writer Accessibility) - -Press the keys OptionAlt+<underlined character> to open a menu. In an open menu, press the underlined character to run a command. For example, press OptionAlt+I to open the Insert menu, and then T to insert a table. -To open a context menu, press Shift+F10. To close a context menu, press Escape. -Inserting Sections - - -Choose View - Toolbars - Insert to open the Insert toolbar. - - -Press F6 until the focus is on the Insert toolbar. - - -Press the right arrow key until the Section icon is selected. - - -Press the down arrow key, and then press the right arrow key to set the width of the section that you want to insert. - - -Press Enter. - - -Press F6 to place the cursor inside the document. - - -Inserting Text Tables - - -Press F6 until the focus is on the Standard toolbar. - - -Press the right arrow key until the Table icon is selected. - - -Press the down arrow key, and then use the arrow keys to select the number of columns and rows to include in the table. - - -Press Enter. - - -Press F6 to place the cursor inside the document. - - - - - - - + + Press the keys Option +Alt+<underlined character> to open a menu. In an open menu, press the underlined character to run a command. For example, press Option +Alt+I to open the Insert menu, and then T to insert a table. + To open a context menu, press Shift+F10. To close a context menu, press Escape. + To Insert Sections + + + Choose View - Toolbars - Insert to open the Insert toolbar. + + + Press F6 until the focus is on the + Insert toolbar. + + + Press the right arrow key until the Section icon is selected. + + + Press the down arrow key, and then press the right arrow key to set the width of the section that you want to insert. + + + Press Enter. + + + Press F6 to place the cursor inside the document. + + + To Insert Text Tables + + + Press F6 until the focus is on the + Standard toolbar. + + + Press the right arrow key until the Table icon is selected. + + + Press the down arrow key, and then use the arrow keys to select the number of columns and rows to include in the table. + + + Press Enter. + + + Press F6 to place the cursor inside the document. + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp index af923cdf79..c0de27ebc1 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp @@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ * * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * - * $RCSfile: load_styles.xhp,v $ - * $Revision: 1.8.4.1 $ + * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ + * $Revision: 1.10 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,47 +35,42 @@ - -Using Styles From Another Document or Template -/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp - - - + + Using Styles From Another Document or Template + /text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp + + + formatting styles; importing -styles; importing from other files -importing;styles from other files -loading;styles from other files + styles; importing from other files + importing;styles from other files + loading;styles from other files -Using Styles From Another Document or Template +Using Styles From Another Document or Template -You can import styles from another document or template into the current document. - - -Choose Format - Styles and Formatting to open the Styles and Formatting window. - - -Click the arrow next to the New Style from Selection icon to open the submenu. - - -Choose Load styles. - - -Use the check boxes at the bottom of the dialog to select the style types that you want to import. To replace styles in the current document that have the same name as the ones you are importing, select Overwrite. - - -Do one of the following: - + You can import styles from another document or template into the current document. + + + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting to open the Styles and Formatting window. + + + Click the arrow next to the New Style from Selection icon to open the submenu. + + + Choose Load styles. + + + Use the check boxes at the bottom of the dialog to select the style types that you want to import. To replace styles in the current document that have the same name as the ones you are importing, select Overwrite. + + + Do one of the following: + + + - - -Click an entry in the Categories list, then click the template containing the styles that you want to use in the Templates list, and then click OK. - - -Click From File, locate the file containing the styles that you want to use, click the name, and then click Open. - - - - - - - + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp index f1e8346412..61fa84c798 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp @@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ * * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * - * $RCSfile: navigator.xhp,v $ - * $Revision: 1.10.4.1 $ + * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ + * $Revision: 1.10 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,35 +35,35 @@ - -Navigator for Text Documents -/text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp - - - + + Navigator for Text Documents + /text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp + + + Navigator; overview in texts -hyperlinks;jumping to -objects;quickly moving to, within text -frames;jumping to -tables;jumping to -headings;jumping to -pages;jumping to -jumping;to text elements -overviews;Navigator in text documents + hyperlinks;jumping to + objects;quickly moving to, within text + frames;jumping to + tables;jumping to + headings;jumping to + pages;jumping to + jumping;to text elements + overviews;Navigator in text documents MW added "pages;" -Navigator for Text Documents +Navigator for Text Documents -The Navigator displays the different parts of your document, such as headings, tables, frames, objects, or hyperlinks. - - -To open the Navigator, press F5. - - -To quickly jump to a location in your document, double-click an item listed in the Navigator window or enter the respective page number in the spin box. - - - - -Navigator - - + The Navigatordisplays the different parts of your document, such as headings, tables, frames, objects, or hyperlinks. + + + To open the Navigator, press F5. + + + To quickly jump to a location in your document, double-click an item listed in the Navigator window or enter the respective page number in the spin box. + + + + + Navigator + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/nonprintable_text.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/nonprintable_text.xhp index 443248f9d2..146f8e5189 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/nonprintable_text.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/nonprintable_text.xhp @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ - * $Revision: 1.8 $ + * $Revision: 1.10 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,37 +35,39 @@ - -Creating Non-printing Text -/text/swriter/guide/nonprintable_text.xhp - - - + + Creating Non-printing Text + /text/swriter/guide/nonprintable_text.xhp + + + non-printing text -text; non-printable + text; non-printable mw copied two entries from hidden_text.xhp -Creating Non-printing Text +Creating Non-printing Text MW created this guide from hidden_text.xhp -To create text that is not to be printed do the following: - - -Choose Insert - Frame. - - -Enter text in the frame and if you want, resize the frame. - - -Choose Format - Frame/Object, and then click the Options tab. - - -In the Properties area, clear the Print check box. - - -Click OK. - - -
-Hiding Text -
- - +To create text that is not to be printed do the following: + + + Choose Insert – Frame + and click OK. + + + Enter text in the frame and if you want, resize the frame. + + + Choose Format - Frame/Object, and then click the + Options tab. + + + In the Properties area, clear the Print check box. + + + Click OK. + + +
+ Hiding Text +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/number_date_conv.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/number_date_conv.xhp index 7a7fa4b4e1..6086d36072 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/number_date_conv.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/number_date_conv.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Turning Number Recognition On or Off in Tables -/text/swriter/guide/number_date_conv.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: see sw.features "Number regognition in tables is off" -YJ:checked - - - + + Turning Number Recognition On or Off in Tables + /text/swriter/guide/number_date_conv.xhp + + + numbers; automatic recognition in text tables -tables; number recognition -dates;formatting automatically in tables -MW changed "number recognition..." to "number;" -Turning Number Recognition On or Off in Tables + tables; number recognition + dates;formatting automatically in tables + recognition;numbers +MW added "recognition;" +Turning Number Recognition On or Off in Tables -$[officename] can automatically format dates that you have entered into a table, according to the regional settings specified in your operating system. -Do one of the following: - - -Right-click in a table cell and choose Number recognition. When this feature is on, a check mark is displayed in front of the Number recognition command. - - - - -Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table, and select or clear the Number recognition check box. - - - -Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table - - + $[officename] can automatically format dates that you have entered into a table, according to the regional settings specified in your operating system. + Do one of the following: + + + Right-click in a table cell and choose Number recognition. When this feature is on, a check mark is displayed in front of the Number recognition + command. + + + + + Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table, and select or clear the Number recognition + check box. + + + + Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp index 43b4714a03..12fee7a6e9 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Defining Number Ranges -/text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Defining Number Ranges + /text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp + + + numbering;quotations/similar items MW deleted "number ranges;" and changed "numbering;" -Defining Number Ranges +Defining Number Ranges -You can automatically number similar items, such as quotations, in your document. - - -Type the text that you want to assign numbering to, for example, "Quotation Number ". - - -Choose Insert - Fields - Other, and then click the Variables tab. - - - - -Click "Number range" in the Type list. - - -Type "Quotation" in the Name box. - - -Do one of the following: - - - - -Type a number in the Value box, or leave the box empty to use automatic numbering. - - -Select the outline level where you want the numbering to restart in the Level box. - - - - -Click Insert, and then click Close. - - - - - - - - - - - + You can automatically number similar items, such as quotations, in your document. + + + Type the text that you want to assign numbering to, for example, "Quotation Number ". + + + Choose Insert - Fields - Other, and then click the Variables + tab. + + + + + Click "Number range" in the Type + list. + + + Type "Quotation" in the Name + box. + + + Do one of the following: + + + + + + Click Insert, and then click Close. + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp index 873f3733bf..25c64deba5 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Adding Line Numbers -/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp - - - + + Adding Line Numbers + /text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp + + + line numbers -text; line numbers -lines of text; numbering -numbering; lines -numbers; line numbering -marginal numbers on text pages -mw deleted "adding;"Adding Line Numbers + text; line numbers + paragraphs;line numbers + lines of text; numbering + numbering; lines + numbers; line numbering + marginal numbers on text pages +MW added "paragraphs;" +Adding Line Numbers -$[officename] can insert line numbers in an entire document or to selected paragraphs in your document. Line numbers are included when you print your document. You can specify the line numbering interval, the starting line number, and whether to count blank lines or lines in frames. You can also add a separator between line numbers. -Line numbers are not available in HTML format. -To add line numbers to an entire document: - - -Choose Tools - Line Numbering. - - -Select Show numbering, and then select the options that you want. - - -Click OK. - - -To add line numbers to specific paragraphs: - - -Choose Tools - Line Numbering. - - -Select Show numbering. - - -Press F11 to open the Styles and Formatting window, and then click the Paragraph Styles icon. - - -Right-click the "Default" paragraph style and choose Modify. -All paragraph styles are based on the "Default" style. - - - - -Click the Numbering tab. - - -In the Line Numbering area, clear the Include this paragraph in line numbering check box. - - -Click OK. - - -Select the paragraph(s) where you want to add the line numbers. - - -Choose Format - Paragraph, and then click the Numbering tab. - - -Select Include this paragraph in line numbering. - - -Click OK. - - -You can also create a paragraph style that includes line numbering, and apply it to the paragraphs that you want to add line numbers to. -To specify the starting line number: - - -Click in a paragraph. - - -Choose Format - Paragraph, and then click the Numbering tab. - - -Select the Include this paragraph in line numbering check box. - - -Select Restart at the paragraph check box. - - -Enter a line number in the Start with box. - - -Click OK. - - - -Tools - Line Numbering - -Format - Paragraph - Numbering -Wiki page about numbering paragraphs by styles - - + $[officename] can insert line numbers in an entire document or to selected paragraphs in your document. Line numbers are included when you print your document. You can specify the line numbering interval, the starting line number, and whether to count blank lines or lines in frames. You can also add a separator between line numbers. + Line numbers are not available in HTML format. + To Add Line Numbers to an Entire Document + + + Choose Tools - Line Numbering. + + + Select Show numbering, and then select the options that you want. + + + Click OK. + + + To Add Line Numbers to Specific Paragraphs + + + Choose Tools - Line Numbering. + + + Select Show numbering. + + + Press F11 to open the Styles and Formatting window, and then click the Paragraph Styles icon. + + + Right-click the "Default" paragraph style and choose Modify. + All paragraph styles are based on the "Default" style. + + + + + Click the Numbering tab. + + + In the Line Numbering + area, clear the Include this paragraph in line numbering + check box. + + + Click OK. + + + Select the paragraph(s) where you want to add the line numbers. + + + Choose Format - Paragraph, and then click the Numbering + tab. + + + Select Include this paragraph in line numbering. + + + Click OK. + + + You can also create a paragraph style that includes line numbering, and apply it to the paragraphs that you want to add line numbers to. + To Specify the Starting Line Number + + + Click in a paragraph. + + + Choose Format - Paragraph, and then click the Numbering + tab. + + + Select the Include this paragraph in line numbering + check box. + + + Select Restart at the paragraph + check box. + + + Enter a line number in the Start with + box. + + + Click OK. + + + + Tools - Line Numbering + + Format - Paragraph - Numbering + Wiki page about numbering paragraphs by styles + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp index 96070b1a74..6949f80682 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Modifying Numbering in a Numbered List -/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp - - - + + Modifying Numbering in a Numbered List + /text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp + + + numbering; removing/interrupting -bullet lists; interrupting -lists;removing/interrupting numbering -deleting;numbers in lists -interrupting numbered lists -changing;starting numbers in lists -MW changed "removing;..." to "deleting;...", and deleted "modifying;..."Modifying Numbering in a Numbered List + bullet lists; interrupting + lists;removing/interrupting numbering + deleting;numbers in lists + interrupting numbered lists + changing;starting numbers in lists +MW changed "removing;..." to "deleting;...", and deleted "modifying;..." +Modifying Numbering in a Numbered List -You can remove the numbering from a paragraph in a numbered list or change the number that a numbered list starts with. -If you want numbered headings, use the Tools - Outline Numbering menu command to assign a numbering to a paragraph style. Do not use the Numbering icon on the Formatting toolbar. -To remove the number from a paragraph in a numbered list: - - -Click in front of the first character of the paragraph that you want to remove the numbering from. - - -Do one of the following: - - - - -To remove the number while preserving the indent of the paragraph, press the Backspace key. - - -To remove the number and the indent of the paragraph, click the Numbering on/off icon on the Formatting Bar. If you save the document in HTML format, a separate numbered list is created for the numbered paragraphs that follow the current paragraph. - - -To change the number that a numbered list starts with: - - -Click anywhere in the numbered list. - - -Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering, and then click the Options tab. - - -Enter the number you want the list to start with in the Start at box. - - -Click OK. - - - - - - - - - -Wiki page about numbering paragraphs by styles - - + You can remove the numbering from a paragraph in a numbered list or change the number that a numbered list starts with. + If you want numbered headings, use the Tools - Outline Numbering menu command to assign a numbering to a paragraph style. Do not use the Numbering icon on the Formatting toolbar. + To Remove the Number From a Paragraph in a Numbered List + + + Click in front of the first character of the paragraph that you want to remove the numbering from. + + + Do one of the following: + + + + To Change the Number That a Numbered List Starts With + + + Click anywhere in the numbered list. + + + Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering, and then click the Options tab. + + + Enter the number you want the list to start with in the Start + at box. + + + Click OK. + + + + + + + + + + Wiki page about numbering paragraphs by styles + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp index 0bbf114ca7..a5fb09b70c 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Inserting and Deleting Page Breaks -/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Inserting and Deleting Page Breaks + /text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp + + + page breaks; inserting and deleting -inserting; page breaks -deleting;page breaks -pages; inserting/deleting page breaks -manual page breaks - -Inserting and Deleting Page Breaks + inserting; page breaks + deleting;page breaks + pages; inserting/deleting page breaks + manual page breaks + tables;deleting page breaks before +MW added "tables;" +Inserting and Deleting Page Breaks -To insert a manual page break: - - -Click in your document where you want the new page to begin. - - -Press Ctrl+Enter. - - -To delete a manual page break: - - -Click in front of the first character on the page that follows the manual page break. - - -Press Backspace. - - -To delete a manual page break that occurs before a table: - - -Right-click in the table, and choose Table. - - -Click the Text Flow tab. - - -Clear the Break check box. - - - - -Insert Break dialog - - + To Insert a Manual Page Break + + + Click in your document where you want the new page to begin. + + + Press Ctrl+Enter. + + + To Delete a Manual Page Break + + + Click in front of the first character on the page that follows the manual page break. + + + Press Backspace. + + + To Delete a Manual Page Break That Occurs Before a Table + + + Right-click in the table, and choose Table. + + + Click the Text Flow tab. + + + Clear the Break check box. + + + + + Insert Break dialog + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp index 15959f83c5..46828f209e 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Changing Page Backgrounds -/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp - - -UFI: part of a series of files to fix #i29922# -dedr: reviewed - - - + + Changing Page Backgrounds + /text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp + + + page styles;backgrounds -backgrounds; different pages -changing;page backgrounds -pages;backgrounds + backgrounds; different pages + changing;page backgrounds + pages;backgrounds MW deleted "page backgrounds" -Changing Page Background +Changing Page Background -$[officename] uses page styles to specify the background of the pages in a document. For example, to change the page background of one or more pages in a document to a watermark, you need to create a page style that uses the watermark background, and then apply the page style to the pages. -
-To Change the Page Background - - -Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. - - -Click the Page Styles icon. - - -In the list of page styles, right-click an item, and then choose New. - - -On the Organizer tab page, type a name for the page style in the Name box. - - -In the Next Style box, select the page style that you want to apply to the next page. - - - - -To only apply the new page style to a single page, select "Default". - - -To apply the new page style to all subsequent pages, select the name of the new page style. - - - - -Click the Background tab. - - -In the list box at the top, select whether you want a solid color or a graphic. Then select your options from the tab page. - - -Click OK. - - -
-To Change the Page Background of All Pages in a Document -Before you begin, ensure that you have created a page style that uses a page background. See To Change the Page Background for details. - - -Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. - - -Click the Page Styles icon. - - -Double-click the page style that uses the page background that you want to apply. - - -To Use Different Page Backgrounds in the Same Document -Before you begin, ensure that you have created a page style that uses a page background. See To Change the Page Background for details. - - -Click in front of the first character of the paragraph where you want to change the page background. - - -Choose Insert - Manual Break. - - -Select Page break. - - -In the Style box, select a page style that uses the page background. - - - - -To change the background of the current page only, select a page style where the Next Style option is set to "Default". - - -To change the background of the current and subsequent pages, select a page style where the Next Style option is set to the name of the page style. -If you want to change the page background later on in the document, repeat steps 1 to 3. - - - - -Click OK. - - - - - - - - - + $[officename] uses page styles to specify the background of the pages in a document. For example, to change the page background of one or more pages in a document to a watermark, you need to create a page style that uses the watermark background, and then apply the page style to the pages. +
+ To Change the Page Background + + + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. + + + Click the Page Styles icon. + + + In the list of page styles, right-click an item, and then choose New. + + + On the Organizer tab page, type a name for the page style in the Name box. + + + In the Next Style box, select the page style that you want to apply to the next page. + + + + + + Click the Background tab. + + + In the list box at the top, select whether you want a solid color or a graphic. Then select your options from the tab page. + + + Click OK. + + +
+ To Change the Page Background of All Pages in a Document + Before you begin, ensure that you have created a page style that uses a page background. See To Change the Page Background for details. + + + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. + + + Click the Page Styles icon. + + + Double-click the page style that uses the page background that you want to apply. + + + To Use Different Page Backgrounds in the Same Document + Before you begin, ensure that you have created a page style that uses a page background. See To Change the Page Background for details. + + + Click in front of the first character of the paragraph where you want to change the page background. + + + Choose Insert - Manual Break. + + + Select Page break. + + + In the Style + box, select a page style that uses the page background. + + + + + + Click OK. + + + If you want to change the page background later on in the document, repeat steps 1 to 3. + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp index 2e6fdf5ecd..9e9c78c676 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Page Numbers -/text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp - - - + + Page Numbers + /text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp + + + page numbers;inserting/defining/formatting -page styles;page numbering -starting page numbers -formatting;page numbers -defining;starting page numbers -inserting;page numbers -mw inserted six index entriesPage Numbers + page styles;page numbering + starting page numbers + formatting;page numbers + defining;starting page numbers + inserting;page numbers + styles;page numbers +mw inserted six index entriesmw added "styles;" +Page Numbers -In Writer, a page number is a field that you can insert into your text. -Inserting page numbers - - -Choose Insert - Fields - Page Number to insert a page number at the current cursor position. - - -If you see the text "Page number" instead of the number, choose View - Field names. -However, these fields will change position when you add or remove text. So it is best to insert the page number field into a header or footer that has the same position and that is repeated on every page. - - -Choose Insert - Header - (name of page style) or Insert - Footer - (name of page style) to add a header or footer to all pages with the current Page Style. - - -Starting with a defined page number -Now you want some more control on page numbers. You are writing a text document that should start with page number 12. - - -Click into the first paragraph of your document. - - -Choose Format - Paragraph - Text flow. - - -In the Breaks area, enable Insert. Enable With Page Style just to be able to set the new Page number. Click OK. - - -The new page number is an attribute of the first paragraph of the page. -Formatting the page number style -You want roman page numbers running i, ii, iii, iv, and so on. - - -Double-click directly before the page number field. You see the Edit Fields dialog. - - -Select a number format and click OK. - - -Using different page number styles -You need some pages with the roman numbering style, followed by the remaining pages in another style. -In Writer, you will need different Page Styles. The first Page Style has a footer with a page number field formatted for roman numbers. The following Page Style has a footer with a page number field formatted in another look. -Both Page Styles must be separated by a page break. In Writer, you can have automatic page breaks and manually inserted page breaks. - - -An automatic page break appears at the end of a page when the Page Style has a different "next style". -For example, the "First Page" Page Style has "Default" as the next style. To see this, you may press F11 to open the Styles and Formatting window, click the Page Styles icon, right-click the First Page entry. Choose Modify from the context menu. On the Organizer tab, you can see the "next style". - - -A manually inserted page break can be applied without or with a change of page styles. -If you just press Ctrl+Enter, you apply a page break without a change of styles. -If you choose Insert - Manual break, you can insert a page break without or with a change of style or with a change of page number. - - -It depends on your document what is best: to use a manually inserted page break between Page Styles, or to use an automatic change. If you just need one title page with a different style than the other pages, you can use the automatic method: -To apply a different page style to the first page - - -Click into the first page of your document. - - -Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. - - -In the Styles and Formatting window, click the Page Styles icon. - - -Double-click the "First Page" style. - - -Now your title page has the style "First Page", and the next pages automatically have the "Default" style. -You can now for example insert a footer for the "Default" Page Style only, or insert footers in both Page Styles, but with differently formatted page number fields. -To apply a manually inserted Page Style change - - -Click at the start of the first paragraph on the page where a different Page Style will be applied. - - -Choose Insert - Manual Break. You see the Insert Break dialog. - - -In the Style list box, select a Page Style. You may set a new page number, too. Click OK. - - -The selected page style will be used from the current paragraph to the next page break with style. You may need to create the new Page Style first. - - - - - - - - - + In Writer, a page number is a field that you can insert into your text. + To Insert Page Numbers + Choose Insert - Fields - Page Number to insert a page number at the current cursor position. + If you see the text "Page number" instead of the number, choose View - Field names. + However, these fields will change position when you add or remove text. So it is best to insert the page number field into a header or footer that has the same position and that is repeated on every page. + Choose Insert - Header - (name of page style) or Insert - Footer - (name of page style) to add a header or footer to all pages with the current page style. + To Start With a Defined Page Number + Now you want some more control on page numbers. You are writing a text document that should start with page number 12. + + + Click into the first paragraph of your document. + + + Choose Format - Paragraph - Text flow. + + + In the Breaks area, enable Insert. Enable With Page Style just to be able to set the new Page number. Click OK. + + + The new page number is an attribute of the first paragraph of the page. + To Format the Page Number Style + You want roman page numbers running i, ii, iii, iv, and so on. + + + Double-click directly before the page number field. You see the Edit Fields dialog. + + + Select a number format and click OK. + + + Using Different Page Number Styles + You need some pages with the roman numbering style, followed by the remaining pages in another style. + In Writer, you will need different page styles. The first page style has a footer with a page number field formatted for roman numbers. The following page style has a footer with a page number field formatted in another look. + Both page styles must be separated by a page break. In Writer, you can have automatic page breaks and manually inserted page breaks. + + + An automatic page break appears at the end of a page when the page style has a different "next style". + For example, the "First Page" page style has "Default" as the next style. To see this, you may press F11 to open the Styles and Formatting window, click the Page Styles icon, right-click the First Page entry. Choose Modify from the context menu. On the Organizer tab, you can see the "next style". + + + A manually inserted page break can be applied without or with a change of page styles. + If you just press Ctrl+Enter, you apply a page break without a change of styles. + If you choose Insert - Manual break, you can insert a page break without or with a change of style or with a change of page number. + + + It depends on your document what is best: to use a manually inserted page break between page styles, or to use an automatic change. If you just need one title page with a different style than the other pages, you can use the automatic method: + To Apply a Different Page Style to the First Page + + + Click into the first page of your document. + + + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. + + + In the Styles and Formatting window, click the Page Styles icon. + + + Double-click the "First Page" style. + + + Now your title page has the style "First Page", and the next pages automatically have the "Default" style. + You can now for example insert a footer for the "Default" page atyle only, or insert footers in both page styles, but with differently formatted page number fields. + To Apply a Manually Inserted Page Style Change + + + Click at the start of the first paragraph on the page where a different page style will be applied. + + + Choose Insert - Manual Break. You see the Insert Break dialog. + + + In the Style list box, select a page style. You may set a new page number, too. Click OK. + + + The selected page style will be used from the current paragraph to the next page break with style. You may need to create the new page style first. + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp index f378059805..f5df3c65b1 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Changing Page Orientation (Landscape or Portrait) -/text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp - - - + + Changing Page Orientation (Landscape or Portrait) + /text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp + + + page styles;orientation/scope -page formats; changing individual pages -formatting; changing individual pages -portrait and landscape -landscape and portrait -printing;portrait/landscape format -orientation of pages -paper orientation -pages;orientation -sideways orientation of pages -scope of page styles -MW changed "page styles;..." and added one entryChanging Page Orientation + page formats; changing individual pages + formatting; changing individual pages + portrait and landscape + landscape and portrait + printing;portrait/landscape format + orientation of pages + paper orientation + pages;orientation + sideways orientation of pages + scope of page styles +MW changed "page styles;..." and added one entry +Changing Page Orientation -All page properties for Writer text documents, like for example the page orientation, are defined by page styles. By default, a new text document uses the Default page style for all pages. If you open an existing text document, different page styles may have been applied to the different pages. -It is important to know that changes that you apply to a page property will only affect the pages that use the current page style. The current page style is listed in the Status Bar at the lower window border. -To change the page orientation for all pages -If your text document consists only of pages with the same page style, you can change the page properties directly: - - -Choose Format - Page. - - -Click the Page tab. - - -Under Paper format, select Portrait or Landscape. - - -Click OK. - - -To change the page orientation only for some pages -$[officename] uses page styles to specify the orientation of the pages in a document. Page styles define more page properties, as for example header and footer or page margins. You can either change the Default page style for the current document, or you can define own page styles and apply those page styles to any parts of your text. -At the end of this help page, we'll discuss the scope of page styles in detail. If you are unsure about the page style concept, please read the section at the end of this page. -Unlike character styles or paragraph styles, the page styles don't know a hierarchy. You can create a new page style based on the properties of an existing page style, but when you later change the source style, the new page style does not automatically inherit the changes. -To change the page orientation for all pages that share the same page style, you first need a page style, then apply that style: - - -Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. - - -Click the Page Styles icon. - - -Right-click a page style and choose New. The new page style initially gets all properties of the selected page style. - - -On the Organizer tab page, type a name for the page style in the Name box, for example "My Landscape". - - -In the Next Style box, select the page style that you want to apply to the next page that follows a page with the new style. See the section about the scope of page styles at the end of this help page. - - -Click the Page tab. - - -Under Paper format, select Portrait or Landscape. - - -Click OK. - - -Now you have defined a proper page style with the name "My Landscape". To apply the new style, double-click the "My Landscape" page style in the Styles and Formatting window. All pages in the current scope of page styles will be changed. If you defined the "next style" to be a different style, only the first page of the current scope of page styles will be changed. -
-The scope of page styles -You should be aware of the scope of page styles in %PRODUCTNAME. Which pages of your text document get affected by editing a page style? -One page long styles -A page style can be defined to span one page only. The First Page style is an example. You set this property by defining another page style to be the "next style", on the Format - Page - Organizer tab page. -A one page long style starts from the lower border of the current page style range up to the next page break. The next page break appears automatically when the text flows to the next page, which is sometimes called a "soft page break". Alternatively, you can insert a manual page break. - - -To insert a manual page break at the cursor position, press Ctrl+Enter or choose Insert - Manual Break and just click OK. - - -Manually defined range of a page style -The Default page style does not set a different "next style" on the Format - Page - Organizer tab page. Instead, the "next style" is set also to be Default. All page styles that are followed by the same page style can span multiple pages. The lower and upper borders of the page style range are defined by "page breaks with style". All the pages between any two "page breaks with style" use the same page style. -You can insert a "page break with style" directly at the cursor position. Alternatively, you can apply the "page break with style" property to a paragraph or to a paragraph style. -Perform any one of the following commands: - - -To insert a "page break with style" at the cursor position, choose Insert - Manual Break, select a Style name from the listbox, and click OK. - - -To apply the "page break with style" property to the current paragraph, choose Format - Paragraph - Text Flow. In the Breaks area, activate Enable and With Page Style. Select a page style name from the listbox. - - -To apply the "page break with style" property to the current paragraph style, right-click the current paragraph. Choose Edit Paragraph Style from the context menu. Click the Text Flow tab. In the Breaks area, activate Enable and With Page Style. Select a page style name from the listbox. - - -To apply the "page break with style" property to an arbitrary paragraph style, choose Format - Styles and Formatting. Click the Paragraph Styles icon. Right-click the name of the paragraph style you want to modify and choose Modify. Click the Text Flow tab. In the Breaks area, activate Enable and With Page Style. Select a page style name from the listbox. - - -
- - - - - - - + All page properties for Writer text documents, like for example the page orientation, are defined by page styles. By default, a new text document uses the “Default” page style for all pages. If you open an existing text document, different page styles may have been applied to the different pages. + It is important to know that changes that you apply to a page property will only affect the pages that use the current page style. The current page style is listed in the Status Bar at the lower window border. + To Change the Page Orientation for All Pages + If your text document consists only of pages with the same page style, you can change the page properties directly: + + + Choose Format - Page. + + + Click the Page tab. + + + Under Paper format, select “Portrait” or “Landscape”. + + + Click OK. + + + To Change the Page Orientation Only for Some Pages + $[officename] uses page styles to specify the orientation of the pages in a document. Page styles define more page properties, as for example header and footer or page margins. You can either change the “Default” page style for the current document, or you can define own page styles and apply those page styles to any parts of your text. + At the end of this help page, we'll discuss the scope of page styles in detail. If you are unsure about the page style concept, please read the section at the end of this page. + Unlike character styles or paragraph styles, the page styles don't know a hierarchy. You can create a new page style based on the properties of an existing page style, but when you later change the source style, the new page style does not automatically inherit the changes. + To change the page orientation for all pages that share the same page style, you first need a page style, then apply that style: + + + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. + + + Click the Page Styles icon. + + + Right-click a page style and choose New. The new page style initially gets all properties of the selected page style. + + + On the Organizer tab page, type a name for the page style in the Name box, for example "My Landscape". + + + In the Next Style box, select the page style that you want to apply to the next page that follows a page with the new style. See the section about the scope of page styles at the end of this help page. + + + Click the Page tab. + + + Under Paper format, select “Portrait” or “Landscape”. + + + Click OK. + + + Now you have defined a proper page style with the name "My Landscape". To apply the new style, double-click the "My Landscape" page style in the Styles and Formatting window. All pages in the current scope of page styles will be changed. If you defined the "next style" to be a different style, only the first page of the current scope of page styles will be changed. +
+ The Scope of Page Styles + You should be aware of the scope of page styles in %PRODUCTNAME. Which pages of your text document get affected by editing a page style? + One Page Long Styles + A page style can be defined to span one page only. The “First Page” style is an example. You set this property by defining another page style to be the "next style", on the Format - Page - Organizer tab page. + A one page long style starts from the lower border of the current page style range up to the next page break. The next page break appears automatically when the text flows to the next page, which is sometimes called a "soft page break". Alternatively, you can insert a manual page break. + To insert a manual page break at the cursor position, press Ctrl+Enter or choose Insert - Manual Break and just click OK. + Manually Defined Range of a Page style + The “Default” page style does not set a different "next style" on the Format - Page - Organizer tab page. Instead, the "next style" is set also to be “Default”. All page styles that are followed by the same page style can span multiple pages. The lower and upper borders of the page style range are defined by "page breaks with style". All the pages between any two "page breaks with style" use the same page style. + You can insert a "page break with style" directly at the cursor position. Alternatively, you can apply the "page break with style" property to a paragraph or to a paragraph style. + Perform any one of the following commands: + + + To insert a "page break with style" at the cursor position, choose Insert - Manual Break, select a Style name from the listbox, and click OK. + + + To apply the "page break with style" property to the current paragraph, choose Format - Paragraph - Text Flow. In the Breaks area, activate Enable and With Page Style. Select a page style name from the listbox. + + + To apply the "page break with style" property to the current paragraph style, right-click the current paragraph. Choose Edit Paragraph Style from the context menu. Click the Text Flow tab. In the Breaks area, activate Enable and With Page Style. Select a page style name from the listbox. + + + To apply the "page break with style" property to an arbitrary paragraph style, choose Format - Styles and Formatting. Click the Paragraph Styles icon. Right-click the name of the paragraph style you want to modify and choose Modify. Click the Text Flow tab. In the Breaks area, activate Enable and With Page Style. Select a page style name from the listbox. + + +
+ + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp index 2f9f2e05e5..94349ac66c 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Creating and Applying Page Styles -/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp - - - - - - + + Creating and Applying Page Styles + /text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp + + + page styles;creating and applying -defining;page styles -styles;for pages - - MW deleted "applying;" and added "styles;" - Creating and Applying Page Styles + defining;page styles + styles;for pages +MW deleted "applying;" and added "styles;" +Creating and Applying Page Styles - $[officename] uses page styles to specify the layout of a page, including the page orientation, background, margins, headers, footers, and text columns. To change the layout of an individual page in a document, you must create and apply a custom page style to the page. - - - To define a new page style: - - - Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. - - - Click the Page Styles icon. - - - In the list of page styles, right-click an item, and then choose New. - - - On the Organizer tab, type a name in the Name box. - - - Do one of the following: - - - - - To apply the custom page style to a single page, select the default page style that is used in your document in the Next Style box. - - - To apply the custom page style to more than one page, select its name in the Next Style box. To stop using the style, insert a manual page break and assign it a different page style. - - - - - Use the tabs in the dialog to set the layout options for the page style, and then click OK. - - - To apply a page style: - - - Click in the page that you want to apply the page style to. - - - Choose Format - Styles and Formatting, and then click the Page Style icon. - - - Double-click a name in the list. - - - To apply a page style to a new page: - - - Click in the document where you want a new page to start. - - - Choose Insert - Manual Break. - - - Select Page break. - - - In the Style box, select the page style that you want to apply to the page that follows the manual break. - - - Click OK. - - - - - - - - - - - + $[officename] uses page styles to specify the layout of a page, including the page orientation, background, margins, headers, footers, and text columns. To change the layout of an individual page in a document, you must create and apply a custom page style to the page. + + + + + + + To Define a New Page Style + + + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting + . + + + + Click the Page Styles icon. + + + In the list of page styles, right-click an item, and then choose New. + + + On the Organizer tab, type a name in the Name box. + + + Do one of the following: + + + + + + Use the tabs in the dialog to set the layout options for the page style, and then click OK. + + + To Apply a Page Style + + + Click in the page that you want to apply the page style to. + + + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting, and then click the + Page Style icon. + + + Double-click a name in the list. + + + To Apply a Page Style to a New Page + + + Click in the document where you want a new page to start. + + + Choose Insert - Manual Break. + + + Select Page break. + + + In the Style + box, select the page style that you want to apply to the page that follows the manual break. + + + Click OK. + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_brochure.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_brochure.xhp index b62c42d70b..a58703a79c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_brochure.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_brochure.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Printing a Brochure -/text/swriter/guide/print_brochure.xhp - - -UFI: Guide printing brochures -DEDR: reviewed - - - + + Printing a Brochure + /text/swriter/guide/print_brochure.xhp + + + printing; individual brochures -booklet printing -brochures; printing individual + booklet printing + brochures; printing individual -Printing a Brochure +Printing a Brochure -You can print a Writer document as a brochure or a booklet. That is, Writer prints two pages on each side of the paper, so that when you fold the paper, you can read the document as a book. -When you create a document that you want to print as a brochure, use portrait orientation for the pages. Writer applies the brochure layout when you print the document. -To Print a Brochure - - -Choose File - Print. - - -In the Print dialog, click Properties. - - -In the properties dialog for your printer, set the paper orientation to landscape. - - -If your printer prints duplex, and because brochures always print in landscape mode, you should use the "duplex - short edge" setting in your printer setup dialog. - - -Return to Print dialog, and click Options. - - -In the Pages area of the Printer Options dialog, select Brochure. - - -For a printer that automatically prints on both sides of a page, specify to print right pages and left pages. - - - - -In the Print dialog, click OK. - - - -If %PRODUCTNAME prints the pages in the wrong order, open the Printer Options dialog, select Reversed, and then print the document again. - - + You can print a Writer document as a brochure or a booklet. That is, Writer prints two pages on each side of the paper, so that when you fold the paper, you can read the document as a book. + When you create a document that you want to print as a brochure, use portrait orientation for the pages. Writer applies the brochure layout when you print the document. + To Print a Brochure + + + Choose File - Print. + + + In the Print dialog, click Properties. + + + In the properties dialog for your printer, set the paper orientation to landscape. + + + If your printer prints duplex, and because brochures always print in landscape mode, you should use the "duplex - short edge" setting in your printer setup dialog. + + + Return to Print dialog, and click Options. + + + In the Pages area of the Printer Options dialog, select Brochure. + + + For a printer that automatically prints on both sides of a page, specify to print right pages and left pages. + + + + + In the Print dialog, click OK. + + + + If %PRODUCTNAME prints the pages in the wrong order, open the Printer Options dialog, select Reversed, and then print the document again. + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp index c679bcbeca..91e21cec45 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Previewing a Page Before Printing -/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp - - - + + Previewing a Page Before Printing + /text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp + + + printing; previews -previews; print layouts -print layout checks -book view -pages;previews -MW changed "page views" to "pages;previews"Previewing a Page Before Printing + previews; print layouts + print layout checks + book view + pages;previews +MW changed "page views" to "pages;previews" +Previewing a Page Before Printing - - -Choose File - Page Preview. - - -Use the zoom icons on the Page Preview bar to reduce or enlarge the view of the page. -To print your document scaled down, print the zoomed preview. Click Print options page view icon to set the print options. - - -Use the arrow keys or the arrow icons on the Page Preview bar to scroll through the document. - - -
- -File - Page Preview. -
- - + + + Choose File - Page Preview. + + + Use the zoom icons on the Page Preview bar to reduce or enlarge the view of the page. + To print your document scaled down, print the zoomed preview. Click Print options page view icon to set the print options. + + + Use the arrow keys or the arrow icons on the Page Preview bar to scroll through the document. + + +
+ + File - Page Preview. +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp index ca743315dd..70ff3b30d3 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet -/text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp - - - - - - + + Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet + /text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp + + + multi-page view of documents -pages;printing multiple on one sheet -overviews;printing multi-page view -printing;multiple pages per sheet -reduced printing of multiple pages - - MW changed "overviews;" - Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet + pages;printing multiple on one sheet + overviews;printing multi-page view + printing;multiple pages per sheet + reduced printing of multiple pages + MW changed "overviews;" +Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet - In Page Preview mode, you have the option to print multiple pages on one sheet. - - - Choose File - Page Preview. - - - Do one of the following: - - - - - To print two pages side by side on the same sheet, click the Page Preview: Two Pages icon -Icon - on the Page Preview bar. - - - To print multiple pages on the same sheet, click the Print options page view icon -Icon - on the Page Preview bar and set the options that you want. - - - - - Click the Print page view icon -Icon + In Page Preview mode, you have the option to print multiple pages on one sheet. + + + Choose File - Page Preview. + + + Do one of the following: + + + + + + Click the Print page view icon +Icon . - - -
- - - File - Page Preview - -
- - + + +
+ + File - Page Preview +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp index 2dd5f6dce0..af8605de3b 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Selecting printer paper trays -/text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Selecting printer paper trays + /text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp + + + selecting;paper trays -paper tray selection + paper tray selection mw made "paper trays;..." a one level entry -Selecting Printer Paper Trays +Selecting Printer Paper Trays -Use page styles to specify different paper sources for different pages in your document. - - -Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. - - -Click the Page Styles icon. - - -Right-click the page style in the list that you want to specify the paper source for, and then choose Modify. - - -In the Paper tray box, select the paper tray that you want to use. - - -Click OK. - - -Repeat steps 1-5 for each page style that you want to specify the paper for. - - -Apply the page style to the pages that you want. - - - - -Creating and applying page styles - - + Use page styles to specify different paper sources for different pages in your document. + + + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. + + + Click the Page Styles + icon. + + + Right-click the page style in the list that you want to specify the paper source for, and then choose Modify. + + + In the Paper tray + box, select the paper tray that you want to use. + + + Click OK. + + + Repeat steps 1-5 for each page style that you want to specify the paper for. + + + Apply the page style to the pages that you want. + + + + + Creating and applying page styles + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printing_order.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printing_order.xhp index 78c603d92d..083a6792e3 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printing_order.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printing_order.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Printing in Reverse Order -/text/swriter/guide/printing_order.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Printing in Reverse Order + /text/swriter/guide/printing_order.xhp + + + ordering;printing in reverse order -printing; reverse order + printing; reverse order -Printing in Reverse Order +Printing in Reverse Order - - -Choose File - Print. - - -Click Options button. - - -In the Pages area, select Reversed. - - -Click OK. - - -In the Print dialog, click OK. - - - - -Printing - - + + + Choose File - Print. + + + Click Options button. + + + In the Pages + area, select Reversed. + + + Click OK. + + + In the Print + dialog, click OK. + + + + + Printing + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp index d9ebaa0018..32219dbddf 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Protecting Content in %PRODUCTNAME Writer -/text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp - - - - - - + + Protecting Content in %PRODUCTNAME Writer + /text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp + + + indexes;unprotecting -tables of contents;unprotecting -tables;protecting/unprotecting cells -sections;protecting/unprotecting -unprotecting tables of contents and indexes -protecting;tables and sections -cells;protecting/unprotecting - - mw transferred 4 index entries from shared/guide/protection.xhp, then changed "sections;" and "tables;", then added 3 new entries - Protecting Content in %PRODUCTNAME Writer + tables of contents;unprotecting + tables;protecting/unprotecting cells + sections;protecting/unprotecting + unprotecting tables of contents and indexes + protecting;tables and sections + cells;protecting/unprotecting +mw transferred 4 index entries from shared/guide/protection.xhp, then changed "sections;" and "tables;", then added 3 new entries +Protecting Content in %PRODUCTNAME Writer - The following is an overview of the different ways of protecting contents in %PRODUCTNAME Writer from being modified, deleted or viewed. - Protecting Sections in %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Any section of a %PRODUCTNAME Writer text document can be protected against changes with a password. - This protection is not intended to be a secure protection. It is just a switch to protect the section against accidental changes. - - - - - - Turning on protection - - - Select the text. Choose Insert - Section - Section, then under Write protection mark the Protect and With password check boxes. (If the section already exists: Format - Sections.) Enter and confirm a password of at least 5 characters. - - - - - Turning off protection - - - Choose Format - Sections - Section and under Write protection clear the Protect check box. Enter the correct password. - - -
- Protecting Cells in a %PRODUCTNAME Writer Table - You can protect the contents of individual cells of a %PRODUCTNAME Writer text table from changes. - This protection is not intended to be a secure protection. It is just a switch to protect the cells against accidental changes. - - - - - - Turning on protection - - - Place the cursor in a cell or select cells. Right-click to open the context menu, then choose Cell - Protect. - - - - - Turning off protection - - - Place the cursor in the cell or select the cells. First, if necessary, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids and mark Cursor in protected areas - Enable. Then right-click the cell to open the context menu, choose Cell - Unprotect. - Select the table in the Navigator, open the context menu and select Table - Unprotect. - Use Shift+Ctrl+T to remove protection for the entire current table or all selected tables. - - -
- Automatic Protection of Indexes and Tables - Tables of contents and indexes created automatically in a %PRODUCTNAME Writer text are automatically protected against accidental changes. - This protection is not intended to be a secure protection. It is just a switch to protect the contents against accidental changes. - - - - - - Turning on protection - - - Place the cursor in the index/table of contents. - From the context menu choose Edit Index/Table. On the Index/Table tab page, mark Protected against manual changes. - - - - - Turning off protection - - - Place the cursor in the index. First of all, if necessary, under Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids , mark Cursor in protected areas - Enable. - From the context menu choose Edit Index/Table. On the Index/Table tab page, unmark Protected against manual changes. - In the Navigator, select the index, then open the context menu in the Navigator and select Index - Read-only. - - -
- - - - Protecting Other Contents - - + The following is an overview of the different ways of protecting contents in %PRODUCTNAME Writer from being modified, deleted or viewed. + Protecting Sections in %PRODUCTNAME Writer + Any section of a %PRODUCTNAME Writer text document can be protected against changes with a password. + This protection is not intended to be a secure protection. It is just a switch to protect the section against accidental changes. + + + + Turning on protection + + + Select the text. Choose Insert - Section - Section, then under Write protection mark the Protect and With password check boxes. (If the section already exists: Format - Sections.) Enter and confirm a password of at least 5 characters. + + + + + Turning off protection + + + Choose Format - Sections - Section and under Write protection clear the Protect check box. Enter the correct password. + + +
+ + Protecting Cells in a %PRODUCTNAME Writer Table + You can protect the contents of individual cells of a %PRODUCTNAME Writer text table from changes. + This protection is not intended to be a secure protection. It is just a switch to protect the cells against accidental changes. + + + + Turning on protection + + + Place the cursor in a cell or select cells. Right-click to open the context menu, then choose Cell - Protect. + + + + + Turning off protection + + + Place the cursor in the cell or select the cells. First, if necessary, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids and mark Cursor in protected areas - Enable. Then right-click the cell to open the context menu, choose Cell - Unprotect. + Select the table in the Navigator, open the context menu and select Table - Unprotect. + Use Shift+Ctrl+T to remove protection for the entire current table or all selected tables. + + +
+ + Automatic Protection of Indexes and Tables + Tables of contents and indexes created automatically in a %PRODUCTNAME Writer text are automatically protected against accidental changes. + This protection is not intended to be a secure protection. It is just a switch to protect the contents against accidental changes. + + + + Turning on protection + + + Place the cursor in the index/table of contents. + From the context menu choose Edit Index/Table. On the Index/Table tab page, mark Protected against manual changes. + + + + + Turning off protection + + + Place the cursor in the index. First of all, if necessary, under Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids , mark Cursor in protected areas - Enable. + From the context menu choose Edit Index/Table. On the Index/Table tab page, unmark Protected against manual changes. + In the Navigator, select the index, then open the context menu in the Navigator and select Index - Read-only. + + +
+ + + + + + Protecting Other Contents + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references.xhp index ae2eb6e90f..6d87b6197b 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references.xhp @@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ * * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * - * $RCSfile: references.xhp,v $ - * $Revision: 1.8.4.1 $ + * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ + * $Revision: 1.10 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,102 +35,109 @@ - -Inserting Cross-References -/text/swriter/guide/references.xhp - - - + + Inserting Cross-References + /text/swriter/guide/references.xhp + + + references; inserting cross-references -cross-references; inserting and updating -tables; cross-referencing -pictures; cross-referencing -objects; cross-referencing -OLE objects;cross-referencing -draw objects;cross-referencing -updating;cross-references -inserting;cross-references + cross-references; inserting and updating + tables; cross-referencing + pictures; cross-referencing + objects; cross-referencing + OLE objects;cross-referencing + draw objects;cross-referencing + updating;cross-references + inserting;cross-references -Inserting Cross-References +Inserting Cross-References -Cross-references allow you to jump to specific text passages and objects in a single document. A cross-reference consists of a target and a reference that are inserted as fields in the document. -Objects with captions and bookmarks can be used as targets. -Cross-Referencing Text -Before you can insert a cross-reference, you must first specify the targets in your text. -To insert a target: - - -Select the text that you want to use as a target for the cross-reference. - - -Choose Insert - Cross-reference. - - -In the Type list, select Set Reference. - - -Type a name for the target in the Name box. The selected text is displayed in the Value box. - - -Click Insert. The name of the target is added to the Selection list. - - -Leave the dialog open and proceed to the next section. -To create a cross-reference to a target: - - -Position the cursor in the text where you want to insert a cross-reference. - - -Choose Insert - Cross-reference to open the dialog, if it is not open already. - - -In the Type list, select "Insert Reference". - - -In the Selection list, select the target that you want to cross-reference. - - -In the Insert reference to list, select the format for the cross-reference. The format specifies the type of information that is displayed as the cross-reference. For example, "Reference" inserts the target text, and "Page" inserts the page number where the target is located. For footnotes the footnote number is inserted. - - -Click Insert. - - -Click Close when finished. - - -Cross-Referencing an Object -You can cross-reference most objects in your document, such as graphics, drawing objects, OLE objects, and tables, so long as they have a caption. To add a caption to an object, select the object, and then choose Insert - Caption. - - -Click in the document where you want to insert the cross-reference. - - -Choose Insert - Cross-reference. - - -In the Type list, select the caption category of the object. - - -In the Selection list, select the caption number of the object that you want to cross-reference. - - -In the Insert reference to list, select the format of the cross-reference. The format specifies the type of information that is displayed as the cross-reference. For example, "Reference" inserts the caption category and caption text of the object. - - -Click Insert. - - -Click Close when finished. - - -Updating Cross-References -To manually update the cross-references in a document, press F9. -Choose View - Fields to switch between viewing the reference names and the reference contents. - - - - - - + Cross-references allow you to jump to specific text passages and objects in a single document. A cross-reference consists of a target and a reference that are inserted as fields in the document. + Objects with captions and bookmarks can be used as targets. + Cross-Referencing Text + Before you can insert a cross-reference, you must first specify the targets in your text. + To Insert a Target + + + Select the text that you want to use as a target for the cross-reference. + + + Choose Insert - Cross-reference. + + + In the Type list, select “Set Reference”. + + + Type a name for the target in the Name box. The selected text is displayed in the Value box. + + + Click Insert. The name of the target is added to the Selection + list. + + + Leave the dialog open and proceed to the next section. + To Create a Cross-Reference to a Target + + + Position the cursor in the text where you want to insert a cross-reference. + + + Choose Insert - Cross-reference to open the dialog, if it is not open already. + + + In the Type list, select "Insert Reference". + + + In the Selection list, select the target that you want to cross-reference. + + + In the Insert reference to list, select the format for the cross-reference. The format specifies the type of information that is displayed as the cross-reference. For example, "Reference" inserts the target text, and "Page" inserts the page number where the target is located. For footnotes the footnote number is inserted. + + + Click Insert. + + + Click Close when finished. + + + Cross-Referencing an Object + You can cross-reference most objects in your document, such as graphics, drawing objects, OLE objects, and tables, so long as they have a caption. To add a caption to an object, select the object, and then choose Insert - Caption. + + + Click in the document where you want to insert the cross-reference. + + + Choose Insert - Cross-reference. + + + In the Type list, select the caption category of the object. + + + In the Selection list, select the caption number of the object that you want to cross-reference. + + + In the Insert reference to list, select the format of the cross-reference. The format specifies the type of information that is displayed as the cross-reference. For example, "Reference" inserts the caption category and caption text of the object. + + + Click Insert. + + + Click Close when finished. + + + Updating Cross-References + To manually update the cross-references in a document, press F9. + Choose View - Fields to switch between viewing the reference names and the reference contents. + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp index 58a85dbb98..1ed3615ec5 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Modifying Cross-References -/text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Modifying Cross-References + /text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp + + + references; modifying cross-references -cross-references; modifying -editing;cross-references -searching;cross-references + cross-references; modifying + editing;cross-references + searching;cross-references -Modifying Cross-References +Modifying Cross-References - - -Click in front of the cross-reference that you want to modify. -If you cannot see the field shading of the cross-reference, choose View - Field Shadings or press Ctrl+F8. - - -Choose Edit - Fields. - - -Set the options that you want, and then click OK. - - -Use the arrow buttons in the Edit Fields dialog to browse through the cross-references in the current document. - - - - - + + + Click in front of the cross-reference that you want to modify. + If you cannot see the field shading of the cross-reference, choose View - Field Shadings or press Ctrl+F8. + + + Choose Edit - Fields. + + + Set the options that you want, and then click OK. + + + Use the arrow buttons in the Edit Fields + dialog to browse through the cross-references in the current document. + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/registertrue.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/registertrue.xhp index 4e33505d31..8dee7a4e7e 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/registertrue.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/registertrue.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Printing Register-true -/text/swriter/guide/registertrue.xhp - - -UFI: fixes #i22750# -FPE: Replaced Writing by Printing - - - + + Printing Register-true + /text/swriter/guide/registertrue.xhp + + + rows; register-true text -lines of text; register-true -pages;register-true -paragraphs;register-true -register-true;pages and paragraphs -spacing;register-true text -formatting;register-true text + lines of text; register-true + pages;register-true + paragraphs;register-true + register-true;pages and paragraphs + spacing;register-true text + formatting;register-true text -Printing Register-true +Printing Register-true - -Setting a document to register-true printing - - -Select the whole document. - - -Choose Format - Page - Page. - - -Select the Register-true checkbox. - - -All the paragraphs in the document will be printed register-true, unless otherwise specified. -Exempting paragraphs from register-true printing - - -Do one of the following: -Select all the paragraphs you want to exempt, then choose Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing. -Open the Styles and Formatting window, click the Paragraph Style you want to exempt, right-click that style, choose Modify. In the dialog, click the Indents & Spacing tab. - - -Clear the Register-true checkbox. - - -
-Register-true -
- - + + To Set a Document to Register-True Printing + + + Select the whole document. + + + Choose Format - Page - Page. + + + Select the Register-true checkbox and click OK. + + + All the paragraphs in the document will be printed register-true, unless otherwise specified. + To Exempt Paragraphs From Register-True Printing + + + Do one of the following: + Select all the paragraphs you want to exempt, then choose Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing. + Open the Styles and Formatting window, click the Paragraph Style you want to exempt, right-click that style, choose Modify. In the dialog, click the Indents & Spacing tab. + + + Clear the Register-true checkbox. + + +
+ Register-true +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp index 38e1354f96..88827e2f26 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ - * $Revision: 1.8 $ + * $Revision: 1.10 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,47 +35,48 @@ - -Removing Line Breaks -/text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp - - - + + Removing Line Breaks + /text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp + + + hard returns in pasted text -paragraph marks;finding & replacing -line breaks;removing -deleting; line breaks -copies;removing line breaks + paragraph marks;finding & replacing + line breaks;removing + deleting; line breaks + copies;removing line breaks MW changed "removing;..." to "deleting;...". -Removing Line Breaks +Removing Line Breaks -Use the AutoCorrect feature to remove line breaks that occur within sentences. Unwanted line breaks can occur when you copy text from another source and paste it into a text document. -This AutoCorrect feature only works on text that is formatted with the "Default" paragraph style. - - -Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Options -. - - - -On the Options tab, ensure that Combine single line paragraphs if length greater than 50% is selected. To change the minimum percentage for the line length, double-click the option in the list, and then enter a new percentage. - - -Click OK. - - -Select the text containing the line breaks that you want to remove. - - -In the Apply Style box on the Formatting bar, choose Default. - - -Choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply. - - -
- -
- - + Use the AutoCorrect feature to remove line breaks that occur within sentences. Unwanted line breaks can occur when you copy text from another source and paste it into a text document. + This AutoCorrect feature only works on text that is formatted with the "Default" paragraph style. + + + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect Options + . + + + + On the Options tab, ensure that Combine single line paragraphs if length greater than 50% is selected. To change the minimum percentage for the line length, double-click the option in the list, and then enter a new percentage. + + + Click OK. + + + Select the text containing the line breaks that you want to remove. + + + In the Apply Style + box on the Formatting bar, choose “Default”. + + + Choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply. + + +
+ +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp index f39aed4218..89772e7bac 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Resetting Font Attributes -/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp - - - + + Resetting Font Attributes + /text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp + + + formats; resetting -font attributes; resetting -fonts; resetting -resetting; fonts -direct formatting;exiting -formatting;exiting direct formatting -exiting;direct formatting -mw made "exiting..." a two level entryResetting Font Attributes + font attributes; resetting + fonts; resetting + resetting; fonts + direct formatting;exiting + formatting;exiting direct formatting + exiting;direct formatting +mw made "exiting..." a two level entry +Resetting Font Attributes - - -You can quickly exit manual formatting by pressing the right-arrow key. For example, if you have pressed Ctrl+B to apply the bold typeface to the text that you type, press the right arrow to return to the default character format of the paragraph. - - -To reset all direct formatting of existing text, select that text, then choose the menu command Format - Default Formatting. - - - - - - - + + + You can quickly exit manual formatting by pressing the right-arrow key. For example, if you have pressed Ctrl+B to apply the bold typeface to the text that you type, press the right arrow to return to the default character format of the paragraph. + + + To reset all direct formatting of existing text, select that text, then choose the menu command Format - Default Formatting. + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp index 67c50de502..00b7d7adc4 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp @@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ * * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * - * $RCSfile: ruler.xhp,v $ - * $Revision: 1.8.4.1 $ + * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ + * $Revision: 1.10 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,42 +35,44 @@ - -Using Rulers -/text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp - - - + + Using Rulers + /text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp + + + rulers;using rulers -horizontal rulers -vertical rulers -indents; setting on rulers -page margins on rulers -table cells;adjusting the width on rulers -showing;rulers -hiding;rulers -adjusting page margins and cell widths + horizontal rulers + vertical rulers + indents; setting on rulers + page margins on rulers + table cells;adjusting the width on rulers + showing;rulers + hiding;rulers + adjusting page margins and cell widths mw made "indent settings..." a two level entry and cut "changing;indents" -Using Rulers +Using Rulers -To show or hide rulers, choose View - Ruler. To show the vertical ruler, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - View, and then select Vertical ruler in the Ruler area. -Adjusting Page Margins -The margins of a page are indicated by the filled areas at the ends of the rulers. -Changing Indents -Indents are adjusted with the three small triangles on the horizontal ruler. - - -To change the left or the right paragraph indent, select the paragraph(s) that you want change the indent for, drag the bottom left or the bottom right triangle on the horizontal ruler to a new location. - - -To change the first line indent of a selected paragraph, drag the top left triangle on the horizontal ruler to a new location. - - -You can also double-click anywhere on the horizontal ruler, and adjust the indents in the Paragraph dialog. -
- - - -
- - + To show or hide rulers, choose View - Ruler. To show the vertical ruler, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - View, and then select Vertical ruler in the Ruler area. + Adjusting Page Margins + The margins of a page are indicated by the filled areas at the ends of the rulers. + Changing Indents + Indents are adjusted with the three small triangles on the horizontal ruler. + + + To change the left or the right paragraph indent, select the paragraph(s) that you want change the indent for, drag the bottom left or the bottom right triangle on the horizontal ruler to a new location. + + + To change the first line indent of a selected paragraph, drag the top left triangle on the horizontal ruler to a new location. + + + You can also double-click anywhere on the horizontal ruler, and adjust the indents in the Paragraph dialog. +
+ + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp index 21d6de71c9..d066989d41 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Using Wildcards in Text Searches -/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp - - - + + Using Wildcards in Text Searches + /text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp + + + wildcards, see regular expressions -searching; with wildcards -regular expressions;searching -examples for regular expressions -mw deleted "wildcards;" and inserted wildcards crossreferenceUsing Wildcards in Text Searches + searching; with wildcards + regular expressions;searching + examples for regular expressions +mw deleted "wildcards;" and inserted wildcards crossreference +Using Wildcards in Text Searches -You can use wildcards when you find and replace text in a document. For example, "s.n" finds "sun" and "son". - - -Choose Edit - Find & Replace. - - -Click More Options to expand the dialog. - - -Select the Regular expressions check box. - - -In the Search for box, type the search term and the wildcard(s) that you want to use in your search. - - -Click Find or Find All. - - -Regular Expression Examples - - -The wildcard for a single character is a period (.). - - -The wildcard for zero or more occurrences of the previous character is an asterisk. For example: "123*" finds "12" "123", and "1233". - - -The wildcard combination to search for zero or more occurrences of any character is a period and asterisk (.*). - - -The wildcard for the end of a paragraph is a dollar sign ($). The wildcard character combination for the start of a paragraph is a caret and a period (^.). - - -You can only search for regular expressions within the same paragraph. That is, you cannot search for one term in a paragraph and a different term in the next paragraph. -
-List of Wildcards -
- - + You can use wildcards when you find and replace text in a document. For example, "s.n" finds "sun" and "son". + + + Choose Edit - Find & Replace. + + + Click More Options to expand the dialog. + + + Select the Regular expressions check box. + + + In the Search for + box, type the search term and the wildcard(s) that you want to use in your search. + + + Click Find + or + Find All. + + + Regular Expression Examples + + + The wildcard for a single character is a period (.). + + + The wildcard for zero or more occurrences of the previous character is an asterisk. For example: "123*" finds "12" "123", and "1233". + + + The wildcard combination to search for zero or more occurrences of any character is a period and asterisk (.*). + + + The wildcard for the end of a paragraph is a dollar sign ($). The wildcard character combination for the start of a paragraph is a caret and a period (^.). + + + You can only search for regular expressions within the same paragraph. That is, you cannot search for one term in a paragraph and a different term in the next paragraph. +
+ List of Wildcards +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp index afb8739c8b..0b475a1fac 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Editing Sections -/text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp - - - - - - + + Editing Sections + /text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp + + + sections; editing -editing;sections -read-only sections -protecting;sections -converting;sections, into normal text -hiding;sections + editing;sections + read-only sections + protecting;sections + converting;sections, into normal text + hiding;sections - Editing Sections +Editing Sections - You can protect, hide, and convert sections to normal text in your document. - - - Choose Format - Sections. - - - In the Section list, click the section you want to modify. You can press Ctrl+A to select all sections in the list, and you can Shift+click or Ctrl+click to select some sections. - - - Do one of the following: - - - - - To convert a section into normal text, click Remove. - - - To make a section read-only, select the Protected check box in the Write Protection area. - - - To hide a section, select the Hide check box in the Hide area. - - - - - Set the other options that you want, and then click OK. - - - - - - Format - Sections - Protecting Content in %PRODUCTNAME Writer - - + You can protect, hide, and convert sections to normal text in your document. + + + Choose Format - Sections. + + + In the Section + list, click the section you want to modify. You can press Ctrl+A to select all sections in the list, and you can Shift+click or Ctrl+click to select some sections. + + + Do one of the following: + + + + + + Set the other options that you want, and then click OK. + + + + + + Format - Sections + Protecting Content in %PRODUCTNAME Writer + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp index 44f92835c5..1f4423d840 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Inserting Sections -/text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Inserting Sections + /text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp + + + sections; inserting -inserting; sections -HTML documents;inserting linked sections -updating;linked sections, manually -links;inserting sections + inserting; sections + HTML documents;inserting linked sections + updating;linked sections, manually + links;inserting sections -Inserting Sections +Inserting Sections -You can insert new sections, or links to sections in other documents into the current document. If you insert a section as a link, the content of the link changes when you modify the source document. -To insert a new section: - - -Click in your document where you want to insert a new section, or select the text that you want to convert to a section. -If you select a text that occurs within a paragraph, the text is automatically converted into a new paragraph. - - -Choose Insert - Section. - - -In the New Section box, type a name for the section. - - -Set the options for the section, and then click Insert. - - -To insert a section as a link: -Before you can insert a section as link, you must first create sections in the source document. -When you open a document that contains linked sections, $[officename] prompts you to update the contents of the sections. To manually update a link, choose Tools - Update - Links. -You can also insert linked sections in HTML documents. When you view the page in a web browsers, the content of the sections corresponds to the content of the sections at the time the HTML document was last saved. - - -Click in your document where you want to insert the linked section. - - -Choose Insert - Section. - - -In the New Section box, type a name for the section. - - -In the Link area, select the Link check box. Under Windows, you can also select the DDE check box to automatically update the contents of the section when the section in the source document is changed. + You can insert new sections, or links to sections in other documents into the current document. If you insert a section as a link, the content of the link changes when you modify the source document. + To Insert a New Section + + + Click in your document where you want to insert a new section, or select the text that you want to convert to a section. + If you select a text that occurs within a paragraph, the text is automatically converted into a new paragraph. + + + Choose Insert - Section. + + + In the New Section + box, type a name for the section. + + + Set the options for the section, and then click Insert. + + + To Insert a Section as a Link + Before you can insert a section as link, you must first create sections in the source document. + When you open a document that contains linked sections, $[officename] prompts you to update the contents of the sections. To manually update a link, choose Tools - Update - Links. + You can also insert linked sections in HTML documents. When you view the page in a web browser, the content of the sections corresponds to the content of the sections at the time the HTML document was last saved. + + + Click in your document where you want to insert the linked section. + + + Choose Insert - Section. + + + In the New Section + box, type a name for the section. + + + In the Link + area, select the Link + check box. Under Windows, you can also select the DDE check box to automatically update the contents of the section when the section in the source document is changed. - - -Click the browse button (...) next to the File name box. - - -Locate the document containing the section that you want to link to, and then click Insert. - - -In the Section box, select the section that you want to insert. - - -Click Insert. - - - - - - - + + + Click the browse button (...) next to the File name + box. + + + Locate the document containing the section that you want to link to, and then click Insert. + + + In the Section + box, select the section that you want to insert. + + + Click Insert. + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/sections.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/sections.xhp index 2f012ca263..d3be6cb621 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/sections.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/sections.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Using Sections -/text/swriter/guide/sections.xhp - - - - - - + + Using Sections + /text/swriter/guide/sections.xhp + + + multi-column text -text; multi-column -columns; on text pages -text columns -sections; remarks -text sections;using -sections; columns in - - mw changed a typo in "multicolumn" - Using Sections + text; multi-column + columns; on text pages + text columns + sections; columns in/use of +mw changed a typo in "multicolumn"mw deleted "sections;using" and changed "section;columns in" +Using Sections - Sections are named blocks of text, including graphics or objects, that you can use in a number of ways: - - - To prevent text from being edited. - - - To show or hide text. - - - To reuse text and graphics from other $[officename] documents. - - - To insert sections of text that uses a different column layout than the current page style. - - - A section contains at least one paragraph. When you select a text and create a section, a paragraph break is automatically inserted at the end of the text. - You can insert sections from a text document, or an entire text document as a section into another text document. You can also insert sections from a text document as links in another text document, or in the same document. - To insert a new paragraph immediately before or after a section, click in front or behind the section, and then press OptionAlt+Enter. - Sections and Columns - You can insert sections into an existing section. For example, you can insert a section containing two columns into a section that contains one column. - A section layout, for example on the number of columns, has priority over the page layout defined in a page style. -
- - - - DDE - -
- - + Sections are named blocks of text, including graphics or objects, that you can use in a number of ways: + + + To prevent text from being edited. + + + To show or hide text. + + + To reuse text and graphics from other $[officename] documents. + + + To insert sections of text that uses a different column layout than the current page style. + + + A section contains at least one paragraph. When you select a text and create a section, a paragraph break is automatically inserted at the end of the text. + You can insert sections from a text document, or an entire text document as a section into another text document. You can also insert sections from a text document as links in another text document, or in the same document. + To insert a new paragraph immediately before or after a section, click in front or behind the section, and then press Option +Alt+Enter. + Sections and Columns + You can insert sections into an existing section. For example, you can insert a section containing two columns into a section that contains one column. + A section layout, for example on the number of columns, has priority over the page layout defined in a page style. +
+ + + DDE +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/select_language.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/select_language.xhp index 71d0df713a..4de6046db9 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/select_language.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/select_language.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Checking Spelling in Other Languages -/text/swriter/guide/select_language.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Checking Spelling in Other Languages + /text/swriter/guide/select_language.xhp + + + languages; recognition of -recognition of languages -spellcheck;activating for all languages -checking spelling;all languages - -Checking Spelling in Other Languages + recognition;languages + spellcheck;activating for all languages + checking spelling;all languages +MW made a two level entry of "regognition of languages" +Checking Spelling in Other Languages -$[officename] can check the spelling of words in more than one language, provided that you have installed dictionaries for the other languages. - - -Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids, and ensure that the Check in all languages check box in the Options list is selected. - - -Activate the AutoSpellcheck icon in the Standard bar. - - -If you do not enable the Check in all languages feature, words that do not occur in the default language of the document are underlined by a wavy red line. To assign the underlined word to another language, right-click the word, and then choose Word is or Paragraph is, where the suggested language and country is shown in the command. - - - - - + $[officename] can check the spelling of words in more than one language, provided that you have installed dictionaries for the other languages. + + + Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids, and ensure that the Check in all languages check box in the Options + list is selected. + + + Activate the AutoSpellcheck icon in the Standard bar. + + + If you do not enable the Check in all languages + feature, words that do not occur in the default language of the document are underlined by a wavy red line. To assign the underlined word to another language, right-click the word, and then choose + Word is + or Paragraph is, where the suggested language and country is shown in the command. + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp index d8717e9f21..e26d831411 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Saving Text Documents in HTML Format -/text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Saving Text Documents in HTML Format + /text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp + + + text documents; publishing in HTML -HTML documents; creating from text documents -homepage creation -saving;in HTML format + HTML documents; creating from text documents + homepage creation + saving;in HTML format -Saving Text Documents in HTML Format +Saving Text Documents in HTML Format -You can save a $[officename] Writer document in HTML format, so that you can view it in a web browser. If you want, you can associate a page break with a specific heading paragraph style to generate a separate HTML page each time the style appears in the document. $[officename] Writer automatically creates a page containing hyperlinks to each of these pages. -When you save a text document in HTML format, any graphics in the document are saved in JPEG format. The name of the HTML document is added as a prefix to the name of the graphic file. The JPEG images are saved in the same folder as the HTML document and are referenced with <IMG> tags in the HTML code. - - -Apply one of the default $[officename] heading paragraph styles, for example, "Heading 1", to the paragraphs where you want to generate a new HTML page. - - -Choose File - Send - Create HTML Document. - - -In the Styles box, select the paragraph style that you want to use to generate a new HTML page. - - -Enter a path and a name for the HTML document, and then click Save. - - - - + You can save a $[officename] Writer document in HTML format, so that you can view it in a web browser. If you want, you can associate a page break with a specific heading paragraph style to generate a separate HTML page each time the style appears in the document. $[officename] Writer automatically creates a page containing hyperlinks to each of these pages. + When you save a text document in HTML format, any graphics in the document are saved in JPEG format. The name of the HTML document is added as a prefix to the name of the graphic file. The JPEG images are saved in the same folder as the HTML document and are referenced with <IMG> tags in the HTML code. + + + Apply one of the default $[officename] heading paragraph styles, for example, "Heading 1", to the paragraphs where you want to generate a new HTML page. + + + Choose File - Send - Create HTML Document. + + + In the Styles + box, select the paragraph style that you want to use to generate a new HTML page. + + + Enter a path and a name for the HTML document, and then click Save. + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/shortcut_writing.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/shortcut_writing.xhp index 3c2663852d..2a48108351 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/shortcut_writing.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/shortcut_writing.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Applying Text Formatting While You Type -/text/swriter/guide/shortcut_writing.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Applying Text Formatting While You Type + /text/swriter/guide/shortcut_writing.xhp + + + text; formatting bold while typing -formatting; bold, while typing -keyboard;bold formatting -bold;formatting while typing -shortcut keys;bold formatting + formatting; bold, while typing + keyboard;bold formatting + bold;formatting while typing + shortcut keys;bold formatting -Applying Text Formatting While You Type +Applying Text Formatting While You Type -To apply bold formatting - - -Select the text that you want to format. - - -Press Command + To apply bold formatting + + + Select the text that you want to format. + + + Press Command Ctrl+B. -You can also press Command + You can also press Command Ctrl+B, type the text that you want to format in bold, and then press Command Ctrl+B when you are finished. - - - - -Keyboard shortcut for text documents -Keyboard shortcut in $[officename] - - + + + + + Keyboard shortcut for text documents + Keyboard shortcut in $[officename] + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp index 5c1cfd4106..09835ec8aa 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ - * $Revision: 1.8 $ + * $Revision: 1.10 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,38 +35,38 @@ - -Using Smart Tags -/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp - - - + + Using Smart Tags + /text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp + + + smart tags -AutoCorrect function; smart tags -options;smart tags -disabling;smart tags -installing;smart tags + AutoCorrect function; smart tags + options;smart tags + disabling;smart tags + installing;smart tags MW moved 2 index entries from shared/01/06040700.xhp, inverted "smart tags;options", made "smart tags;" a one level entry and added 2 entries -Using Smart Tags +Using Smart Tags -Smart Tags provide additional information and functionality to specified words in a Writer document. The available features can be different for different Smart Tags extensions. -Installing Smart Tags -Smart Tags can be supplied as extensions to %PRODUCTNAME Writer. -To install a Smart Tag, do one of the following: - - -Save the *.oxt extension file to your harddrive, then double-click the *.oxt file in your file manager. Alternatively, in %PRODUCTNAME choose Tools - Extension Manager to open the Extension Manager, click Add and browse to the file. - - -Click a Smart Tag *.oxt file link on a web page and open the link with the default application. This requires a properly configured Web browser. - - -Smart Tags menu -Any text in a Writer document can be marked with a Smart Tag, by default a magenta colored underline. You can change the color in Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Appearance. -When you point to a Smart Tag, a tip help informs you to Ctrl-click to open the Smart Tags menu. If you don't use a mouse, position the cursor inside the marked text and open the context menu by Shift+F10. -In the Smart Tags menu you see the available actions that are defined for this Smart Tag. Choose an option from the menu. The Smart Tags Options command opens the Smart Tags page of Tools - Autocorrect Options. -To enable and disable Smart Tags -When you have installed at least one Smart Tags extension, you see the Smart Tags page in Tools - Autocorrect Options. Use this dialog to enable or disable Smart Tags and to manage the installed tags. -Text that is recognized as a Smart Tag is not checked by the automatic spellcheck. - - + Smart Tags provide additional information and functionality to specified words in a Writer document. The available features can be different for different Smart Tags extensions. + Installing Smart Tags + Smart Tags can be supplied as extensions to %PRODUCTNAME Writer. + To install a Smart Tag, do one of the following: + + + Save the *.oxt extension file to your hard drive, then double-click the *.oxt file in your file manager. Alternatively, in %PRODUCTNAME choose Tools - Extension Manager to open the Extension Manager, click Add and browse to the file. + + + Click a Smart Tag *.oxt file link on a web page and open the link with the default application. This requires a properly configured Web browser. + + + Smart Tags Menu + Any text in a Writer document can be marked with a Smart Tag, by default a magenta colored underline. You can change the color in Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Appearance. + When you point to a Smart Tag, a tip help informs you to Ctrl-click to open the Smart Tags menu. If you don't use a mouse, position the cursor inside the marked text and open the context menu by Shift+F10. + In the Smart Tags menu you see the available actions that are defined for this Smart Tag. Choose an option from the menu. The Smart Tags Options command opens the Smart Tags page of Tools - Autocorrect Options. + To Enable and Disable Smart Tags + When you have installed at least one Smart Tags extension, you see the Smart Tags page in Tools - Autocorrect Options. Use this dialog to enable or disable Smart Tags and to manage the installed tags. + Text that is recognized as a Smart Tag is not checked by the automatic spellcheck. + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp index 4ab2c5e90e..3df8959043 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp @@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ * * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * - * $RCSfile: spellcheck_dialog.xhp,v $ - * $Revision: 1.13.4.2 $ + * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ + * $Revision: 1.10 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,56 +35,48 @@ - -Checking Spelling Manually -/text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp - - - + + Checking Spelling and Grammar + /text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp + + + spellcheck; checking text documents manually -checking spelling;manually - -Checking Spelling Manually + checking spelling;manually + grammar checker +mw added "grammar checker" +Checking Spelling and Grammar -You can manually check the spelling of a text selection or the entire document. -The spellcheck starts at the current cursor position, or at the beginning of the text selection. - - -Click in the document, or select the text that you want to check. - - -Choose Tools - Spelling and Grammar. - - -When a possible spelling error is encountered, the Spellcheck dialog opens and $[officename] offers some suggested corrections. - - - - -Do one of the following: - - - - -To accept a correction, click the suggestion, and then click Change. - - -Edit the sentence in the upper text box, and then click Change. - - - - -To add the unknown word to a user-defined dictionary, click Add. - - -
- - -Spelling and Grammar dialog - - -Wiki page: Adding more languages -Wiki page: Multiple language spellchecking -
- - + You can manually check the spelling and grammar of a text selection or the entire document. + To check the spelling and the grammar of a text, the appropriate dictionaries must be installed. For many languages three different dictionaries exist: a spellchecker, a hyphenation dictionary, and a thesaurus. Each dictionary covers one language only. Grammar checkers can be downloaded and installed as extensions. See the extensions web page. + The spellcheck starts at the current cursor position, or at the beginning of the text selection. + + + Click in the document, or select the text that you want to check. + + + Choose Tools - Spelling and Grammar. + + + When a possible spelling error is encountered, the Spellcheck + dialog opens and $[officename] offers some suggested corrections. + + + Do one of the following: + To accept a correction, click the suggestion, and then click Change. + Edit the sentence in the upper text box, and then click Change. + To add the unknown word to a user-defined dictionary, click Add. + + +
+ + + Spelling and Grammar dialog + + + Wiki page: Adding more languages + Wiki page: Multiple language spellchecking +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp index c34c860646..ee02470759 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Applying Styles in Fill Format Mode -/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: Transformed table to numbered list - - - + + Applying Styles in Fill Format Mode + /text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp + + + fill format mode -copying; styles, by fill format mode -brush for copying styles -styles; transferring -formats; copying and pasting -text formats; copying and pasting + copying; styles, by fill format mode + brush for copying styles + styles; transferring + formats; copying and pasting + text formats; copying and pasting mw changed "copying;" -Applying Styles in Fill Format Mode +Applying Styles in Fill Format Mode -You can quickly apply styles, such as paragraph and character styles, in your document by using the Fill Format Mode in the Styles and Formatting window. - - -Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. - - -Click the icon of the style category that you want to apply. - - -Click the style, and then click the Fill Format Mode icon -Icon - in the Styles and Formatting window. - - -Move the mouse pointer to where you want to apply the style in the document, and click. To apply the style to more than one item, drag to select the items, and then release. - - -Press Esc when finished. - - -
- - - - - - -Styles and Formatting -
- - + You can quickly apply styles, such as paragraph and character styles, in your document by using the Fill Format Mode in the Styles and Formatting window. + + + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. + + + Click the icon of the style category that you want to apply. + + + Click the style, and then click the Fill Format Mode icon +Icon + in the Styles and Formatting window. + + + Move the mouse pointer to where you want to apply the style in the document, and click. To apply the style to more than one item, drag to select the items, and then release. + + + Press Esc when finished. + + +
+ + + + + + + Styles and Formatting +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp index 63fa1178f1..a82b917155 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Creating New Styles From Selections -/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: spec "Changed behaviour of drag and drop of selections to the Styl_ist" -YJ:checked - - - + + Creating New Styles From Selections + /text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp + + + styles; creating from selections -drag and drop;creating new styles -copying;styles, from selections + drag and drop;creating new styles + copying;styles, from selections mw deleted "creating;" and added "copying;" -Creating New Styles From Selections +Creating New Styles From Selections -You can quickly create a new style from an existing style that you have applied manual formatting to. - - -Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. - - -Click the icon of the style category that you want to create. - - -Click in the document where you want to copy the style from, for example, in a paragraph that you applied manual formatting to. - - -Click the arrow next to the New Style from Selection icon and choose New Style from Selection from the submenu - - -Type a name in the Style Name box. - - -Click OK. - - -To create a new style by drag-and-drop: - - -Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. - - -Click the icon of the style category that you want to create. - - -Select at least one character, or object, in the style that you want to copy. For page and frame styles, select at least one character or object in the page or frame. - - -Drag the character or object to the Styles and Formatting window and release. -For Paragraph and Character Styles, you can drag-and-drop onto the respective icon in the Styles and Formatting window. You do not need to open that style category in advance. - - -You can also drag-and-drop a frame into the Styles and Formatting window to create a new frame style: Click the frame, wait a moment with the mouse button pressed down, but without moving the mouse, then drag to the Styles and Formatting window and drop the frame onto the Frame Styles icon. -
- - - -Styles and Formatting -
- - + To Create a New Style From a Manually Formatted Selection + + + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. + + + Click the icon of the style category that you want to create. + + + Click in the document where you want to copy the style from, for example, in a paragraph that you applied manual formatting to. + + + Click the arrow next to the New Style from Selection icon and choose New Style from Selection + from the submenu + + + Type a name in the Style Name + box. + + + Click OK. + + + To Create a New Style by Drag-And-Drop + + + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. + + + Click the icon of the style category that you want to create. + + + Select at least one character, or object, in the style that you want to copy. For page and frame styles, select at least one character or object in the page or frame. + + + Drag the character or object to the Styles and Formatting window and release. + For paragraph and character styles, you can drag-and-drop onto the respective icon in the Styles and Formatting window. You do not need to open that style category in advance. + + + You can also drag-and-drop a frame into the Styles and Formatting window to create a new frame style: Click the frame, wait a moment with the mouse button pressed down, but without moving the mouse, then drag to the Styles and Formatting window and drop the frame onto the Frame Styles icon. +
+ + + + Styles and Formatting +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp index bcbc2cf699..27e14cf3e4 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp @@ -75,4 +75,4 @@ Styles and Formatting
- \ No newline at end of file + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp index 0876d40586..c181d132a1 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Making Text Superscript or Subscript -/text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Making Text Superscript or Subscript + /text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp + + + text; subscript and superscript -superscript text -subscript text -characters;subscript and superscript + superscript text + subscript text + characters;subscript and superscript -Making Text Superscript or Subscript +Making Text Superscript or Subscript - - -Select the text that you want to make superscript or subscript. - - -Do one of the following: - - - - -Choose Format - Character - Position, and then select Superscript or Subscript. - - -Press Ctrl+Shift+P to make the text superscript, and Ctrl+Shift+B to make the text subscript. - - - -Format - Character - Position -Tools - AutoCorrect - Replace - - + + + Select the text that you want to make superscript or subscript. + + + Do one of the following: + + + + + Format - Character - Position + Tools - AutoCorrect - Replace + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp index 80cfdcb74c..5086c0c7ed 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Merging and Splitting Cells -/text/swriter/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp - - - + + Merging and Splitting Cells + /text/swriter/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp + + + cells; merging/splitting -tables; merging cells -cell merges -splitting cells;by menu command -merging;cells - -mw made "cell merges;" a one level entry - -Merging and Splitting Cells + tables; merging cells + cell merges + splitting cells;by menu command + merging;cells +mw made "cell merges;" a one level entry +Merging and Splitting Cells mw created this file out of the shared guide "table_cellmerge.xhp", see also bug #63021 -You can select adjacent cells, then merge them into a single cell. Conversely, you can take a large cell and divide it into individual cells. -Merging Cells - - -Select the adjacent cells. - - -Choose Table - Merge Cells. - - -Splitting Cells - - -Place the cursor in the cell to be split. - - -Choose Table - Split Cells. -A dialog allows you to split the cell into two or more cells, horizontally or vertically. - - - - - - + You can select adjacent cells, then merge them into a single cell. Conversely, you can take a large cell and divide it into individual cells. + To Merge Cells + + + Select the adjacent cells. + + + Choose Table - Merge Cells. + + + To Split Cells + + + Place the cursor in the cell to be split. + + + Choose Table - Split Cells. + A dialog allows you to split the cell into two or more cells, horizontally or vertically. + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_cells.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_cells.xhp index 44b28ea6b7..4e76fef053 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_cells.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_cells.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Adding or Deleting a Row or Column to a Table Using the Keyboard -/text/swriter/guide/table_cells.xhp - - - - - - + + Adding or Deleting a Row or Column to a Table Using the Keyboard + /text/swriter/guide/table_cells.xhp + + + rows; inserting/deleting in tables by keyboard -columns; inserting/deleting in tables by keyboard -tables; editing by keyboard -keyboard;adding or deleting rows/columns -splitting cells;by keyboard -merging;cells, by keyboard -deleting;rows/columns, by keyboard -inserting;rows/columns, by keyboard - - MW changed "adding;" to "inserting;" - Adding or Deleting a Row or Column to a Table Using the Keyboard + columns; inserting/deleting in tables by keyboard + tables; editing by keyboard + keyboard;adding or deleting rows/columns + splitting cells;by keyboard + merging;cells, by keyboard + deleting;rows/columns, by keyboard + inserting;rows/columns, by keyboard +MW changed "adding;" to "inserting;" +Adding or Deleting a Row or Column to a Table Using the Keyboard - You can add or delete rows or columns in table as well as split or merge table cells using the keyboard. - - - To insert a new row in a table, place the cursor in a table cell, press OptionAlt+Insert, and then press the up or down arrow key. You can also move the cursor to the last cell in the table, and then press Tab. - - - To insert a new column, place the cursor in a table cell, press OptionAlt+Insert, and then press the left or right arrow key. - - - To split a table cell instead of adding a column, press OptionAlt+Insert, and then hold down CommandCtrl while you press the left or right arrow key. - - - To delete a row, place the cursor in a table cell, press OptionAlt+Delete, and then press the up or down arrow key. - - - To delete a column, place the cursor in a table cell, press OptionAlt+Delete, and then press the left or the right arrow key. - - - To merge a table into an adjacent cell, place the cursor in the cell, press OptionAlt+Delete, hold down CommandCtrl, and then press the left or the right arrow key. - - - - - - - - + You can add or delete rows or columns in tables as well as split or merge table cells using the keyboard. + + + To insert a new row in a table, place the cursor in a table cell, press Option +Alt+Insert, and then press the up or down arrow key. You can also move the cursor to the last cell in the table, and then press Tab. + + + To insert a new column, place the cursor in a table cell, press Option +Alt+Insert, and then press the left or right arrow key. + + + To split a table cell instead of adding a column, press Option +Alt+Insert, and then hold down Command +Ctrl while you press the left or right arrow key. + + + To delete a row, place the cursor in a table cell, press Option +Alt+Delete, and then press the up or down arrow key. + + + To delete a column, place the cursor in a table cell, press Option +Alt+Delete, and then press the left or the right arrow key. + + + To merge a table into an adjacent cell, place the cursor in the cell, press Option +Alt+Delete, hold down Command +Ctrl, and then press the left or the right arrow key. + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_delete.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_delete.xhp index 8ea49b888f..82b4f0bdce 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_delete.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_delete.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Deleting Tables or the Contents of a Table -/text/swriter/guide/table_delete.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Deleting Tables or the Contents of a Table + /text/swriter/guide/table_delete.xhp + + + deleting; tables or table contents -tables; deleting + tables; deleting -Deleting Tables or the Contents of a Table +Deleting Tables or the Contents of a Table -You can delete a table from your document, or delete the contents of the table. - - -To delete a whole table, click in the table, and then choose Table - Delete - Table. - - -To delete the contents of a table, click in the table, press CommandCtrl+A UFI: Ctrl+A once is not enoughuntil all cells are selected, and then press Delete or Backspace. - - -
- -
- - + You can delete a table from your document, or delete the contents of the table. + + + To delete a whole table, click in the table, and then choose Table - Delete - Table. + + + To delete the contents of a table, click in the table, press Command +Ctrl+A UFI: Ctrl+A once is not enoughuntil all cells are selected, and then press Delete or Backspace. + + +
+ +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_insert.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_insert.xhp index 7339607a94..9049df3bf6 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_insert.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_insert.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Inserting Tables -/text/swriter/guide/table_insert.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe -checked - yj - - - + + Inserting Tables + /text/swriter/guide/table_insert.xhp + + + tables; inserting text tables -inserting; tables in text -DDE; inserting tables -OLE objects; inserting tables in -cells;inserting from spreadsheets -tables in spreadsheets;inserting in text -spreadsheets;inserting tables from + inserting; tables in text + DDE; inserting tables + OLE objects; inserting tables in + cells;inserting from spreadsheets + tables in spreadsheets;inserting in text + spreadsheets;inserting tables from mw changed "cell ranges;" to "cells;" -Inserting Tables +Inserting Tables -There are several ways to create a table in a text document. You can insert a table from a toolbar, through a menu command, or from a spreadsheet. UFI: from a database? -To insert a table from the Insert toolbar - - -Place the cursor in your document where you want to insert the table. - - -On the Standard bar, click the arrow next to the Table icon. - - -In the table grid, drag to select the numbers of rows and columns that you want, and then release. - - -To cancel, drag to the other side until Cancel appears in the preview area of the grid.make it RTL compliant -To insert a table with a menu command - - -Place the cursor in your document where you want to insert the table. - - -Choose Table - Insert - Table. - - -In the Size area, enter the number of rows and columns. - - -Select the options that you want, click OK. - - -Inserting a Table From a Calc Spreadsheet - - -Open the $[officename] Calc spreadsheet containing the cell range that you want to insert. - - -In the spreadsheet, drag to select the cells. - - -Choose Edit - Copy. - - -In your text document, do one of the following: - - - - -Choose Edit - Paste. The cell range is pasted as an OLE object. To edit the contents of the cells, double-click the object. - - -Choose Edit - Paste Special, and choose from the following options: - - - - - -Options - - -Is inserted as... - - - - -$[officename] $[officeversion] Spreadsheet - - -OLE object - as with CommandCtrl+V or drag-and-drop - - - - -GDIMetaFile - - -Graphic - - - - -Bitmap - - -Graphic - - - - -HTML - - -HTML table - - - - -Unformatted text - - -Text only, tab stops as separators - - - - -Formatted text [RTF] - - -Text table - - - - -DDE link (only under Windows) + There are several ways to create a table in a text document. You can insert a table from a toolbar, through a menu command, or from a spreadsheet. UFI: from a database? + To Insert a Table From the Insert Toolbar + + + Place the cursor in your document where you want to insert the table. + + + On the Standard bar, click the arrow next to the Table icon. + + + In the table grid, drag to select the numbers of rows and columns that you want, and then release. + + + To cancel, drag to the other side until Cancel appears in the preview area of the grid.make it RTL compliant + To Insert a Table With a Menu Command + + + Place the cursor in your document where you want to insert the table. + + + Choose Table - Insert - Table. + + + In the Size area, enter the number of rows and columns. + + + Select the options that you want, click OK. + + + To Insert a Table From a Calc Spreadsheet + + + Open the $[officename] Calc spreadsheet containing the cell range that you want to insert. + + + In the spreadsheet, drag to select the cells. + + + Choose Edit - Copy. + + + In your text document, do one of the following: + + + +
+ + + Options + + + Is inserted as... + + + + + $[officename] $[officeversion] Spreadsheet + + + OLE object - as with Command +Ctrl+V or drag-and-drop + + + + + GDIMetaFile + + + Graphic + + + + + Bitmap + + + Graphic + + + + + HTML + + + HTML table + + + + + Unformatted text + + + Text only, tab stops as separators + + + + + Formatted text [RTF] + + + Text table + + + + + DDE link (only under Windows) - - -Table structure and contents, without formatting. With updating + + + Table structure and contents, without formatting. With updating - - -
+ + + -Drag-and-Drop a Cell Range From a Calc Spreadsheet - - -Open the $[officename] Calc spreadsheet containing the cell range that you want to insert. - - -In the spreadsheet, drag to select the cells. - - -Click and hold the mouse button in the selected cells. - - -Drag the selected cells into the text document. - - - - - - - - + Drag-and-Drop a Cell Range From a Calc Spreadsheet + + + Open the $[officename] Calc spreadsheet containing the cell range that you want to insert. + + + In the spreadsheet, drag to select the cells. + + + Click and hold the mouse button in the selected cells. + + + Drag the selected cells into the text document. + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp index f1660d8105..21a575ecc9 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Repeating a Table Header on a New Page -/text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Repeating a Table Header on a New Page + /text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp + + + tables; heading repetition after page breaks -repeating; table headings after page breaks -headings; repeating in tables -MW made "table heading repetition..." a two level entry and changed "headers;" to "headings:" - -Repeating a Table Heading on a New Page + repeating; table headings after page breaks + headings; repeating in tables + multi-page tables +MW made "table heading repetition..." a two level entry and changed "headers;" to "headings:"mw added "multi-page tables" + + Repeating a Table Heading on a New Page -You can repeat a table heading on each new page that the table spans. - - -Choose Table - Insert - Table. - - -Select the Heading and the Repeat heading check boxes. - - -Select the number of rows and columns for the table. - - -Click OK. - - - - - - - + You can repeat a table heading on each new page that the table spans. + + + Choose Table - Insert - Table. + + + Select the Heading + and the Repeat heading + check boxes. + + + Select the number of rows and columns for the table. + + + Click OK. + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp index 732612ddff..655f06effa 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp @@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ * * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * - * $RCSfile: table_sizing.xhp,v $ - * $Revision: 1.14.4.2 $ + * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ + * $Revision: 1.10 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,21 +35,23 @@ - -Resizing Rows and Columns in a Text Table -/text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp - - - + + Resizing Rows and Columns in a Text Table + /text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp + + + cells; enlarging and reducing in text tables -table cells; enlarging/reducing in text -keyboard; resizing rows/columns -resizing;rows and columns in text tables -enlarging columns,cells and table rows -reducing rows and columns in text tables -tables; resizing -UFI: added "tables;sizing" here, deleted it in swriter/01/050901. Added "tables;arranging"mw deleted "text tables;enlarging cells", "tables;changing the size", "tables;arranging" and "arranging;tables". MW changed "tables;sizing" and "table cells;". MW added "reducing rows and columns in text tables" -Resizing Rows and Columns in a Text Table + table cells; enlarging/reducing in text + keyboard; resizing rows/columns + resizing;rows and columns in text tables + enlarging columns,cells and table rows + reducing rows and columns in text tables + tables; resizing/juxtaposing + juxtaposing tables +mw deleted "text tables;enlarging cells", "tables;changing the size", "tables;arranging" and "arranging;tables". MW changed "tables;sizing" and "table cells;". MW added "reducing rows and columns in text tables"MW changed "tables;" and added "juxtaposing tables" +Resizing Rows and Columns in a Text Table You can resize the width of table cells and columns, as well as change the height of table rows. @@ -58,70 +60,65 @@ Icon - - -You can also distribute rows and columns evenly using the icons on the Optimize toolbar on the Table Bar. - - -
+ + + You can also distribute rows and columns evenly using the icons on the Optimize toolbar on the Table + Bar. + + + -Changing the Width of Columns and Cells -To change the width of a column: -Do one of the following: - - -Rest the mouse pointer over the column dividing line until the pointer becomes a separator icon, and then drag the line to a new location. - - -Rest the mouse pointer over the column dividing line on the ruler until the pointer becomes a separator icon, and then drag the line to a new location. - - -Hold down Command + Changing the Width of Columns and Cells + To Change the Width of a Column + Do one of the following: + + + Rest the mouse pointer over the column dividing line until the pointer becomes a separator icon, and then drag the line to a new location. + + + Rest the mouse pointer over the column dividing line on the ruler until the pointer becomes a separator icon, and then drag the line to a new location. + + + Hold down Command Ctrl and then click and drag a line to scale all cells right or above the line proportionally. - - -Place the cursor in a cell in the column, hold down the Option + + + Place the cursor in a cell in the column, hold down the Option Alt key, and then press the left or the right arrow key. - - - - -To increase the distance from the left edge of the page to the edge of the table, hold down Option + + + To increase the distance from the left edge of the page to the edge of the table, hold down Option Alt+Shift, and then press the right arrow key. - - -You can specify the behavior for the arrow keys by choosing Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table, and selecting the options that you want in the Keyboard handling area. -To change the width of a cell: - - -Hold down Option+Command + + + You can specify the behavior for the arrow keys by choosing Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table, and selecting the options that you want in the Keyboard handling area. + To Change the Width of a Cell + Hold down Option+Command Alt+Ctrl, and then press the left or the right arrow key - - -Changing the Height of a Row - - -To change the height of a row, place the cursor in a cell in the row, hold down the Option + Changing the Height of a Row + To change the height of a row, place the cursor in a cell in the row, hold down the Option Alt key, and then press the up or the down arrow key. - - -Resizing a whole Table -To change the width and height of a table, do one of the following: - - -Click inside the table. In the rulers, drag the border between the white and the gray area to resize the table. - - -Click inside the table. Choose Table - Table Properties to open a dialog and set the properties to the numbers. - - -To wrap text to the sides of a table, and to arrange two tables next to another, you must insert the tables into a frame. Click inside the table, press Command -Ctrl+A twice to select the whole table, then choose Insert - Frame. -Tables within HTML pages do not offer the full range of properties and commands as tables in OpenDocument format. - - - - - - - + Resizing a Whole Table + To change the width and height of a table, do one of the following: + + + Click inside the table. In the rulers, drag the border between the white and the gray area to resize the table. + + + Click inside the table. Choose Table - Table Properties to open a dialog and set the properties to the numbers. + + + To wrap text to the sides of a table, and to arrange two tables next to another, you must insert the tables into a frame. Click inside the table, press Command +Ctrl+A twice to select the whole table, then choose Insert - Frame. + Tables within HTML pages do not offer the full range of properties and commands as tables in OpenDocument format. + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp index f82c937ec0..f5deecc31e 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Modifying Rows and Columns by Keyboard -/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Modifying Rows and Columns by Keyboard + /text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp + + + table mode selection -proportional distribution of tables -relative distribution of table cells -tables; adapting the width by keyboard -cells; adapting the width by keyboard -keyboard;modifying the behavior of rows/columns -behavior of rows/columns + proportional distribution of tables + relative distribution of table cells + tables; adapting the width by keyboard + cells; adapting the width by keyboard + keyboard;modifying the behavior of rows/columns + behavior of rows/columns -Modifying Rows and Columns by Keyboard +Modifying Rows and Columns by Keyboard -When you insert or delete cells, rows or columns in a table, the Behavior of rows/columns options determine how the neighboring elements are affected. For example, you can only insert new rows and columns into a table with Fixed row and column dimensions if space permits. -Note that these properties are valid only for changes to the column width that are made using the keyboard. Using the mouse, you are free to make any column width changes.UFI: fixes bugtraq 4971582 -To set the Behavior of rows/columns options for tables in text documents, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table, or use the Fixed, Fixed/Proportional, and Variable icons on the Table Bar. There are three display modes for tables: - - - -Fixed - changes only affect the adjacent cell, and not the entire table. For example, when you widen a cell, the adjacent cell becomes narrower, but the width of the table remains constant. - - - -Fixed, proportional - changes affect the entire table, and wide cells shrink more than narrow cells. For example, when you widen a cell, the adjacent cells become proportionally narrower, but the width of the table remains constant. - - - -Variable - changes affect the table size. For example, when you widen a cell, the width of the table increases. - - - - - - - - + When you insert or delete cells, rows or columns in a table, the Behavior of rows/columns options determine how the neighboring elements are affected. For example, you can only insert new rows and columns into a table with fixed row and column dimensions if space permits. + Note that these properties are valid only for changes to the column width that are made using the keyboard. Using the mouse, you are free to make any column width changes.UFI: fixes bugtraq 4971582 + To set the Behavior of rows/columns + options for tables in text documents, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table, or use the Fixed, Fixed/Proportional, and Variable icons on the Table + Bar. There are three display modes for tables: + + + + Fixed - changes only affect the adjacent cell, and not the entire table. For example, when you widen a cell, the adjacent cell becomes narrower, but the width of the table remains constant. + + + + Fixed, proportional - changes affect the entire table, and wide cells shrink more than narrow cells. For example, when you widen a cell, the adjacent cells become proportionally narrower, but the width of the table remains constant. + + + + Variable - changes affect the table size. For example, when you widen a cell, the width of the table increases. + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/template_create.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/template_create.xhp index 6bab9a5180..94246db9b5 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/template_create.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/template_create.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Creating a Document Template -/text/swriter/guide/template_create.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Creating a Document Template + /text/swriter/guide/template_create.xhp + + + document templates -templates; creating document templates + templates; creating document templates -Creating a Document Template +Creating a Document Template -You can create a template to use as the basis for creating new text documents. - - -Create a document and add the content and formatting styles that you want. - - -Choose File - Templates - Save. - - -In the New Template box, type a name for the new template. - - -Select a template category in the Categories list. - - -Click OK. - - -To create a document based on the template, choose File - New - Templates and Documents, select the template, and then click Open. -
- - - -File - Templates - Save -
- - + You can create a template to use as the basis for creating new text documents. + + + Create a document and add the content and formatting styles that you want. + + + Choose File - Templates - Save. + + + In the New Template + box, type a name for the new template. + + + Select a template category in the Categories + list. + + + Click OK. + + + To create a document based on the template, choose + File - New - Templates and Documents, select the template, and then click + Open. +
+ + + + File - Templates - Save +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/template_default.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/template_default.xhp index bfd1b47eb6..c51d656269 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/template_default.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/template_default.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Changing the Default Template -/text/swriter/guide/template_default.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -default templates; defining -defaults; templates -templates; default templates -text documents;default templates -mw changed "text;" to "text documents;" -Changing the Default Template + + Changing the Default Template + /text/swriter/guide/template_default.xhp + + + +default templates;defining/resetting + defaults; templates + templates; default templates + text documents;default templates +mw changed "text;" to "text documents;"mw changed "default templates;" +Changing the Default Template -The default template contains the default formatting information for new text documents. If you want, you can create a new template and use it as the default template. - - -Create a document and the content and formatting styles that you want. - - -Choose File - Templates - Save. - - -In the New Template box, type a name for the new template. - - -In the Categories list, select "My Templates", and then click OK. - - -Choose File - Templates - Organize. - - -In the category list, double-click the "My Templates" folder. - - -Right-click the template that you created, and choose Set as Default Template. - - -Click Close. - - -To reset the default template: - - -Choose File - Templates - Organize. - - -Right-click a folder in the category list, choose Reset Default Template - Text Document. - - -Click Close. - - - - - - - - + The default template contains the default formatting information for new text documents. If you want, you can create a new template and use it as the default template. + To Create a Default Template + + + Create a document and the content and formatting styles that you want. + + + Choose File - Templates - Save. + + + In the New Template box, type a name for the new template. + + + In the Categories + list, select "My Templates", and then click OK. + + + Choose File - Templates - Organize. + + + In the category list, double-click the "My Templates" folder. + + + Right-click the template that you created, and choose Set as Default Template. + + + Click Close. + + + To Reset the Default Template + + + Choose File - Templates - Organize. + + + Right-click a folder in the category list, choose + Reset Default Template - Text Document. + + + Click Close. + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp index f64b26f08f..449fcdd207 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp @@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ * * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * - * $RCSfile: templates_styles.xhp,v $ - * $Revision: 1.8.4.2 $ + * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ + * $Revision: 1.10 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,36 +35,37 @@ - -Templates and Styles -/text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp - - - + + Templates and Styles + /text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp + + + formatting styles; styles and templates -styles; styles and templates -organizing; templates (guide) -templates; organizing (guide) + styles; styles and templates + organizing; templates (guide) + templates; organizing (guide) -Templates and Styles +Templates and Styles -A template is a document that contains specific formatting styles, graphics, tables, objects, and other information. A template is used as the basis for creating other documents. For example, you can define paragraph and character styles in a document, save the document as a template, and then use the template to create a new document with the same styles. -Unless you specify otherwise, every new $[officename] text document is based on the default template. -$[officename] has a number of predefined templates that you can use to create different types or text documents, such as business letters. -Viewing and Organizing Styles in Templates - - -Use the Template Management dialog to copy styles from one document to another. - - -To copy a style, drag it to another template or document. - - - - - - - - - - + A template is a document that contains specific formatting styles, graphics, tables, objects, and other information. A template is used as the basis for creating other documents. For example, you can define paragraph and character styles in a document, save the document as a template, and then use the template to create a new document with the same styles. + Unless you specify otherwise, every new $[officename] text document is based on the default template. + $[officename] has a number of predefined templates that you can use to create different types or text documents, such as business letters. + Viewing and Organizing Styles in Templates + + + Use the Template Management dialog to copy styles from one document to another. + + + To copy a style, drag it to another template or document. + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp index 5359247c8f..0ce7043996 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Animating Text -/text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp - - - + + Animating Text + /text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp + + + text animation -effects; text animation -animations;text -mw made "animating text" a two level entryAnimating Text + effects; text animation + animations;text +mw made "animating text" a two level entry +Animating Text -You can only animate text that is contained in a drawing object, such as rectangles, lines, or text objects. For example, draw a rectangle, then double-click the rectangle and enter your text. - - -Select the drawing object containing the text that you want to animate. - - -Choose Format - Object - Text Attributes, and then click the Text Animation tab. - - -In the Effect box, select the animation that you want. - - -Set the properties of the effect, and then click OK. - - - - + You can only animate text that is contained in a drawing object, such as rectangles, lines, or text objects. For example, draw a rectangle, then double-click the rectangle and enter your text. + + + Select the drawing object containing the text that you want to animate. + + + Choose Format - Object - Text Attributes, and then click the + Text Animation tab. + + + In the Effect + box, select the animation that you want. + + + Set the properties of the effect, and then click OK. + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp index 17deff376e..df18d0a352 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Changing the Case of Text -/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Changing the Case of Text + /text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp + + + characters; uppercase or lowercase -text; uppercase or lowercase -lowercase letters; text -uppercase; formatting text -capital letters;changing to small letters -changing;cases of text -initial capitals in titles - -Changing the Case of Text + text; uppercase or lowercase + lowercase letters; text + uppercase; formatting text + capital letters;changing to small letters + changing;cases of text + initial capitals in titles + small capitals (guide) +MW added "small capitals" +Changing the Case of Text -You can change the case of text, format text with small capitals, or capitalize the first letter of each word in a selection. -When you apply a formatting to your text by Format - Character, the text stays the same, it is only displayed in another way. On the other hand, when you choose Format - Change Case, the text is permanently changed. -To capitalize text: - - -Select the text that you want to capitalize. - - -Do one of the following: - - - - -Choose Format - Change Case - Uppercase. - - -Choose Format - Character, click the Font Effects tab, and then select the type of capitalization in the Effects box. "Capitals" capitalizes all of the letters in the selection. "Title" capitalizes the first letter of each word in the selection. "Small capitals" capitalizes every letter in the selection, but in a reduced font size. - - -To change text to lowercase: - - -Select the text that you want to change to lowercase. - - -Do one of the following: - - - - -Choose Format - Change Case - Lowercase. - - -Choose Format - Character, click the Font Effects tab, and then select "Lowercase" in the Effects box. - - - - - - + You can change the case of text, format text with small capitals, or capitalize the first letter of each word in a selection. + When you apply a formatting to your text by Format - Character, the text stays the same, it is only displayed in another way. On the other hand, when you choose Format - Change Case, the text is permanently changed. + To Capitalize Text + + + Select the text that you want to capitalize. + + + Do one of the following: + + + + To Change Text to Lowercase + + + Select the text that you want to change to lowercase. + + + Do one of the following: + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp index 45949dd945..4bc14b21b7 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ - * $Revision: 1.8 $ + * $Revision: 1.10 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,42 +35,50 @@ - -Using a Frame to Center Text on a Page -/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp - - - + + Using a Frame to Center Text on a Page + /text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp + + + text frames; centering on pages -centering;text frames on pages -title pages; centering text on + centering;text frames on pages + title pages; centering text on -Using a Frame to Center Text on a Page +Using a Frame to Center Text on a Page - - -Select the text that you want to center on the page. - - -Choose Insert - Frame. - - -In the Anchor area, select To page. - - -In the Size area, set the dimensions of the frame. - - -In the Position area, select "Center" in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes. - - -Click OK. - - -To hide the borders of the frame, select the frame, and then choose Format - Frame/Object. Click the Borders tab, and then click in the Set No Border box in the Line Arrangement area. -To resize the frame, drag the edges of the frame. - - - - - + + + Select the text that you want to center on the page. + + + Choose Insert - Frame. + + + In the Anchor + area, select To page. + + + In the Size + area, set the dimensions of the frame. + + + In the Position + area, select "Center" in the Horizontal + and Vertical + boxes. + + + Click OK. + + + To hide the borders of the frame, select the frame, and then choose Format - Frame/Object. Click the Borders tab, and then click in the + Set No Border box in the + Line Arrangement area. + To resize the frame, drag the edges of the frame. + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp index 677f8f98f2..9481de122c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Using the Direct Cursor -/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Using the Direct Cursor + /text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp + + + text; cursor -entering text with direct cursor -direct cursor; settings -writing with direct cursor -cursor;direct cursor -settings;direct cursor + entering text with direct cursor + direct cursor; settings + writing with direct cursor + cursor;direct cursor + settings;direct cursor -Using the Direct Cursor +Using the Direct Cursor -The direct cursor allows you to enter text anywhere on a page. -To set the behavior of the direct cursor, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids. - - -On the Tools bar, click the Direct Cursor icon -Icon + The direct cursor allows you to enter text anywhere on a page. + To set the behavior of the direct cursor, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids. + + + On the Tools bar, click the Direct Cursor icon +Icon . - - -Click in a free space in the text document. The mouse pointer changes to reflect the alignment that will be applied to the text that you type: - -Icon + + + Click in a free space in the text document. The mouse pointer changes to reflect the alignment that will be applied to the text that you type: + +Icon Align left - -Icon + +Icon Centered - -Icon + +Icon Align right - - -Type your text. %PRODUCTNAME automatically inserts the required number of blank lines, and, if the options are enabled, tabs and spaces. - - - - - - - - + + + Type your text. %PRODUCTNAME automatically inserts the required number of blank lines, and, if the options are enabled, tabs and spaces. + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp index 124f007e0a..2d8ddd6187 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp @@ -53,20 +53,20 @@ Select the text and apply a different font style or effect, such as bold. - Right-click in a paragraph, choose Paragraph, set the options that you want, for example, the background color, and then click OK. + Right-click in a paragraph, choose Paragraph, set the options that you want, for example, the background color, and then click OK. - Select the text, and then choose Insert Frame. + Select the text, and then choose Insert - Frame. - Use the Text tool on the Drawing toolbar. + Use the Text tool on the Drawing toolbar. - Use Fontwork. To open the Fontwork window, click the Fontwork Gallery icon on the Drawing bar. + Use Fontwork. To open the Fontwork window, click the Fontwork Gallery icon on the Drawing bar. - \ No newline at end of file + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp index 27ce10a933..833b7fa567 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ - * $Revision: 1.8 $ + * $Revision: 1.10 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,101 +35,105 @@ - -Inserting, Editing, and Linking Text Frames -/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp - - - + + Inserting, Editing, and Linking Text Frames + /text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp + + + text frames; inserting/editing/linking -editing;text frames -inserting;text frames -resizing;text frames, by mouse -scaling; text frames, by mouse -links;text frames -text flow; from frame to frame -frames; linking -printing;hiding text frames from printing + editing;text frames + inserting;text frames + resizing;text frames, by mouse + scaling; text frames, by mouse + links;text frames + text flow; from frame to frame + frames; linking + printing;hiding text frames from printing mw deleted "text;" and changed "printing;" -Inserting, Editing, and Linking Text Frames +Inserting, Editing, and Linking Text Frames -A text frame is a container for text and graphics that you can place anywhere on a page. You can also use a frame to apply a column layout to text. -Inserting Text Frames - - -Select the text that you want to include in the frame. - - -Choose Insert - Frame, and click OK. - - -Editing Text Frames - - -To edit the contents of a text frame, click in the frame, and make the changes that you want. - - -To edit a frame, select the frame, right-click, and then choose a formatting option. You can also right-click the selected frame, and choose Frame. - - -To resize a text frame, click an edge of frame, and drag one of the edges or corners of the frame. Hold down Shift while you drag to maintain the proportion of the frame. - - -Hiding Text From Printing -Any Writer text frame can be set to a mode which allows viewing the text on screen, but hides the text from printing. - - -Select the text frame (you see the eight handles). - - -Choose Format - Frame/Object - Options. - - -In the Properties area, unmark the Print check box and click OK. - - -Linking Text Frames -You can link Writer text frames so that their contents automatically flow from one frame to another. - - -Click the edge of a frame that you want to link. Selection handles appear on the edges of the frame. - - -On the Frame Bar, click the Link Frames icon -{ENTER ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION HERE} + A text frame is a container for text and graphics that you can place anywhere on a page. You can also use a frame to apply a column layout to text. + To Insert a Text Frame + + + Select the text that you want to include in the frame. + + + Choose Insert - Frame, and click OK. + + + To Edit a Text Frame + + + To edit the contents of a text frame, click in the frame, and make the changes that you want. + + + To edit a frame, select the frame, right-click, and then choose a formatting option. You can also right-click the selected frame, and choose Frame. + + + To resize a text frame, click an edge of the frame, and drag one of the edges or corners of the frame. Hold down Shift while you drag to maintain the proportion of the frame. + + + To Hide Text From Printing + Any Writer text frame can be set to a mode which allows viewing the text on screen, but hides the text from printing. + + + Select the text frame (you see the eight handles). + + + Choose Format - Frame/Object - Options. + + + In the Properties area, unmark the Print check box and click OK. + + + To Link Text Frames + You can link Writer text frames so that their contents automatically flow from one frame to another. + + + Click the edge of a frame that you want to link. Selection handles appear on the edges of the frame. + + + On the Frame Bar, click the Link Frames icon +Icon . - - -Click the frame that you want to link to. - - -You can only link frames if: - - -The target frame is empty. - - -The target frame is not linked to another frame. - - -The source and the target frames are in the same section. For example, you cannot link a header frame to a footer frame. - - -The source frame does not have a next link. - - -The target or the source frame are not contained in each other. - - -When you select a linked frame, a line is displayed that connects the linked frames. -The Autosize feature is available only for the last frame in a chain of linked frames.UFI: removed + + + Click the frame that you want to link to. + + + You can only link frames if: + + + The target frame is empty. + + + The target frame is not linked to another frame. + + + The source and the target frames are in the same section. For example, you cannot link a header frame to a footer frame. + + + The source frame does not have a next link. + + + The target or the source frame are not contained in each other. + + + When you select a linked frame, a line is displayed that connects the linked frames. + The AutoSize feature is available only for the last frame in a chain of linked frames.UFI: removed id="par_id3147542" l10n="U" oldref="72"You can only change the height of the last frame in a series of linked frames. Obviously this works now
- - - - -
- - + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp index 783c010b22..d79466d0d1 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp @@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ * * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * - * $RCSfile: text_nav_keyb.xhp,v $ - * $Revision: 1.10.4.2 $ + * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ + * $Revision: 1.10 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,137 +35,137 @@ - -Navigating and Selecting With the Keyboard -/text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp - - - + + Navigating and Selecting With the Keyboard + /text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp + + + text; navigating and selecting with keyboard -navigating; in text, with keyboard -selecting;text, with keyboard -keyboard; navigating and selecting in text + navigating; in text, with keyboard + selecting;text, with keyboard + keyboard; navigating and selecting in text -Navigating and Selecting With the Keyboard +Navigating and Selecting With the Keyboard -You can navigate through a document and make selections with the keyboard. - - -To move the cursor, press the key or key combination given in the following table. - - -To select the characters under the moving cursor, additionally hold down the Shift key when you move the cursor. - - - - - -Key - - -Function - - - -+Command key - -Ctrl key - - - - -Right, left arrow keys - - -Moves the cursor one character to the left or to the right. - - -Moves the cursor one word to the left or to the right. - - - - -Up, down arrow keys - - -Moves the cursor up or down one line. - - -(Command+Option + You can navigate through a document and make selections with the keyboard. + + + To move the cursor, press the key or key combination given in the following table. + + + To select the characters under the moving cursor, additionally hold down the Shift key when you move the cursor. + + +
+ + + Key + + + Function + + + + +Command key +Ctrl key + + + + + Right, left arrow keys + + + Moves the cursor one character to the left or to the right. + + + Moves the cursor one word to the left or to the right. + + + + + Up, down arrow keys + + + Moves the cursor up or down one line. + + + (Command+Option Ctrl+Alt) Moves the current paragraph up or down. - - - - -Home - - -Moves the cursor to the beginning of the current line. - - -Moves the cursor to the beginning of the document. - - - - -Home -In a table - - -Moves the cursor to the beginning of the contents in the current cell. - - -Moves the cursor to the beginning of the contents of the current cell. Press again to move the cursor to the first cell in the table. Press again to move the cursor to the beginning of the document. - - - - -End - - -Moves the cursor to the end of the current line. - - -Moves the cursor to the end of the document - - - - -End -In a table - - -Moves to the end of the contents in the current cell. - - -Moves the cursor to the end of the contents of the current cell. Press again to move the cursor to the last cell in the table. Press again to move the cursor to the end of the document. - - - - -PgUp - - -Scrolls up one page. - - -Moves the cursor to the header. - - - - -PgDn - - -Scroll down one page. - - -Moves the cursor to the footer. - - -
- - - - - + + + + + Home + + + Moves the cursor to the beginning of the current line. + + + Moves the cursor to the beginning of the document. + + + + + Home + In a table + + + Moves the cursor to the beginning of the contents in the current cell. + + + Moves the cursor to the beginning of the contents of the current cell. Press again to move the cursor to the first cell in the table. Press again to move the cursor to the beginning of the document. + + + + + End + + + Moves the cursor to the end of the current line. + + + Moves the cursor to the end of the document + + + + + End + In a table + + + Moves to the end of the contents in the current cell. + + + Moves the cursor to the end of the contents of the current cell. Press again to move the cursor to the last cell in the table. Press again to move the cursor to the end of the document. + + + + + PgUp + + + Scrolls up one page. + + + Moves the cursor to the header. + + + + + PgDn + + + Scroll down one page. + + + Moves the cursor to the footer. + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp index 8b686951f1..78a7202e70 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Rotating Text -/text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: Changed table to numbered list - - - + + Rotating Text + /text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp + + + text; rotating -rotating;text + rotating;text -Rotating Text +Rotating Text - - -You can only rotate text that is contained in a drawing object. - - -Choose View - Toolbars- Drawing to open the Drawing toolbar. - - -Select the Text icon -Icon + You can only rotate text that is contained in a drawing object. + + + Choose View - Toolbars- Drawing to open the Drawing + toolbar. + + + Select the Text icon +Icon . - - -Drag in your document to draw the text object, and then type your text. - - -Click outside of the object, then click the text you entered. Click the Rotate icon -Icon - on the Drawing Object Properties toolbar. - - -Drag one of the corner handles of the text object. - - -You can also right-click the text object, choose Position and Size, click the Rotation tab, and then enter a rotation angle or a new position for the object. -
- -Show Draw Functions -
- - + + + Drag in your document to draw the text object, and then type your text. + + + Click outside of the object, then click the text you entered. Click the Rotate icon +Icon + on the Drawing Object Properties toolbar. + + + Drag one of the corner handles of the text object. + + + You can also right-click the text object, choose Position and Size, click the Rotation tab, and then enter a rotation angle or a new position for the object. +
+ + Show Draw Functions +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/textdoc_inframe.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/textdoc_inframe.xhp index 6a954504c2..52a4d32b88 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/textdoc_inframe.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/textdoc_inframe.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Inserting an Entire Text Document -/text/swriter/guide/textdoc_inframe.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Inserting an Entire Text Document + /text/swriter/guide/textdoc_inframe.xhp + + + sections;inserting external content -text documents;merging -links;inserting text documents as -inserting;text documents + text documents;merging + links;inserting text documents as + inserting;text documents mw deleted "text;" -Inserting an Entire Text Document +Inserting an Entire Text Document - - -Place the cursor in the document where you want to insert the file. - - -Choose Insert - File. - - -Locate the text document that you want to insert, and then click OK. - - -The contents of the text document are embedded into the current document and are not updated if the source file is changed. If you want the contents to automatically update when you change the source document, insert the file as a link. -Inserting an Entire Text Document as a Link - - -Place the cursor in the document where you want to insert the file. - - -Choose Insert - Section. - - -Type a name in the New Section box, and then select the Link check box. - - -In the File Name box, type the name of the file that you want to insert, or click the browse button (...) and locate the file. -If the target text document contains sections, you can select the section that you want to insert in the Sections box. - - -If you want, set the formatting options for the section. - - -Click Insert. - - -$[officename] automatically updates the contents of the inserted section whenever the source document is changed. To manually update the contents of the section, choose Tools - Update - Update All. - - - - + To Insert a Text File + + + Place the cursor in the document where you want to insert the file. + + + Choose Insert - File. + + + Locate the text document that you want to insert, and then click OK. + + + The contents of the text document are embedded into the current document and are not updated if the source file is changed. If you want the contents to automatically update when you change the source document, insert the file as a link. + To Insert an Entire Text Document as a Link + + + Place the cursor in the document where you want to insert the file. + + + Choose Insert - Section. + + + Type a name in the New Section box, and then select the Link check box. + + + In the File Name + box, type the name of the file that you want to insert, or click the browse button (...) and locate the file. + If the target text document contains sections, you can select the section that you want to insert in the + Sections box. + + + If you want, set the formatting options for the section. + + + Click Insert. + + + $[officename] automatically updates the contents of the inserted section whenever the source document is changed. To manually update the contents of the section, choose Tools - Update - Update All. + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp index e56b4dfb73..fd1d87a730 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Hyphenation -/text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp - - - + + Hyphenation + /text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp + + + hyphenation;manual/automatic -separation, see hyphenation -automatic hyphenation in text -manual hyphenation in text -mw transferred 2 entries to hyphen_prevent.xhpHyphenation + separation, see hyphenation + automatic hyphenation in text + manual hyphenation in text +mw transferred 2 entries to hyphen_prevent.xhp +Hyphenation -By default, $[officename] moves words that do not fit on a line to the next line. If you want, you can use automatic or manual hyphenation to avoid this behavior: -Automatic hyphenation -Automatic hyphenation inserts hyphens where they are needed in a paragraph. This option is only available for paragraph styles and individual paragraphs. -To automatically hyphenate text in a paragraph: - - -Right-click in a paragraph, and choose Paragraph. - - -Click the Text Flow tab. - - -In the Hyphenation area, select the Automatically check box. - - -Click OK. - - -To automatically hyphenate text in multiple paragraphs: -If you want to automatically hyphenate more than one paragraph, use a paragraph style. -For example, enable the automatic hyphenation option for the "Default" paragraph style, and then apply the style to the paragraphs that you want to hyphenate. - - -Choose Format - Styles and Formatting, and then click the Paragraph Styles icon. - - -Right-click the paragraph style that you want to hyphenate, and then choose Modify. - - -Click the Text Flow tab. - - -In the Hyphenation area, select the Automatically check box. - - -Click OK. - - -Apply the style to the paragraphs that you want to hyphenate. - - -Manual Hyphenation -You can insert a hyphen where you want on a line, or let $[officename] search for the words to hyphenate, and then offer a suggested hyphenation. - - -To quickly insert a hyphen, click in the word where you want to add the hyphen, and then press CommandCtrl+Hyphen(-). - - - - -If you insert a manual hyphen in a word, the word is only hyphenated at the manual hyphen. No additional automatic hyphenation is applied for this word. A word with a manual hyphen will be hyphenated without regard to the settings on the Text Flow tab page. - - -To manually hyphenate text in a selection: - - -Select the text that you want to hyphenate. - - -Choose Tools - Language - Hyphenation. - - - - -When $[officename] encounters a word to hyphenate, do one of the following: - - - - -To accept the hyphenation suggestion, click Hyphenate. - - -To insert the hyphen in another part of the word, click the arrow buttons. - - - - - - - -Text Flow - - + By default, $[officename] moves words that do not fit on a line to the next line. If you want, you can use automatic or manual hyphenation to avoid this behavior: + Automatic Hyphenation + Automatic hyphenation inserts hyphens where they are needed in a paragraph. This option is only available for paragraph styles and individual paragraphs. + To Automatically Hyphenate Text in a Paragraph + + + Right-click in a paragraph, and choose Paragraph. + + + Click the Text Flow tab. + + + In the Hyphenation + area, select the Automatically check box. + + + Click OK. + + + To Automatically Hyphenate Text in Multiple Paragraphs + If you want to automatically hyphenate more than one paragraph, use a paragraph style. + For example, enable the automatic hyphenation option for the "Default" paragraph style, and then apply the style to the paragraphs that you want to hyphenate. + + + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting, and then click the Paragraph Styles icon. + + + Right-click the paragraph style that you want to hyphenate, and then choose Modify. + + + Click the Text Flow + tab. + + + In the Hyphenation area, select the Automatically check box. + + + Click OK. + + + Apply the style to the paragraphs that you want to hyphenate. + + + Manual Hyphenation + You can insert a hyphen where you want on a line, or let $[officename] search for the words to hyphenate, and then offer a suggested hyphenation. + To Manually Hyphenate Single Words + To quickly insert a hyphen, click in the word where you want to add the hyphen, and then press Command +Ctrl+Hyphen(-). + If you insert a manual hyphen in a word, the word is only hyphenated at the manual hyphen. No additional automatic hyphenation is applied for this word. A word with a manual hyphen will be hyphenated without regard to the settings on the Text Flow tab page. + To Manually Hyphenate Text in a Selection + + + Select the text that you want to hyphenate. + + + Choose Tools - Language - Hyphenation. + + + + + When $[officename] encounters a word to hyphenate, do one of the following: + + + + + + + + + Text Flow + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp index 9bfc3bb054..3652480b01 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Adding Bullets -/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp - - - + + Adding Bullets + /text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp + + + bullet lists;turning on and off -paragraphs; bulleted -bullets;adding and editing -formatting;bullets -removing;bullets in text documents -changing;bulleting symbols -mw deleted "editing;" and "adding;"Adding Bullets + paragraphs; bulleted + bullets;adding and editing + formatting;bullets + removing;bullets in text documents + changing;bulleting symbols +mw deleted "editing;" and "adding;" +Adding Bullets - - -Select the paragraph(s) that you want to add bullets to. - - -On the Formatting Bar, click the Bullets On/Off icon -Icon + To Add Bullets + + + Select the paragraph(s) that you want to add bullets to. + + + On the Formatting Bar, click the Bullets On/Off icon +Icon . - - -To remove bullets, select the bulleted paragraphs, and then click the Bullets On/Off icon on the Formatting Bar. -Formatting Bullets - - -To change the formatting of bulleted list, choose Format - Bullets and Numbering. -For example, to change the bulleting symbol, click the Options tab, click the browse button (...) next to Character, and then select a special character. You can also click the Graphics tab, and then click a symbol style in the Selection area. - - -
- - - - - - - -
- - + + + To remove bullets, select the bulleted paragraphs, and then click the Bullets On/Off icon on the Formatting Bar. + To Format Bullets + To change the formatting of a bulleted list, choose Format - Bullets and Numbering. + For example, to change the bulleting symbol, click the Options tab, click the browse button (...) next to Character, and then select a special character. You can also click the Graphics tab, and then click a symbol style in the Selection + area. +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp index fdb943e6b2..24aed3fb93 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Adding Numbering -/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp - - - - - - + + Adding Numbering + /text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp + + + numbering;paragraphs, on and off -paragraphs; numbering on/off -formatting;numbered lists -inserting;numbering - - MW changed "adding;" to "inserting;" - Adding Numbering + paragraphs; numbering on/off + formatting;numbered lists + inserting;numbering +MW changed "adding;" to "inserting;" +Adding Numbering - - - Select the paragraph(s) that you want to add numbering to. - - - On the Formatting Bar, click the Numbering On/Off icon -Icon + To Add Numbering to a List + + + Select the paragraph(s) that you want to add numbering to. + + + On the Formatting Bar, click the Numbering On/Off icon +Icon . - - - To change the formatting and the hierarchy of a numbered list, click in the list, and then open the Bullets and Numbering toolbar. - - - To remove numbering, select the numbered paragraphs, and then click the Numbering On/Off icon on the Formatting Bar. - Formatting a Numbered List - - - To change the formatting of a numbered list, click in the list, then choose Format - Bullets and Numbering. - - -
- - - - - - - - - -
- - + + + To change the formatting and the hierarchy of a numbered list, click in the list, and then open the Bullets and Numbering toolbar. + + + To remove numbering, select the numbered paragraphs, and then click the Numbering On/Off icon on the Formatting Bar. + To Format a Numbered List + To change the formatting of a numbered list, click in the list, then choose Format - Bullets and Numbering. +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp index ebea827fd8..4d604e87a3 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Numbering and Numbering Styles -/text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp - - - - - - + + Numbering and Numbering Styles + /text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp + + + numbering; manually/by styles -manual numbering in text -paragraph styles;numbering - - MW deleted "applying;" - Numbering and Numbering Styles + manual numbering in text + paragraph styles;numbering +MW deleted "applying;" +Numbering and Numbering Styles - You can apply numbering to a paragraph manually or with a paragraph style. - - - To apply numbering manually, click in the paragraph, and then click the Numbering On/Off icon on the Formatting Bar. - - - You cannot apply manual numbering to paragraphs that are listed under "Special Styles" in the Styles and Formatting window. - - - UFI: the following paras moved here from text\shared\01\06050000.xhpWhen you press Enter in a numbered or bulleted list, %PRODUCTNAME automatically numbers the next paragraph. To remove the numbering or bullet from the new paragraph, press Enter again. - - - To change the hierarchical level of a bullet in a list, click in front of the paragraph, then press the Tab key. - - - To change the bullets or numbering format for the current paragraph only, select a character or word in the paragraph, choose Bullets and Numbering, and then click a new format. - - - To change the bullet or numbering format for all paragraphs in the list, ensure that the cursor is in the list, choose Bullets and Numbering, and then click a new format. - - - To apply the same bullet or numbering format to all paragraphs in the list, select all paragraphs, choose Bullets and Numbering, and then click a format. - - - You can also use the commands on the Bullets and Numbering toolbar to edit a numbered or bulleted list. To change the numbering or bullet format, click the Bullets and Numbering icon. - To apply numbering with a Paragraph Style - Paragraph Styles give you greater control over numbering that you apply in a document. When you change the numbering format of the style, all paragraphs using the style are automatically updated. - - - Choose Format - Styles and Formatting, and then click the Paragraph Styles icon. - - - Right-click the paragraph style that you want to apply numbering to, and then choose Modify. - - - Click the Numbering tab. - - - In the Numbering Styles box, select the type of numbering that you want to use. - - - Click OK. - - - Apply the style to the paragraphs that you want to add numbering to. - - - - - - - - - - - - - + You can apply numbering to a paragraph manually or with a paragraph style. + To Apply Numbering Manually + To apply numbering manually, click in the paragraph, and then click the Numbering On/Off + icon on the Formatting Bar. + You cannot apply manual numbering to paragraphs that are listed under "Special Styles" in the Styles and Formatting window. + + + UFI: the following paras moved here from text\shared\01\06050000.xhpWhen you press Enter in a numbered or bulleted list, %PRODUCTNAME automatically numbers the next paragraph. To remove the numbering or bullet from the new paragraph, press Enter again. + + + To change the hierarchical level of a bullet in a list, click in front of the paragraph, then press the Tab key. + + + To change the bullets or numbering format for the current paragraph only, select a character or word in the paragraph, choose Format - Bullets and Numbering, and then click a new format. + + + To change the bullet or numbering format for all paragraphs in the list, ensure that the cursor is in the list, choose Format - Bullets and Numbering, and then click a new format. + + + To apply the same bullet or numbering format to all paragraphs in the list, select all paragraphs, choose Format - Bullets and Numbering, and then click a format. + + + You can also use the commands on the Bullets and Numbering toolbar to edit a numbered or bulleted list. To change the numbering or bullet format, click the Bullets and Numbering icon. + To Apply Numbering With a Paragraph Style + Paragraph Styles give you greater control over numbering that you apply in a document. When you change the numbering format of the style, all paragraphs using the style are automatically updated. + + + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting, and then click the Paragraph Styles + icon. + + + Right-click the paragraph style that you want to apply numbering to, and then choose Modify. + + + Click the Outline & Numbering + tab. + + + In the Numbering Style box, select the type of numbering that you want to use. + + + Click OK. + + + Apply the style to the paragraphs that you want to add numbering to. + + + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp index b9400f50b4..e0d4fbde93 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp @@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ * * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * - * $RCSfile: using_thesaurus.xhp,v $ - * $Revision: 1.7.4.2 $ + * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ + * $Revision: 1.10 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,48 +35,53 @@ - -Thesaurus -/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp - - - + + Thesaurus + /text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp + + + thesaurus; related words -related words in thesaurus -spelling in thesaurus -dictionaries; thesaurus -lexicon, see thesaurus -synonyms in thesaurus -searching;synonyms + related words in thesaurus + spelling in thesaurus + dictionaries; thesaurus + lexicon, see thesaurus + synonyms in thesaurus + searching;synonyms -Thesaurus +Thesaurus -You can use the thesaurus to look up synonyms, and related words. - - -Click in the word that you want to look up. - - -Choose Tools - Language - Thesaurus, or press Command + You can use the thesaurus to look up synonyms, and related words. + + + Click in the word that you want to look up. + + + Choose Tools - Language - Thesaurus, or press Command Ctrl+F7. - - -In the Meaning list, select the definition that matches the context of the word. - - - - -Select the replacement word in the Synonym list. - - -Click OK. - - -To look up the word in a different language, click Language in the Thesaurus dialog, select one of the installed languages, and then click OK. In the Thesaurus dialog, click Search. The thesaurus may not be available for all installed languages. -If you applied a different language setting to individual words, or paragraphs, the thesaurus for the applied language is used. - - - -Thesaurus - - + + + In the Meaning + list, select the definition that matches the context of the word. + + + + + Select the replacement word in the Synonym + list. + + + Click OK. + + + To look up the word in a different language, click Language + in the + Thesaurus dialog, select one of the installed languages, and then click OK. In the Thesaurus dialog, click Search. The thesaurus may not be available for all installed languages. + If you applied a different language setting to individual words, or paragraphs, the thesaurus for the applied language is used. + + + + Thesaurus + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp index 4d9745cff0..df829b50a3 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp @@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ * * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * - * $RCSfile: word_completion.xhp,v $ - * $Revision: 1.11.4.1 $ + * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ + * $Revision: 1.10 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,48 +35,48 @@ - -Word Completion for Text Documents -/text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp - - - + + Word Completion for Text Documents + /text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp + + + automatic word completion -completion of words -AutoCorrect function; word completion -word completion;using/disabling -disabling;word completion -switching off;word completion -deactivating;word completion -refusing word completions -rejecting word completions + completion of words + AutoCorrect function; word completion + word completion;using/disabling + disabling;word completion + switching off;word completion + deactivating;word completion + refusing word completions + rejecting word completions mw made a two level entry of "switching off..." and "word completion", copied two entries to word_completion_adjust.xhp and added a new entry -Word Completion for Text Documents +Word Completion for Text Documents -$[officename] collects words that you frequently use in the current session. When you later type the first three letters of a collected word, $[officename] automatically completes the word. -If there is more than one word in the AutoCorrect memory that matches the three letters that you type, press CommandCtrl+Tab to cycle through the available words. To cycle in the opposite direction, press CommandCtrl+Shift+Tab. - Using word completion - - -By default, you accept the word completion by pressing the Enter key. - - - To reject the word completion, continue typing with any other key. - - - Switching off the word completion - - - Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Options - - Word Completion . - - - Clear Enable word completion . - - -
-Fine-Tuning the Word Completion -
- - + $[officename] collects words that you frequently use in the current session. When you later type the first three letters of a collected word, $[officename] automatically completes the word. + If there is more than one word in the AutoCorrect memory that matches the three letters that you type, press Command +Ctrl+Tab to cycle through the available words. To cycle in the opposite direction, press Command +Ctrl+Shift+Tab. + To Accept/Reject a Word Completion + + + By default, you accept the word completion by pressing the Enter key. + + + To reject the word completion, continue typing with any other key. + + + To Switch off the Word Completion + + + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect Options - Word Completion. + + + Clear Enable word completion. + + +
+ Fine-Tuning the Word Completion +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp index 99d080035d..efa0e97417 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Fine-Tuning the Word Completion for Text Documents -/text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp - - - - - - + + Fine-Tuning the Word Completion for Text Documents + /text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp + + + settings;word completion -word completion;settings -text documents;word completion settings -weekdays; automatically completing -months; automatically completing - - mw copied two entries from word_completion.xhp and created three new entries - Fine-Tuning the Word Completion for Text Documents - - MW created this guide by splitting word_completion.xhp - If you like it that $[officename] automatically completes the words that you frequently use, you can make further adjustments to refine that behaviour. If you want, you can also save the current list of collected words so that it can be used in the next session. - To fine-tune the word completion choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Word Completion and select any of the following options: - Inserting an additional space character - - - Select Append space. - - - The space character is appended after you type the first character of the next word after the auto-completed word. The space character is suppressed if the next character is a delimiter, such as a full stop or a new line character. - Selecting the accept key - - - Choose the key to accept the suggested word using the Accept with list box. - - - Selecting the number of characters - - - Use the Min. word length box to set the minimum number of characters a word must have to be collected into the list. - - - Selecting the scope of collected words - - - Select When closing a document, save the list for later use in other documents. - Now the list is also valid for other documents that you open. When you close the last %PRODUCTNAME document, the word list is deleted. - If you do not select the checkbox, the list is only valid as long as the current document is open. - If you want the word list to exist longer than the current %PRODUCTNAME session, save it as a document, as described in the following section. - - - Working with the word list - If the automatic spellcheck option is enabled, only the words that are recognized by the spellcheck are collected. - Use the word list to always start with a defined set of technical terms for the word completion feature. - - - Open the text document that contains the terms that you want to use for word completion. - The word completion feature collects the words. - - - Select all or some of the words in the list. - - - Use CommandCtrl+C to copy all selected words into the clipboard. Paste the clipboard into a new document and save it to get a reference list of collected words. - Later you can open the reference list and automatically collect the words, so that the word completion feature starts with a defined set of words. - - -
- - Word Completion - Using Word Completion - -
- - + word completion;settings + text documents;word completion settings + weekdays; automatically completing + months; automatically completing +mw copied two entries from word_completion.xhp and created three new entries +Fine-Tuning the Word Completion for Text Documents +MW created this guide by splitting word_completion.xhp +If you like it that $[officename] automatically completes the words that you frequently use, you can make further adjustments to refine that behavior. If you want, you can also save the current list of collected words so that it can be used in the next session. + To fine-tune the word completion choose Tools – AutoCorrect Options - Word Completion and select any of the following options: + To Insert an Additional Space Character + Select Append space. + The space character is appended after you type the first character of the next word after the auto-completed word. The space character is suppressed if the next character is a delimiter, such as a full stop or a new line character. + To Define the Accept Key + Choose the key to accept the suggested word using the Accept with list box. + To Select the Minimum Number of Characters + Use the Min. word length box to set the minimum number of characters a word must have to be collected into the list. + To Select the Scope of Collected Words + Select When closing a document, save the list for later use in other documents. + Now the list is also valid for other documents that you open. When you close the last %PRODUCTNAME document, the word list is deleted. + If you do not select the checkbox, the list is only valid as long as the current document is open. + If you want the word list to exist longer than the current %PRODUCTNAME session, save it as a document, as described in the following section. + To Use the Word List for Further Sessions + If the automatic spellcheck option is enabled, only the words that are recognized by the spellcheck are collected. + Use the word list to always start with a defined set of technical terms for the word completion feature. + + + Open the text document that contains the terms that you want to use for word completion. + The word completion feature collects the words. + + + Select all or some of the words in the list. + + + Use Command +Ctrl+C to copy all selected words into the clipboard. Paste the clipboard into a new document and save it to get a reference list of collected words. + Later you can open the reference list and automatically collect the words, so that the word completion feature starts with a defined set of words. + + +
+ Word Completion + Using Word Completion +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp index 0bc28549a4..a99997f2f5 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Counting Words -/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Counting Words + /text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp + + + words; counting in text -number of words -documents; number of words/characters -text; number of words/characters -characters; counting -number of characters -counting words -word counts + number of words + documents; number of words/characters + text; number of words/characters + characters; counting + number of characters + counting words + word counts MW deleted "character counts" -Counting Words +Counting Words - - -If you want to count only some text of your document, select the text. - - -Choose Tools - Word Count. - - -To get some more statistics about the document, choose File - Properties - Statistics. - -File - Properties - Statistics - - + + + If you want to count only some text of your document, select the text. + + + Choose Tools - Word Count. + + + To get some more statistics about the document, choose File - Properties - Statistics. + + File - Properties - Statistics + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp index 4da7c9a947..b09bf35860 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Wrapping Text Around Objects -/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: Deleted screenshots - - - + + Wrapping Text Around Objects + /text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp + + + text wrap around objects -contour editor -contour wrap -text; formatting around objects -formatting; contour wrap -objects; contour wrap -wrapping text;editing contours -editors;contour editor + contour editor + contour wrap + text; formatting around objects + formatting; contour wrap + objects; contour wrap + wrapping text;editing contours + editors;contour editor -Wrapping Text Around Objects +Wrapping Text Around Objects - - -Select the object. - - -Choose Format - Wrap, and then choose the wrapping style that you want to apply. -The current wrapping style is indicated by a bullet. - - -Specifying the Wrapping Properties - - -Select the object. - - -Choose Format - Graphics, and then click the Wrap tab. - - - - -Set the options that you want. - - -Click OK. - - -To change the wrapping contour of a graphic: -You can change the shape that the text wraps around. - - -Select the graphic, right-click, and then choose Wrap - Edit Contour. - - - - -Use the tools to draw a new contour, and then click the Apply icon (green check mark). - - -Close the Contour Editor window. - - -
- -Contour Editor -
- - + To Wrap Text Around an Object + + + Select the object. + + + Choose Format - Wrap, and then choose the wrapping style that you want to apply. + The current wrapping style is indicated by a bullet. + + + To Specify the Wrapping Properties + + + Select the object. + + + Choose Format - Graphics, and then click the Wrap tab. + + + + + Set the options that you want. + + + Click OK. + + + To Change the Wrapping Contour of a Graphic + You can change the shape that the text wraps around. + + + Select the graphic, right-click, and then choose Wrap - Edit Contour. + + + + + Use the tools to draw a new contour, and then click the Apply + icon (green check mark). + + + Close the Contour Editor + window. + + +
+ + Contour Editor +
+ + \ No newline at end of file -- cgit